a'lO CVCo r ^ SUPPLEMENT TO THR 7th ANNUAL REPOKT OF THE DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE. FISHERIES BRANCH. CONTRIBUTIONS ro CANADIAN BIOLOGY BEING STUDIES FROM THE BIOLOGICAL STATIONS OF CANADA 1917 Salt and smoked haddock are too often prepared, it is pointed out, from fish inferior in quality or even tainted, whereas the best finnans ” can only be made from fish in the freshest condition, kept cold, and cured by strict methods. Finnan baddies in Canada are often inferior because: (1) no vertebral cut is made; (2) smoke is not sufficiently dense; (3) the fish are left from one to three days, in order to drain the blood, etc., away, whereas one hour on ice would be sufficient. Various conditions were tested, namely, method of splitting, time in brine and smoke, quality of brine and smoke. The studies included seven separate experi- ments : — (1) Perfectly fresh fish cured by usual New Brunswick methods. (2) Salt constant, but smoke varied. (3) Smoke constant, but brine varied. (4) Small fish, under variations of both conditions. (5) Preservative value and palatability of salt content. (6) Hake experiment. (7) Proof that dorsal incision is most desirable after the usual splitting. Fish up to four pounds require one hour in the brine, but thirty minutes suffices to preserve excellent flavour, and smoking (beech, or old wood sawdust) for ten hours is sufficient, but fifteen to eighteen hours dries more thoroughly, for preserving. Adja- cent home markets and more distant markets require appropriate variation in details. XI. OBSERVATIONS OF HADDOCKS, ETC.— (Prof. F. C. Harrison). Rigid bacteriological methods were followed in the study of material obtained from haddocks, caught one or two miles from 'St. Andrew’s station; and some other material, fresh and cured, from the market. An examination of the intestinal content of twelve haddocks was made, and microscopically numerous small bacilli, of at least ten species, could be determined, but no cocci or spirilla were observed. The most common bacillus, a liquefying form, seemed to be related closely to B. vulgaris. It is especially interesting, because it was found in the flesh, as well as on .the surface, of the finnan baddies, which were experi- mented with at the station, and also on some spoiled haddock from a fish dealer. Fragments of the flesh of cured haddock were placed in inoculation flasks, and plate cultures secured. Four of the organisms then discovered were similar to those from the intestinal content. The researches show that salting and smoking fish does not kill the organisms on fresh fish, after they are gutted; but it is undeniable that there is too much carelessness in handling fish commercially. Exposure to warm air and sunlight, before gutting and salting, increases the bacteria. XIV DEPARTMENT OF THE XAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 XII. BACTEEIOLOGY OF SWELLED CAXXED SAEDIXES.— (Mr. Wilfrid , Sadler, M.Sc., B.S.A.) After referring to the presence of micro-organisms in various foods, including mussels, clams, canned salmon, etc., the author refers to the canned method in the Xew Brunswick and Maine sardine canneries, which he visited. The filled and finished cans are sterilized in boiling water for to 2 hours. Scrupulous care is exercised in the final packing processes, and questionable cans are discarded or re-processed. Two main classes of bacteria were isolated; (1) gas-producers of eight types; (2) non-gas-producers. Xo organisms were found in the cotton-seed oil used, but in the sea- water, herring intestines, etc., several strains of bacteria were discovered, 'but none producing gas in carbo-hydrates. After a description of the seventeen or more media used, and the methods adopted, Mr. Sadler describes the features of the swelled cans, the bulged con- vex appearance, the escape and forcing out of oil or sauce between the soldered edges, and a rattling sound when shaken. Gas is expelled on opening the can, and the odour may be normal, or offensive. In the former case, doubtless spices and other ingredients hide the odour of putrefaction. The contents may be soft, mingled with the oil and maceated, in contrast to the firm non-macerated white appearance of the normal contents. The elaborate cultures and tests in the laboratory are detailed by the author, and summarized on pages 208 and 209. An experiment was made with normal cans from the Chamcook factory, and the organisms, numbers 35, 37, arid 64 were used for inocu- lation. These organisms were, respectively: (1) a large coccus, not-motile, rod-like, short, and thick; (2) rod-like, and three times as long as broad; (3) some ranging from the coccus to short thick rods. In each case, typically swelled cans resulted. The source of the harmful micro-organisms remains to be discovered, and the stage at which infection occurs ; also effective prevention and the results of the effects,, by experimental inoculation, on laboratory animals. XII L BACTEEIAL DEISTEUCTIOX OF COEEPODS.— (Mr. Wilfrid Sadler, M.Sc., etc.) In some marine i/lankton, studied at the Atlantic station, in 1916, a number of copepods, or small crustaceans, were observed by Professor AVilley to be apparently in process of destruction by bacteria. It was suggested to the author, by Dr. Willey, that a study might be made of them. The copepods occur in the central cavity of the first feelers or antenna?. By the usual bacteriological methods, and by seven fish coiicoctions, sptK?ially prepared, three different types of bacteria were isolated, fourteen media being used in the investigation. The first type were short, rod-like, non-motile organisms, non-spore-bearing, and without capsule; the second was of the same length, but twice as broad, not much longer than broad, and similarly non-spore-bearing, and apparently capsuleless, and lastly a third type, coccus, either in pairs or occurring in masses in the form of Streptococci, non-spore bearing, and with capsule faintly apparent. The first is probably B. neapolitanws, a sub-type of B. coli; the secouid, rapidly motile to and fro, or on an axis, and a typical form of Para-(3hertner group; and the third non-motile, though rotatory, and showing violent agitation, a variety of liquefying Bireptococcus f/racilisj namely Micrococcus zymogenes, and the last- named culture })robably causes the destruction of the copepods, and if this destruction be extensive, its elfective upon the minute food of young fishes, and a variety of other important creatures in the sea, may be serious. Xo inoculations of healthy living copepods was xiossible in 1916. PREFACE XV SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a XIV. OHECK-LIST OE MARINE INVERTEBRATES.— (Dr. E. M. Kindle and E. J. Whittaker, M.A.) The authors, in their list of over 1,000 invertebrates, occurring along the Atlan- tic shores of Canada, set forth the bathymetric range from between tide marks to a depth of 100 fathoms — five graduations, namely, 100, 100-50, 50-15, and 15-1, and inshore less than 1 fathom; also the minimum and maximum depths. They embody published faunal results from 1901, the date of Dr. Whiteave’s valuable and remarkable catalogue, published by the Geological Survey. To make the contribution more complete a bibliography of fifty papers and memoirs follows the che(E list, to which is added an alphabetical index, including synonyms. XV. HYDROGRAPHY IN PASSAMAQUODDY BAY AND VICINITY.— (Rev. Professor Alexander Vaclion.) Professor Vachon made a series of observations during a number of cruises in the Prince in the summer of 1915, and gives a summary with tables of his researches into the temperature, salinity, and density of the sea-water at ten successive sta- tions in July and August, at different hours, and at different stages of the tide. These constitute the potent factors which affect the assemblages of marine organisms form- ing the benthos, the nekton, and the plankton, in the ocean. The investigations of the author, involving lengthy laboratory studies, are difficult to summarize, as the paper itself is very much condensed. XVI. THE HYDRO IDS OF EASTERN CANADA.— Dr. C. McLean Fraser.) The author is able in this paper to extend substantially the list which he pub- lished in 1913 — (a list of fifty Nova Scotia species) — and now determines 112 species, sixteen for the first time in the area referred to, and one species which is regarded as new to science. The distribution is tabulated, and an interesting summary of the distribution of the Gymnoblastea, the Campanularidse, and five other orders. A sys- tematic list, with distribution and synonyms, is given, and the author discusses the principles of the classification of the hydroids, and combats Levinson’s view that the character of the individual (zooid), not the colony (zoarium), should determine the classification, and the doubtful value of the operculum (urged by Levinson) as the sole basis for dividing the Family Sertularidie into genera is maintained, because it is so easily injured, and thus readily altered. 8 GEORGE V SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a A. 1918 I Part I. PRELIMINARY REPORT OF THE COMMISSION ON THE SEA-LION QUESTION, 1915. Dr. Charles F. Newcombe, Victoria, B.C., Chairman ; Wm. Hamar Greenwood^ Vancouver, B.C., Secretary ; and Dr. C. McLean Fraser^ Curator of the Government Biological Station, Nanaimo, B.C. Introduction. In May, 1915, the Biological Board of Canada appointed an honorary com- mission to make an inquiry as to the effect of the bounty of two dollars per head which had been offered by the Dominion Government to aid in the reduction of the number of sea-lions in the province of British Columbia, and which applied during the year 1915 only. The commission, after some changes, finally consisted of Dr. C. F. Newcombe, of Victoria, chairman; W. Hamar Greenwood, B.A., of Vancouver, secretary; and Dr. C. McLean Fraser, of the Biological Station, Nanaimo. Early in August, Prof. A. B. Macallum, of the University of Toronto, Secretary of the Biological Board of Canada, visited the west coast and met two of the com- missioners at Vancouver. Authority was then given for an early commencement of the investigation, but it was left to the commissioners themselves to draw up a plan of operation which would best fulfil the purposes of the proposed inquiry. The com- missioners at once decided that there should be a division of the work of the com- mission, Mr. Greenwood undertaking to collect all information possible by corre- spondence and personal interviews, the other two members more especially devoting their time to field and laboratory work, with the view of gaining more knowledge as to the life-history of the sea-lion. In order to facilitate the statistical section, a schedule of questions was drawn up and forwarded to officials of all the fishing plants of the province, and, for the field party, application was made through the Biological Board for the use of one of the vessels belonging to the Department of Naval Service. These matters are referred to later in the report. 2. ACTION ELSEWHERE ON THE SEA-LION QUESTION. The sea-lion question is by no means a new one. As long ago as 1898 it was very much to the fore in California. In 1899 the State Commission authorized the killing of numbers of the animals, giving the reason for so doing in the sixteentn biennial report of the State Board of Fish Commissioners of the state of California for the years 1899-1900, pp. 26-40. In this report is included, as well, much corre- spondence on the subject. At the outset, in April, 1899, the commissioners called a meeting of all persons interested to consider the evidence that might be offered regarding the damage done by sea-lions. The reason given in the report for calling this meeting is as follows: “For many years the fishery interests have strenuously complained of the damage done by sea-lions in the bays and rivers of the state. This commission has had the subject under consideration for many years. During the fall of 1898 and the spring of 1899 the salmon fishermen made repeated calls upon us for relief in this behalf, claiming that the sea-lions were appearing in the bays and lower rivers in increasing numbers, and that they follow the salmon from the ocean for more than 100 miles 38a— 2 5 6 departme:s^t of tee service 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 inland. The raanagers of the canneries and the buyers for the San Francisco markets joined in these requests. Our patrol force corroborated the statements and alleged that the territory covered by them swarmed with these animals. Formerly the sea- lions were hunted for commercial purposes, but their hides and oil no longer find a profitable market, and the industry has failed, in consequence of which they have greatly increased in number.” Fishermen, market men, and cannery men were unanimous in asking for a reduction in number on account of the destruction by them of salmon and other food fishes. So voluminous was the evidence that such scientists as Jordan, Gilbert, and Harkness were convinced of the justice of the plea. As a number of the larger rookeries were situated on federal lighthouse reserva- tions, the commission wrote to the Hon. Lyman Gage, then Secretary of the Treasury, to ask permission to kill sea-lions on these reservations, giving quite fully the reasons advanced for making such a request. The request was granted on April 27, but on May 31, before any lions were killed, the permit was suspended. On June 9 a letter from the Treasury Department gave the information that the suspension was due to protests from the United States Fish Commission, the secretary of the United States Department of Agriculture, the New York Zoological Society, and various others. The commission in reply stated its case at greater length, and called the atten- tion of the Treasury Department to the fact that while their evidence was backed up and accepted by scientists who had studied the question at first hand, all of the opposition came from men who had no personal knowledge of the various aspects of the question. This reply was sufficient to convince the United States Commissioner of Fisheries, who therefore withdrew his opposition. However, it failed elsewhere, and consequently the Lighthouse Board refused to cancel the suspension until further evidence was deduced. The case of the commission, of which A. T. Vogelsang was chairman, may be stated briefly as follows: — Previous to 1884 sea-lions were killed for commercial purposes. Cheaper substi- tutes have been obtained for the hides, oil, and trimmings, and commercial killing is no longer profitable. Since that time the animals have greatly increased in number, and hence the amount of destruction has greatly increased. They chase the salmon for a long distance up the bays and rivers, ‘‘ They are voracious and destruc- tive to the last degree. It is estimated by the fishermen upon the rivers, and the salmon canners, that from 20 to 40 per cent of the fish entering the bays are destroyed fly this means. They enter the nets of the fishermen and take the fish already gilled. They tear and destroy the nets and cause irreparable damage to the hardy and indus- trious fishermen. They are seen every day during the salmon run with fish in their jaws and almost no net is hauled that does not show a large percentage of fish destroyed by these animals. It is so now that the fishermen, when laying out their nets, must patrol them from end to end as they drift with the current or tide, armed with Winchester rifles, to protect the nets from the depredation of these beasts.” There is little use in providing hatcheries to increase the supply of salmon .if the sea-lions are allowed to kill so many of them in the sea. Captain Butwell, chief lightkeeper at Ano Nuevo island, in the summer of 1890 made an examination of the stomach of a large grey sea-lion (Eumetopias stelleri) and found over sixty pounds of fish bones. In the following summer a deputy killed a sea-lion with a salmon in its jaws, the head of which sea-lion is now preserved at Stanford Uni- versity. The case of the opposition is presented most fully by W. T. Hornaday, as repre- senting the New York Zoological Society. He says: — “ Judging from all the facts which have been brought forward up to this date, and from correspoiidonce with naturalists from the Pacific coast, we B. C. SEA-LION INVESTIGATION 7 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a feel constrained to say that, in our judgment, the evidence against the destruc- tiveness of the fur seal is very far from being sufficient to warrant the Cali- fornia Fish Commission in asking the United States Government to permit the destruction on its reservations.” He blames the California Commission for condemning the sea-lion on what he considers unsatisfactory evidence. His reasons are summarized as follows: — First. — We have good reason to believe that the estimated number of sea-lions on the Pacific coast (10,000) is very greatly in excess of the actual number. “ Second. — The estimate of the amount of fish consumed aaily by the sea- lion herds (500,000' pounds) we consider to be preposterous and absurd. This presupposes that each sea-lion consumes 50 pounds of fish per day, whereas, the full ration of an adult male sea-lion in captivity amounts to only 12 pounds or less per day. “ Third. — In the absence of statistics based on detailed scientific obser- vation of known reliability, the assumption that the sea-lions are responsible for a marked decrease in the fish supply of the Pacific coast is unwarranted. “ Fourth. — The people of the whole United States have proprietary rights in all the living creatures which inhabit the waters of the coast of California, as well as all other states, and particularly the sea-lion herds which breed on the public domain; and the people of California have no right, either in law or equity, to wantonly destroy the sea-lion herds until the justification of such a course has been clearly and satisfactorily proven. Fifth. — The sea-lion has been condemned by the California Fish Com- mission without having had the benefit of counsel or witness for the defence, a proceeding so thoroughly un-American that the findings based thereon are unworthy of serious consideration.” In view of these reasons he asked for the preservation of “ the very interesting and valuable sea-lion herds of the Pacific coast.” Mr. Vogelsang, in direct reply to Mr. Hornaday, says that the fifth reason is entirely untrue, as he has shown in his correspondence that all evidence available was considered, some of this evidence from scientists of repute. He objects to the statement that sea-lions are valuable, and as far as the interest goes, they cannot be considered more interesting than other harmful animals, the coyote for instance. He indicates the weight of such remonstrance by saying : It seems to me remarkable that your society is not aware of the fact that the fur seal does not frequent the rookeries of the California coast, and the varieties against which our activities have been chiefiy directed are the barking sea-lion (Zalophus) and, incidentally, the grey sea-lion (Eumetopias) .” The commission was so confident of the correctness of their stand that they published all this correspondence in the matter and left the public to judge. Before going further it should he stated that throughout this California report reference is made to two species of sea-lion, the barking sea-lion {Zalophus calif ornia- nus) and the grey, or Steller’s sea-lion {Eumetopias stelleri), but the general state- ments apply to both of these. There is evidence that both are found in British Columbia waters, but although Zalophus has been reported, it may be only an occasional visitor (see further evidence in this report). The grey sea-lion is the common one on the British Columbia coast and northward. While the controversy was going on between the California State Commission and the Treasury Department, in the summer of 1899, Prof. L. L. Dyche, of the University of Kansas, made examination of the stomachs of several sea-lions killed 38a— 21 8 DEPARTME'ST OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 in the vicinity of Monterey, finding in the cases where the contents were sliitable for identification, these consisted largely of squid. No traces of salmon were found. A reference to this work of Dyche’s, which was made in an article by C. H. Merriam appearing in Science, May 17, 1901, has been very extensively quoted in support of the contention that sea-lions are of little detriment to the fishing industry. Without in any way questioning the results of the investigation, it may be pointed out that these results do not necessarily have much bearing on the sea-lion question in British Columbia. We have no evidence that the grey sea-lion is ever found as far south as Monterey, although it is quite possible that some individuals from the rookery at Ano Nuevo or even from that at the Farallones may pay visits to that region. On the other hand, at that time the California sea-lion was found in large numbers around Santa Cruz island, a short distance north of Monterey, and at many points to the south of this. There is every likelihood, therefore,' that the majority, if not all, of the animals examined by Dyche were of the California species. Colour is given to this conclusion further by the statement of the United States Commis- sioners, later referred to, “ that the Steller sea-lion is largely a fish 'consumer and the California sea-lion is largely a squid eater,” this statement, of course, being based on the evidence they were able to obtain at that time. It is the Steller sea- lion, almost entirely, with which we are concerned. On account of further refusals of the Lighthouse Board in 1900 to cancel the suspension of the permit to kill sea-lions on the federal reservations, in 1901 the California commission asked for the appointment of a special commission to look into the matter thoroughly. The request was granted. Cloudsley Butter was appointed chairman of the commission, K. E. Snodgrass was named by the California commission, and E. C. Starks by the California Academy of Science. This commis- sion visited points along the coast from Monterey to Puget sound, making personal observations and obtaining information from those having personal knowledge of the subject. The report of the commission was submitted to the United States Fish Commission, and appeared in the report of the commissioner for 1902, pp. 116-119. The following remarks bear on Eumetopias. Eighteen stomachs were examined, of which thirteen contained food. All of these had eaten fish, and five of them had also eaten squid, but the fish was relatively large in amount, up to 36 pounds, while the squid was small, six being the greatest number in any stomach. “ This study indicates that the Steller sea-lion is largely a fish consumer and the California sea- lion is largely a squid eater. It seems apparent, however, that either species feeds on whatever is most convenient.” “ At the mouth of the Columbia river, sea-lions were seen fishing in considerable numbers near the jetty at the mouth of the river, but none was seen to catch a fish of any kind. Gulls were frequently observed hovering about a group of sea-lions and acting as if picking up food. One such flock of gulls was seen coming gradually nearer the jetty from a group of sea-lions about a mile away; after a time it was shown that they were following a large piece of salmon flesh, which the tide brought within 20 feet of the observer. Salmon were seen and photographed that had been mutilated (presumably by sea-lions and seals) after being caught in gill nets. Such mutilated specimens were common. The fishermen stated that the seals simply pull off the gills but the sea-lions always take a bite out of the belly of the netted salmon. A number of pound nets were visited, but no sea-lions were seen in them. “ The fishermen were unanimous in their denunciation of the sea-lions. A fishing company at Chinook, Washington, states that it was damaged $1,500' in 1901 by sea-lions letting fish out of the nets, the damage to the nets not being included. The sea-lions enter the traps in the same way that the fish do, and, after eating what they wish, break their way out through the side. The shallow water and the large number of salmon at the mouth of the Colum- bia river make that point a favourite breeding ground, and there is no doubt tliar the sea-lions are doing much damage there.” B. C. SEA-LION INTESTIGATION 9 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Although permission to kill sea-lions on federal reservations was refused, the commission, by means of arming their patrols, killed a great number of sea-lions at other points along the coast. The report states : “ It may be added that our activities have been exerted, nevertheless, to the destruction of a large number of these animals upon such rookeries and other places along the coast as are not subject to the control of the Treasury Department of the United States. The effect on the salmon industry is already apparent, as, since the summer of 1809, the number of sea-lions present in the bays and rivers has been much less than formerly.” Apparently the number killed by the patrol was greatly augmented by the number killed by the fishermen themselves. The destruction at that time seems to have had the desired effect, as since then no serious complaint has been made to the commission. We have this on the authority of Mr. N. B. Scofield, who was in 1898, and is now in 1916, in the employ of the California Fish commission. (Sea-lions have been so reduced in numbers that in 1909 a law was passed, forbidding the killing, maiming or capturing sea-lions, in the waters of Santa Barbara channel and on the land adjacent thereto, in order to prevent the extermination of the black or California sea-lion. As evidence that California was not alone in the demand for reduction in the number of sea-lions, it may be stated that the Oregon Legislature passed a BilC offering a bounty of $2.50 for each sea-lion killed in the waters of the state or within one marine league of the shore. On account of faulty wording of the Bill, the money was not available, but the Fishermen’s Protective Union raised a fund by private- subscription to hire men to shoot the lions on their breeding grounds. In Washing- ton, too, there has been some complaint at times but nothing definite seems to have been done. 3. PREVIOUS WORK ON THE SE’A-LION QUESTION IN BRITISH COLUMBIA. So far as is known to the present commission, the only investigations hitherto made in British Columbia are those which were conducted by the chairman and his son, in the year 1913. In the spring of that year, the chairman wns requested by the British Columbia authorities in Victoria, B.C., to conduct an investigation to disclose the numbers of sea-lions that frequent and breed upon our coast, and the number and locations of the islands where they breed. This was in consequence of the many complaints made that sea-lions were seriously damaging the fisheries. ISTo information whatever was furnished to those in charge of this inquiry of 1913 relating to previous controversies regarding the food habits of sea-lions in California or other states, but before starting for the north, such literature as was accessible was consulted, and an examination was made of the report of the United States Commissioner of Fisheries for 1902, to which reference was made by Horna- day and others when describing the California and Steller’s sea-lion. This report at once revealed the widely divergent opinions entertained by competent naturalists as to the food habits of the sea-lions, and special pains were taken in the field to procure from all sources information as to their food, and the evidence of the older Indians, who in their younger days had depended largely on sea-lions for food, and had utilized their skins and other parts in various wnys, wns noted. The result of the inquiry made by these investigators is mentioned in the annual provincial report for the year 1913, published in 1914. The ground covered by it included the coast line from Boundary bay, North Latitude 49°, to the Nass river in 54° 40', at various points in which the officials of more than thirty salmon canneries and herring plants were personally inter- viewed, and further information was obtained from their employees, both white and Indian. Amongst these points were the lower Fraser river, Knights inlet. Alert bay, Quathiaski cove, Rivers inlet, Bella Coola, Kimsquit, Namu, Bella 10 DEPARTMEI^T OF THE ^AAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Bella, Skeena river, Nass river, Masset, Skidegate, Quatsino, Ucluelet, and the important cannery known as Kildonan, at Uchucklesit, Barkley sound. As the result of inquiries at these stations it was learned that serious complaints of depredations by sea-lions were made at only two localities, viz., Bivers inlet and Barkley sound. In each of these places damage had been so great that active steps had been taken to diminish their numbers by the fishing companies affected.. Indians questioned at more than forty villages were unanimous in stating that the principal food of sea- lions was fish, and that these fish consisted in the greater part of fish eaten by man, especially salmon, herring, and halibut. In not a single instance was any wish expressed that sea-lions should be protected, as no dependence is now placed on them for food, clothing, or any' of the native arts or industries. Over 1,800 miles of coast line were examined, mostly in a small gasolene sloop. Three groups of islands, forming breeding places, were noted, and a fourth indicated, and the number of individuals seen was estimated at upwards of 11,000. In addition to the rookeries, a large number of isolated rocks, used as resting places, were visited and recorded. The rookeries and hauling-out places were shown on a map accom- panying the report. Later in the season a second visit to the rookeries in Queen Charlotte sound and off cape Scott was made. A number of successful photographs were taken, islands not before visited were explored, and an estimate made of the numbers frequenting these. The joint report shows that the injury to the fisheries complained of is of two kinds. At Rivers inlet the complaint was that nets were damaged and destroyed and vast numbers of salmon were devoured or mutilated, while at two localities in Barkley sound it was stated that the principal loss was in the herring fishery, which suffered largely through the presence of great bands of sea-lions surrounding the schools of fish and driving them out from the heads of bays and inlets where the most successful fishing had always been carried on. Complaint was also made that they devoured enormous numbers of herring and halibut. As regards the food question, little information was obtained by personal obser- vation. Three adults were examined, two of which contained no food whatever in their stomachs, while the third was full of fish, including salmon, cod, and bass. A second kind of sea-lion was reported by Indians of Barkley sound as occurring there, and from their description it was concluded that this was the California species, Zalophus calif or nianus. It is surmised that this species and perhaps the majority of the individuals belonging to Steller’s species came from the American side, as the rookeries in the state of Washington are far nearer to Barkley sound than those on the Canadian side. 4. THE CALIFORNIA SEA-LION IN BRITISH COLUMBIA WATERS. The following notes tend to confirm the statements made by Indians of Ucluelet in 1913, that a second kind of sea-lion visits Barkley sound at times, though never in large numbers. Dr. C. II. Towhshend, Director of the New York Aquarium, permits the quota- tion from a letter written on November 9, 1915, of a passage relating to a period when he was the naturalist on the United States Bureau of Fisheries steamer Albatross: — “ I visited Barkley sound in 1889 with the Albatross. The sea-lions I saw and heard barking at the time were on some rocks, I think not far from the lighthouse. They were unquestionably the California species, which is the only barking sea-lions in that region. Sea-lions do a good deal of moving about up and down the coast. They do not confine themselves to any one neighbourhood.” B. C. SEA-LION INVESTIGATION 11 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Dr. Townshend also sent, at the same time, a copy of the Bulletin No. 29, of the Zoological Society of New York, for April, 1008. This contains an interesting article by Dr. Townshend entitled “An Inquisitive Sea-lion,” describing the .behaviour of a young specimen of Zalophus calif ornianus, which w^as attracted to the Alha-tross w’hile at anchor one evening at Port Townshend, by the barking of a setter dog. It spent the night in the ship^s dinghy, and Dr. Townshend was able to make a very successful photograph of it before it grew dark. The photograph is reproduced on page 412. Further information of similar bearing was obtained from Prof. Trevor Kin- caid, of the University of Washington. At the Alaska-Yukon-Pacific Exposition, held in Seattle in 1909, two animals were included in one of the exhibits, as fur seals. Prof. Kincaid was asked to examine them, as there was much doubt as to the correctness of this designation. Both of them were found to belong to the California species of sea-lion, and those in charge of them stated that they had been taken in the salmon traps at New Dungeness, not far from the entrance to Puget sound. After the close of the exposition the two animals were moved to the zoological collection at Woodland park, Seattle, still labelled as Alaska fur seals. A visit was made by a member of this commission to the Zoological Garden mentioned, and the caretaker was interviewed with little result. The animals in question had died soon after their arrival at Woodland park. In December, 1915, Indians employed in hunting for the commission, stated that the second kind of sea-lions was well known in Barkley sound as the black or barking kind, but these only pass in as far as Alberhi canal very seldom. The last one that was recalled had been killed off Nahmint about five years ago. 5. THE SEA-LION QUESTION AS IT AFFECTS BRITISH COLUMBIA. At the preliminary meeting of the commission in August a decision was reached as to two main methods of seeking information on the sea-lion question. The one was to make a trip along the coast to get personal information if possible, although little was expected on account of the lateness of the season, and failing this, or sup- plementing this, to get information from those who claimed to have firsthand know- ledge concerning the habits and food of the sea-lions as well as the nature and extent of their depredations. The other was to obtain information by correspondence with ccnnery managers, fishery officers and others interested or likely to be able to furnish such. In connection with the former of these, the Department of the Naval Service kindly put at the disposal of the commission, for three weeks, the steamer Malaspina^ Captain Holmes Newcomb commanding. The commission is under no little obligation to Captain Newcomb, his officers and crew for the courtesy shpwn during the trip. On August 30 the Malaspina^ with Drs. Newcombe and Fraser on board, started northward. The attempt to visit all of the rookeries along the coast had to be given up through lack of time, partly due “to delay by smoke and fog, and by waiting for a chance to coal at Prince Eupert. The Cape St. J ames rookery was not visited, nor was that on the Cape Scott group of islands ; three attempts to get out to the Haycocks and Triangle islands all failed on acount of foggy and heavy weather. The rookery on the Sea Otter group was visited, where there were sea-lions visible, but on account of the dangerous reefs in the vicinity, it was not possible to get close enough with so large a boat to make an estimate of the number, and the swell was too heavy to attempt it with a small boat. A small rookery at the west end of Hope island was visited, and here the only attempts made to capture sea-lions proved abortive. On two mornings in succession Indian hunters, hired for the purpose, tried to shoot and spear one or more of the herd of forty or fifty that were visible in the surf, but without 12 DEPARTME^'T OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 success. Finally the rookery at Solander island, olf cape Cook, was visited. The weather was very foggy, but after waiting for an hour and a half in the vicinity, the captain was able to bring his ship near enough the rocks to make the sea-lions plainly visible. The’ number was estimated to be at least 1,000, although it may have been somewhat in excess of that number. Dr. Newcombe, in his report in 1913, did not consider Solander island to be a rookery but as shown elesewhere in this report, he is now convinced that it is one. 6. INFORMATION FROM EYE-WITNESSES. As the personal information on this trip, consequently, was somewhat limited, as much as possible was made of the evidence of eye-witnesses. These may be divided into three classes: (1) Those who were not sufficiently familiar with sea- lions to be able to distinguish them from hair seals, (2) those who claimed to have personally seen sea-lions chasing and eating some species of fish, (3) those who claimed to have seen sea-lions eating fish and had also examined the stomachs of one or more of these animals. Of group (3) the majority were Indians, some of them old men, who, in earlier days, had made use of many portions of the sea-lions for various purposes. Besides these there were two white men, viz., Mr. F. Inrig, manager of the British Columbia Packers’ cannery at Wadhams on Hi vers inlet, and Mr. J. Boyd, Fisheries Overseer at Bella Bella. Group (2) included cannery men, cold storage men, active fishermen, sea captains, fishery officers, as well as others, in no way directly connected with the fishing business. The evidence of those in group (1) has not been considered. Bepresentatives from numerous localities from Alert bay to Prince Kupert, and all along the west coast of Vancouver island from cape Scott to Barkley sound sup- plied information for this area and even beyond it to the mouth of the Nass river and Hecate strait. Twenty-six in all made statements sufficiently definite to be worthy of consideration. The commission does not vouch for any of the evidence submitted, but sees no reason to doubt its accuracy. The points at least on which there was general agreement must be accepted until such times as they can either be corroborated or disproved. Already a portion of the evidence has been confirmed as shown in a later portion of the report. 7. AIATERIALS USED BY SEA-LIONS AS FOOD. There was not a dissenting voice to the assertion that sea-lions eat food fishes. Of the food fishes eaten, salmon and halibut have been most frequently noticed, and of the species of salmon, spring, sockeye and coho. Humpback and dog salmon were not reported. Besides the salmon and halibut, other food fishes, viz., herring, oolachan, red cod, ling cod, and rock cod were mentioned. Devil fish (which probably included squid also) were frequently mentioned, dogfish and birds in a single instance. It may l)e well to note here that lack of positive evidence is not negative evidence. These men, almost without exception, stated that they saw no signs of sea-lions chasing other than food fishes or of the remains of other than food fishes in their stomachs. Naturally so, because in the first place they would never take the trouble to learn the haunts of fish not suitable for food, and in the second place, the sea-lions would be killed almost entirely in the neighbourhood of fishing grounds of some sort, and would more likely than otherwise have eaten those very food fishes. This does not prove that the sea- lion does not eat anything else in the sea when tlie food fishes are not readily avail- able. This matter is taken up again later. B. C. SEA-LION INVESTIGATION 13 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a S. INJURY TO THE FISHING INDUSTRY. With regard to the injury done to the fisheries of the province, only the salmon, halibut, and herring industries need be considered. Taking first the salmon fishery, the complaints of injury were almost wholly confined to the Rivers Inlet region. Here the sockeye season is at its height just after the pupping season, during which period it has been stated by many authorities, no food is taken by the adults. When the pups are two or three weeks old, according to the Indians, they are able to swim at the surface of the water and are then taken by the adults into the neighbouring waters while the latter satisfy their appetites, now especially voracious after the long fast. It is quite probable that the amount of the stomach content at that time (Mr. Inrig reported having seen thirty-six sockeye salmon in one lion’s stomach) cannot be taken as typical for the whole year. The sea-lion is such a powerful swimmer that it can readily overtake a salmon, which it catches and shakes until the piece comes out and the bite is swallowed. If the fish are plentiful, the bitten fish is not touched further but another is attacked in a similar manner. If the fish are scarce the part of the fish left after the first bite 14 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 may be seized again by the same individual or by other individuals, as they commonly go hunting in small herds. At times they find it more convenient to take the salmon out of the gill-nets, especially when they are being hauled, as then the fish are near the surface of the water. One case was reported where sixteen salmon in succession were taken, as fast as the net was hauled to the surface, the one animal making the entire capture. It is at such times that harm is done to the gear. The lions are so powerful that if the net is taut they pass through it with ease. If it is looser they may get tangled up in the net and do much more damage to it. The rookery in the Sea Otter group of islands is opposite the mouth of Kivers inlet, (see map, page 13), so that all schools of fish entering the inlet must pass near by. The sock eye run comes just at the time when the lions need the greatest supply of food, hence what could be more opportune for them. Apparently in the early days of the industry the sea-lions were not so numerous. It w’as not until about 1911 that they appeared in large enough numbers to be espe- cially troublesome. In 1912 and in 1913 so many fish were taken from the nets set in the inlet for some distance from the mouth that the fishermen found it useless to con- tinue fishing in that locality. Many of the sea-lions were killed in 1914 and 1915, and the season of 1915 was a particularly good one in the inlet. The injury done to the halibut fisheries has not been so serious, partly because the habits of the halibut require a different method of fishing. The attack made on an individual of this species can only be observed when a halibut is taken from the hook when that part of the line is near the surface, at which time the halibut is attacked in the same way the salmon is. Damage was reported from Hecate strait and from the area to the north and northwest of Vancouver island. In fishing for this species there is little chance for any damage to gear. Damage to the herring industry was reported only from Barkley sound. Here the complaint was not so much that the numbers of the herring were being diminished as that the schools are broken up, scattered and driven seaward. As many as 30Q sea- lions have been reported from the sound where they use the Bird rocks for a hauling- out place. Two plants have been in operation, one at Ucluelet, near the entrance, and the other at Uchucklesit, far up the sound. Barkley sound is a long distance from any known rookery, but as the lions do not appear here until late in the fall, the pups no longer need care, and as the adults are such powerful swimmers such distances would not mean much to them. In other localities, notably Clayoquot, Quatsino sound, and in the Nass ris^er, herring runs are followed by sea-lions, but as yet not enough fishing has been done for any special observation to be made. ‘ 9. THE FLATTERY ROOKERY. This Malaspina trip covered the “ spheres of influence ” of all of the British Columbia rookeries, but it was possible that it did more than that. Barkley sound is a long way from Solander island, where, so far as is known, the nearest British Colum- bia rookery exists. It is much nearer to what is generally spoken of as the Flattery rookery, off the west coast of the state of Washington. It is probable that occasional sea-lions seen in the strait of Georgia, as far north as the mouth of the Fraser river and at Entrance island, near Nanaimo, as well as others in the strait of Fuca, are from the Flattery rookery. On that account it seemed desirable to obtain more definite information concerning this rookery. Mr. John -N. Cobb, editor of the Pacific Fisherman, who has shown much interest in the work of the commission, obtained the assistance of the United States Kevenu-e Service, who kindly placed the Snohomish, Lieut. H. W. Pope commanding, at the service of its members, for the purpose of visiting the rookery. As the State Depart- ment was also interested in the information, Mr. Cobb went along to represent that department. B. C. SEA-LION INVESTIGATION 15 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a On October 25, ]VIr. Cobb and Drs. Xewcombe and Fraser met the Snohomish at Port Angeles and proceeded to Neah bay, where the night was spent in order to make an early start in the morning to visit the rookery. In the morning, however, such a storm was raging outside the cape, that visiting the rookery was out of the question. The next day waS no better, and hence the visit had to be abandoned. The trip was not entirely in vain notwithstanding, as from the Indians at Neah bay it was learned that the rookery in question is located on the Jagged islets, about nine miles south of the Umatilla reef, or twenty-one miles south of cape Flattery. Judging from some photographic prints of the rookery that were shown, it must be quite a large one. The Indians, too, gave the impression that it was of large size although no definite estimate could be obtained from them. From this rookery the sea-lions come out into the strait of Fuoa, haul out on rocks not far from Ueah bay, and even come into the bay itself after fish. The Indians here had the same story to tell concerning the eating of halibut, salmon, and herring. 10. BARKLEY SOUXD INVESTIGATION. In order to obtain more definite information as to the damage done by Steller’s sea-lion than that afforded by the statements of white and Indian fishermen, certain arrangements were made with Mr. Martin, manager of the Wallace Fisheries Com- pany at Kildonan, Barkley sound. Mr. Martin courteously afforded every facility at his disposal af the cannery, and the commissioners had such an excellent base of supply provided for them that it was unnecessary to take any camp outfit. Two points of special interest were to be taken up. The first was with regard to the interference by sea-lions with the herring fishery in the way of keeping these fish off-shore, or by breaking up the schools ; the second was with respect to the statement that they annually devour large quantities of herring. ^ In 1915, the sea-lions made their first appearance for the season in Barkley sound on November 1. On the morning of November 3, Dr. Fraser, being provided with a motor-boat and two men from the cannery, was able to visit their hauling-out place on Bird rocks. Small groups were seen from the entrance of Uchucklesit harbour to Bird rocks, and on the rocks there were about sixty, but these fell off into the water before it was possible to get a shot. It was an easy matter to chase small herds, up to ten or twelve, for a long distance, as they kept together well, coming to the sur- face often. Some shots were fired', but as no means of retrieving them were available at the time, no specimen was obtained. Some photographs, indicating their presence were obtained, but otherwise these do not give much information. Apparently all of these lions were of the Steller species, and there were no small ones in the lot. On the following morning, on the way from Kildonan to Port Alberni, small groups of lions were seen at intervals ffrom the mouth of tffe harbour almost as far as the Canadian Northern construction headquarters. In every locality in which they were seen there was every evidence of herring schools there also. From reports received by the chairman early in December, it was learned that sea-lions were in great abundance in nearly all of the numerous inlets branching from tlie larger waters, known as Barkley sound, and that they were as usual pursuing the herrings, which were then being taken for curing and for bait. As stormy weather then prevailed, causing wrecks and loss of life just outside of the sound, it was thought that a more successful hunt could be made in the more inside waters of Uchucklesit inlet. As Dr. Fraser was out of the province at the time, and Mr. Greenwood’s engagements prevented him from taking part in the investigation, the consideration of the food question as far as these Barkley sound sea-lions were com^erned was under- taken by Dr. Newcombe alone. 16 DEPARTME:NT of tee :S'ATAL seryive 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 It was a matter of congratulation, however, that Mr. Clyde L. Patch, Dominion taxidermist, was able to take an active part in the investigation. Hearing from the chairman that an attempt was to be made to secure a large number of sea-lions (including, it was hoped, the California species), Mr. Taverner, zoologist of the Royal Victoria Museum, Ottawa, supported by the Director of the Geological Survey, Dr. R. G. McConnell, offered to send a skilled taxidermist, with a view to saving all skeletons and skins for permanent preservation as a mounted group. Mr. Patch co-operated heartily in the work of collecting specimens, and, in spite of- very adverse weather conditions, secured the desired parts of fourteen individuals, together with data as to sex and size. He also made plaster casts of various parts, to be utilized when mounting these specimens. On arriving at Kildonan, a short distance inside of Uchucklesit inlet, on December IG, it was found that the herring and their pursuers were no longer there; they had been for some weeks, but had passed out into the sound. Native hunters were secured, and a small gasolene hsh-boat was hired, in preference to the large craft, the loan of which was offered by Mr. Martin. The two Indians were armed with rifles and with the ordinary fur-seal spears of the west coast, in order to retrieve the bodies of any wounded individuals. Independent Indian hunters were also promised a certain sum for every sea-lion they could secure. B. C. SEA-LION INVESTIGATION SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a The first goal was the Bird rocks, the principal resort and retiring x)lace of sea-lions in Barkley sound, where, it was stated, a day or two earlier, some hundreds had been seen from passing vessels. On the way out two independent hunters in a small canoe furnished with gasolene were overtaken. They had just wounded a female sea-lion, and speared it while under observation. At Bird rocks there was a large number of sea-lions, some hauled up, and a large numiber swimming about close to the shore. All were somewhat wild, but two were killed and hauled on board to be examined at leisure at Kildonan. The weather was dull and rainy, and hence it was impossible to secure successful photographs. After this the hunting was left to the Indians to carry on, resulting in eleven more specimens being brought in, two of which were paid for by Mr. Patch on behalf of the Geological Survey, as the chairman considered that a run of eleven or twelve specimens, all telling the same story, was sufficient for the purpose of the commission. On opening the stomachs ef the twelve specimens containing fish, it was found that all of them had herring in an unmutilated condition. Evidently they had bolted them without any mastication. The quantities amounted to from one-half to two gallons, including the pulpy mass of more or less digested food. Two contained one or two rounded stones. The following table shows the sex, length, etc., of those examined, as noted by Mr. Patch: — d Where Killed. Sex. Length. Stomach Contents. 1 Bird rocks Male 8 ft. 44 in. Small crabs, devil fish. Stone, clam shell. Herring. It 2 9 M 5“ 8 Off Uchucklesit Female 8 m 3 .. 4 Male 9 M 21 M 6 M 10 M 5 M () „ 8 M 11 M 7 8 M 21 M 8 M 31 M 8 Female 9 Male 8 M 2 M 10 7 H 31 M 11 8 m 8 M 12 .. 7 M 11 M l.S Female 8 .. 31 M 14 ir • . . Male 10 M 44 M In addition to these fourteen, a male brought to Kildonan a few days previous to the arrival of Dr. Newcomibe and Mr. Patch, was opened and examined by Mr. W. A. Kewoombe, who reported that it had been killed amongst the herring, and that it contained a large number of these fish and their skeletons, in addition to a pulpy mass of indistinguishable material. From the results above detailed it seemed clear that at this time of the year, at least, the main food O'f StellaPs sea-lion, while in Barkley sound, is one of the most important food fishes of the province, and that the contention of the white and native fishermen relating thereto was amply supported by incontestable evidence. Some of the stomach contents were bottled up and sent to Dr. Eraser for exam- ination, on which he reports as follows: The main portion of the material from sea- lion stomachs sent from Barkley sound consisted of herring in a more or less digested state, but the other contents are worth considering. These were (1) the dorsal fin and some vertebrae of dogfish — enough to make diagnosis definite; (2) a portion of a vertebral column of a flatfish — not enough to make identification of species possible; (3) a clavicle from some bony fish, possibly from the same flatfish; (4) a number of cephalopod beaks; (5) a clam shell that had been bored by Thais', (C) small stones; (7) numerous nematode parasites of the Ascaris type. 18 DE'PARTME:\^T of tee rayal service 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 The finding of the dogfish remains is especially interesting. Only one of all the eyewitnesses examined mentioned dogfish as an article of sea-lion diet. In recent years the dogfish have been so numerous in Barkley sound during the early part of the herring season that the fishermen find it unprofitable to put out their nets since the dogfish do so much damage to them. It may be only a coincidence, but when the sea-lions come in about the first of November, the dogfish no longer interfere with the nets. The fact that sea-lions do eat dogfish indicates that it might be more than a coincidence. Without question the dogfish is a greater pest than the sea-lion at the present time. It might be a still greater pest if the sea-lion were exterminated. The flatfish remains, as well as those of the squid and devilfish, indicate that at times the sea-lion is a bottom feeder, possibly only in shallow water. The dead clam shell and the stones were likely scooped up when the bottom feeding was being carried on. From the variety obtained in two of the stomachs it seems as though the sea- lion is not restricted in its diet but that anything will serve, the most abundant material receiving the greatest attention. 11. INFORMATIO?0 BY CORRESPONDENCE. While the investigation in the sea-lion haunts was being carried on, the secretary was getting information by correspondence. To facilitate and unify this, a set of questions, accompanied by a circular letter (see appendix), w^as sent to each British Columbia cannery manager, etc., wFo was likely to have knowledge of any phase of the question. To these questions a large number of replies were obtained, and these, in general, definitely confirmed the evidence already quoted, and brought out some points not previously considered. Comparatively few endeavoured to estimate damage to gear, but the total estimates given amounted to over $1,600' for the 3' ear 1915. It was scarcely expected that any very definite figures would be given for the value of the fish lost by mutilation or for the diverted run of fish but a number of replies indicated that in the case of the salmon, the value of the fish lost by mutilation, and in the case of the herring, the value of the loss by diverted run, would be considerable. The only place where any definite change in the number of sea-lions was noted w^as at Bivers inlet, where there was a definite increase during 1911-12-13, and since then a noticeable decrease. None of those directly interested in the fish business could give any definite information as to the value of sea-lions. Such information from other sources will be treated separately. The correspondents were almost unanimously in favour of complete extermina- tion, to ensure which they wished a Government bounty, none of them feeling able to cope with the situation themselves. That extermination might be as rapid a& possible, shooting the adults and clubbing the pups on the rocks soon after they were born in June, should afford the most definite results, although poisoning and other extreme methods w^ere also suggested. These methods w^ould not do very well in Barkley sound wliere the sea-lions come in late in the fall. As a bounty mark, the muzzle seemed to satisfy the majority, although it was also suggested that the mark should be changed from year to j^ear. 12. KILLING SEA-LIONS. Nothing w’as done systematically tow^ards the killing of sea-lions, except in Barkley sound, where it has been going on with more or less vigour for several years, until the year 1914. So much damage w’as done to the fisheries of Bivers inlet in 1913 (^Manager Inrig estimated the loss of gear at Wadham's cannery alone at B. C. SEA-LIOS I^'TESTIGATIOE^ 19 SESSIONA . PAPER No. 38a $3,021) that the following year several cannerymen decided to co-operate in decreas- ing the number. A levy of $1.50 was made for each boat fishing, and as there were TOO boats fishing, this provided a fund of $1,050. Two dollars a tail were offered for sea-lions, and in thirty-six hours enough tails were obtained to take up all the bounty, that is to say 5'25 were procured. During this year again, on Barkley sound, men were supplied with guns and ammunition and sent to drive the sea-lions away from the schools of herring. They can be chased thus like herds of cattle. N^o effort was made to retrieve any of those shot, but a large number must have been killed. In 1915, Wadham’s cannery supplied two gasolene fish carriers, and giving twenty men to each a holiday, armed them with rifles and supplied them with between $400 and $500 worth of ammunition, sent them off to the rookery to kill sea-lions. The first trip was made in the second or third week in May,' and a thousand rounds of ammunition w^ere used. Hundreds must have been killed, but only three noses were taken home. The second hunt took place in the first week in June. This time 200 muzzles were obtained, and it was estimated that 750 altogether must have been killed. The muzzles were handed in to the fishery officer for the bounty of $2, which was placed on sea-lions last year by the Department of Fisheries, $5,750 being set aside for that purpose. This bounty was all used up early in June, many muzzles being brought in after the bounty money had all been paid out. Of the 2,875 sea-lions for which bounty was paid, 1,160 were killed at or near the Sea Otter group at the mouth of Rivers Inlet, 1,616 on the East and West Haycocks (islands in the cape Scott group) and the few remaining at various spots along the coast. Beside the number mentioned from the Haycocks, 674 were brought in too late for bounty. (These figures were supplied by Mr. F. H. Cunningham, Chief Inspector of Fisheries, the list including the number to whom bounty was paid, the number and the location where obtained. See Appendix B). In the two years, therefore, there is positive evidence that 4,074 sea-lions w'ere killed, 3,549 in 1915, and 525 in 1914. According to the statements of Fisheries Overseer Saugstad at Rivers inlet, and Boyd at Bella Bella, through whom most of the bounty was applied for, there would certainly not be more than 50 per cent saved of those killed. Of the adults, there might not be more than one in ten, but among the pups there would be quite a large proportion. Approximately 75 per cent of the muzzles brought in were from pups. In the localities alone in which sea-lions were killed for bounty in 1914 and 1915, at a conservative estimate there must have been 8,000 killed, of which approximately 6,000 were pups. The number killed in Barkley sound and at isolated spots elsewhere would add materially to this number. At such a rate, extermi- nation would not seem far off. In fact it was practical extermination of the 1915 increase on the Sea Otter and Haycock rookeries. Comparing these numbers with the estimated number for the whole coast, 11,000, given by Dr. Newcombe as seen in 1913, it would seem that an estimate based on the numbers that may be seen at the rookeries and hauling-out places, must be too low. Even during the pupping season, all the lions will not be on the rookeries at the same time, for while the adult male and female may fast at such a time, there is no evidence that immature individuals do so, and the probability is that they feed then as they do at other times of the year. During the rest of the year, it is known that at times all the members of a herd may be away from the rookery or hauling-out place at one time, but there is no assurance that all of them are ever on the rocks at the same time. Certainly there are times when some are on the rocks and others are in the water, since that has been observed by the commissioners on different occasions. If they are not all on the rocks at the same time, an estimate based on the number seen at any one time would not take into account those in the water. 20 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Consider the case of Solander island for example. In the investigation by Dr Ivewcombe m 1913, since at times there were no lions whatever visible, doubt was expressed as to its being a rookery (there is now conclusive evidence that it is) although at other times upwards of one thousand were seen there. Even when a thousand of them were on the rocks there may have been many more scattered about actively leeding or in search of food. ’ Taking It for granted, therefore, that 11,000 was a fair estimate in 1913 for the number ot sea-lions that could be seen at the rookeries ■ and hauling-out places, it is evident that to this number, an addition must be made, amounting to an unknown percentage of the whole number, to get at the total number in British Columbia waters. 13. COMMERCIAL USES TO WHICH SEA-LION CARCASSES MIGHT BE PUT. From evidence o-f manufacturers and sea-lion hunters the suggestion was con- veyed to the commissioners that there was an economic and commercial value in sea- lion hides, whiskers, and carcasses. Under the bounty system the whole carcass of a sea-lion, with the exception of the muzzle, is disregarded, thrown into the sea, or left on the rookeries or hauling-out grounds to putrify, so far as any effort is made by the hi ^ utilize it. Much time was spent and many persons interviewed in obtaining definite information as to the feasibility of utilizing sea-lion carcasses for commercial purposes, with the happy result, however, of its being demonstrated that the hide of a sea-lion is eminently suitable for tanning into leather, from wihich durable and serviceable gloves and boots to-day are being made; that the whiskers have a value of 25 cents a piece to Orientals; and that the flesh can be rendered into nwi-r'^t available. While it was impossible, f ° disposal of the commissioners, to investigate this side ot the problem in an phaustive manner, on account of the great distances from \ ancouver and Victoria to San Francisco and New York, where comprehensive and accurate corrobOTation of the commercial uses of the carcasses of sea-lions can be obtained, yet sufiicient evidence was discovered to point to the conclusion that in miling sea-hons the economic value of their entire carcasses should be taken into con- Hderation, SO that, if it were found possible and feasible, then the monetary returns Irom the disposal of the carcasses in the form of hides, whiskers, oil, and guano would at least equal and possibly, with care, exceed the amount of the bounty offered y t e overnment. It is in the mind of the commissioners that if such a consum- mation could be reached, a real service to industry and the country could be rendered, it IS in this direction that the commissioners desire to pursue their inquiries durino* the coming year. ® hat turn that inquiry might take is indicated by the fact that Mr. W. F. Kobinson, president of the Kobinson Fisheries Company, manufacturers, producers, and distributors of fish oil and fish fertilizer, Anacortes, Washington, writing to the commission under date of August 11, 1915, says: ‘‘We have never yet had the car- casses of sea-lions to use in our fertilizer plant, but could do so if we had them, as we understand they grow to a very large size. Unless the expense of obtaining ’the sea-hons is too great, or your works are not near the source of production, we believe they could be handled to advantage.’’ Messrs. Anderson and Miskin, 448 Seymour street, Vancouver, in answer to an inquiry from the commission, wrote the following letter, in which it is understood that the oil from the sea-lions corresponds to seal oil: — Ucplying to your telephonic inquiry re our requirements of seal oil, we are buyers of the same quality as is produced in Newfoundland from the blubber of the young harps (hair seal). It is principally used in miners’ lamps, and must be free of moisture. If we get the right quality, we can use 500 to B. C. SEA-LIOt^ INYESTIGATIOE 21 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a 700 tons per annum. Samples are usually submitted before we purchase, or it is guaranteed to be the finest quality, and what is termed ‘water white.^ Straw and coloured oil, which is much cheaper, we handle a small quantity of. Oil from old harps is very much darker than what is produced from the young ones. “ There is a good market for seal oil in United Kingdom, and we have no doubt whatever that, if the stuff can be produced on the Pacific 'Coast, it would be to our mutual advantage. If a small trial lot was sent home on con- signment through US, it would enable our friends to judge of the character of the oil, and if not suited for their purposes there would be no difficulty in dis- posing of it in the open market. If, on the other hand, it did suit them, they would doubtless be willing to make a contract for the quantity we have already stated, under guarantee of quality equal to consignment parcel, of which sealed samples could be retained here.” As to guano obtained from fish, whales, and other sea animals, its price is in the neighbourhood of $40 a ton. It is used as a fertilizer, and also manufactured into chicken food. The demand is steady and growing. Similar guano, it is thought, could be made from the carcasses of sea-lions. In relation to the manufacture of sea-lion hide products, the commission is indebted to K. 0. Grinnell, British Columjbia Glove Company, Eburne, Point Grey, for valuable information obtained during an interview on October 22. Mr. Grinnell speaks from personal knowledge as in his factory he has made gloves, boots, and moccasins from sea-lion hides. In fact, he has built up a small but substantial business in leather goods made from sea-lion hides. Naturally, therefore, he is emphatic in his declaration that sea-lions are of commercial value, especially for their hides. In 1913 he took a hunting trip to Haycock islands and got 500 hides which, when green and salted, weighed almost 200 pounds apiece. These hides he tanned in the ordinary way and made into gloves in his factory which in the fall of that year, was situated at Coquitlam. In tanning the hide reduces about 75 per cent, and w'hen tanned runs from an inch to a quarter of an inch in thickness. It is thin under the flippers but it is thicker on the belly than on the back. In making the hide into leather it may be split into three layers', and when thus split can be readily manipulated. From this leather, chrome-tanned leather gloves are made. From the hide of a fair-sized male, 2-| to 3 dozen pairs of gloves may be made, but taking an average of male, female and pup, only about 25 square feet of leather can be obtained, enough to make one dozen pairs of gloves. The range of gloves made runs from the fine automobile gloves or gauntlets to the heavy loggers’ mittens, the former selling at $24 a dozen pairs and the latter from $10.50 to $15. No better material can be obtained for loggers’ mittens, as the hide of the sea-lion by nature is of fine fibre, tough, strong, fiexible, and of close grain, enabling it to keep out water, while still retaining its pliability. The other gloves as well are very durable and serviceable. On the day following the interview, Mr. Grinnell brought into the secretary’s office two pairs of gloves made from sea-lion hide, tanned in his own factory and made up in the interval. One pair was from the hide of a sea-lion pup, this selling at $1.50 or, by the dozen, $12.50; the other was from an adult, selling at $1.75 a pair, or $13.50 a dozen. The secretary bought the two pairs, and has them on exhibition in his office at present. With eight or nine men working, twenty-five to fifty pairs of gloves a day are made. More men are wanted, as the output could easily be increased. Glove business from sea-lion hides is a good business. There is a ready market in Canada for all the factory can turn out. The moccasins that Mr. Grinnell makes from the sea-lion hides give good satis- faction. They are pliable and fit snugly to the foot. The price is $26 per dozen 38a— 3 22 DEPARTMEI^T OF THE FATAL 8ERTIGE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 pairs. Boots from these hides stand water as well as rubber boots. A pair were made for a customer, who has to wade throug'h water and chemical liquor all the time while at work, and even here they igave excellent satisfaction. For boot purposes, green hides are better than dry hides, but all sea-lion hides are good. Mr. Grinnell would be glad to consider a proposal to buy all the sea-lion hides that could be delivered to him, and is sure if he could get the supply at a fair pri^e he could build up a large industry". He would be willing to pay 5 cents a pound for green hides if he were guaranteed 5,000 hides. If he could get hides in large enough numbers to make it worth while he could ship them to San Francisco, as he has a standing order to ship any hides he can get at 6 or 7 cents a pound for green hides of females and pups and 2 cents a pound for males, but he has to pay the freight. It would take 5,000 per annum to satisfy this demand. If the lions can be obtained, the skinning is a simple matter. A good man can skin a lion in from fifteen to twenty-five minutes and should be able to skin three or four an hour. He would thus make good wages if he could get steady work for the day at 25 cents a skin. Mr. Grinnell is of the opinion that the oil from the sea-lion alone should make it worth while saving the carcass, and the remainder of the carcass made into guano or chicken food should command a good price. P. H. McMullen, representing the McMullen Hide and Fur Company, 956 Powell street, Vancouver, said he would handle any quantity of sea-lion hides at a price similar to that suggested by Mr. Grinnell. 14. BOUNTY PAYMENTS FOR KILLING SEA-LIONS. By good fortune the commission interviewed A. K. Sinclair, 2940 Ontario street, Vancouver, a sea-faring man, an old sealer and perhaps the pioneer sea-lion hunter for profit in British Columbia. He tells the sea-lion story from a different viewpoint, that of the hunter. In May, 1914, he was on a hunting trip for Hibbard & Stewart, hide dealers, 958 Powell street, Vancouver, as skipper of the schooner Tuladi, the agreement being that he was to receive 3 cents a pound for green salted sea-lion hides, delivered in Vancouver. He was at Kivers inlet on May 25, 1914, where, he states, he organized the plan mentioned elsewhere inffhis report by which the canners there gave $1,050 in bounty in an effort to diminish the depredations of the sea-lions by killing off a number of them. Sinclair had to wait about a week for good weather before he could get on the Virgin rocks. From his anchorage in Schooner Eetreat, every day he spied out the land until conditions were ripe. On June 5 or 6 he made a landing on the Virgin rocks from a dory. The sea-lions made as if they would prevent his landing, but after killing five or six of them from the dory he and one hunter succeeded in getting on the rocks. They left one man on the schooner and one man in the dory not far from the rocks. It was breeding season, and all the sea-lions stayed on the rocks when the landing was made. The lions were not frightened, they did not stampede, they seemed indifferent to the visitors. If any sea-lions slid off the rocks on the approach of the hunters they returned to the rocks after the hunters landed. The hunters shot all the cows and bulls they could within that radius, and cut the tails from all they had killed to collect the bounty. They started killing at 6 in the morning and finished at 2 in the afternoon. At the end of the killing, 750 tails were counted. They then turned back to Bivers inlet, declared enough tails to collect $1,050 and hoping that more bounty might be put up they did not reveal the possession of a greater number. B. C. SEA-LION INVESTIGATION 23 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a After Sinclair and his crew had collected the bounty they went back to the Virgin rocks and skinned some of the sea-lions for their hides. They got about 2,000 pounds, when the weather turned bad and prevented any further landings. The wind came in from the west every day about 10 a.m. and kept blowing steadily and strong until evening, when it died down. All that they got from the hides on this trip amounted to $60, but they had the $1,050 bounty money besides. The following year, leaving Vancouver on May 12, Sinclair with two others took the 40-foot gasoline schooner Atlintoo up the coast to hunt for sea-lions. They got a few near Smiths inlet. On May 16 they were off Virgin rocks, but very few sea-lions were in sight. They arrived at Rivers inlet May 20, where they tried to get the canners again to put up a bounty fund, but the canners had decided to go hunting sea- lions on their own account. Sinclair describes the hunting party from the canneries as composed of sixteen or twenty men armed with “pop guns,” twenty-two rifles, revolvers, and other firearms. They left Rivers inlet 2 a.m. one Sunday, went to Virgin rocks, and got back about four in the afternoon. They were nof successful, as they had begun too early. Four noses were all they had. (The bounty^mark had been changed from tails to noses.) Later, many other parties from Rivers , inlet went out to Virgin rocks, until from much shooting the sea-lions got scared off. On June 3 Sinclair and his crew got fourteen noses after making a landing on, .Virgin rocks. He found the sea-lions timid, for as soon as they saw the launch they got off the rocks into the water, and even the mothers left their young when the hunters landed. ' “The sea-lions went off like sheep.” He was dissatisfied .with Virgin rocks and went to Calvert island, where he anchored, and got four noses one day, ten another, and eight another. In all he got fifty-seven noses, and landed at Rivers iplet; where he collected on them in the name of George Allen. Fifteen noses he brought to Vancouver and collected on them there.' " ; Mr. Sinclair declares that to make a success of sea-lion hunting it necessary to' be able to land on Virgin rocks every day or every ether day! ‘ He says That if there had been a bounty in 1914 he could have killed ' 90 per ' cent of those on Virgin rocks. If he had been offered $2,500 to clear the sea-lions off Virgin rocks in 1914 and protect the Rivers: inlet fisheries he would have accepted it and done the job completely. The proper way to attack these animals to reduce their numbers is to get the old ones first. 'When females are pupping the old sea-lions never leave the rocks to feed or do anything else. The bull sea-lions are as thin as rakes after the cows are done pupping, at which time they are all very voracious.' If it is desired to exterminate the sea-lions, all the rookeries should be hunted at the same time. During the pupping season they are easily fooled, since they persist in staying on the breed- ing grounds. Sinclair would take six or seven good shots and reach the rocks about June 1. He would hide three men on the rocks with orders to shoot only the old ones- and . to shoot to kill, aiming at the spot just below the ear. The old ones will not leave tlie rocks at tEis time if they are not fired at from the water, and the pups cannot, for they are not strong enough, as they are suckled by the mothers for ten days or two weeks after birth. When the adults are killed the pups can readily be clubbed, and if not they would die of starvation. Sinclair is of the opinion that bounty should not be paid unless the hide were brought in, as the hide could be sold for more than the bounty. He would be willing to hunt sea-lions, collecting a bounty on the hide of $1 for pups, $3 for females, and $2 for bulls. He says also that bounty paid on sea-lions killed at a long distance from any locality where fishing is in operation is money thrown away. He thinks East Haycocks, Tree Hob island, ButterwortE rocks, Massett, Banks island. Price island, Bonilla banks, and Aristazable island are too far away from Rivers inlet to allow sea-lions from them to be the cause of depredations to fishing. An article appeared in the Pacific Motor-Boat, Seattle, Wash., in November, 1915, treating of sea-lion hunting by motor-boat in Oregon, so pertinent to the Canadian 38a — 3j 24 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 inquiry that, with the permission of the publisher, Mr. Miller Freeman, it is repro- duced in part: — “A rather unique industry is carried on each year in motor-boats off the coast of Curry county, Oregon. The Kogue River reef and the Cape Blanco reef are each year combed for sea-lions, and the work of killing them is often hazardous and dangerous. “ The killing is not done for amusement, but for profit, the skins being valued at from $4 to $6 each, and some other portions of the carcass being of sufficient value to make the average for each animal killed between $5 and $6. The annual slaughter does not take place until the young are born, usually in July and August. This plan of leaving the pups insures a supply for the hunters the next year and there is no danger of the disappearance of the sea-lions from the vicinity where they are sought. The largest rocks in the Blanco reef are off shore from three to seven miles and the hunters must go well prepared. It is possible they might be obliged to stay about the rocks two or three days at a time, for the ocean occasionally becomes so rough the small boats are obliged to stay in the lee until the weather improves. Until late years the hunters used rowboats in which to seek the lions and sometimes were on the rocks several days before they could return ashore at Port Orford, the nearest town. Recently, however, gasoline boats are utilized altogether in hunting. It is customary to go from shore to the rocks where the sea-lions make their home, in a small open craft, and, after making a kill, the skins are picked up from the reef by a larger craft, the gasoline schooner Tramp, a 15-ton boat of Marshfield. Captain John Swing has transported the sea-lion hides in the Tramp from the two reefs for the past ten years, trans-shipping them for San Francisco at Coos Bay. The average number of hides secured each season varies from 300 to 400, the hunters feeling they have done a profitable season’s work if they make a clear profit of $1,000, since the season is only for a month, and the time goes quickly while they are engaged. The hides are used by manufacturers for belting. They are prepared by salting them heavily but not tanned until they reach their destination at San Francisco. The skins are heavy, the hunters finding them occasionally weighing 150 pounds when secured from an animal of extraordinary size. Taking the skins from the sea-lions is an occupation that calls for quick and expert ability. A good skinner can take a hide off in from five to seven minutes, when working at ordinary speed. Robert Forty and James Crewe each has a record of skinning a common-sized animal in three and a half minutes. While there is no means of weighing the sea-lions, the hunters estimate their weight from 1,500 to over 3,000 pounds. The larger the pelt, of course, the better the price is secured.” Thus it will be seen that in paying a bounty of $2 for each muzzle of a slain sea- lion and disregarding the hide and carcass, there is lost an opportunity to encourage the prevention of fisheries depredations and at the same time, by means of a business organization centered in the government officials, make the sea-lion, through its hide and carcass, pay the bounty and more. When further facts are obtained concerning methods of organization, aiming at using for commercial purposes the sea-lion carcass, the commission should be able to outline a plan that would achieve that economical and conservative result. B. C. SEA-LION INVESTIGATION 25 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a 15. COIS^CLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS. The commissioners are satisfied that as the numbers of sea-lions in or near Rivers inlet increased from 1911 to 1913, they were present in sufficient numbers to be a serious menace to the fishing industry, although there was no diminution in the pack until 1913. Thus the pack for 1910 was 129,398 cases, for 1911, 101,006 cases, and for 1912, it amounted to 13'7,697 cases; in 1913 there were only 68,096 cases put up, the smallest pack since 1901. This was the year in which it was found useless to fish farther out towards the mouth of Rivers inlet than the entrance to Draineys inlet. The fact that the fishermen had to stop all fishing in this region on account of the number of fish taken out of the nets and the amount of damage done to gear is backed up by the fact that the cannery managers of the five outer canneries in the inlet were willing to put up their own money in 1914 as a bounty that the number of sea-lions might be reduced. Coincident with the decrease in the number brought about in this way in 1914, the pack went up again, amounting to 199,952 cases. While the fluctu- ation from year to year is always evident, the great decrease in the pack for 1913 can scarcely be accounted for on that basis. In 1915 a bounty of two dollars per muzzle was placed on sea-lions by the Department of Fisheries. This might have been expected to help out the Rivers inlet canneries, and probably it did so as the pack 146,838 cases, slightly surpassed the previous high record of 1912. Of this pack, over 139,999 cases were sockeye, over 27 per cent of the total sockeye pack for the province for this year. Since such a pack is worth approximately $1,299,999, it is certainly worth conserving. However, as this bounty of two dollars was an indiscriminating bounty, its success was not unqualified. It is true that many sea-lions were killed in tlie vicinity of Rivers inlet, but it is also true, as shown in this report, that more than twice the numiber were killed at points too far distant from Rivers inlet to have any effect on the fishing there, not because sea-lions, on occasion, do not travel so far, but that at, and for some time after, the pupping season, they remain in the vicinity of the rookery, and this season corresponds with the time of the sockeye run in Rivers inlet. Furthermore, it is commonly believed that the numbers in the Sea Otter rookery have greatly increased since the lions were driven from Triangle island after the erection of the lighthouse and the installation of a wireless plant there. If this is true, the killing of so many sea-lions on the East and West Haycocks in 1915 will tend to drive those uninjured away from these islands and hence it might increase the numbers in the Sea Otter rookery, thus doing harm rather than good to the Rivers inlet fishing. Since only the muzzle was required to obtain the bounty, it was possible for a very few individuals to kill a sufiicient number on the rookeries in a very short time to take up all of the bounty, whether these lions were doing any harm or not, consequently, in other cases where sea-lions, likely to be doing harm, were killed, there was no bounty available. As an example, the Barkley sound fishermen had made 'complaints of depredations by sea-lions but as the whole available bounty was used up in June, while the sea -lions did not come into Barkley sound until the first of November, the Barkley sound fishermen received no benefit whatever from the bounty. If the skins and carcasses had been made use of, such wholesale killing in such a short period would not have been possible, and some return might have been obtained from the money expended. The opinion is still held by eminent scientific men that it has not yet been proved that fish is an important item of the food of sea-lions. Drs. Merriam, Ever- mann and Hornaday have been much quoted in this regard. These men and others, during the California controversy, refused to put any faith in the statements of the fishermen regarding the sea-lion depredations. The period covered by the researches of the commission has been a 1‘mited one but even in this limited period sufficient 26 DEPARTMEH^T OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 evidence was obtained to prove that during a certain time of the year at least, food fish are eaten in large quantities by grey sea-lions. As in this instance the state- ments of the fishermen are definitely corroborated, there is evidently a fair basis for accepting other statements upon which there is general agreement, provided always that allowance must be made for a bias, natural to those interested in this as in any other question. It is on account of this bias that the evidence from inde- pendent witnesses is always desirable. Taking that into consideration, it is recom- mended that the commission should continue to study the life-history of the sea-lion, particularly dtiring the breeding season, which corresponds to the time of the big run of sockeye at Eivers inlet. This should be accomplished with comparative ease but the habits during the remainder of the year cannot be so readily ascertained as iii such investigation many difficulties will have to be overcome. The amount of food required just after the pupping season cannot be considered as an index for the rest of the year. That taken by the sea-lions in Barkley sound in November and December would be much nearer the average. The results of feeding in captivity do not help much as opinions differ so markedly. Thus, as previously quoted, Homaday states that 12 pounds a day or less is sufficient food for an adult male sea-lion, while Scammon says, the keeper at Woodward^s Gardens, San Francisco, informed him that he fed a male and a female sea-lion, regularly, every day, fifty pounds of fresh fish. ^ In any case, the amount of food required by a sea-lion in captivity, where its movements are necessarily much restricted, might be very different to the amount required by one during the active life out in the sea, where, in many instances, the food is so plentiful that there is great temptation to eat more than actual necessity calls for. The presence of dogfish remains in the stomach of a sea-lion caught in Barkley sound opens up a large question that should be investigated, particularly in view of the statement that the dogfish cease to bother the herring nets as soon as the sea-lions appear in the neighbourhood. While a definite comparison of the damage done to the herring fishery by the dogfish and the sea-lion is impossible, this at least can be said : while it does not pay to fish for herring when the dogfish interfere and the sea- lions are absent, it does pay to do so when the reverse is the case. If the disappear- ance of the dogfish is in any sense due to the presence of the sea-lion, the sooner the matter is investigated the better. Although at the present time no other species is so much a pest as the dogfish, there are other undesirable species, and while the commission has no definite infor- mation as to the relation of any of these to the sea-lion, the possibility of the sea-lion’s maintaining equilibrium in such cases is worthy of consideration. While the commissioners recommend that sea-lions should be driven away or greatly reduced in numbers where it is evident that they are doing appreciable damage, they are not satisfied that there is any necessity for decreasing the numbers at other rookeries, except after some organized plan by which the pups could be free from injury, as in the case mentioned off the Oregon coast, in order that the industrial value of the sea-lions should be conserved, and more particularly in view of the pos- sible friendly offices of the sea-lion that suggest further inquiry. Even in the case where it is considered necessary to diminish the number of sea-lions materially, the monetary value of the hide and carcass should be taken into consideration in any plan adopted. CHARLES F. NEWOOMBE. WM. HAMAR GREENWOOD. C. McLEAN FRASER. 1 Scammon, C. M. Marine Mammals of the Northwestern Coast, 1874, page 135. B. C. SEA-LION INVESTIGATION 27 S£5oiONAL PAPER No. 38a Part II. HEPORT AND CONCLUSIONS OF THE SEA-LION INVESTIGATION, 1916. In order to ascertain the effect upon the sea-lion population of the bounty of $2 per head which was placed upon them early in the year 1915, and the desirability or otherwise of continuing it, the commission appointed by the Biological Board of Canada considered it advisable: (1) to procure the number of individuals killed in order to obtain the bounty, (2) to visit the rookeries in order to make an estimate of the number of sea-lions still remaining in the province (3) to visit all localities from which complaints had been sent of depredations by these animals, and (4) to inves- tigate, as far as possible, the nature of the food of the sea-lions, as grave doubts had been expressed by well-known men of science as to whether food fish formed any part of their diet, some authorities even stating that their principal food consisted of animals which are enemies of fish used by man. The lateness of the season when the commissioners were first able to commence their labours and the unsuitability of the valuable government vessel for approaching the rookeries placed at their disposal, prevented them from completing the programme thus sketched. 'The number of sea-lions killed was obtained with approximate accu- racy; a great deal of information was procured from the various fishing stations as to the damage done by them during the fishing season and a beginning was made in the line of inquiry as to whether sea-lions do or do not eat food fish at one of the points at which complaint was made of their interference and destructive habits. The rookeries, however, were not adequately examined, nor had the commissioners any opportunity of personally investigating the food question at Rivers inlet, one of the most important salmon fisheries on the coast and one from which the most urgent complaints of damage had emanated, and also that one in the neighbourhood of which by far the greatest number of sea-lions, pups and adults, had been slaughtered early in 1915. It was therefore pointed out by the commissioners in their report for 1915 that it was their opinion that, with the object of completing the task originally proposed by them, their work should be resumed in 1916 early enough to be on Rivers inlet fishing ground during part of the salmon season and also in time to visit the rookeries when the sea-lions were assembled to bear their young, in ord^r to be able to make as accurate an estimate of their numbers as possible. The lack of facilities for communication with Rivers inlet made it difficult to decide on the most suitable time to visit this locality. The regular mail service and the telegraph and telephone communication made it an easy matter to get data as to conditions at Barkley sound, but at Rivers inlet telegraph and telephone communica- tion is lacking and mail arrives but ouce a week. From reports already received the eommission was led to believe that sea-lion depredation occurred both before and after the pupping season in early June. Since it was desirable to get as full information as possible as to the numbers of sea-lions at the different rookeries, it seemed possible that this could be obtained during the trip in which the Rivers inlet question was to be considered. For the twofold purpose especially, a 45-foot motor launch, the Emoh, was char- tered, with Captain Massey co^mmanding. Leaving Vancouver on June 21 and Departure Bay the following morning, a start was made for Rivers inlet, and 28 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAYAL SERYICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Wadhams was reached on June 24. On this part of the trip, as well as throughout the remainder of it, advantag-e was taken of every opportunity to confirm or add to the intormation already received. Contrary to expectations, there was no sign of any sea-lions in the inlet and no word o± any being seen, singly or in herds, as they had been reported early in the season in other years. _ Since, therefore, there was no immediate prospect of carrying on personal investigation in Eivers inlet, the commission proceeded to make a survey of the various rookeries. 17. SURVEY OF THE ROOKERIES. I. The Sea Otter Group. ^ 11 the first place attention was directed to the rookery on the Sea Otter group of island^ near the entrance to Eivers inlet. Manager Inrig offered to send out a Wad- Imms Cannery boat with its crew and others armed with rifies to shoot some sea-lions for insp^tion. The offer was accepted, and on June 25 the rookeries were visited On Pearl rocks, the first of the group to be visited (see fig. 2), there were about .oO sea-hons, about 50 of them being pups. As the sea was smooth, a landing was made from a row-boat, on the largest of the rocks, and a female, 7 feet 1 inch long which had been shot, was opened and examined, but the stomach was empty. Here' as on the other rocks in this group, the pups were very young, some of them newly born, and none of them yet able to take to the water or to swim properly if they did get in. Watch rock (see fig. 3), was next visited, but on this there were three adults. J wo of these were shot and examined. They were both small males, one of them 7 feet 6 in^es in length (see fig. 5) and the other 8 feet 1 inch. The stomachs were empty ^ Finally the Virgin group was visited. This group consists of three larger rocky islands and other smaller ones. There were lions on all, a total number of at least 2,500, of which nearly 1,000 were pups. One male, 10 feet 4 inches long (see fig. 13), was examined, with the same result as in the other cases. Evidently it was no use trying to learn what the sea-lion takes as food by examining the stomachs of those killed on the rookeries, and hence the members of the commission wished for no further slaughter. The boat crew were not satisfied with this, however, and many more were made to suffer. The adults all took to the water at the sound of the first volley if they had not already done so on the near approach of the boat, but they come to the surface at short intervals, rising until the head, neck and shoulders are visible, at which time they offer a target to the marksmen. The young pups are very helpless, so that they may easily be approached and many of these were clubbed to death. (It was in this way that most of them were killed for bounty the previous year.) Several photographs of pup groups were obtained on both Pearl and Virgin rocks (see figs. 6-12). 11. The East Haycocks. On the following day, June 26, the rookeries to the northwest of Vancouver island, on what is sometimes known as the cape Scott group of islands, were visited. On the way from Eivers inlet, sea-lions were again seen on the islands of the Sea Otter group, but no attempt was made to get near enough to make an estimate of the number. Channel rock to the southward of Pearl rocks was showing slightly above water and on it there were about twenty-five sea-lions. In the cape Scott group, the West Haycocks were first visited but no sea-lions were visible. The East Haycocks, however, presented the most wonderful sight of B. C. SEA-LION INTESTIGATION 29 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a the whole trip. For a considerable distance above the water’s edge, the rocks every- where were lined with sea-lions. The lowest estimate made as to the number was 6,000. The pups here were larger and hence, in such a number, it was difficult to distinguish them from the yearlings and small females. For that reason the num- ber of pups could not be approximated. As it was pouring rain unfortunately photo- graphy was out of the question. No rookeries have been reported from the larger islands, Lanz and Cox, there- fore, although the shores were scanned with glasses from a distance, no closer examina- tion was made. Triangle island, which formerly was the base for a large rookery, no longer supports one. The island was not visited but by means of wireless com- munication the commission was assured that no breeding took place there in 1916. In the open ocean for miles around Haycocks, sea-lions were seen, singly or in small groups, the last of these for the day about 14 miles away in the direction of Quatsino sound. III. Solander Island. The rookery at Solander island, off cape Coop, was examined the following day, June 27. The day was fine and the sea smooth. The Emoli was left in the offing, while two members of the commission in the boat’s dinghy, rowed over to the rookery in the hope that some photographs could be obtained before there would be much commotion among the members of the herd. Such hopes were vain for so timid were these huge beasts that even the approach of this small boat struck them with terror and they began to tumble off into the water, consequently, in order to show any large portion of the number, long range photographs had to be taken (see figs. 16, 17). Three or four of the large bulls remained to be seen at shorter range, swaying from side to side and uttering most deafening roars. Some of their most faithful consorts remained with them almost to the last. One in particular seemed very loath to go (see fig. 21). He was probably the largest of the herd, and one of the largest seen at any of the rookeries, but he, too, finally took the plunge. His total length must have been over 12 feet and his weight over a ton. (Dr. Newcombe in his sea-lion report for 1913, gives the actual weight of a 12-foot sea-lion, brought into Alert bay, April 26, 1913, as 2,240 pounds.) In the water the animals seem to have less fear, and when a score of them came up at the same time, near together (see fig. 23), -and in close proximity to the small boat, to give their deep roar in unison, one felt that it was as well that they did not realize the extent of their powers. This rookery was not a large one, so that the number, little in excess of 500, could be fairly accurately counted. Here again the pups were Targe enough to take to the water, and they were among the first to do so ; hence the relative number could not be definitely estimated. On June 28, while returning from Sea Otter cove to Eivers inlet, sea-lions were seen at cape Eussell and other points between this and cape Scott. IV. Cape St. James. There remained one large rookery, that on the rocks off cape St. James, at the southern extremity of the Queen Charlotte islands, and a start was made for this on June 29. In the neighbourhood of Estevan island, engine trouble developed to such extent that it was necessary to go to Prince Eupert for repairs. This made a delay of some days. On July 9, Butterworth rocks, to the northwest of Stephens island, were visited, as this is a well-known hauling-out place, but not a rookery. Two sea-lions were seen. 30 DEPARTME^iT OF THE NAYAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 These were 150 miles from the nearest known rookery. They disappeared into the water while the boat was still at long range, but they appeared to be of good size. They could hardly be breeding adults so far away from a rookery, and there were no pups on the rocks. They were probably bachelor males, such as were seen and examined on Watch rock in the Sea Otter group. Hecate strait was crossed on July 11, and cape St. James reached on Juily 13. Here again the day was fine and the sea smooth, with the exception of a certain amount of swell. Thus near approach was possible, and some photographs were obtained (see figs. 30-33), but no attempt was made to land. There were only about 1,000 sea-lions on the rocks, and the pups could not readily be distinguished from the other mem- bers of the herd. Individuals in the water were seen as far away as Scudder point, 25 miles distant from the rookery. On the return, Kivers inlet was reached on July 17. 18. A COMPARISON OF THE ENUMERATIONS OF 1913 AND 1914. While the rookeries are still under consideration, it is well to compare the enumeration here made with that made by Dr. C. F. Newcombe and W. A. Newcombe in 1913^. A table of comparison will serve as a basis for bringing out special points. Ivookery. 1913. 1916. Date. Number. Date. Number. Cape St. -Tames June 12, 13. . . . 2,000 .July 13 1,000 Sea Otter group— Pearl rocks June 21, 22. . . 1,350 June 25 250 Wfl.teVi rocks .1 line 22. 112 June 25 3 Virgin rocks Aug. 28, 29, Sept. 2 2,300 June 25 2,500 Ca])e Scott group — 1 riangle island J uly 15, 19 300 None breeding. Past Haycocks . . Aug. 17, 25. . . 3,200 June 26 6,000 Solar.der island July 20 None seen. June 27 500 To this should possibly be added about thirty-five, which were seen by the com- missioners off Hope island, September 3 and 4, 1915, where it may be, as the Nawhitti Indians aver, there is a small rookery. This was not visited either in 1913 or 1916. There is little difference in the total estimate in the two cases, but a comparison of the individual rookeries bears out the statement made in the earlier report that to get the extent of the whole sea lion population, the number seen on the rookeries must be increased by an unknown number representing those in the water at the same time. Taking the cape St. James rookery in the first place, if the whole 1913 herd was on the rocks when Dr. Newcombe made the enumeration and the whole 1916 herd was on the rock when the commissioners made the enumeration, there is no accounting for the reduction of the numbers as no raids were made on the rookery for the bounty in 1915 and very few were killed that could have belonged to the herd. The discrepancy is even greater than would appear from the above figures. The 1913 enumeration was made on June 12 and 13, when, as was stated in the report, but few pups had been born. In 1916 the enumeration was made a month later, when the pups of the year would not only all be born, but all able to take to the water. To make a more correct 1 Provincial Fisheries Department’s Report, British Columbia, 1913, pp. R131-R145, with 16 plates. B. C. SEA-LI0:N imESTIGATION 31 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a comparison it would be necessary to add about 500 to the 1913 number for the pups that were born in that year. Unless in the meantime there was an epidemic, or an extensive migration took place, neither of which is probable, the number on the rocks on July 13, 1916, did not by any means represent the whole herd. The fact that several were seen at various points even up to 25 miles from the rookery, bears this out. It is even probable that the two bachelor males (?) seen on Butterworth rocks belonged to this herd. In this connection mention should be made of a conversation which the com- missioners had at Claxton on July 15, with a Ilaida Indian, Timothy Tait, belonging to the ISTinstints tribe, who is recognized by the Ilaida as the principal owner of the cape St. James rookery. He said that he didn’t think the placing of the new light- house on the island of cape St. James had made any difference to the rookery, to which, as usual, he had paid several visits during the year (he had killed a number of sea-lions for food). He said he and his people found scattering pups at all times of the year, although the months of June and July were the most ijroductive. Coming next to the Sea Otter group, the only exact comparison of the two years can be made in the case of the Pearl rocks and Watch rock, since the time of the year .almost exactly coincides. The large reduction shown in 1916 was to be expected from the number of onslaughts made on this portion of the rookery in the interval. Watch rock, which was a breeding place in 1913, evidently is one no longer. The portion of the rookery on Virgin rocks shows no material difference. Apparently the number killed has not materially decreased the size of the herd, unless, since the 1913 count was made over two months later in the year, it is quite possible a smaller percentage of the whole number was on the rocks. In the spring of 1892, when J. M. Macoun, O.M.G., was acting on the Behring Sea Commission to make an enumeration of the fur seals, he visited these rocks and some notes in his diary, which he kindly put at the disposal of the cuinmission, helps out in this comparison. On May 12, writing of the Virgin group, he says: “The largest island was then approached, and, as the sea-lions, by which it was covered, did not take alarm, a careful estimate was made of their numbers. Making allowance for all possible kinds of error, I can safely say, there were 1,500 on the one island, and more than 2,000 in the group.” As this estimate was made on May 12, no pups of the year could have been counted. Hence the number, over 2,000, must be com- pared with the number apart from the pups, estimated at 1,500, in 1916. If this indicates anything, it is that, instead of a natural increase, which should be con- siderable in fourteen years, there has been a decided decrease here as on Pearl rocks. The difference of the attitude of the sea-lion towards mankind is striking. After seeing so many exhibitions of timidity in 1916, it is hard for the commissioners to realize that, not so very long since, the sea-lion did not take alarm at the approach of a boat, even at a time distant from the pupping season. In the cape Scott group, the reduction in number on Triangle island, noted in 1913, has continued to the ultimate conclusion, as now no lions breed on the island. At the East Haycocks, the figures would indicate a great increase in number during ^he three years, when, as a matter of fact, there should have been a great decrease, since 2,290, from which the muzzles were taken, were killed, besides many that Xvere not retrieved. During the summer of 1913, Mr. Grinnell and his men hunted the sea-lions on and around the Haycocks, until they had secured 500 hides. The sur- prise, therefore, is not that W. A. Newcombe did not see more than he did when he visited this rookery late in August, but that he saw as many as he did, after so much hunting. The large number seen on the rocks in 1916 did not represent the whole herd, since, as has been stated, numerous lions were seen in the water and on the rocks from cape Russell to cape Scott. Considering, finally, the Solander island rookery, it will be noted that Dr. New- combe saw none when passing on July 20, and that others passing near the same 32 DEPARTME'NT OF THE HAYAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 time, notably Captains Gillam and Troup, who took special notice, at Dr. New- combe’s request, saw no sign of any, hence it was supposed that it was not a breeding place. Since on June 27 the pups were large enough to take to the water, they are able evidently to feed for themselvs by July 20, and the whole herd was away from the rookery. The majority of them must have been away even on June 27, as there were not nearly so many on the rocks as there were on September 14, 1915, when it was estimated that there were upwards of 1,000 visible. At that time the lions were present both on Solander island proper and the small outlying rock (see fig. 15), while on June 27 they were entirely confined to the outlying rock. The number that haunt Barkley sound cannot well be counted here. If they are from a British Columbia rookery, they have probably been counted in with the others, and if, which is more probable, they come from the Jagged islet rookery, off the Wash- ington coast, they cannot properly find a place in this enumeration. Summing up the whole matter, although the enumeration in 1913 as well as that in 1916 was as well done as it could be, by making a single visit or few visits to each rookery, there are little data for comparison of the relative numbers in the two years. The estimate on the rookeries is slightly higher in 1916 than in 1913, but that is largely because in the majority of cases the visit was made at a more opportune time. It would not be legitimate to draw the conclusion from the figures that the number of sea-lions was greater in 1916 than in 1913, especially in the face of the fact that S,000 animals had been killed in the intervening period. The only instance where a direct comparison could be made, viz., at Pearl and Watch rocks, there was evidence of a decided diminution. While in round numbers 10,000 fairly well represents these seen on the rocks at the rookeries, there is a large number besides these, possibly even as great a number or greater, scattered over a wide area along the whole coast. 19. THE RIVERS INLET SITUATION. Having finished the examination of the rookeries, the whole attention of the com- mission was turned to the Rivers inlet situation. The return from Queen Charlotte islands on July 17 should have been at the height of the season for sockeye — the special tit— bit for the sea lion — during which time the depredations are most serious. Judging from the number reported in previous years, the commission concluded that there should be no difficulty in getting several sea-lions, shot right in the fishing area, that the stomachs might be examined at a time there would be every chance of seeing the quantity and nature of the food before it would be digested to any extent. From the outset, however, the prospects were none too promising. The season was wet and backward, the fish were running low, so that catches were very small. Although sea-lions were reported in the inlet, they were much less numerous than in preceding years, but torn nets and mutilated fish were shown to indicate that they still were doing damage. At several canneries along the inlet there were Indians who had hunted fur seals. If any of these could be obtained to shoot and spear the sea-lions, the best results could be expected. Because of the poor season, every available man was required to fish, and it proved no easy matter to get any of them to undertake sea-lion hunting. After some delay, a Sitka Indian, Louis, agreed to try his luck, but no one with experience could be obtained to go with him. The best that could be done was to hire an Indian boy, Jimmie, as boat puller. These two were supplied with a boat from one of the canneries, a rifle, ammunition, and a spear and taken down to where some of the outermost nets in the inlet were drifting, as it was here that the most damage was reported. I'hey were out with the nets on Wednesday and Thursday nights, July 19 and 20 (the lions did not bother, in the daytime), while the Emoh was moored at the Goose Bay fishing camp near by. Neither sound nor sight of sea- lion was noticed on either occasion, although the fishermen still reported their presence. B. C. SEA-LION INVESTIGATION 33 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a The following detailed reports were obtained from the fishermen in the neigh- bourhood on Thursday morning: — Boat 1397 reported seeing two sea-lions near the nets the previous night. Boat 4867 reported being bothered the previous night by the sea-lions, but not as much as the night before. Boat 4901 reported that sea-lions had torn the net the previous night. Boat 4876 reported that sea-lions had been seen all afternoon the day before down by the point. Boat 1381, manned by a Jap, reported no trouble. Boat 1405, also manned by a Jap, reported that sea-lions were on the net the night before between 8 and 9 o’clock. Boat 4791 reported no trouble the previous night, but some the night before. Boat 4588 reported that fish had been taken from the net and eaten about 11 o’clock the previous night. Claimed by fisherman that he had lost 50 fish in a week, shown by the heads and tails left in the net. Boat 1398, manned by a Jap, reported that he had seen sea-lions in the net about 10 o’clock in the morning. Boat 4915, from the Good Hope cannery, reported disturbance by sea-lions in the net the previous night. An independent boat reported that he had seen sea-lions in the inlet at 4 o’clock the previous afternoon. Boat 4870, a Good Hope cannery boat, reported having seen sea-lions during the night. Boat 4844 reported having noticed sea-lions in the inlet the previous night at 9 o’clock. Boat 1416 reported that fish had been eaten by sea-lions on the net at 8 o’clock the previous night. Boat 1153, manned by a Jap, reported that he had not been bothered with sea-lions. . Boat 1394, manned by a Jap, reported having seen sea-lions in the fishing area at 11 o’clock the previous night. After the negative results of Wednesday and Thursday nights. Manager Inrig and Net Foreman Anderson (it may be mentioned here that cannery managers and men, especially those at Wadhams where the commission made its headquarters, gave every assistance in the investigation consistent with the serious demands on their time occasioned by their own interests) intimated that some of 'the white fishermen would be willing to give assistance. Accordingly, several of them were supplied with ammunition and a substantial reward was offered for each sea-lion brought in. Louis went out with one of these fishermen to be right at the net as Jimmie in the mean- time had been discarded. Friday night proved no better than the others, although some torn nets and mutilated fish were still shown as evidence of the sea-lions’ presence. The weekly close season lasts from 6 a.m. on Saturday to 6 p.m. Sunday. The net foreman offered the use of two nets for Saturday night if permission could be obtained from Fisheries Overseer Saugstad, the idea being that if two nets, and only two, were put out Saturday evening, all the inducements for the sea-lions would be centred around these nets. Mr. Saugstad readily granted permission and arrange- ments were made to carry the plan into effect. Two men were assigned to each boat. S. Simonsen of Sea Otter cove, V.I., went with Louis in the one boat, while G. Bjerregard, of Holberg, Y.I., and J. C. Holm, of Campbell river, Y.I., manned the other. From long experience these men were thoroughly acquainted with fishing 34 DEPARTME^^T OF TEE EAYAL SERYICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 conditions in the outer part of the inlet. The commissioners, as on previous occa- sions, remained near by in Goose bay. Early in the morning the men were picked up but no sea-lions had been shot and there was little evidence of their presence except the remains of three sockeye and one humpback that were found in the nets. A photograph was taken of these remains (se fig. 34.) It is interesting and instructive to compare this photograph with one taken at the Canadian Fish and Cold Storage plant at Prince Pupert, September 8, 1915, which shows the way in which salmon are mutilated by hair seals (see fig. 35.) 20. LITTLE EVIDENCE OF SERIOUS DAMAGE IN 1916. ' After a week of negative results there was no encouragement to stay longer and the commission prepared to depart on the following morning. As the fishermen would all be fishing again on Sunday night, they were encouraged to make a final effort to get sea-lions while the commissioners were still in the neighbourhood. The Bmoh anchored in Goose bay for the night, and in the morning (July 24), since there were no results reported, a start was made for home at 4.30. As the fishermen were still confident that sea-lions could be captured in the inlet, they were assured chat the offer of reward would hold good until the end of the season, if the stomachs were sent to the Biological station for examination. No claim has yet been made for such reward. 21. PROBABLE AMOUNT OF INJURY DONE BY THE SEA-LION. It will be seen from the above account that the commission spared no pains to get concrete evidence on the situation at Fivers inlet.' If a week of such endeavour at the height of the season could produce no positive results, there was no hope that a whole season’s residence there would do so. Such being the case, the commission Jeels justified in stating that, as far as the 1916 season was concerned, the sea-lions were not a very decided menace to the fishing in the inlet. The Emoh travelled several miles up and down the inlet every day during the sojourn there, and only on one occasion was there seen a trace of a sea-lion, and at that time only one was seen. The majority of the men that fished in the outer part of the inlet were questioned, none of whom reported having seen more than four or five. The sea-lion is undoubtedly to blame for some torn nets and mutilated fish, but that he alone is to blame is open to question. On account of his bad reputation, all the blame is put on him whether he deserves it or not. It might be mentioned that nets are commonly torn at other fish centres where the men scarcely know what a sea-lion looks like. All the fishermen agree in declaring that the damage in 1916 was much less than in the previous years. If any further evidence is needed to show that the commission is more than justified in making this stand, it is supplied by a letter to the secretary from Mr. Frank Inrig, dated November 19, after the close of the fishing season. It reads as follows: — To the Secretary of the Sea-Lion Commission, Boom 929 Birks Building, Vancouver, B.C. Dear Sir,— As manager of the British Columbia Packers’ Canneries, Wadhams and Brunswick, at Fivers inlet, I can speak with knowledge of the depredations of the sea-lions in former years to the commercial fisheries at Fivers inlet. Up to two years ago these depredations were great, and in terms of money, costly to the canneries. But the expenditure of a few thousand dollars on bounties by the Federal Government, two years ago, resulted in many sea-lions, both young and old. B. C. SEA-LION INVESTIGATION 35 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a being killed at and on the rookeries in the Pacific, and besides that a thorough scare being thrown into all the sea-lions frequenting the waters adjacent to Kivers inlet. The sea-lions, always timid, became exceptionally timorous in the presence of man, and shunned rather than sought the fishing areas. This to my mind was due to the hunting of sea-lions induced by the offer of a bounty. In the year 1916 the sea-lions were not excessively harmful. They did not bother the fishing operations at Rivers inlet to any great degree, and not at all as they did three years ago. This I attribute to the effect of the hunting under the bounty system, and also to the fact that before the season opened for fishing the sea-lions on the Sea Otter group of rookeries were pretty thoroughly scared by being shot at and in some cases killed by fishermen at Rivers inlet. I think they have lost their voraciousness and courage to appear where man is and where fishing operations are being carried on at Rivers inlet. Now I do not think the sea-lions should be killed off as long as they remain as quiet as they did this year, for their hides may still be made use of for commercial purposes and their carcasses turned into hen food or fertilizer, but I do think that the Federal Government, through the Fisheries Overseer at Rivers inlet, might spend two hundred dollars a year on ammunition to be served out to the fishermen for them to make a scare raid on the Sea Otter group of rookeries every year before the salmon fishing begins, in order to terrorize the sea-lions and make them fearful of man. This would keep them away from the fishing operations throughout the season and protect the fish and the gear of the fishermen. Don’t kill off the sea-lions, but strike terror into them. If this communication is of any use to you, you are at liberty to do with it as you wish. Yours faithfully, FRANK INRIG. Vancouver, R.C.,' November 19, 1916. There are still large numbers of sea-lions along the British Columbia coast. On the rookeries alone over 10;000 were seen in June and July, 1916. The rookery estimate is not sufficiently accurate as an index of the whole number to show the reduction that took place by the slaughter of 8,000 sea-lions in 1914-15 and to some extent in 1913, except in the case of some of the rocks of the Sea Otter group, where extensive diminution was indicated. The menace to the fishing industry in Rivers inlet, so much complained of in previous years, had largely disappeared in 1916. The Steller sea-lion undoubtedly eats large quantities of food fishes at certain times of the year, but for the remainder of the year there is little or no evidence as to what he does eat. Since it has been shown that fish not used as food as well as squid and devil fish are eaten, he cannot at all times be the epicure that some people would have us believe. Although he requires animal food, it is probable that he will take any kind available in quantity sufficient to satisfy his hunger. It is even possible that in helping to keep down other injurious species de does more good than harm to the fishing industry, provided he can be kept away from the nets or other fishing gear. Reference has been made to the influence the sea-lion may have on the dogfish question and the dogfish is not the only carnivorous species that is taken as food. 36 DEPARTMEHiT OF THE NATAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 22. SUGGESTED CONTROL OF DESTRUCTION OF SEA-LIONS. The economic side of the question has been discussed and it is not necessary to refer to it again except to mention two points. The first is that the price of leather is rapidly going up, thus adding force to the argument as to the value of sea-lion skins. The second is with reference to the sea-lion carcass. It has been truly said that the flesh should make good fertilizer and poultry food, but it must be remembered that up to the present, plants for producing marine animal fertilizer on this coast have not been especially noted for their financial successes. Sea-lion carcasses cannot be taken to any of the fertilizer plants now in existence and made use of at a profit. With the processes now in use, it would not pay to erect a fertilizer plant to make use of fish offal at Eivers inlet or any other fishing 'centre where the fishing season is so short. No line of economic research in connection with the fishing industry on this coast offers a more promising field than that to do with the elimination of waste or rather the transmutation of waste products to products of commercial value at a cost that will ensure a reasonable profit on the outlay. W^hen cheaper methods of producing fertilizer and poultry food have been wor'ked out, the sea-lion carcass may become an important factor. The commissioners have no hesitation in stating that they can see no valid reason at present at any rate for adopting any plan looking toward total extermination of the Steller sea-lion. Even when its depredations were most serious it has been shown that these can be reduced to a negligible quantity in a comparatively short time. Since that is so, it should not be a difficult matter to keep the depredation at a minimum. It may be well that, as Manager Inrig has suggested, this could be done by spending $200 for ammunition each year to scare them away and terrorize them. If it could be done at Rivers inlet it should be done equally well at BaFkley sound, possibly better since the lions come in there apparently in a single group about the first of November. If this were done it should be under the control of the Federal Department of Fisheries, as Mr. Inrig suggests. If the scare is not sufficient, it might be advisable to materially reduce the numbers of sea-lions at the rookery responsible for the depredation, when the menace became threatening. In either case the opera- tion should be so controlled that the greatest commercial value could be obtained. Indiscriminate and promiscuous killing should not be tolerated. While the number of sea-lions is as great as it is at present, it might be legitimate to allow the killing of a certain number each year as in the case of all other species of commercial value, provided that not more than the number which would represent the annual increase were taken, under conditions that would ensure conservation. CHARLES F. NEWCOMBE, WM. HAMAR GREENWOOD, C. McLEAN FRASER. B. C. SEA-LION INVESTIGATION 37 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a 23. APPENDIX A. I. FORMAL QUESTIONS SUBMITTED TO SALMON CANNERS AND OTHERS. Sea-Lion Commission. (Appointed under AuthoiHy Biological Board of Canada.) 1. Are Sea-Lions injurious to the Fisheries of British Columbia? 2. Have your own fishing operations ever been injured or interfered with by them?. . . 3. Please state the nature of such damage this year and the estimated loss : Gear . . . . . . . . . , $ Mutilated fish . . . . . . Diverted run of fish . . . . 4. Other years? 5. Is the lessened run of fish (if any) attributable to Sea-Lions? 6. Has the Herring Fishery been interfered with this year by Sea-Lions? 7. Have you noticed any steady increase year by year to the amount of injury caused by Sea-Lions? 8. Are Sea-Lions of any commercial value? 9. Do they assist your fisheries in any way? [Methods of dealing with Sea-Lions if considered to he injurious to the Fisheries of B.O.^ 1. Do you recommend complete extermination, or merely a reduction in numbers?. .. . 2. Could your company deal with this question in your neighbourhood without Government aid? > 3. If not, in what manner eould the Government most effectually aid you? [A] By employing hunters under Government supervision? [B1 By offering a bounty open to all willing to hunt? [Cl By providing money or ammunition to be expended under the control of the fishing companies? 4. Can you give information as to the existence of Hookeries or other places frequented by Sea-Lions in your neighbourhood? 5. What is the best time for killing them? . . . 6. What is the best method? 7. What is the best evidence on which to pay the bounty? (At present the muzzle is taken as proof.) 8. Should the bounty be paid for pups, or adults, or both? 9. What has been the effect of the bounty for killing Sea-Lions upon this year’s fishing? 10. Have you any remarks or suggestions to make not covered by the above list of questions? 11. Have you examined the contents of Sea-Lion stomachs? II. FORMAL LETTER SENT BY THE SECRETARY OF THE COMMISSION TO CANNERS AND OTHEUSu Sea-Lion Commission. To the Manager, Dear Sir, — On behalf of the Sea-Lion Commission appointed under the authority cf the Biological Board of Canada, we invite your cordial assistance in getting infor- mation and opinions regarding the alleged depredations of these animals. It has been stated that sea-lions destroy fish and fishing gear and interfere with the free prosecution of fishing operations by means of seine nets and other appliances. 38a— 4 38 DEPARTME'NT OF THE A’AFAL 8ERYICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 It also has been suggested that the sea-lions be exterminated or so thoroughly attacked to death by man as to frighten them away from their depredatory raids, and that this be encouraged by giving a bounty of two dollars ($2) a sea-lion, such bounty to be paid on presentation of the muzzle of the animal as voucher for its extinction. We will be glad if you will answer the questions set out in the enclosed form to the best of your knowledge and belief, and add any observations you may think fit. It has been suggested that the canneries, where any depredations from sea-lions occur, might be left to handle the problem themselves without any idea of government bounty, on the assumption that fishermen attached to the canneries would protect their own interests. Your speedy attention to the requests made on you in this letter and enclosed form will be appreciated and will assist the sea-lion commissioners in the preparation of their report on the whole question. APPENDIX B. Number of Sea-Lions on which bounty has been paid in British Columbia for the fiscal year 1915-1916. Name of Claimant. Niimber Paid For. Where Killed. Amount of Bounty paid. Andrew Spalding 24 Banks island $ cts. 48 00 TTpnry R.ndla.nd ... 1 Butt.erworth rocks 2 00 George Jones 1 Massett 2 00 J. W. Robinson . . 11 Price island 22 00 .John Wool, ten. . 20 Calvert island 40 00 Henry Brown . . 12 Bonilla banks ... 24 00 Wm. Leighton 1 Tree Nob island 2 00 Peter Robinson 1 Stephens island. ... 2 00 David Parnell 2 Butterworth rocks 4 00 George Allen 15 Virgin rocks 30 00 J. Wootten 3^2 Sea Otter group 684 00 Jas. Robinson 2 Aristazable island 4 00 J. Wootten 49 Sea Otter gro ip 98 00 F. S. Carpenter 1 Price island 2 00 Henry Brown 2 Bonilla banks 4 00 A. Goodman 50 Virgin rocks . 100 00 L. H. Hogan. . . 97 194 00 Geo. Allen 57 .. 114 00 D. McLennan 03 .. 126 00 J. Wootten 1,174 ’l53 20 Fast Haycocks 2.348 00 Dan. McCloskey F. S. Carpenter Pearl and Virgin rocks Price island b06 00 52 00 Spruce Marten 2 Seymour inlet 4 00 Tiake .Tf>e 51 Virgin rocks 102 00 .facob White 82 Sea Otter erroup 164 00 Chief Schwish 1 Village island 2 00 James Rush 1 Ucluelet 2 00 Wrn. '^Paylor. ... 2 Otter point 4 00 J.)an. C2\iital 1 Duncan bay .... 2 00 Jacob White 442 l80 Fast Hayc'ocks 884 00 Albert Thom})Son Virgin rocks Smith’s inlet 360 00 Tom (xeorge 1 2 00 Ikmson Keatta 1 Ahousat 2 00 Wm. Fatty 1 Ahousat 2 00 Joe Hayes 1 Long Beach 2 00 .Foe Williams. . . 2 M U • 4 00 Joe Martin 2 Cape Cod 4 00 Abram Jeffries 1 Thorrnanby island 2 00 Totals 2,875 5,750 00 B. C. SEA-LION IN VEST 1 a AT ION 39 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a EXPLANATION OF FIGURES. 1. Wadhains cannery, Eivers inlet. The Emoli is the white boat in the rig-ht fore- ground. 2. The largest of the Pearl rocks. 3. Watch rock. 4. The largest of the Virgin rocks after all the adult sea-lions had taken to the water. 5. Male sea-lion killed on Watch rock. 6-12. Groups of sea-lion pups on Pearl and Virgin rocks. 13. Male sea-lion killed on one of the Virgin rocks, and two pups. (2-13 were taken June 25, 1916.) 14. A figure to show the position at Solander island relative to cape Cook. 15. Solander island. 16-18. The outlying rock at Solander island, taken as the sea-lions were leaving it. 19-22. Remnants of the herd, showing some of the largest males. 23. Sea-lions in the water at Solander island. (14-23 were taken June 27, 1916.) 24. A figure to show the relative position of cape St. James island, on which the lighthouse is situated, to the main island, Ivunghit. Four groups of rocks extend in a chain southward from cape St. James. 25. A figure to show the position of the first two groups of rocks relative to cape St. James island. 26. The first group of rocks south of cape St. James island. - 27. The second group. 28. The third group. 29. The fourth and final rock. It was on the second and third of these groups that the sea-lions were seen in abundance. 30-33. Views of the sea-lion herd on the rocks at cape St. elames. (24-33 were taken July 9, 1916.) 34. The remains of three sockeye and one hump^back (the largest piece being the humpback) taken from a net in Rivers inlet July 23, 1916, said to have been mutilated by sea-lions. 35. Remains of salmon taken from the nets near Prince Rupert, September 8, 1915, said to have been mutilated by hair seals. 36. Scow on which Dr. Newcombe and Mr. Patch examined sea-lions in December, 1915, near Kildonan cannery, Barkley sound. (Photos 1-35 by C. M. Fraser, 36 by O. F. Newcombe.) 38a— 4-1 Fig. 1. Fig. 3. Fi^. 4. Fig. 7. Fig. 8. Fig. 9. Fig. 10. Fig. 13. Fig. 14. Fig. 15. Fig. 16. Fig. 17. Fig. 18. Fig. 10. Fig. 20. Fig. 21. Fig. 22. Fig. 23. Fig. 24. Fig. 25. Fig. 26. Fig. 27. Fig. 28. Fig. 30. Fig. 31. Fig. 32. Fig. 33. Fig. 35. Fig. 36. II LOBSTER INVESTIGATIONS AT LONG BEACH FOND, N.S. (A. P. Knight^ M.A., M.D., F.R.S.C., Professor of Animal Biology, Queen’s University, Kingston, Ont.) RECOMMENDATIONS. 1. That the rearing operations hitherto conducted by the Board at Long Beach pond be discontinued. 2. That the executive committee consider the advisability of securing from the Fisheries Branch of the Department of Naval Service full control over the operation of one of the present lobster hatclieries, in which to conduct a series of experiments on the rearing of lobster fry, using warm sea-water, as suggested by Professor Macallum. 3. That the executive committee confer with the department as to the best method ©f collecting statistics regarding the relative numbers of male and female lobsters trapped next season, and also the percentage of females carrying fertilized eggs. 4. That several more enclosures be built at a moderate cost, by either the Board or by the Fisheries Department at different points along the maritime coast, for the purpose of determining more definitely the percentage of commercial lobsters which extrude eggs in July and August. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS. Acknowledgment is due the Department of Naval Service for furnishing a plenti- ful supply of both berried and commercial lobsters for the purpose of carrying on the experiments described in the following report; also for placing at the disposal of the Board the services of Mr. Andrew ITalkett. Mr. Flalkett gave us every assistance. j\fore particularly, be kept an accurate count of the lobsters received at the pond, allotted to the various enclosures, and returned to the sea. The Board is also indebted to the department for moving the rearing plant from the southwest end of the pond, and placing it within the cement pound. POUND AND POND. In the following report the reader must distinguish carefully between the natural pond of some 5 acres, and the artificial pound of about three-fourths of an acre, enclosed by cement walls and forming the northeast part of the pond. Fig. 1.— Long Beach Pond viewed from the northeast end. In the fore- ground can be seen first the mess-house; beyond this, the cement pound; further away is the larger part of the pond. In the distance can be seen the engine house and plant for rearing lobsters. 38a— 5— R 53 54 BEPARTMETs^T OF TEE FATAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Last year, 1914, because of the excessive leakage of water from the pound, the Board approved of the location of an experimental rearing plant of four boxes at the southwest end of the pond, and my report upon the operations of that year has been already i3ublished. LEAKAGE. On December 18, 1914, the Board was notified that the leakage, which had per- sisted throughout the previous summer, had been stopped, and that there was at that date a depth of feet of water in the ])ound at low tide. During the winter of 1915, however, the leakage again developed and was again reported stopped on June 26, 1915. At this date there was said to be a depth of 5 feet 8 inches of water at low tide. On my arrival, July 3, 1915, the pound was again leaking, not copiously, it is true, but sufficiently to show that in the course of a few days or weeks the rearing boxes, 4 feet in depth, would likely be resting in the mud. As a precaution, there- fore, against possible injury to our larvae, the boxes were reduced in depth to feet. On the assumption that there would be, as intimated, 6| feet of water at low tide, a space of 4 feet would intervene between the bottom of our shallow boxes and the mud beneath. At Wickford, B.I. — the original home of the plant — the depth of water below the boxes is 12 feet at low tide, excepting at one corner, where it is only 5| feet. At Long Beach it was hoped that a depth of 4 feet might suffice to test the scheme. Last year at low tide there were only between 20 and 22 inches of water below our boxes, this year, after operating our plant for seventeen days, the boxes were resting in the mud, so great was the leakage. Fig. 2. - W(‘st side of cement i)i)und showing leakage of water Ov'er the ironrods at the ii|»|)er left hand corner of tin* illustration can be seeii the gearing of the rearing aj)[)aratus inside of the cement pound. At tlie extreme low water of August 7, two of the boxes were resting 5 inches in tlie mud. IMeasurcmeiits at eleven diiferent points around our apparatus gave the LOBSTER INVESTIGATIONS 55 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a following depths of water, 21 inches, 22, 17, 20, 17, 19, 19, 23, 24, 26, 24, or an average of 21 inches, in which to float our apparatus. It can scarcely be expected that an apparatus, which requires at least 10 feet of water in which to operate, can be made to operate successfully in a depth of 21 inches. FIRST HATCHING. Our first hatching began July 12, and in two days we had about 40,000 larvte in the four bpxes. While only an odd diatom could be found on the fry during the first day, large numbers were visible by the fifteenth. As the diatoms increased, the fry became “fuzzy’’ to the naked eye. Both last year and this the efiect of the diatoms was largely, if not solely, mechanical. Feeding was interfered with, the animals became exhausted with the effort of swimming, sank to the bottom, and soon died. The remarkable thing about this mortality was that last year it was caused by the diatom Synedra investiens, whereas this year it was caused by Licmophora Lyngbyei. Why the principal destructive organism should have been different in the two years is difficult to understand, unless it were due to the fact that in 1914 the sea-water reach- ing our boxes came through the sand, gravel, and mud of the sea-wall, whereas, in 1915 it came through an earthenware pipe from the open sea. As soon as it became apparent that this season’s fry were likely to share the same fate as those of last year, the contents of two of the boxes were transferred to St. Mary’s bay, in order, if possible, to save their lives. Meanwhile the leakage steadily grew worse. On the 19th the average depth of water below the boxes was only 10' inches. As a result, good ventilation became impossible, because the water drawn in through the bottom windows gradually became muddy. It was resolved, therefore, not to use more than two boxes for rearing purposes for the remainder of the season. The other two were fitted up with shelters, or nests, for adult lobsters, so that more accurate observations could be made upon them than was possible in the compartments of the pound. detention devices. It should, perhaps, be explained that we employed five different devices, or enclo- sures, for impounding adults. The smallest was the crate, about 3 feet by 2 feet by 2 feet, which floated on the water, and could be used for temporary purposes only. The second was our rearing boxes, 10 feet by 10 feet by 2| feet, with revolving paddles inside, so as to aerate the water, as described in the report of last year'. The third was the compartment, 20 feet by 10 feet by the varying depth of the water at high and at low tide. The wooden slats of which it was constructed were only about 4J feet high. As can be seen from the illustration, there were six of these compartments within the cement pound. The fourth enclosure was the pound, and the fifth, the pond, but these two latter were so large that is was impossible to use them for observa- tion purposes. The compartments could be used for observation purposes only at low water. The real purpose of their construction was to serve as sub-divisions of the pound, in which lobsters could be kept for experimental and observational purposes. FAILURE. We had even worse luck this season than last. Of the 20,000 fry which we tried to rear in the two remaining boxes, beginning July 12, only twenty-one remained alive on the 30th of July, and they were all in the second stage of development. Not one had moulted a second time, and they had taken thirteen days before moulting even 38a— 56 departme:nt of tee fatal eeryige 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 once. Of the 20,000 to 22,000 fry which we tried to rear at a second trial, beginning August 2, only 146 were alive on August 17, and these also were all in the second stage. In the August rearing the larvae were shaded from the sunlight by heavy painted canvas screens lying close over the boxes; in July they were not. The effect of the shading appeared to be to reduce the first stage from thirteen days to nine days, and to lessen the number of diatoms; hut the larvse died just the same. It is, of course, true that the warmer water in August (about one degree) may have had more to do with the shortening of the first stage than the exclusion of light. Indeed, the influence of direct sunlight upon larvse is still an open question. To be sure, the fry, when left to themselves, swim straight into the light, but it does not follow that because they do so, the result to themselves is necessarily beneficial. Fig. 3.— Showing the interior of the cement pound. The six latticed compartments are for retaining lobsters so that they can be studied at close range. Leaving out for the present the influence of light, it may well be asked: “What favourable conditions exist at Wickford, that enable the operators there to raise 40 per cent of their fry to the crawling or fourth stage, which do not exist at Long Beach pond?’’ And the answer is: first, too slight a depth of water under our rearing boxes, thus favouring the entrance of mud and diatoms from the bottom; secondly, the presence in the water of an unusual number of diatoms not generally found in open sea-water;* thirdly, too low a temperature of water. While the temperature at Wickford varies during the rearing season from 68° to 75°, the mean average temper- ature at Long Beach this season was only 58-09° for July, and 58-9° for August. The two following tables give the daily temperatures at Long Beach for July and August, respectively: — • Professor McClement’s Report " Diatoms and Lobster Rearing” — Contributions to Cana- dian Biology, 1915-16. Supp. 6th Ann. Rep. Dept. Naval Service (Fisheries), Ottawa. 1917. LOBSTER INVESTIGATIONS 57 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Temperatures and kind of weather at Long Beach Pond, during the month of July, 1915. Date. Wind. Temperature of Pound Water. Temperature air outside. Weather. Maximum. Mean. Minimum. 0 O O O July 19 SW 55 ‘5 not taken. Foggy. II 18 SW. 58-0 Fair. II 14... calm. Temp, in St. 560 n Fair. Mary’s Bay 56 . 8. II 15 SW .59 '8 670 Foggy. II 16... S. 57-3 56-5 Foggy. II 17. . SW. 58-0 59-8 Foggy and rainy. II 18... SW. 560 61-0 Foggy. II 19 . . SW. 58-0 not taken. Fair to rainy. II 20. . . SW. 560 .55 7 Foggy. 1, 21... NE. 58-5 not taken. Raining. II 22... NE. 60 8 58-4 560 It Cloudy. II 23... N. 620 60-2 57 63-0 Fair. 620 60 II 24. . SW. 65 0 61-5 59-0 not taken. Fair. 630 590 II 2o . . . E. 61.5 '"'eo-s' 57-0 , Fair. 64 5 59-0 II 26... SW. 60-8 59-2 56'5 54-8 Foggy. 60-5 590 II 27... SW. 590 55 '8 580 58-0 Rainy and foggy. 570 55-0 II 28 . . . SW. 58-0 ’*'58'0 530 54 0 Foggy. 61-5 590 1, 29... SW, 610 57 -5 550 60 0 Fair. 58-5 55-5 II 30... s. .57-5 58-5 55 0 640 Foggy. 61-5 600 II 31... SE. 61-5 591 56-7 63 0 Foggy. Totals 1161-8 716-8 Mean average temperature of water = 58 09'’. Mean average temperature of air = 59 ‘7°. 58 DE'PARTMEI^T OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Temperature and kind of weather at Long Beach Pond during the month of August, 1915. Date. Wind. Temperature of Found Water. Temperature air outside. Weather. \ Maximum. Mean. Minimum. O O 0 Aug. 1... S. Faired 62-3 60-5 57 0 - GO 6 Foggy. 10 A.M. 65-5 57 3 .. 2... Calm and Cloudy 64-7 61-3 58-0 72-0 Foggy. 63 6 590 M 3... N. Sun shining. 610 58-5 55 0 54-8 Fair. 640 54 7 .. 4... S. 610 56-5 520 59-8 Fair. M 5. . . NE. 610 58-1 55 0 58-8 Cloudy. 61-5 55- 0 M 6... NE. 61 0 600 56-5 59-8 Fair. 660 56-5 .. 7... S. 650 60-5’"” 57 0 66-5 Fair. 63 0 57 '5 8. , . SW. changed to 63 0 600 570 58-5 Foggy. N. .. 9.. Calm. 640 59-3 570 62-0 Foggy, 59-5 570 10 , . . SW. 60-0 ”58-6'‘ 57-5 65 0 Foggy. 59 ’5 560 .. 11... NE. 60-5 59-9 57-5 600 Fair. 64-7 57-0 ti 12 . . . SW. 630 60-0 57-0 59-0 Fair. M 13... s. 61-5 58-7 560 61-0 Foggy. .. 14... s. 55-5 56-5 550 55-5 Foggy. 59-5 55-0 M 15... NE. 59-5 58 0 .56-5 64-0 F oggy. 60-0 56 0 M 16... SW. 610 58-8 56-3 630 Foggy. 605 57-3 .. 17... SW. 600 57-7 55-5 62-0 Foggy. Totals 1002-3 1059-7 August Mean average temperature of water=58‘9° Mean average temperature of air=62‘3® July Mean average temperature of water =58 09° Mean average temperature of air = 59’ 7°. On this subjiect the Bhode Island Commission remarks: — The temperature of the water is of paramount importance in order to obtain the best results. Although it is possible to rear lobsters with some success in cold water, the best results will be obtained with water at a temperature of 65° to 75° P. This higher temperature results in a more rapid development of the lobsters. This more rapid development results, first, in a reduction of the expenses of operating the plant, because of the less time required, and, second, in a greater proportion of fry reared to the fourth stage, because in the shorter time there is less chance for death from cannibalism, parasites and injury. Prof. A. B. Macallum has suggested that, in order to overcome the handicap of cold water, we should use sea- water that has been heated to 68° or 70°. This appears to be a good suggestion, unless its adoption would increase to too great an extent the cost of operating our plant. At a moderate calculation, about 2 cubic feet of water per minute enters, and, of course, leaves each rearing box. To heat this quantity of LOBSTER INYESTiaATIONS 59 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a water from 58'°, which is our average temperature, up to 70° will require the com- bustion of about 250 pounds of coal per day of twenty-four hours. As the enlarged Wickford plant is composed of fifty-two boxes, the total consump- tion of coal for the rearing season of two months would amount to about 300 tons. Accordingly, to the regular expense of running a Wickford plant of fifty-two boxes, namely, wages of five men, gasoline, oil, food for the larvae, wear and tear, there would have to be added in Canada the wages of an extra engineer and fireman, besides the cost of the 300 tons of coal. WINTEEING m THE POUND. Next to the leakage of water, the feature which attracted most attention at Long Beach during the early season of 1915 was the pitiable condition of the lobsters which had wintered in the pound. They were simply covered with growths of green, brown, and orange coloured algse. The green measured from 1 to 3 inches in length, the brown from several inches to three feet, and the orange-coloured ones about one-quarter to one-half inch. These latter grew not alone on the body, but over the eyes, and rendered them blind, at least for the time being. Their gills varied in colour from grey to almost black, strongly suggesting that the function of these organs was impaired by a coating of the black mud in which they were compelled to live during the year. The animals which had passed the winter in the pond were distinctly better. They were not so much infested with algse, but the effects of their confinement became very apparent when they were compared with the commercial lobsters which were\ placed in the pond between May 10 and June 15. In the former the natural colours of the body were completely hidden by the grey mud and copious growth of weeds which they carried, whereas the latter showed the bright colours characteristic of the normal lobster. Moreover, the commercial ones were free from algal growths, and their gills exhibited the well-known flesh colour. The difference between pond and pound lobsters, on the one hand, and commercial lobsters, on the other, was comparable to the difference between the dirt and rags of a tramp and the cleanliness and dress of a gentleman. CONFINEMENT. The fundamental conditions for a healthy life are very much the same for lobsters as for other animals. They must have plenty of food, well-ventilated water, adequate exercise alternated with rest, and diffused sunlight. How many of these conditions can be said to be freely supplied to a lobster that passes all of its time in a crate, car, box, compartment of the pound, or even in the pound itself? One has but to think of the ill effects of confinement upon wild animals, or even upon domes- ticated animals, to realize how harmful it is. Human beings, whose occupation con- fines them much in factories, shops, or offices, and those who are confined in jails, asylums, or detention camps — all suffer more or less from their confinement. Is not the spread of tuberculosis among cattle largely due to their confinement in ill-ventilated stables? Do not zoological gardens also show instances of deterioration in health, due to the violation of the fundamental laws of biology? Lobsters can be no exception to the rule. When kept in confinement we cannot expect to find them in the same condition of health and vitality as when they live in the open sea. No wild animal flourishes so well in confinement as in the open. Liberty of movement is essential to health. It matters not whether lobsters are retained in small or large enclosures, or, for that matter, in the whole pond, the ill-effects upon the lobsters soon become apparent. In the case of the smaller crates and cars, the animals soon die. In the 60 DEPARTME^^T OF TEE RATAL EERTIGE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 larger compartments of the pound, or pond, the ill-effects may not become apparent for several months, but slowly and surely the lobsters’ health and vitality are under- mined and they finally succumb to the adverse conditions. No doubt, by a long course of breeding and artificial selection, it might be pos- sible, in the case of the lobster, just as in the case of our domesticated animals, to breed a stock that would be less sensitive to the ill-effects of confinement, but, until we have bred such a strain, the nearer we can make the conditions of confinement approximate to the conditions in which the animal lives in the sea, the lower will be the mortality. MUDDY BOTTOM. Next to the copious growth of weeds, blinding and encumbering the lobsters which had wintered at Long Beach, perhaps the next most unfavourable condition was the mud. There is, of course, mud and mud. Every lobster fisherman knows perfectly well that during winter and early spring the largest catches are made off shore, on muddy or sandy bottom. In late spring or early summer the fishermen move their traps towards the shore, and find the best fishing on rocky bottom along the side of kelp or other kinds of sea-weed. But, while the lobster finds a congenial home on a soft sea-bottom, it does not follow that the animal, when compelled to pass the winter in Long Beach pound, necessarily finds the mud therein equally congenial. The mud of the pound has a disgusting odour, largely due to the gas, sulphuretted hydrogen. Every one who is familiar with this gas knows its characteristic odour, and the characteristic odour could be obtained anywhere in the central area of the pound tty simply driving a wand down into the mud. For example, at low water on the morning of August 8 a spruce wand six-sixteenths by seven-sixteenths was pushed 5| feet into the mud by the mere pressure of the hand. This was at the north end of our engine house. At the south end, 3 feet were found. At the south end of our hatching boxes, 5 feet. At all points, on withdrawing the wand, the characteristic odour of sulphuretted hydrogen was experienced, and the adherent mud had all the appearance of a sulphide precipitate. That the gas was really sulphuretted hydrogen became evident in another way. The gas-ladened mud blackened any board, oar, or boat that was painted with white lead, and which remained in contact with the mud for a few hours. Moreover, it precipitated soluble salts of silver, copper, iron, etc., and there is no doubt that the surface of the gill filaments were darkened and their function partially destroyed by sulphides or other particles of mud. In this way it is easy to understand how the gills of lobsters in the pound gradually turned, first, to a grey colour, and finally became almost black. Dr. McGill, chief analyst of the Inland Revenue laboratory, Ottawa, made an examination of the mud, the super-natant sea-water, and the gills of an adult lobster which had died in the pound. He reports as follows: “The mud is chiefly silica, with a considerable amount of inter-mixed sulphide of iron. The gills of the lobster con- tained iron and phosphates, with a possible trace of sulphur.” Dean Goodwin, D.Sc. of the Kingston School of Mining, reports a similar finding to that of Dr. McGill. MORTALITY. The severe conditions under which the animals passed the winter seem to have affected their general health and caused a rather high death-rate. Of course, it is quite impossible to estimate the death-rate among lobsters in their natural habitat. In the sea, allowance must be made for those that die of hunger, or are killed by enemies. In the pond and pound the adults have no enemies, and, consequently, should show a low rate of mortality, otherwise there would he no reason for placing them in sanctuaries. We can only form an idea of the rate of mortality in sanctuaries LOBSTER INVESTIGATIONS 61 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a by keeping track of those which die from year to year, and ascertaining, if possible, the cause of death. For example, of 167 lobsters left in the pond and pound last season (1914) only 134 could be found this season, thus showing a loss of 33. Of the 312 placed in the pond and pound this season (1915) all have been accounted for, the loss by death being a total of thirty-eight. But, just as thirty- three in the one case does not represent the true loss by death (because some of last year’s lobsters may yet be recovered from the pond), so thirty-eight does not show the true mortality this year, that is, the mortality due to the ill-effects of detention in the pound or pond. The loss this year must be reduced to twenty, because eight of the thirty-eight were poisoned by the accidental use of red paint on the paddles in one of our hatching boxes, and ten others died in the course of transportation to the pound. The real loss, therefore, this year is only 6 per cent of the total, whereas, the loss on last year’s numbers (if no more can be found in the pond) was nearly 20 per cent. The greatly decreased mortality this season is, undoubtedly, due to the great care exercised by the department in collecting, feeding, and distributing them, and the shorter deten- tion period in the pond and pound. No one, who appreciates the facts, will advocate the retention of lobsters in either pond or pound for more than a few months at a time. EGG-LAYING. Egg laying at Long Beach this season had two jieculiarities. The first was that about half the females extruded only a few hundred eggs in place of many thousands, and the second was that the eggs on probably 80 per cent of the mothers were unferti- lized. In explanation of the former fact (noticed last year also) we at first assumed that the mothers had been interrupted in the act of egg-laying by being dipped up in the net. Subsequent facts, however, showed that this was not the case, because, when such lobsters were confined in crates or cars for a few weeks, the number of eggs was never increased. Secondly, when (as happened on a few occasions) such a lobster died, post mortem examination showed that the beast had extruded all the ripe eggs in her ovaries, excepting perhaps half a dozen or so. This great reduction from the full, complement of eggs had to be explained on some other grounds. As this peculiarity in egg-laying was limited, so far as the writer can remember, to females which had spent the winter in the pond or pound, the reduction in the number of eggs would seem to be due to the unfavourable conditions under which the animals had lived through- out the winter — crowding-in a small compartment, lack of adequate food, excessive growth of algse upon them, and the uncongenial mud of the bottom. In illustration of this subject, the following facts may be quoted. In one compartment of the pound were fifty females which had hatched their eggs in the summer of 1914 and been retained in the pound all winter. Whether they had extruded eggs last autumn and lost them during the winter or early spring is not known, but, at any rate, they were all found without eggs on April 8, 1915. On July 19 an examination of the 50 resulted, as follows: — 22 had no eg’g's on them. 21 had new eggs on them, hut none with the full complement. Within a week 4 of these 21 had lost the few eggs which they had. 1 only had a full complement of eggs. 2 had died. 1 male only was present throughout the winter with these females. 3 were unaccounted for. It is probable that few if any of the eggs carried by these twentyf-one females were fertilized, because there was only one male present in the enclosure to mate with the fifty females. It happened, unfortunately, at the time of this examination that the rearing apparatus absorbed all my attention, and, consequently, no examina- tion of the eggs was made to' see whether they were fertilized or not. Nor must it be supposed that the lo'ss of eggs by four of these females out of the twenty-one was the only instance of the kind which came under our notice this season. On another 62 DEPARTMEI^T OF TEE RATAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 occasion a female, which was known to carry a few eggs, was later found to be without any. In a third instance two females, both with eggs, were placed in a crate and a few days afterwards one of them was found to have lost her eggs. Here, then, we have records of three different occasions on which lobsters lost their eggs a short time after extruding them. If unfertilized eggs “ go bad ” and drop off within a few weeks or even months after extrusion, it is easy to understand how our fishermen find not more than an average of 20 per cent (according to one member of the Shell Fish Commission of 1912-13) of the females carrying eggs. It may be, too, that mothers, when pressed by hunger, eat their eggs, whether fertilized or not fertilized. I have myself watched a female tearing off unfertilized eggs from her swimmerets, passing them forward and transferring them, to her mouth with her maxillipedes. On examining her abdomen, the egg clusters could be seen ragged and torn on each side and partly removed. It could not be said in this instance that the eating of her eggs was the result of hunger, because all the lobsters in the pound this summer were well cared for and regularly fed. The fourth instance of the loss of eggs was the most remarkable of all. In this case none of the eggs adhered to the abdomen. The first intimation we had that eggs were being laid was seeing them floating around in the current on the floor of one of our rearing boxes. These were all soft and jelly-like, and undoubtedly, diseased and unfertilized. Kig. 4. — Mother lobsters carrying newly extruded eggs. These are attached to tin; paired swimming feet on the under surface of the abdomen. When carrying egg.s, th(! mothers always bend the latter part of the abdonren and tail under the body so that the eggs are as well ))rotected as if carried in a covered cup. In the illustration tire abdomen is extended so as to expose the eggs to view. LOBSTER IETE8TIGATI0ES 63 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a MOULTING. We had opportunities of witnessing several successful moults and also several failures to moult, followed by death. The act is too well known to require description. In healthful surroundings and under the stimulus of adequate food, the act cannot he a critical one for a vigorous animal, hut, if conditions are not favourable, as in the pound, then the act may well be fraught with danger. There can be but little food in winter, especially, within the limited area of the compartments, and considering the leakage, the supply of fresh sea-water at low tide must also have been scanty. The slimy mud that covered their gills was an ever-present menace, so that the animals were weakened by their long confinement, and some of them, therefore, unfit to store materials in the body for the manufacture of the new shell or the excretion of waste material from the body. What more likely thing could happen than that some of them would succeed in moulting,, while others would fail and die? BLIND LOBSTERS. On noticing the blind lobsters, the first question that occurred to me was to ask whether the sight would be restored after moulting. The question was generally answered in the afiirmative, but not always. In the case of a female which had spent a year at least, and possibly more, in the pond, it was found that she was still blind. The algal growths bad penetrated too deeply into the substance of the eye and had destroyed the underlying tissue. In one other case, the sight was impaired, but not lost; hut, generally speaking, the process of moulting restored the sight. NUMBERS OF EGG-BEARING FEMALES. It is greatly to be regretted that statistics in regard to the relative numbers of egg-bearing lobsters are not available. The following table from Herrick’s book is valuable so far as it goes. Facts of a like kind are given by Yinal Edwards for No Man’s Land. Similar facts do not appear to be available in Canada, so far as the writer knows. Record of the Total Catch of Lobsters at Woodshole, Mass., from December 1, 1893, to June 30, 1894, showing the number and size of egg-bearing females. Length. No. Males. No. Females Females with eggs. Totals. Length. No. Males. No. Females F emales with eggs. Totals. in. in. 6 3 4 7 lOi 0 1 1 1 H 1 • 1 104 62 71 '17 1.33 3 4 7 104 79 103 28 182 6f 5 0 .. 5 m ' 1 1 7 45 47 93 10| 18 is’ 2 36 7f 1 1 11 31 62 20 93 7f io 4 14 114 10 11 21 n 66 47 113 114 11 30 4 41 7| 20 9 29 Ilf 2 2 4 8 168 140 2 308 12 9 14 3” 23 1 1 124 1 1 81 44 29 73 124 4 7 11 8i 143 115 7 258 12| 1 1 1 26 27 1 53 13 4 4 8 9 170 166 13 336 134 1 1 9^ 1 1 ] 14 1 1 91 32 38 4 70 144 1 2 3 9h 148 169 24 317 15 3 3 n 27 29 O u 56 10 167 184 36 351 Totals 1,313 1,344 168 2,657 Percentage of females which carry eggs, 12. Percentage of females with eggs at No Man’s Land, 63 ’7, but that was over twenty years ago, when lobsters were moi’e abundant than now. 64 DEPARTMENT OF TEE NATAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 These figures indicate that a much higher percentage of females are berried along the Massachusets coast than in St. Mary’s bay or the Bay of Fundy. Inquiries made among the lobster fishermen, both last summer and this, go to show that out of every 1,000 to 2,000 adults, only from two to three are found to carry eggs. Is it not time that other statistics besides measurements of length should be collected and published in our annual reports? In collecting statistics, the important points are: (a) the relative numbers of males and females caught during a season; (h) the percentage of females that carry mature, or ripe, eggs during the open season; (c) the percentage of females which extrude new eggs during July, August, and September; (d) and especially, the pro- portion of these eggs which are fertilized and unfertilized. .. With such statistics before us for a few years we should soon know whether we are making good the wastage of lobsters or not. At present we do not know. In a vague way we conclude that, because millions of newly hatched fry are being planted annually in the sea, therefore, we must necessarily be increasing our lobster supply, or, at least, keeping the supply up to the numbers annually trapped by the fishermen. The fallacy of this reasoning is clearly realized by the Shell Fish Commission (1912- 13) page 27 : The annual returns, though showing a very large increase in the money value, are really misleading, because, while the supply of lobsters is declining, the price has so materially advanced that the total value is greater to-day than at any previous period.” The results of all our hatching and all our egg-planting, therefore, has not sufficed to replenish our depleted waters: that they have increased the numbers is pure guess work. The same criticism precisely may fairly be made about rearing the fry. We are working away in the dark, increasing the chances of survival, no doubt, but with- out demonstrable proof of any increase in the numbers of animals which grow to maturity. Can we not be a little more accurate in our methods? Let us first of all collect for a few years the statistics for which I am pleading. With these as a basis for com- parison, let us erect, say, fifty enclosures, 20 feet by 20 feet, at a cost not exceeding $200 each, or $10,000 in all. Impound in these during July and August, twenty-five males and twenty-five females — all carefully chosen and fully mature, and I am con- fident that we shall get a very large increase in the number of eggs. And after all, the greatest aid in preventing the extinction of the lobster will be to increase the egg bearers. Mother ocean will feed the fry, if we protect the egg producers. But, if we continue to hatch, as has been done in the past, we never know what increase results from our efforts, but we do know that frequently we are feeding fish. Much desirable information can probably be obtained by circularizing canners and fishermen and explaining clearly to them the objects which the department has in view. In fact, Mr. W. S. Trask, a canner at Little Biver gladly gave me such informa- tion as he had at his disposal. From May 10 to June 15 he bought 7,151 adult lobsters from fishermen. He did not take the time (nor did the fishermen) to distinguish males from females, but he was confident from some observations which he had made a few years before, that there were generally more females than males. Out of the 7,151 adults which he had purchased, only thirty-five carried eggs, that is, 1 per cent, on the assumption that the sexes are equal in numbers. How can the lobster industry be kept up, if only one mother out of every 100 bears ripe eggs? Probably few females are ever sterile. When eggs are not fertilized, one cause will probably be the lack of facilities for mating. This, at least, was apparently the Note. — Mention should be made of the information collected by Mr. Halkett at Baker’s Pond, C.B.. showimr the relative percentage of males and females there to be about 46 males to 54 females per hundred. LOBSTER IRYESTIGATIO^'S 65 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a cause this year at Long Beach. Up to to August 2, forty-three females had extruded eggs, and careful examination of twenty-eight of these showed that only five carried fertilized eggs. The reason of this seems clear enough. With the fifty females which wintered in the pound, there was, as already stated, only one male. Whether this one male could fertilize the eggs of forty-nine females is certainly open to question. It is true that the department placed thirty males and thirty females (commer- cial) in the pond or pound for experimental purposes this season, but, unfortunately, eight of the males were poisoned, several of them were undersized, and six others died from causes unknown. It will thus be seen that, if we take into account the relatively small proportion of males to females, and the unfavourable conditions in which both sexes were confined in the pound — I refer to the mud, not to feeding, which was care- fully done, — it is not much wonder that many of the extruded eggs remained unfertil- ized, then softened and dropped pff. ANNUAL SPAWNING. It was intimated in my report for 1914 that some females which had extruded eggs in August of that year were to be retained in the pound all winter, and might throw some light upon the subject of annual spawning. Of forty-seven females placed in the pound in midsummer, 1914, thirty had extruded eggs by the end of September. There were confined with these females, fifteen males. Leaving out of consideration ten females which were under 10 inches in length, the proportion of full-grown males to females was 15 to 37, or nearly 1 male to 2 females. The result was that on the 8th of April, 1915, when these thirty females were again examined, all bore fertilized eggs. In other words, 64 per cent of the females placed in the pound last June carried fertil- ized eggs to June of this year. As a matter of fact, most of the eggs were “laid” in August, but the important point is the large number of berried females which resulted from the experiment. These animals were not examined again until July 7, 1915, when the following results were found: — 12 had no eggs on them, being probably hatched off in the interval between April 8 and July 7. 12 were in the act of hatching their eggs. 2 had newly extruded eggs upon them. 1 was dead. 1 was lost off the dip net in removing it from the compartment. 2 could not at that date be accounted for, probably hidden in the mud. 30 The twelve which had old eggs upon them on April 8, but were without eggs on July 7, were placed in a compartment by themselves and re-examined again on July 29, when seven of them were found to be carrying newly extruded eggs. These seven females with the two which bore new eggs on July 7 make a total of nine, which had carried eggs in 1914, and again extruded eggs in 1915. The remain- ing five of the twelve escaped from the enclosure in which they were confined, and, as a consequence, it became impossible to identify them from others in the pound, but so far as these nine lobsters are concerned, annual spawning is an undoubted fact. One female, at least, of these seven, bore “ bad ” eggs, and one other, though the eggs appeared normal and of the usual number, nevertheless, carried unfertilized eggs, as shown by microscope examination. MORE FERTILIZED EGGS. The problem of problems in the lobster industry is not how to rear fry to the crawling stage, but how to increase the number of females which carry fertilized eggs. 66 JJEPARTMEl^T OF THE FATAL EERTICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 The artifi(3ial hatching of lobster eggs may be important, though many doubt it; the artificial rearing of lobster fry to the fourth or fifth stage may be important, though this remains to be proved, at any rate in Canadian waters ; but the biggest of all lobster problems is how to increase the number of fertilized eggs. Unfertilized eggs are probably produced in vast numbers, if biennial spawning is the rule; in vaster numbers still, if annual spawning is the rule. Reverting again to the 7,161 adults bought by Mr. W. S. Trask this season, among which he found only thirty-five berried females, and to Mr. J. W. Tidd’s catch of 3,000 lobsters in 1913, among which he found only three berried females, we are faced with the problem of explaining how it happens that there were not about 3,500 berried females among Mr. Trask’s purchases, if lobsters spawn annually, or 1,750 if lobsters spawn biennially, similarly with Mr. Tidd’s catch, and witb the catch, of every lobster fisherman in the Maritime Provinces. We have no knowledge of the extent to which the sexes mingle with each other in the sea. Conclusions based upon the tagging of lobsters and their subsequent liberation and capture may be misleading. .Tagging does seem to indicate, however, that they are strongly local in their habits, and, if so, they may meet each other only at intervals and solely by accident. How different conditions are to-day for mating, compared with what they were in early colonial days when lobsters were so abundant along the Atlantic coast that after every storm they were found lying along the shore in windrows! If the facilities for mating are lacking, this may be the reason why so few females carry fertilized eggs. If there is no mating, the mothers will extrude their eggs annually or biennially, as the case may be, but the eggs, being unfertilized, will “ go bad ” and subsequently drop off. It must not be supposed, therefore, that the eggs found in June, July, August, and September on berried females are necessarily “good eggs.” For breeding pur- poses they may be as useless as those of a pullet with which no cockerel has cohabited. As illustrating the truth of this statement, it is only necessary to point out that of twenty-eight females which extruded eggs in Long Beach pond this season, only five were found to carry fertilized eggs. These results are quite different from those of last year, but the conditions were different in the two years. In 1914 the matfing lobsters w^ere placed in a compartment specially located near the entrance of fresh sea- water from the intake pipe, and by the end of the season, as already stated, 64 per cent of the females carried fertilized eggs, as compared with 1 per cent reported by fisher- men. In the case of the mating lobsters of this year, 1915, some of them, were placed at first in the pond and others of them in the pound. Subsequently they were trans- ferred to two of our rearing boxes, and later again to the third compartment of the pound. Considering, too, that there were only 26 males to 109 females and that the transfer from one enclosure to another was unnatural; considering also the unfavour- able conditions under which they lived in the pound, one can readily understand that copulation took place less frequently than under the more natural conditions of 1914. But after making every allowance for the conditions which militated against the extrusion and fertilization of eggs, we find that 44 out of 109 females extruded eggs in the summer of 1915, or over 40 per cent. When it is remembered that the Shell Fish Commission estimated from their inquir- ies that the percentage of berried females ranged from 2 per cent to 40 per cent,* and that this latter percentage existed only where fishing is permitted in June and July, as in Nortluimberland strait, and when it is considered also that in these months some lobsters are carrying old eggs and others are carrying new ones, it will readily be seen that the 40 per cent does not represent the true proportion of newly extruded eggs at all. Let us find out, if possible, the correct proportion of hen-lobsters which carry new eggs, or of those which carry mature eggs, but not a combination of the two. * These figures were obtained not from the Commission but by correspondence with only one member of the Commission. LOBSTER INVESTIGATIONS 67 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a MATING GROUNDS. So few facts are known in regard to the mating of lobsters that special attention should be given to this subject next year. While the pound has proved to be useless this season as a suitab-le place in which to rear fry or retain adults, the southwest end of the pond, as stated in last year’s report, could be made very useful, both as a sanct- uary for beried females and as a mating ground for commercial lobsters. If the com- partments at present in the pound were removed to the southwest end of the pond, and the cost of doing this need not exceed $200, there would then be ample space for both sanctuary and mating ground and better conditions than prevailed this past summer. It cannot be stated too often that the great problem is how to increase the number of fertilized eggs. The hatchery cannot add a single fry to those which the mother will hatch out. On the contrary, the hatchery often starts them upon their ocean life, infected with diatoms, as shown by Professor Gorham. The rearing plant guards and feeds the fry for a brief three or four weeks, and then liberates them to take their chances in wind and tide and among a multiplicity of voracious enemies. In contrast with the uncertainty of hatching and rearing fry, an increase in the number of females carrying fertilized eggs would mean an incalculable increase in the number of fry, and consequently, a better chance of survival until they become adults. Fig. 5. — Two lobsters resting in their shelters. To realize how greatly the number of berried lobsters may be increased, as they were actually increased in the pound in 1914 from 1 per cent to 64 per cent, we have only to consider how rapidly a farmer could increase his poultry if he bred from sixty-four hens out of a hundred, instead of from one hen. He might use a hatching apparatus (as we do for lobsters) and a rearing apparatus also, if there is such a thing for chickens, but the increase in his poultry would be slow indeed, compared with what it would be if he bred from sixty-four mothers in place of from one. If we could come anything near increasing our berried lobsters from 1 per cent to 64 per cent, we might burn down our lobster hatcheries and never notice the loss, so far as the lobster indus- try is concerned. 68 DEPARTMEI^T OF TEE EAYAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Of course, there may be other causes at work, besides lack of facilities for mating, to account for the small number of berried females. If so, these causes must be studied and, if possible, removed. But, at any rate, no one can be blind enough to overlook the significance of the mating experiments of last year and this. THE EVERYDAY LIFE OF THE LOBSTER. While our lobster-rearing experiments at Long Beach pond, bpth last year and this, resulted in failure, it cannot be said that the two seasons’ work was entirely barren of results. Apart from the observations which have been made on mating, and which, it is hoped, may prove even more useful to the lobster industry than any success which might have been achieved in lobster rearing, we have been able to make some contribu- tions to our knowledge of the every day life of the lobster. ' Very early in our operations of this year it was decided to use but two rearing boxes, instead of four. The other two were fitted up with shelters, or nests, for the study of adults. Obeservations were made every day from July 20 to August 6, when the animals had to be removed. The excesive leakage from the pound left our boxes resting in the mud, and contributed not a little to bring about the death of several adults, through the lack of properly aerated water. POSTURES. When performing certain functions, for example, cleaning themselves, egg-laying, fighting, etc., the adults took up certain appropriate postures. One of these, which may be spoken of as the cleaning posture, was first observed among lobsters which had wintered in either pond or pound. Within a week after these animals had been placed Fig. 6. — This illustration is from a lobster cast which has been shaped to resemble the posture of a mother lobster when hatching her eggs. The swim- merets are visible under the abdomen and these are moved gently backwards and forwards in the water so as to assist in liberating the young from the “shell”. This same posture is taken when the animal is cleaning itself. in the rearing box, their appearance had changed very much for the better. No lady in the land could spend more time on her toilet than these lobfSters did in cleaning themselves. They did not, of course, wash, massage, paint or powder their faces, nor did they curl their hair, but they did spend days and days in attempts to free themselves from the excessive growth of algo3, which covered almost every part of their body. LOBSTER INVESTIOATIONS 69 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a At first they ate voraciously; later on, much more moderately. Their only toilet instruments were the opposable thumb and finger (pincel’s) of their walking legs. Every part of their body which could be reached by those appendages was carefully gone over. It was no uncommon thing to see a lobster raise the first pair of wall^ing legs over the great claws and use them in cleaning the rostrum and antennules. The antennae (feelers) would be grasped by the pincers and drawn through between the thumb and finger, thus stripping off algae and dirt, in much the same way as a person might strip off the excess of dirt from a string by drawing it through between his thumb and finger. When thus cleaning themselves, the animals rest almost entirely upon the tips of their great claws and the telson which is bent at right angles to the long axis of the body. The middle region is arched slightly upward, and the walking legs are thus left almost completely free for cleaning movements. THE HATCHING POSTURE. This posture has often been described and does not differ from the cleaning one, excepting that the animal rests on its walking legs as well as on its great claws and telson. The movements are limited to a gentle swaying backwards and forwards of the swimming feet, evidently for the purpose of assisting the fry to liberate themselves from the egg capsule (shell). EGG-LAYING POSTURE. The egg-laying posture, as we saw it, was different from that described by Anderton. The general position is that of a more or less erect frog. The abdomen is bent com- pletely under the body, and the broad tail is well spread out on each side, so as to form an almost perfect cup. The anterior part of the body is inclined at an angle of nearly Fig. 7. — The egg-laying posture. 45°, on account of the animal resting on the tips of the great claws. The posture is such as to allow the eggs, as soon as they leave the orifice of the oviduct, to fall by gravity over the receptaculum seminis and drop easily and naturally into the abdominal cup already described. After the eggs have filled the cup, the female turns upon her back for 15 or 20 minutes and remains almost motionless, the walking legs alone swaying backwards and forwards at intervals of a minute or two. During this quiet period the egg glue is apparently hardening so as to fix the eggs to each other and to the hairs of the swimmerets. 38a— 6 70 DEPARTME^t^T OF THE EAYAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 That the egg glue requires time to harden in the water was demonstrated by the fact that one female, which was lying on her back after egg-laying, was dipped up too soon from the box and righted in position. As a result, nearly all her eggs dropped off on the board on which the observer was standing. THE RESTING POSTURE. This is the posture which an animal naturally adopts when left to itself in a crate, box, or otlier enclosure, and usually after being fed. If there are many animals Fig. 8. — The resting posture. From a photograph of an animal under water. together, they will often take up this posture in one corner and lie one on top of the other. It is their usual posture in shelters. FIGHTING POSTURE. There is nothing new to describe about this posture. Most people who have viitched lobsters when removed from the water have seen them elevate their great claws, open their scythe-like jaws, and otherwise adopt a threatening or defensive attitude. It is the regular pose of female lobsters, in defence of their eggs, and of the male lobsters towards each other. Time after time have we seen two males pas^ females without adopting any belligerent attitude, but as soon as they approached each other “squared off” for a fight. Though the males are generally restless, the hirger ones chasing the smaller from place to place, we never actually saw one injure the other. BIENNIAL SPAWNING. It remains to say a few words on the subject of biennial spawning. The fact that nine lobsters spawned in 1914, and again in 1915, is beyond all question. It is also equally beyond question that out of 50 lobsters which hatched their eggs in July, 1914, and moulted in the autumn of 1914 (according to the testimony of the care- taker of the pond) twenty-two did not spawn this summer at all. If lobsters spawn biennially, then these females should have extruded new eggs in July and August of 1915, but they did not. • LOBSTER INVESTIGATIONS 71 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a From the evidence which we have collected thus far at Long Beach, it is quite clear that some lobsters spawn annually, some biennially, and some do not spawn even biennially. Of course, it is only fair to point out again that the conditions in both pond and pound are unnatural, and, therefore, we need not be surprised when we meet with departures from the normal habits of the animal, whether the liabit be annual or biennial spawning. A REVIEW. In looking over the operations of the pound for the past two years, let it be frankly acknowledged at the outset that the main purpose for which it was built has not been realized. Can it be fairly said, then, that the money spent in the purchase of the pond and the construction of the pound has been wasted? I think not. In addition to being a sanctuary for berried females, the pound has brought about the discovery that the numbers of lobsters may be increased by bringing the sexes together. This, of course, was not the primary object for which the pound was built. So far as can be judged from public reports and from the Board’s corres- pondence with the Fisheries Branch, the discovery was made by accident. Sixty- two commercial lobsters were sent to the pound in 1914 for the purpose of observing v/h ether lobsters spawn annually or biennially. Long before a conclusion could be reached on the subject, it was discovered that 64 per cent, of the forty-seven females in the pound had extruded fertilized eggs — a most astonishing fact, when every fisherman in Digby County knows that only about one female in every hundred carries eggs. This opinion of the fishermen is corroborated by Mr. Andrew Halkett. In his report upon the Baker Lobster pound. Cape Breton, 1909-10, page 16, he mentions a trip which he took with Rafuse & Son, fishermen, to seventy-five traps, c ontaining altogether fifty-six males and sixty females. Only one of the females was berried. Why this great difference in egg-bearing between open-sea lobsters and those in Long Beach pound? One obvious explanation is that it is due to the close inter- course between male and female lobsters in a compartment 20 feet long by 10 feet wide. The fact that 40 per cent, of the females at Long Beach this summer (1915) extruded eggs under most unfavourable conditions appears to corroborate the discovery. At any rate, the results of the two years’ observations, in my judgement, amply justify the department in building a few more enclosures at different points along the maritime coast in order to test still further the extent to which egg-bearing may be artificially promoted. Surely the expenditure of money on industrial and economic problems is one of the functions of Government. If it is not, then much of the expenditure on Experi- mental Agricultural Stations and on investigations into our peat and other mineral resources is unjustifiable. Far, however, from the money hitherto spent upon such scientific investigations being wasted, it is money well spent. Similarly, I trust it will 'be realized in a few years that the money spent upon Long Beach pond will have been amply justified either by the direct or indirect scientific results that have been achieved. 38a — 6-J 8 GEORGE V SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a A. 1918 III THE PEARLY FRESH-WATER MUSSELS OF ONTARIO. By John D. Detweiler^ M.A., St. Andrew’s College, Toronto. (With one figure in the text). INTRODUCTION. As a part of the pearly fresh-water mussel investigation, conducted by the Bio- logical Board of Canada, a number of localities, from which promising reports had come in, were visited in August, 1916. The investigation had a twofold object: first, to determine the abundance, species and commercial value of the mussels; and, second, to ascertain whether it would be advisable to introduce artificial propagation in any Canadian waters. In order to facilitate the work, the Board decided to send the author to the Fair- port Biological Station at Fairport, Iowa, so that he might thoroughly acquaint him- self with the problem in hand. THE UNITED STATES FISHERIES BIOLOGICAL STATION, FAIRPORT, IOWA. This station was established in 1908, and is the centre of mussel propagation and of the investigation of problems relating thereto. In the practical propagation of mussels the station serves as headquarters for field operations conducted throughout the Mississippi basin, including the Mississippi river and its tributaries. There may be in the field at one time from two to six field parties operating near the station or at a distance of several hundred miles. For full account see United States Bureau of Fisheries, Document 829, by Dr. Coker. # METHODS AND TECHNIQUE OF ARTIFICIAL PROPAGATION. The methods of propagation are based upon the peculiar character of the normal course of development of the fresh-water mussels. The young mussels, with rare excep- tions, when first liberated from the mother clam must become parasitic upon a fish in order to pass through the next stage of their development. To this end these young mussels — glochidia, as they are called at this stage — attach themselves to the fins or gills of a fish, if the opportunity presents itself. They already have two shells which under proper stimulus work like a small trap, and a very slight wound seems to be produced which after attachment begins at once to heal over. In this way the glochidia become more or less safely encysted and now virtually live the life of para- sites, subsisting on the juices of the fish. In the course of two 'weeks, more or less, having completed their metamorphosis, they break away from their host, drop to the bottom and begin an independent existence. If not over-infected, the fish seem to suffer no injurious effects. Naturally, the limit of successful infection depends on the size and nature of the fish. Careful investigation of natural and artificial infection has shown that a moderate-sized fish may carry successfully from 1,000 to 2,000 glochidia. Mussels do not attach themselves indiscriminately, but for each species of mussel there is a limited number of species of fish that may serve as host. In some cases the number that may act as a host is apparently very exclusive. In this connection 75 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAYAL 8ERYIGE 7 6 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 it may be mentioned that the gar, including at least the two species L. platostomus and L. osseus, has been found to be practically the only host for one of the most desirable of shells, the Yellow sand-shell (Lampsilis anodontoides). In actual artificial infection of fish the operation is essentially as follows: The gravid mussels and their suitable fish hosts are placed in a vat or tub containing a requisite amount of water. The mussel is now opened, the marsupial pouch split open along its ventral border and the glochidia are squeezed out into one of the valves of the mussel, which valve also serves as a small water container. The glochidia are then poured into the tub and the water agitated, more or less, so that they will be kept in suspension. From time to time individual fish are caught and gills examined to determine the extent of infection. The optimum amount of infection varies for different sizes and species of fish and also for the condition the fish are in. It is generally accomplished within the limit of 5 to 20 minutes. Over- infection must be guarded against. Naturally, there cannot be any definite rule as to the number of glochidia to be used with any number of fish, the person in charge must be guided by his experience. When sufficiently infected, the fish are removed to the river or pond. If develop- ment in the gills is to be watched, they may be transferred to crates anchored in the river or pond. The gravid female clams may generally be found by looking over material where fishermen are at work. Unless the glochidia are sufficiently developed, the operation is useless, for not until then will they open and close their valves when stimulated. The fish are caught with the seine or net. From this it will be seen that the experimental shell-fish station and the fish- cultural station go hand in hand. In fact it is a point of economy to combine the two. Although artificial infection would appear to be a comparatively simple operation, a working knowledge of the process has only been obtained as a result of careful and laborious research. As yet only a few species of mussels are thus propagated. The search for natural hosts is still being prosecuted. Experimental work is also being carried on with the object of determining the period of parasitism, and the life history of the young mussel after parasitism, and to lead to such improvements of methods as will make the work most productive of practical results. It is interesting to note that within a period of two years, young mussels of sufficient size to cut and finish buttons from their shells were reared at the station. These were raised from artificially infected fish, which were kept in fioating crates or in earth ponds. They are not only the first mussels to be reared to such a size from artificial infection, but they are the first commercial forms known to have been grown in ponds. RESULTS OF ARTIFICIAL PROPAGATION. Although there is no means of definitely checking up the results of artificial pro- pagation on a large scale, where the mussels already exist, yet the extent of the confidence the United States Government has in the undertaking may be shown by the fact that during the last fiscal year, 331,451,490 glochidia, in round numbers, were liberated in the parasitic condition and 424,550 fish were employed in the opera- tions. ^ It is believed that a considerable proportion of the glochidia fall upon unfavourable ground, or fail to reach maturity from other causes. However, since a large number can be liberated at a comparatively small cost, the attempt is deemed justifiable. So far restocking, only, has been attempted, and in general fishermen report that where artificial infection has been carried on, more young shells are found 1 Annual Report of the Commissioner of Fisheries to the Secretary of Commerce for Fiscal Year ended June 30, 1916. PEARLY FRESU-WATER MUSSELS 77 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a than ever before. Such encouraging reports have come in from Lake Pepin, Wis- eonsin; White and Black rivers, Arkansas, and from Pairport, in the vicinity of the station. THE SOJOURN AT THE STATION. My sojourn at the station, July 25, August 3, was both highly profitable and very pleasant. Laboratory accommodation and facilities were freely offered. Valuable instruction, demonstrations and advice were gladly given by the Director and his staff. By assisting in the examination of gills for natural infection, and in carrying out artificial infection under the supervision of an experienced man, I was enabled t<* get a working knowledge of the operations, which would have been quite impossible +0 obtain otherwise. The kindness with which I was received, the consideration shown for my wants and comfort, and the pleasure taken in facilitating the object of my visit were beyond my highest anticipations. In this connection I wish to particularly mention Mr. A. Shira, the Director; Mr. Canfield, Superintendent of Pish Culture; Prof. Clark and Dr. Howard, Scientific Assistants; Mr. Gorham, Poreman, and Mr. Southall, Shell Expert. The Station has also kindly sent me a set of classified shells, thereby facilitating classification here. ORIGIN OF OUR LARGER MUSSEL FAUNA. The identity of the mussel fauna of certain Canadian areas with that of the Mississippi waters at once suggests a probable common origin. Our forms no doubt migrated northward on the retreat of the ice cap which is believed to have covered northern North America during the great ice age. As this ice field retreated toward the North West, numerous lakes were formed, now represented by our modern Great Lakes, and these probably all except lake Ontario drained into the Mississippi system. Several of the old drainage courses have been discovered, among them being the ancient Lake Erie outlet, by way of the Wabash into the Mississippi river, and the glacial lake Chicago along the Chicago river. Even lake Superior appears to have had a watercourse into the Mississippi by way of the St. Croix river.^ Numerous species of mussels no doubt found their way up these waterways into the ancient lakes, and ultimately populated the rivers now fiowing into them. THE GRAND RIVER. As far as I have been able to ascertain, the Grand river contains more mussels of commercial value than any other Ontario waters. This river rises in the township of Melancthon, Dufferin county, within a distance of almost twenty-five miles from Georgian bay. Its source, at an elevation of approximately 1.700 feet above sea-level may be said to mark the highlands of the southwestern Ontario plateau. Prom its source to its outlet into lake Erie, at Port Maitland, by the river, the distance is 175 miles and the drainage area is approximately 2,500 square miles. The drainage basin is wide at its headwater area, and narrow in the lower flat country, where most of the rivers flow directly into the lake. The river may be topographically divided into two parts — upper and lower. The upper part extends well into Waterloo County and includes the Conestogo tributary. Here, on the flat headwater table lands, the declivity is small; then for a distance becomes quite sleep. At Elora, for example, there is a single drop of over 40 feet where the river enters a limestone gorge. The fall of the lower river is gradual and uniform, and generally becomes flat towards the lake. The following table will show the approxi- mate fall of the whole river. 1 Pop. Sc. Monthly XLVI No^ 2, p. 217. U.S. Geol. Survey Monographs, XXXVIIa. 78 DEPARTMENT OF THE NATAL EERY ICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Table I. — Distance from Port Maitland approximate in sea level. Place. Mileage. Difference Elevation Difference, LakeEiie Level. Port Maitland 0 7 573-94 0 Foot dam, Dunnville 7 0 573 94 706 Water above dam 7 22 581-00 13-00 Y ork ... 29 5 594 00 16 -00 Foot dam, Caledonia 34 0 610 00 • 8-00 Top dam, n 34 0 ' 618-00 0 Behind dam, n 34 16 618 00 1-00 At mouth, Fairchild’s 50 10 619 00 20-00 Cockshutt Bridge, Brantford 60 4 639 5 Foot lower dam, n 64 0 644-00 14 -00 Behind n m 64 3 658-17 17 00 Behind upper dam, 67 9 675 -00 5-00 Below darn. Paris 76 0 680-00 8-00 Behind dam, « 76 7 688-00 114-00 Bridge, Glenmorris 83 7 802 -00 51 -00 Foot dam, Galt 90 0 853 9-00 Above dam, t> 90 30 862 00 156 00 At Bridge Conestogo 120 15 1018-00 r. Flora. 135 Total head 5 Both dams 56 ft. At Fergus 140 Total head 7 M 38 ft. Bridpp* Polwnod 147 Water level 1367-00 In the upper stretches of the river, including its tributaries, extending roughly to the vicinity of Paris, the stream-bed is composed of rocks and course gravel almost throughout, and flows in places over exposed limestone for considerable distances. From Paris southward the bed consists chiefly of: — Table FTo. 2. Vicinity — Nature of Bed — Paris to Brantford Gravel, sand. Western Counties canal Gravel, sand, silt and clay. Brantford to 12 miles below. . . . Gravel, sand and clay. To Caledonia Fine gravel, sand and silt. Caledonia to York Gravel, exposed limestone. York to Dunnville Fine gravel, sand and silt. Dunnville to Lal^e Largely silt. This section of the province, in common with all southwestern Ontario, is occu- pied throughout by comparatively undisturbed limestone and other Silurian and Devonian strata with overlying drift, clays, sands and more recent superflcial deposits. The deep deposit of drift material naturally lends itself to erosion, and consequently the river carries considerable quantities of sand and gravel during heavy floods, scour- ing the channel from the headwaters to below Brantford. Below this point a large area of the river channel with the small declivity produces such a condition that light deposits may take place rather than the scouring of the bed to any extent. All the tributaries also bring down large quantities of material. DISTRIBUTION OF MUSSELS. Some years ago when repairs were being made on the feeder canal at Dunnville, shells were found in such abundance that they were picked up by the wagon load. This discovery led to the establishment of a small shelling industry at this point. Last year (1915) 205 tons were shipped from Dunnville, and this year approximately 260 tons. PEARLY FRESH-WATER MUSSELS 79 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Two or three years ago, during low water, three men picked up and shipped five or six car-loads from a point about one or one and one-half miles below York, and shipped, it is reported, to Buffalo. From the lower dam at Brantford to the old power-house at Echo Place, there is . what was at one time a barge canal, about If miles long. Where cuts were made it is about 50 feet wide and 5 or 6 feet deep. There is still in this system Mohawk lake, three-eighths of a mile wide by one-third mile long and 20 to 30 feet deep in places. Six or seven years ago, when the water was let out for repairs, this was the best place in the immediate vicinity of Brantford for clams, as to size, quantity and variety. It is said that about ten years ago clams were abundant at a point about half way between Brantford and Paris, called Mulloy’s Farm. I am also informed by the city engineer of Brantford that large numbers of clams are to be found in the vicinity of Bow Park farm. The fall on the Speed river, a tributary of the Grand, is well utilized, and clams of good size are found behind nearly all the dams which hold back the water over a considerable area of storage basins.^ SPECIES AND CHARACTERISTICS OF SHELLS. I have twice visited the Dunnville area, and found a considerable variety of mussels of commercial value. My investigation there was much facilitated by Mr. H. Clark, who superintends the shell-fishing. In discussing the mussel fauna, only such species as are of commercial value will be considered. In the following list common names are also given along with the scientific ones : — ^ Scientific Name. Common Name. Lampsilis alata, Say Lampsilis luteola, Lam Lampsilis recta^ Lam Lampsilis venticosa, Barnes . . Ohliquaria reflexa, Kaf Quadrula lachrymosa, Lea Quadrula plicata, Say Quadrula ruhiginosa. Lea. Quadrula undulata, Barnes . . Pink heel-splitter. . . Fat mucket. . . Black sand-shell. . . Pocketbook. Three-horned warty-back. Maple leaf. Blue-point. Wabash pig-toe. Three-ridge. No doubt this list does not contain all the species of commercial value found in this district. I have, in fact, picked up the Fluted-shell, Symphynota costata, Eaf., a good many miles north of Dunnville, and it likely occurs here. I might in passing- mention Lampsilis gracilis, Barnes, (Paper shell), a large mussel found here, but which is of no practical value on account of the thinness of its shell. Of the above species those most commonly occurring are L. alata, Q. plicata, and Q, undulata, L. alata is a good-sized heavy clam, quite a large number of the shells weighing in the neighbourhood of a pound, but its value is much reduced for button manufacture on account of its usual pink or purple colour. Q. plicata and Q. u?idulata are similar in appearance and comprise the chief commercial species of this area. They grow to a large size, and as a rule have a good white lustre. I have in my collection one of the former species weighing If pounds, and of the latter, one Isk pounds in weight. L. luteola is naturally a valuable shell, as its quality is excellent, and it cuts and finishes with least waste. The area around Dunnville, however, does not appear to be particu- 1 1 am indebted to the Hydro-Electric Power Commission office at Brantford for valuable data, and also for reports on clam distribution on the Grand river system. 2 For nomenclature see Synopsis of Naiades, or pearly fresh water mussels. Proceedings, U.S. National Museum, Vol. XXII, No. 1205, 1900, Charles T. Simpson. 80 DEPARTMENT OF TEE NATAL EEBTJGE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 larly favour^ibl'e to its development. It may perhaps be found more plentifully and of better quality farther up the river in localities more nearly approximating the condi- tion in lakes. The other species are of good quality, but owing to their scarcity in this area, have little commercial importance. METHODS OF THE DUNVILLE MUSSEL FISHERY. On my visit to the fishing grounds at Dunnville I found two gangs of men at work on the river above the town ; one at a distance of about two miles, and the other some five and one-half miles farther on, near Morgan’s island. In the former locality they had a pile of shells which would weigh about five tons. These were fished and shelled in about three and one-half days, by two men and two boys; The men did the fishing, while one boy ran the gasolene launch and the other removed the meat from the shells. The outfit for procuring the clams consists of two scows fastened rigidly together by a plank at each end. The distance between the scows is 4 or 5 feet. The men stand on the stern plank while operating the scoops. The scoop, or dip-net is a dipper-like apparatus with a handle of from 12 to 18 feet in length. The bowl consists of a wire cage about 16 inches in depth, and is attached to a triangular iron frame, 16 inches to a side. Thus the opening of the scoop is triangular and works in the manner of a dredge. To assist in the raking of the beds by this scoop, a number of iron spikes about 3 inches long are fastened to the lower part of the triangular frame, and are set about 3 inches apart. This helps to draw the scoop into the river shown and are set about 3 inches apart. This helps to draw the scoop into the river bed. A line passes from the lower end of the scoop to the forward plank and this is of such a length as to allow the handle to stand vertically against the stern plank. The whole outfit is towed by a gasolene launch. The scows, though varying in size, . are about 16 feet long by 3J feet wide and 14 inches deep. The following diagram may serve to illustrate the fishing outfit in operation : — ‘ In order to remove the mussels from their shells they are subjected to boiling in water. This kills the animal, causes the relaxation of the powerful adductor muscles, which hold the valves together, and permits the easy removal of the muscles from their attachment on the valves. The boiling pans vary in size, but are usually about 6 feet long by 4 feet wide and 8 inches deep. The bed near Morgan’s island is about i mile long and 50 feet wide. Here the bottom is gravelly, and although the shells are numerous and of good quality, the number of dead ones is considerably larger than farther down the river, where the bottom is muddy. j Last year the shelling was done below the town at a point a mile north of Port *. Maitland. Here 265 tons were taken from an area less than | of a mile in length. ; Idle bed, I am told, showed no signs of depletion. This year the fishing has been done above the town, and although about 260 tons have been taken, the ground is apparently not as i)rodi:ctive as was anticipated. PEARLY FRESH-WATER MUSSELS 81 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a PEARLS. A considerable number of pearls and slugs are also found. Some are of very fair size and good quality. In Mr. Clark’s opinion, pearling alone would insure a sufficient return for one’s labours if followed up. The highest figure yet obtained for a pearl was $75. RECOMMENDATIONS. In order to develop to the fullest extent the resources of the river, three main steps are urgent; first, to insure against depletion of the present stock of clams; second, to restock and stock artificially all favourable areas, and third, to improve the river in general by stream regulation. Since the last-mentioned object is so funda- mental, I shall deal with it first. STREAM REGULATION AND SOAIE OF ITS ADVANTAGES. Through the progressive removal of the natural physical conditions regulating stream-fiow, the floods in the river have for some years been becoming more and more violent and destructive. This increased flood-flow has naturally reduced the volume of low water-flow proportionately. These two conditions, along with the scouring and general damage of river-bed, constitute an increasing menace to mussel life, to fisheries, and to power development along the river. Some idea of the truth of the above statements may be deduced from a study of the following table of volume of flow at different points. The maximum flow of greatest recent flood is also included. This took place in the spring of 1912. Approximate flow in cubic feet per second, period 1914, 1915 and 1916. Grand River Stations. Maximum.* Minimum.* Mean. Drainage area in sq. miles. 1912. Estimated Maximum . Belwood 4,600 3 190 280 10,000 Conestogo 9,300 15 375 550 20,000 Galt 19,000 55 810 1,360 .50, 000 Glenmorris 23,000 70 900 1,390 Brantford 26,000 100 14,000 2,000 100,000 Y ork .... 27,000 200 1,550 2,280 * Maximum flows are mean of two gauge lieights, takm a.ni. and p.m. daily. Minimum flows in some stations consist of leakage from dams. The danger consequent upon these conditions cannot readily be overestimated. The fact that drainage areas of the Grand River and Great Miami river flowing through Dayton, Ohio, are approximately equal, is sufficient proof. No doubt far-reaching measures for the prevention of dangerous floods will have to be taken in the future. If such measures involve water conservation, the resources of the river will be enorm- ously increased. In the fall of 1912 the Hydro-electric Power Commission made a reconnaissance survey of the river watershed covering the main stream from Caledonia to the head- waters ; also of the larger tributaries from their confluence with 'the main stream to their headwaters. In this survey, the main object of which was to ascertain what locations, if any, merited examination as sites for storage reservoirs and regulating works, it was found that by the building of nine dams ranging from 30 to 65 feet, storage reservoirs ranging from 450 acres to 3,000 acres in area could be obtained; the aggregate acreage being between ten and eleven thousand. While the above figures 82 DEPARTMENT OF TEE NAYAL SERYICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 are approximations, it is believed to be reasonably certain that the system of storage basins would have an aggregate impounding capacity of not less than five billion cubic feet.^ It will be evident that the economic advantage accruing from such pools of dependable character cannot be lightly esteemed. In relation to mussel life there would be not only the addition of new flood areas, but also no doubt the improvement of the bed of the streams ba^k of these areas. In these lake-approximations, or river- lakes as they have been called, admirable conditions should be afforded for the par-, ticularly valuable shell L. luteola. Not only does this shell work up well into buttons but it also lends itself readily to artificial propagation on a commercial basis. Although it is rare to find shells of commercial value in lakes, these river-lakes form a natural habitat for the above mentioned mussel. For example, Lake Peoria, a lake expansion in the Illinois R. forms at present probably the best mussel producing district in the United States. As the young mussels are parasitic on fish in the early stage of their life history, it would of course be necessary to construct effective fish-ways at these dams. Further, by a study of tables 1 and 2 it will be seen that there are considerable stretches in the river where apparently suitable mussel areas obtain. If mussels are not found here in a survey, the fault will probably he due to flood conditions prohibit- ing their development in these areas. If such is the case, flow-regulation should over- come the unfavourable environment. * , FOOD, A FACTOR OF THE ENVIRONMENT. In the discussion of favourable environments, due consideration must be given to- the food problem. This is doubtless the most important factor in the environment of the mussel, and it is unfortunate that no extensive work has been done along this line. Actual records of stomach contents of fresh-water mussels are rare. Records of analysis show that among the microscopic forms, minute plants, diatomacese and other algae, constitute a part of the food of the mussels. With reference to the food habits. Professor Clark and Ur. Wilson report in part, as follows: ‘‘The stomach contents of mussels taken from the main current of the St. Mary’s, St. Joseph, and Maumee rivers were rather noteworthy for their paucity of organic material. Through the large mass of muddy matrix filling the stomach were usually scattered a few Scenedesmus, various diatoms, and an occasional Pediastrum or CosmariumP Ur. Petersen, a Uanish ecolo- gist and Uirector of the Uanish Biological Station, has fully demonstrated that the fine dust-like detritus forming a thin top layer of bottom deposits constitutes a large part of the food of the oyster and other mollusks. Ur. Jensen, Petersen’s colleague, concluded after investigating the source of the detritus that its origin is primarily from sea plants, broken down until it assumes the fine dust like form. It has been suggested^ that the “large mass of muddy matrix” referred to by Clark and Wilson was probably the kind of material described by Petersen as “ dust-fine detritus.” Although large bivalves may not be able to avail themselves of the layer of dust-fine detritus, it is no doubt taken in by water currents. Ur. J ensen also examined the water by centri- fuging, and obtained material identical with the top layer of bottom deposits. In Oneida lake the surface of the bottom deposits, in bays and quiet bodies of water, is reported to be of precisely the character described by Ur. Petersen. It would, indeed, he very interesting to establish the relationship between stomach-contents of different species of mussels and the nature of the river bed in which they do, or do not thrive. It would, no doubt, lead to valuable information with regard to the choice and the establishment of new areas for their development. It may be found that the food 1 Sixth Annual Report, Hydro-Electric Power Commission of Ontario, 1916. 2 Relation of MoUusRs to Pish in Oneida Lake, by Frank Collins Baker, University of Syra- cuse, N.Y., July, 1916. PEARLY FRESH-WATER MUSSELS 83 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a supply of the mussels is by no means fully dependent on the free-swimming organisms, and that the favourable localities, discussed above, are largely conducive to the develop- ment of the mussel on account of conditions favouring the deposition of the “ detritus.” RESTOCKING AND STOCKING. The restocking of areas where mussels at present exist, and where active fishing is going on, and the stocking of new areas, may be summed up under the head of artificial propagation. As the method pursued in artificial propagation has been described in a general way, we shall now consider its application to the river in question. Of all mussels so far experimented with, L. luteola lends itself most readily to arti- ficial propagation on a commercial basis. It is the species chiefly propagated at present by the United States Government. As time and opportunity prevented my making an extensive survey of Grand Kiver, I cannot state the extent to which this species occurs therein. It is, nevertheless, very generally distributed in Ontario waters, but in order to attain to a size and abundance suitable for commercial value it apparently must have the conditions more or less as described above in “ river-lakes.” The specimens so far obtained from the river are not of very good quality. This is probably due to unfavourable conditions preventing their optimum development in the areas from which they come. In a commercial appraisal made of some of our shells by Mr. John B. Southall, Shell Expert at the Eairport Station, this particular shell was reported on as follows “ medium size, no discoloration, brittle, third grade^ and yielding 788, 16 — ^line,^ gross blanks per ton.” In his remarks he further states that they were rather thin and of a steel-coloured nacre and produced blanks that would chip and cleave during the processes of button manufacture. With regard to this mussel I would suggest a careful examination of the areas lying behind the larger dams with a view to stocking them with the valuable species. Such a survey might include the dams at Dunville, Caledonia, Brantford and Galt on the main river, and also the larger ones on the Speed tributary, where the fall is well utilized, and where clams of good size are said to be found in all such storage basins as hold back water over a considerable area. Behind the dam at Caledonia there is a stretch of practically dead water for twenty miles which might lend itself favourably to the development of this mussel. Here the river bed can be classed as permanent, inasmuch as the usual freshet velocity of the river water above is greatly reduced on reaching this point. At Brantford the old barge canal, described above, containing also Mohawk lake, might prove a very suitable locality for propagation on a small scale. For the purpose of stocking, I would strongly recommend that an attempt be made to introduce the particularly fine luteolas of lake Pepin, in the Mississipi, about 30 miles down the river from St. Paul, Minn. In the United States gravid mussels, for purposes of infection, have not been shipped over a much greater distance than 300 miles, but I am informed by the Director of the Eairport Station that they sent a couple of shipments of live mussels from Eairport to New York in the fall of 1916, and that the majority reached their destination in good condition. The distance from lake Pepin to Galt, Ont., would be about 835 miles by rail. Fortunately, this species is not very exclusive in its choice of hosts, neither is its spawning period of short duration, as is the case with some other commercial mussels. All the Lampsilinse, in fact, are gravid, more or less, during the whole year 1 In the report of the appraisal the luteolas sent from the Canada Co. Cut and from the Grand River were combined in one report. 2 In grading the material I sent him, the texture and lustre of the niggerhead (Q. ebenus) was taken as the standard. 3 A line in button measurement is 1/40 of an inch. 84 departme:s^t of the naval service 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 but most ripe ones are found from April to July. In my survey in August I found quite a number of gravid luteolas but none that on microscopic examination proved to be ripe. This early and extended spawning period would be favourable to success- ful shipping, before the warm weather comes on. The fish that may serve as carriers belong mainly to the families Centrarchidae and Percidse. The species are : F. sparoides (speckled bass) ; F. annularis (crappie) ; L. pallidus (blue sunfish) ; M. salmoides (large-mouthed black bass) ; M. dolomieu (small-mouthed black bass) ; S. vitreum (yellow pickerel) ; S, Ganadense (sand pickerel) ; P.fiavescens (yellow perch) and F. chrysops (white bass), all well represented in our waters. i Since the artificial propagation of this mussel is past the experimental stage, I ! did not consider it advisable to repeat the operation here,- on my return from Pairport, i particularly as my time v/as limited and as the localities visited did not appear very | favourable. It was kindly suggested at Pairport that gravid mussels be shipped over | here for infecting purposes. Lampsilis recta, though not found plentifully in the Grand river, is a very valu- able shell on account of its fine quality. Mr. Southall reported it to be of large size, without discolouration, firm and of first grade, making 369, 16 — ^line and 470, 24 — line gross blanks per ton. Although the usual run of this species is coloured, those from the Dunnville area seem to be of fine quality. There are, however, some shells which show discoloration. In the fiscal year 1916, 11,288,300 larval mussels of this species were planted at Pairport. The fish which may serve as hosts for artificial propagation are: L. pallidus (blue sunfish) and A. cyanellus (green sunfish). The former of these species occurs abundantly in some parts of lake Ontario and lake Erie and their tributaries, but the latter has not been reported from Ontario, although it is supposed that it will be found in lake Erie. F. annularis (crappie, also called , silver bass) has been found naturally infected with this mussel, but it is rare in our- waters.^ ■ The spawning period of this mussel is similar to that of Lampsilis luteola and ; the river appears to be adapted to this species. The shellers at Dunnville seem to prize ' this shell above all others. ij Lampsilis ventricosa. — This shell is not used very extensively in button manufac- ture, but it is worked up into novelties. Large shells, however, make buttons of good i lustre. Last year 447,000 glochidia were used for infection at Pairport. The species 'i of fish that may serve as hosts in artificial propagation are: F. annularis, L. pallidus, -\ and M. salmoides (large-mouthed black bass). At present it would not appear to be ?! essential to increase the stock of this shell. j The Quadrula group is well represented in the Grand, but only two species appear | in large quantities — Q. plicata and Q, undulata. These constitute at present our ■ chief button shells, and the Canadian Pearl Button Company, of Trenton, Ont., which I has the sole right to the Dunnville fishery at present, reports that the shells from the ' Grand compare favourably with those shipped to their plant from the United States. In the commercial appraisal of these two species from the Grand, the report is as follows Specie.s. Common Size. Dis- Texture. Grade. No. of gross blanks per ton Name. colouration. 16-line. 24-line. Q. plicata'^ Bluepoint . . Three-ridge. Large . , None Firm 3rd 142 245 Q. undulata Large . . None Firm 3rd 182 214 1 Manual of Vertebrates of Ontario, by C. W. Nash, has been consulted for fish distribution in our waters. 2 The plicata from Mud Creek, near Port Pranks, were evidently grouped with those of the Grand river, for there is but a single report. PEARLY FRESH-WATER MUSSELS 85 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a It is noted tliat they had a very uneven inner surface, causing waste in cutting blanks; the tips of the shells were too thin for buttons. The colour and nacre were not as bright as the usual run of the species found in the Mississippi river; but it nevertheless makes a good button and, with proper care, the material could be worked up with profit. As the Button Company of Trenton works up tons and tons of these shells their statement as to the comparative value of the shells must also receive due consideration. With regard to the propagation of the former species {Q. plicata), Dr. Howard, of Fairport, Iowa, makes the fallowing statement: — Several factors favour the artificial propagation of this species upon a practical scale. It is common and at present one of the most used shells in the button industry. It seems to be a form not narrowly restricted as to hosts, and these are indicated to be among the commonest and most readily obtainable fishes. Although a river form, its habit as a dweller in stiller water and on mud bottom makes it susceptible to propagation or control under conditions readily imitable in artificial lakes or ponds. A continuous water supply is desirable; my observation has been, however, that it will survive rather adverse conditions in this respect. I have collected many live specimens from a slough which had gone dry to the extent that only mud remained. Under these con- ditions the majority of the pond mussels, Anodonta corpulenta, had died. I would cite also the finding of this species accidentally introduced in the para- sitic stage into an artificial pond at Fairport, Iowa. The pond had gone dry, and I found a specimen still alive buried in mud barely moist. It is evident, I think, from these observations that the species is hardy, at least as regards some of the more common vicissitudes to which mussels are naturally subjected.”^ In his experimental work with this species he found that P. annularis (crappie), P. sparoides (speckled bass), P. flavescens (yellow perch), and L. pallidus (blue sun- fish) were successful carriers. The spawning period is short, being confined chiefiy to the month of July. In the last fiscal year 147,000 glochidia of this species were set free in the parasitic stage at Fairport. At present the safe-guarding of the beds against depletion is more urgent than experimental work in artificial propagation of this species. As experience and equip- ment are obtained, work on the more difficult Quadrulas should no doubt be pro- ceeded with. I have so far not obtained any data of experimental work done on Q. undulaia. In general appearance the two forms are similar. In plicata, the umbones are more elevated and inflated than in undulata. PROTECTION OF FRESH-WATER MUSSELS. For the protection of the present mussel beds the following methods may be considered of sufficient importance to merit discussion.^ (a) A closed season in each year. (&) Eestriction as to the methods of fishing. (c) Restriction as to size of mussels retained by fishermen. {d) Closed regions for specified numlber of years. (e) The imposition of licenses. 1 Experiments in propagation of Fresh Water Mussels of the Quadrula group. By Dr. A. D. Howard, Bureau of Fisheries, Document No. 801. 2 See also. Protection of Fresh Water Mussels, by R. E. Coker, Ph.D., Bureau of Fisheries, Document No. 793. 86 DEPARTMENT OF THE NATAL SERTIGE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 (a) The main object to be attained by instituting a closed season for fishing is the protection of the beds during the breeding season. Incidentally, however, a second benefit naturally accompanies the one sought, for by limiting the length of the season, the extent of the fishiug will likewise be diminished. Since the chief commercial shells so far shipped are Quadrula plicata and undulata, and since these species have short periods of gravidity during the summer months, the closed season restriction peculiarly applies to the Grand. But the river also supports other shells of some commercial value which have long breeding seasons, and thus the protection afforded would not be sufficiently wide-reaching. This will be particularly true in case of artificial propagation. Besides, an interruption of fishing operations during a few summer months would seriously interfere with the industry. {h) At present the shells are obtained in one way only, as described above. This method is fortunately not the one against which complaints are generally made. Although it roots up the bed it does not unnecessarily injure the mussels which are too small for commercial purposes, and these should be returned to the water. (c) It is obvious that there is a limit to the size of a shell beneath which it is pure wastefulness to retain it. The fishermen and the button manufacturers lose time in handling the material and the beds are depleted at a much greater rate than they would otherwise be for the same finished product. A limit for every species is, as a rule, impracticable if for no other reason, at least for the fact that the determination of species is sometimes difficult. After a size limit has been decided upon, considerable details will have to be worked out in order to satisfactorily enforce any regulations agreed upon. {d) One of the most immediate protective measures is that of closed areas. This best meets the case of the long breeding species and gives them an opportunity to restock areas, preventing for a term of years the disturbance of gravid clams some of which, when disturbed, discharge the young even though not mature. It also favours the building up of beds by allowing the young clams to establish themselves. The system on which a river or portions of it are to be closed, and the time and duration of areas closed can best be determined by studying field and biological conditions. (e) By the granting of fishing permits as at present on the Grand, no doubt the number of shellers is thereby limited. It is a question, however, just how far the interests of a private person or firm are safeguarded as well as those of the fishing grounds. Although such a fishing permit was granted with a view to stimulating shell prospecting it nevertheless undoubtedly discriminates against other persons or firms. If fishing licenses were granted to resident fishers, thereby eliminating the exploiters or such persons as would not wish to follow up the industry, no doubt good results would be obtained. This would also leave to fishers the opportunity to sell to such firms as paid the best prices. RIVER AUX SABLES. In the brief survey of this river for shells I confined my attention chiefly to its lower stretches from which reports of abundance of shells had come in. The east branch of the river rises a short distance north of Jaffa, in the township of Ilibbert, county of Perth. The west branch has its course several miles to the west of this point and the two branches unite near the northern boundary of Stephen township. After a course of about 90 miles the river enters Lake Huron at a point 12 miles, almost due west, from the confluence of the two branches. This U-shaped river is remarkable for its meandering course and for its apparently recent geological history. Until about 25 years ago the river outlet was not as now, but at a distance of 10 miles further south, near the village of Port Franks. It is an artificial channel PEARLY FRESH-WATER MUSSELS 87 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a cae-quarter of a mile in length. Previous to this cut the river made an abrupt turn at Grand Bend when within one-quarter of a mile from the lake, and it flowed almost parallel to the lake shore to the natural outlet, below Port Pranks. This deviation of its course was probably due to the sand collecting near its northwesterly banks, forcing the river southwards. Owing to the frequently occurring floods on the lowlands, the Canada Company, which owns extensive tracks of land in' the district, decided to make a cut from the northwestward flowing arm of the river to the southward arm. I shall refer to it as the “ Canada Company Cut.” It passes through the former lake Burwell and is 3.5 miles in length. Later on, wishing to further improve their lands, the Company put the second cut through at Grand Bend, diverting the river directly into the lake. Although the upper part of the old river channel, between Grand Bend and the lower cut is dry, it still contains a large volume of water. It approximates, in fact, to a narrow lake about 8 miles in length. In places it is a few hundred feet wide and quite deep. The greatest depth at which I took soundings was 17 feet. A fair and appar- ently continuous current of water flows from it into the main stream at the cut. Previous to the construction of the artificial channels the river must have been admiraoly suited to the support of mussel life. Even when the second cut was put in Y 113 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Three hauls were taken at the next low water on the morning of August 17, yield- ing the following small gadoids : — Haul No. 1. — Numerous hake. Haul No. 2. — Five pollock, four cod, and four hake. ^ Haul No. 3. — Four hake. The length frequencies of the twenty-seven small pollock obtained in catches 19 and 29 to 32 are given in table I. The length frequencies of the fish caught in the seine catches 19 and 29-32 form rather even curves with a mode at 8 cm. and 9 cm. The mean standard length of these fish, as calculated from measurements made to the nearest millimeter, is 8-7 cm., and the mean total length, as calculated in the same way is 9-7 cm. The scales of these fish show a series of rings of plates corresponding to the centres of the scales of longer pollock. The number of these rings is from 4 to 10. In no case were the rings of plates close together, indicating winter growth. In 1913 five small pollock were caught in the shore seine at Sandy Cove, N.S. Their length frequencies were as follows : — 'Potal lengths.. . . 7 cm. 8 cm. 9 cm. Standard lengths Frequency 7 cm. 8 cm. Frequency 1 1 3 2 3 The measurements were made to the nearest millimeter, and the mean total length was 8-2 cm. and the mean standard length 7-4 cm. Seven other small pollock were obtained, five from weir& which had been seined for herring and two caught on hook and line from the station wharf. The length fre- quencies of these fish are given in table 2, and show that these fish were larger than those caught in the shore seine. Their mean standard length was 12-2 cm. and their mean total length was 13-3 cm. Their scales corresponding to their larger size show a greater number of rings of plates but do not show any winter rings. So far as any importance can be attached to the occurrence of these seven fish, it would seem to indicate that the young, after they attain a certain length, about 11 cm., move into slightly deeper water where they are not caught by the shore seine. IV THE SECOND YEARNS GROWTTI. Among the pollock caught in the shore seine at Wilson’s beach on August 4, as described in the previous section and grouped together as catch No. 19, 'eighteen were between 29 and 45 cm. total length. Two of these, specimens No. 660 and No. 661, 29 and 32 cm. total length, show only a single winter ring in their scales. The lengths of these fish at the end of their first winter as calculated from the positions of the winter rings in the scales is shown in table 3. It is to be noted that these fish are probably large for their age being caught in a shoal with large fish. They constitute, however, the only data the writer has been able to obtain on pollock in their second year’s growth. It is hoped in future work to fill this unfortunate gap in the investigations. v. THE THIRD YEARNS GROWTH. In all seventy-three pollock in their third year were caught. They were all caught in the shore seine near Wilson’s beach, C'ampobello island, and are included in catches 17 and 19. 114 DEPARTMElsT OF TEE FATAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 i Catch 17 was taken on the morning of August 3, 1916, when numerous schools of small pollock were seen close inshore just north of Wilson’^ beach, and the shore seine was set at low water. One haul yielded fifty-seven specimens ranging between 30 cm. and 47 cm. in total length. The seine was rapidly hauled in over a rocky bottom and the only other fish caught was one Pseudopleuronectes americanus 35 cm. in length. The scales of these pollock all show two winter rings. The length fre- quencies are given in table 4. The mean total length is 39.6 cm. and the mean stan- dard length is 36-4 cm. Catch No. 19 has already been described in a previous section. It included sixteen pollock whose scales showed two winter rings. The total lengths of these fish at the ends of their first and second winters, as calculated from their scales, are given in table No. 5. The lengths given are, in each case, the average of two measurements on different scales. The mean total lengths of two-year old fish of the catch are, at the end of the first winter, 15-4 cm. and at the end of the second winter, 31-8 cm. The mean length of the fish when caught on August 4 was 39*2 cm. The mean increase in total length during the second year, t2, was 16-4 cm. and the mean increase during the third year up to August 4 was 7-4 cm. The length frequencies of the fish in the different years of their growth are shown in table 6. The corresponding figures for the standard lengths are: mean standard length at end of first winter, 14.1 cm.; mean standard length at end of second winter, 31.3 cm; mean standard length when caught on August 4, 35.9 cm. VI.— THE FEEQUENCY OF THE DIFFERENT YEAR CLASSES IN THE YEARS 1914, 1915 AND 1916. From measurements made on 1,250 pollock caught in July, 1914, Mr. Douglas Macallum constructed a length frequency curve, given in the paper already referred to. This curve, as Mr. Macallum noted, shows two modes, one at 63 cm., and one at 68 cm., the former being the more prominent one. The mean length of 6-year old fish (67-8 cm.) corresponds closely with the frequency curve at 68 cm., as scale studies show, and the mean length of 5-year old fish (63- cm.) with the mode at 62 to 63 cm. The most prominent mode is at 63 cm., i.e., 5-year old fish, or the class of 1909. Ihe material for the study of the pollock in 1915 consisted of the measurements and scales of 652 fish obtained in five catches from Casco bay, off Oampobello island. New Brunswick. The first two of these catches were made on June 22, and included 331 fish, the other three catches were made on July 16, and included 321 fish. The length frequencies of these pollock, both the actual numbers caught and the per cent in each centimeter class, are given in table 7. In catches 1 and 2, both the standard and the total lengths were measured while the catches 3 to 5, only the standard lengths were taken. The table gives the standard lengths for all five catches and, in addition, the total lengths for catches 1 and 2. From the column in the table giving the per cent of specimens in each centimeter class for the first two catches and the similar column for the last three catches, it will be seen that they agree in showing the most frequent classes at 65 and 66 cm. Since the distribution of lengths in the catches is similar and since the catches were chosen at random, it would seem fair to assume that they represent correctly the distribution in point of size of fish caught during June and July in the vicinity of Campobello island. The frequency curve for the standard lengths of catches 1 to 5 is shown in the graph where the lengths have been grouped in 2 cm. classes and the frequencies plotted in per cent. This curve has a single mode at 66 cm., corresponding to the most frequent class in the per cent column. An examination of the scales of the fish from a typical catch, catch 2, was made in the POLLOCK IN BAY OF FUND7 115 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a following- manner: The envelopes, each containing the scales of a single hsh, were arranged in the order of the standard lengths of the fish; the scales from every fourth envelope were examined and the number of rings counted. In this way, without exam- ining scales from all the fish, scales from a representative sample of the catch were examined. The numbers of fish in each year class are shown in table 8. The mean standard length of the 5-year old fish of the class' of 1910 was '63-9 cm., and that of the 6-year-old fish of the class of 1909 was 67-4 cm. The mode on the 1915 frequency curve is therefore seen to be due to the greater frequency of the 6-year-old fish of the class of 1909, or the same which gave rise to the most prominent mode in the 1914 frequency curve. The mean standard length of catches 1 and 2 is 67-5 cm., and the mean total length is 72*8 cm. The material for the study of the pollock of three winters and over, in 1916, consisted of measurements of thirty-two catches made near Campobello island between July 10 and October 16. The first eleven of these catches, Nos. 2 to 18j were measured by the writer, both the standard and the total length being recorded and scale samples taken from each fish. The remaining catches were measured by Capt. Sheppard Mitchell of tie Biological Station stafiF, and the total lengths recorded. The dates and locations of the catches and the number of pollock they contained are given in table 9. The length frequencies of these catches have been tabulated and catches grouped according to the date of capture. Catches 2 to 12 were made betwen July 10 and 14; their standard length frequencies are given in table 10, columns I to X. From column IX it can be seen that the mode for these catches is about 66 c.m. The mode for catches 15 to 18 is seen from column XIV to be also 66 cm., although the frequencies of the 67 and 68 cm. classes are also large. Catches 2 to 18, which contain 567 fish, have been combined in columns XYI and XVII, which give the length frequencies in per cent. These columns show that the mode, in this case, is to be placed at 67 cm. The mode at 67 cm. is slightly in advance of the mode of the 1915 curve which is at 6'6 cm. In the case of the remaining catches, numbers 41 to 62, the total length only was recorded. The catches are grouped according to the time of capture, July, August, first half of September, latter half of September, and October. In each of these groups the combined length frequencies of the separate catches, the per cent length frequency obtained by reducing the combined frequencies to per cent of the total number of fish concerned and the per cent frequency in classes of 2 centimeter intervals are given. The later percentages are each obtained by adding two of the percentages of the previous column. They are entered opposite the length of even number althougl^ they really correspond to a length which is the mean of the length of the two classes, the percentages of which were added, e.g. in column IV the per cent 8-0 corresponds to a length of 63-5 cm. The percentages in 2 centimeter classes are given because they, make possible a more rapid inspection of the table. From table 11 it will be seen that the mode for catches 2 to 18 is 74cm., which may be taken to be the total length corresponding to 67 cm. The mode for catches 41 to 62 is at 80 cm. and it will be noted that this is approximately the mode of the separate groups of catches. The total length 80 cm., may be considered to correspond approximately to a standard length of 67/74 x 80 cm. or 72-5 cm. During the summer of 1916, pollock were scarce around Campobello island, but they became more plentiful in the autumn. The catches 41 to 62 measured by Captain Mitchell are therefore regarded as more typical. It is these measurements which I have used in constructing the curve for 1916 in the graph. As these were measurements of the total length and the measurements for 1914 and 1915 were of the standard length the curve has been moved in the diagram so that its actual mode at 80 cm. comes at 72 cm. This has been done merely for the purposes of comparison. The form of the curve for total lengths is of course different from that for standard lengths. It is also to be considered that this curve represents fish caught later in the year than those used 116 DEPARTMENT OF THE NATAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 for the 1914 and 1915 curves, a fact which would make the corresponding: modal length less than that shown. The numbers of winter rings have been counted for the scales of the fish of catches 3, 6 and 7, and the results are shown in table 12. The table shows that these catches, which had a mode at 67 cm., were composed predominately of 6-year-old fish. This being the case, the mode at 72 cm. of the curve for catches 41 to 62 shown in fig. 1, probably corresponds to the 7-year-old fish or the fish of the 1909 year class, the same which gave rise to the modes in the 1914 and 1915 curves. VII. SUMMARY. 1. It has been found that young pollock showing in their scales no winter rings and therefore probably in their first year’s growth occur in shallow tidal water on the western coast of the Bay of Funday. 2. Data as to the rate of growth during the first two years are given. 3. Evidence is given for believing that the 1909 class has been the most abundant during the three years 1914, 1915, and 1916. 4r Vm. — TABLES. Table 1. — Length Frequencies of Small Pollock caught in shore seine in 1916. A. standard Lengths — Numbers in columns represent number of specimens in centimeter groups. Length 7 cm. 8 cm. 9 cm. 10 cm. 11 cm. Catch 10 3 6 8 2 - Catch 29-32 - - 3 - 4 1 Total 3 9 8 6 1 B. Total Lengths — Numbers in columns represent number of specimens in centimeter groups. Length ... 7 cm. 8 cm. 9 cm. 10 cm. 11 cm. 12 cm. Catch 19 2 4 7 5 1 - Catch 29-32 - 1 2 - 4 1 Total 2 5 9 5 5 1 Table 2. — Length Frequencies of Small Pollock, Catches Nos. 21-26, five seined in herring weirs and two caught with hook and line from Station wharf August 3 to 9. A— JStandakd Lengths. Lengths Fr ! ^ I cqoQKioGO't'ccooococicNooqoocoi-.oo (M-^OlOCCOOOOCO-^COi^iH c . “ 5 i ! > u a 0) pH j C^tMC^J-^CMClOClOClT— (t^OuD-^iCOClCL^C^Cr. CO»00'^COOCCC^Tr'(^^iOCCOi I r-1 (M rH Tt< (?q CO Oi.-'t' '!f Tf )0 O c: O CO O lO CO (M CO rH T— I Ph iH ' r-l CO IC (M ^ a i > » g I [Xj • S a i> ^ o s c s-,,u o > i X ! CJ o lO CO • O CO -04 00 ^ t^OCOlOCCr-lTfil^tOlO'!fO:OCO'^COr- ICOCOCQOCC^OCOi— 'OilO 0104i— I(Mt— ( IC0OOOC:00t>.)OiC04-t^(M040404rHTH>H XXX I X I C0i-lr-irH04!Mi0-|^, C0O4t— ‘XCOCiCOCCCQ— 'COirClCClOlOt^COCOrHlOrH X ( 04 lO CO I'- «5 CO • CO tH • Tf CO 1 g 03 S d . o a C ^ « -3 X 'gS Q-= 1 -Si ! = ! o ^ c3 d ce d o ^ d d tX d c " 03 3^ uP- CO CO rri ■ Oi t- 04 • CO O • CO CO -L cocoococococoocoi-^ocooot^OL-ooi>-t^coi'^cocococo THr-'04 04iO-^»C'*'COl^COldl^CiO'cr'OO^P|Hi-HCOr-(i-i,-l 04 04 04 04COC004t-H04tHCO COi— (COCOCO-^'Cfi'^-^OCO ■ CO 04 1-1 CO CO TJH IC0r-lT-HTHC0C00404C0CO':f'C0COCOiOCC^04r-iC0i-'i-l04 ifC0C4THO404-M>-C004C004C0i 04rHC0 ■'T'C0'^ldO4 '^COCOOO'itU004lOCO' o' tP o' -H 04 CO lO CO tP 00 o' o' r-J o-i CO »0 Co' tP 00 O O rp 04' CO lO CO' t- 00 o' o O »0 lO Id lO lO iO lO >d iC CO CO CO CO CO CO O CD CO CO t - I- t>. I'- «>- CO POLLOCK IN BAY OF FUNDT 121 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a •* (M M 38a— 9-1 Table 11. — Total length frequencies of catches 2 to 62. 122 DEPARTME~tn' OF THE NATAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 sstqo -uio z tjO'Ba ui % O '-0 o ^ 'SSBp UIO qoBa UI cd SSBp MUD Z CO q0B9 Ul w HCOCOOiOO'^COOT-IOOOOO.-ilM:C'COO(MC<»X rH(M5 ■ tO ^ -CO to ^ ZZ -05 • O O -CO ^ 1 ^ ‘ (h 1 CO COCO(NO'^C:'^asCCX'^CCClCC(M-^TtiOCOt>-^-^rHr-iCOO7 X io (?;, SSBp MUD Z q0B9 III % I? 6”^ •SSBp ’lUD qOB9 II I % •Aouanbajj pauiquioQ C O • X • O • X X • CO t- • O • l>. • c CO -IQ -lO CO -CO -X -»o o O O X O — :Oi— 'Xl>*OX''t''^COlC'itiJOi— tt'-COXX cocq(hxX'S“iot^K: t^xr. t^xiC'TCOi-i rHOOOCOOXr-^XX' »0 CO • ^ • O • O • • O "t^Xt^XO iLixC‘iotoc-o»r:cot^t^'^t-':r' iCi— icoTt'xococococC'rciCtooiioo X-i-H-X-X-lO lO X 1 O -io 1 CO -X • 1-H t^i-HiOwi— 'L^i— ICOCiOi— l-^iCCOiOXXw .L— JCSIr-IX'^C^liOC^'^t^XOlOOOCO X ■ t- X • X CO • to • O • X X CO l' •lO X 'O -X -X -X -X -tH O IJ' t- X X -w E- 1-H O I'- 1-1 O O :0 X X — I CO t- O (M q0B9 Ul % I H-l X.X -O X -O *f~ -o !>, O O-X X -X -O -O -O -CO -CO -lO • •■£ -X O 6"^ •ssiqo MUD ipB9 Ul % •ADuanbaaj pauiquioQ XXOOXOOOOt-OOt-l^Ol-Ot^OL-XXOl-XXXt-OOOX r-ii-HC0C0C0Tti'9'X'9't0.01D^OE0t^E0XXXC0XC0i— iCOi^ 0 .d X I- X X d -■ d X ^ *d X X d d d X td d ^ X X o ^ gi X ■:o*0 40iOio:o:C)Oco^D:c:c^OwL-t>-t'-t>-t>-i^L^t'-i>-i'^QCGCccaoyj-, ; I POLLOCK IN BAT OF FUND 7 123. SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a ■ 05 • I— • .’co -CO iO) ' • .o C5 IM X • • r-l r-l r-* • G; z z O • IN 1 : i ; r-l r-( 1— 1 CO -05 ■ • • O 'T' lO • X o fo n- X • • • 00 • X ’ X ■ ~r • — t c: C5 05 CO : . : ; • ; 1 •• ■ 1-H -t* rH ,H CO • 05 lO • ic m (N • • ; Ktl • • X CO (M X (N O • • X (N (M X (M X • • 05 05 CO X • • 1— ' • r: • rH X • y 05 X Tfi »0 O 'S' O t-H 04 rH .-1 ’ OO^'T'S'i— lOi— 1 ; X • • ■ • • ' ^ : ; ; : : : : o o X Total in caches xxcoxaocic:C5 124 DEPARTMEI^T OF THE NAVAL SERVICE POLLOCK IN BAY OF FUN BY SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Curves showing length frequencies of Polloch caught in Idllj., 1915 and 1916. The curves for 1914 and 1915 are constructed from measurements of the standard length and are based upon measurements on 1,250 fish in the case of the 1914 curve and in the case of the 1915 curve on 652 fish. The curve for 1916 is based on measurements of the total length of 1,168 fish. In order to compare it with the curves for 1914 and 1915 the whole curve has been moved to the left so that the mode which was at 80 cm. is at 72 cm. ?<■ ‘ •■■'^ '■' y-'-' ■' V;-. -vy'.V V"Vy 1 ■ . ^.v . O'X^ ^ ’^A ‘-.N'v ■■"r •'V..'F'y . -i’"; ■'5^ • ■■■ * .■N-V..-,i‘t - ' I' - [j^. ,V r- ;,.^\> ; v V r»\ '.■ :a-v . i»» !• 4$f‘ ; rZ.i^'r:iy ■ •■ •*.> . .>v - .' "■ -.V: ' V. kT , - ' v'.'- Vv;”'-' /I .■\ ‘-v/ ' '• i ,il ^ . --i ■,- . ;- : • .., .t,v. . ,t ifcy- ,»% ’ . .' ''ftT:'?'" -5- ■'!:■•■■■ '''V “r ,•>' '■•' ■ ,,>m' ■-■- '-‘•'■'i ' ■.’•y^'''/. ..■ -r'i S4.r ■• , , . . St.'.t-'ij: ^ -i ■ .«.,V '< •'• V- I •. :'SUS jv-'. ■ ■- a •■ I. ■,'.y>* -*• ■ ';'-j ;; . •4' I, .J^P' :, ■. ■.-■■ysey . ,, . , , ^^■■■••''4 y ’V’ ' ‘‘r*/ ,;.AV ■**■ :»V't :| ' ‘ ''; | ‘ ; ? y; S; j;V •<■ ■ ‘ ' . 'rri;- -• .; ,4 • ^ ■ • V : r i ^ ■r-. ■• • y yjs ^ V^'- * , ,:v ■ >..■ <^;'j • 'r '■ * . • . 4.^. * /*l j • 'fit'-iSk. ' / .. , . A.:..,,., , -W' • ' ... A* ''■iTi 8 GEORGE V SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a A. 1918 VII further hydrographic investigations in the bay of fundy. By E. Horne CRaigie^ B.A., University of Toronto and W. H. Chase, B.A., Acadia University. {With 25 figures and 1 map.) During the summer of 1914 a hydrographic section of the Bay of Fundy was made, a report of which appeared in the Contributions to Canadian Biology, 1914-1915.^ At the beginning of July, 1915, it was suggested that a considerable amount of dredg- ing should be done with a view to working out the fauna of the Bay of Fundy, and the opportunity was taken to combine with this work a repetition of the hydrographic observations made in the previous year and to extend them over the greater part of the Bay. It was thus possible to collect sufficient data to give a general idea of the conditions existing in the water of this important and interesting region. OBSERVATIONS MADE AND APPARATUS EMPLOYED. The work was carried out during two cruises in the month of July. The first of these enabled dredging to be carried on at twenty-four stations in St. Mary bay. Nova Scotia, and observations to be taken at stations I to IV in the Bay of Fundy — the stations which were established in 1914. The work of the second cruise comprised dredging at nine stations in the Annapolis basin and the establishment of two more cross-sections and a longitudinal section of the Bay of Fundy. In St. Mary bay and the Annapolis basin, the stations in which were numbered consecutively in Arabic numerals, temperatures and water samples were taken at the surface and at the bottom at each dredging station, largely for the sake of the connec- tion of these conditions with the fauna found. At all the Bay of Fundy stations, observations were made at the surface, at depths of 5 and 10 fathoms, and then at 10 fathom intervals to the bottom. In the table of data the records for the bottom have been put opposite the nearest depth in tens of fathoms. The exact depth of the obser- vation may be seen at a glance from the record of “ Depth ” near the top of the column for each station. The hydrographic data obtained in St. Mary bay and the Annapolis basin are tabulated here chiefly in order that they may be accessible when required, though few deducations can be made from them at present. At the Bay of Fundy stations V to XV, dredge hauls were taken; and at these and the Annapolis basin stations, surface plankton samples were also obtained. The apparatus employed was the same as that used in 1914, and has been des- cribed in the report of the work done in that year. The temperature of the air and of the surface water were taken by means of a delicate chemical thermometer, all other temperatures were determined by reversing thermometers. The temperatures at 5 and 10 fathoms at station III, and from 10 to 40 fathoms at station IV, were determined by a Negretti-Zambra thermometer, ^ all other temperatures below the surface by a Richter thermometer.^ The water samples were obtained by means of a Petterssen- 1 Craigie, E. Horne. “A Hydrographic Section of the Bay of Fundy in 1914.” 2 Magnaghi pattern frame, Negretti and Zambra thermometer No. 170664. 3 Laboratoire Hydrographique, Kobenhavn, Preisliste, 1914, No. 75, thermometer No. 164. 127 128 DEPARTMENT OF TEE NATAL BERTICE , 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Nansen water-bottle. A full description of both this water-bottle and the reversing thermometers may be found in. the section on hydrographic work in the report on the “ Investigation of the Bays of the Southern Coast of New Brunswick with a view to Their Use for Oyster Culture.”^ The temperatures read on the Eichter thermometer were all corrected for the expansion of the mercury column at the temperature at which the reading was made, and the corrected figures were recorded in the tables and used in constructing the temperature curves. All temperatures are in the centigrade scale. The densities and salinities of the y^ater samples were determined by W. H. Chase, but as he was called away by military duties, he was unfortunately prevented from completing the work.^ Such discrepancies between density and'oalinity in many cases were found in the records that it was considered necessary to repeat the analysis of the samples, and Professor Vachon of Laval University was so kind as to do this during the summer of 1916. Unfortunately, Prof. Vachon found that the water sam« pies must have altered by evaporation since they were collected, and it has accord- ingly been regretfully decided not to publish the data for the Bay of Pundy stations, but to confine this report to the temperature observations. The densities, salinities and chlorine contents of the samples from St. Mary bay, as determined by W. H. Chase, will be found in table III at the end of the report. LOCATION OF OBSERVATION STATIONS. The positions of all the stations are indicated on the accompanying map, on which the fifty and hundred fathom lines have also been inserted, giving an idea of - the conformation of the bottom of the Bay. The stations were located so as to give , as complete sections as possible, showing the conditions existing in the various parts of the water. In making the observations, the stations were found by the use of a log. ■ Stations I to IV are on a straight line drawn from East Quoddy Head, Campo- ' hello island, to Boar’s Head, Petit Passage, Long island, as follows: — ' Station 1 7 miles from East Quoddy Head. “ II.. 19 " III 27 IV 37 The remaining Bay of Bundy stations are located as follows I Station V. “ VI ” VII, “ VIII, “ IX. “ X. “ XI. “ XII. “ XIII. “ XIV. “ XV. 22 miles N.W. from Digby Gut. 8 ” S. from Partridge Island, St. John 1 Harbour. m ” S. from Partridge Island, St. John ( Harbour. 211 “ S. from Partridge Island, St. John ^ Harbour. 28 “ S. from Partridge Island, St. John \ Harbour. in “ E. from Station VII. 5 ” S. from Quaco Head.' 10^ “ “ “ 151 “ “ “ 20h “ “ “ If) ” S.E. by S. from Quaco Head. The distances are measured in geographical miles. 1 Mavor, Craigie, and Detweiler in “ Contributions to Canadian Biology, 1914-15.” I 2 The responsibility for the planning of the work, selecting the stations, etc., rests with i E. Horne Craigie, as does also the recording and working up of the temperature data, while i observations on density and salinity were in charge of W. H. Chase. The two workers colla- ; berated on the draft of the earlier part of this report, and on the preparation of the accom- panying map and some of the figures. Owing to Mr. Chase’s departure for the front, it has I been necessary to complete the report without his assistance or criticism. j HYDROGRAPHIC IRYE8TIGATI01Y8 129 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a DEDUCTIONS FROM DATA OBTAINED IN THE BAY OF FUNDY. A. — Temperature Curves. From the corrected data obtained at each station, a temperature curve has been drawn (figs. 1-15), and upon the basis of these curves four profiles have been con- structed representing respectively the three transverse sections and one longitudinal section of the Bay of Fundy. The discrepancies in depth at some stations shown by the curves and profiles are to be explained by the state of the tide when the observa- tions were made. The bottom conformation has been drawn as accurately as possible with the aid of charts. If the data for stations I to IV be compared with those recorded in August, 1914,^ it will be observed that, with the exception of the surface temperatures at stations II and IV, all the readings are considerably lower in the new observations, the bottom temperatures averaging 2.7° lower than in 1914. The range of temperatures between the surface and the bottom is thus much greater in 1915, the difference in the surface temperatures being comparatively little. These differences between the temperatures found in the two years are to be explained, no doubt, by the fact that the new observa- tions were taken six weeks earlier in the season than the old ones, when the heating effect of the summer sun and air had had less time to penetrate to the deeper water. Thus there is to be seen a very rapid fall of temperature in the layers of water near the surface (figs. 1-4). In this connection, it must be remembered that the heat con- ductivity of sea water is so slight as to be practically negligible. “ The heat conveyed by the sun to the uppermost water-layers cannot therefore be propagated into deep water by conduction, but only through movements of the water-waves, currents, con- vection ^ currents,’ etc.”^ The fact that the deeper water is heated so much in a period of six weeks must be attributed to the vertical mixing of the water by the great tides occurring in this region. Another effect of this vertical mixing by the strong tidal currents was referred to in the previous report, namely, the considerable areas of the same, or nearly the same temperature occurring at many of the stations. . This is most marked in the case of the stations farther up the Bay, the temperatures at stations X to XV (figs. 10-15) inclusive being practically constant between a depth of 5 fathoms and the bottom. The fact that this uniformity becomes more marked in the upper part of the Bay bears out the theory that the tides are responsible for it, the tides being greatest at the head of the Bay, w*hile the water there is shallower, so that the tides are likely to effect a more complete mixing of the mass of water. Helland-Hansen, generalizing upon the basis of temperature curves for four stations distributed over the Atlantic from the Faroe- Shetland channel to the Sargasso Sea says: “From the surface downwards the temperature falls very rapidly for the first hundred metres; at 100 metres it is 4° to 6° colder than at the surface. Beyond 100 metres the temperature decreases at first much more slowly. . . . The layers in which the temperature changes very rapidly are called ^discontinuity layers’ (by the Americans ‘ thermo dine,’ and by the Grermans ‘ Sprungschicht ’).”^ The curves obtained for the first four Bay of Fundy stations, i.e. those nearest the open Atlantic, (figs. 1-4) agree with these observations to an extent which seems little short of remarkable in shallow and enclosed water, especially where conditions are so peculiar as they are in the Bay of Fundy. Indeed it would hardly seem justifiable to consider the correspondence as more than a matter of chance were it not for the fact that it appears even more clearly in the curves for the same stations in August, 1914. The comparison is made particularly apt 1 Craigie, E. Horne. “A Hydrographic Section of the Bay of Fundy in 1914.” Contri- butions to Canadian Biology, 1914-1915. 2 Helland-Hansen in ” The Depths of the Ocean,” by Sir John Murray and Dr. Johan Hjort, p. 226. 3 “ The Depths of the Ocean,” p. 223. 130 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 by the fact that Helland-Hansen’s observations were made between June 24 and August 10 — at practically the same time of year as our own work. Wliile the density and salinity records are not being included in this report, for the reasons explained above, it is perhaps worth while remarking in this connection that the observed densities also correspond rather closely with the records obtained in the part of the open Atlantic near Nova Scotia by the Challenger expedition in May 1873. The surface densities for the Challenger stations 49 and 50 are, respectively, 1.02354 and 1.02451, the bottom readings for the same stations being 1.02400 and 1.02546. The depth at station 40 was only 85 fathoms, that at station 50 was 1,250 fathoms.^ The surface and bottom densities found at our stations I to lY were: — Station— I. n. m. iv. Surface '. 10242 10240 10239 10‘246 Bottom 10246 10250 10252 10252 The surface densities throughout the Bay varied from 10238 (stations YI and VII) to 10248 (station XIII). The bottom densities ran from 10244 (station X) to 10252 (stations III and IV). Thus it appears that the density of the waters of the Bay of Fundy corresponds quite closely with that of the neighbouring part of the Atlantic. Once more, no doubt, the thorough mixture brought about by the tides is to be held responsible for this, as it seems improbable that evaporation in the Bay of Fundy is nearly sufficient to counterbalance the influx of fresh water. Helland-Hansen remarks that the high surface temperature shown by his curves “is principally due to the absorption of heat rays from the sun. In places the water is heated by contact with warm air, but this source of heat is of less importance, the temperature of the surface water heing^ as a rule^ higher than the temperature of the air.”^ He makes no mention of the time of day at which his readings were made, which, of course, would greatly affect the air temperature — unless he refers to the mean air temperature of the day. All our observations, practically, were made in daylight, and in no case was the air less than 2.2° warmer than the surface water, while in most cases it was considerably more. It may be noted in passing that although three of Helland-Hansen’s four stations mentioned above are farther north than the Bay of Fundy, and all four are in the open Atlantic, his lowest surface temperature (that in the Faroe-Shetland channel) is 13 °C. — more than 1° higher than the highest reading obtained in the Bay of Fundy. In looking over the records of the Challenger observa- tions^ in July, 1873, it is' found that at 6 a.m. on the 16th of the month the air tem- perature was as much as 3°F. below that of the surface water in the harbour of Madeira; but in the majority of cases the air was warmer than the surface water. On the 15th the mean air temperature was 0.1° F. less than the mean surface water temperature, and on the 26th it was 0.5° F. less, but such cases are considerably in the minority. In May, 1873, when the Challenger was in this part of the Atlantic, only in a few cases again did the water temperature exceed the air temperature; and in no case was the mean surface water temperature for the day higher than the mean air temperature, until the 22nd of the month, when the ship had gone south to about the 40th parallel of north latitude. The temperature curves for stations I to lY do not show so clearB’’ as did those of 1914 the resemblance between stations II, III, and lY, and the distinct difference from these of station I. The curve for station I shows a peculiar rise in temperature between 40 and 70 fathoms. A similar, though smaller rise occurs at the same depth 1 Report on the Specific Gravity of Ocean Water, observed on board H.M.S. Challenger during the years 1873-76.” By J. Y. Buchanan, pp. 14 and 16. Report on the Scientific Results of the Voyage of II.M.S. Challenger, Phys. and Chem., Vol. I. 2 ” The Depths of the Ocean,” p. 225. (Tiie italics are due to the present writer.) 3 “ Meteorological Observations made during the voyage of H.M.S. Challenger, 1873-76.” Report on the Scientific Results of the Voyoge of H.M.S. Challenger, Narrative, Vol. II, 1882. E YD RO GRA PHIC INVESTIGATION !S 131 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a in station II and is represented in station III also, at a somewhat deeper point. This is evidently the effect of some current and its occurrence both in the Grand Manan Channel (station I) and at the two neighbouring stations in the open Bay would seem to suggest that it is tidal. It is to be regretted that there was not an opportunity tc make further observations with a view to elucidating this matter. It may be noted that in 1914 a similar, though smaller rise in temperature occurred at a depth of 60 fathoms at station II with the tide two-thirds flood, while in the present case it was one-half flood at the same station. At station I, where the irregularity is most marked, the tide was flood, while at the same station in 1914 no such irregularity was found with the tide one-third flood. Thus from the present limited data there is no indication that this condition occurs regularly at any particular state of the tide. A similar rise is to be seen at a depth of 20 fathoms at station IX (fig. 9). B. Pro-files. The profile for the section from East Quoddy Head to Petit Passage (fig. 16) shows no marked disagreement with that obtained in 1914. The cold water along the slope from Grand Manan found in 1914 does not appear in the new section. As before, the temperatures tend to be a little higher on the Nova Scotia side of the bay than on the New Brunswick side.^ The irregularities showing in the graphs, which were dis- cussed in the previous section are not represented in the profile. The water below 6°C. occupying most of this profile does not appear in that of the St. John to Digby section (fig. 17), and a similar position but less space is occupied by the water between 6.38° and 7°. The tendency of the water towards the Nova Scotia side to be warmer does not appear in this section. The profile from Quaco Head to Port Lome (fig 18), shows that the water below 7° has disappeared, and its place, though much less space, is taken by water between 7.9° and 8°. • From these three profiles it is easy to picture each successive layer of cold water running up the bay and gradually diminishing in extent until it finally dis- appears, its place being taken by the next layer. Of course, these remarks are not to be taken as meaning that the water is believed to be actually divided into distinct layers behaving thus. The longitudinal section from Cape Chignecto to station III (fig. 19) shows that the layers do not simply taper and fade away, but end rather suddenly, clearly sug- gesting that the water flows up the bay and the lower layers are continually retarded by friction with the bottom, though this appearance is probably due to tidal action. A peculiar condition appears between stations VII, X, and XII. The presence of warmer water at station VII might be attributed to warm water coming in from the Atlantic surface, passing along the south shore, and turning north about this region (see fig. 20), but the source of the cold water at station X is not so clear. It seems possible that as the warm surface water is turned north across the bay (fig. 20) the cold water belo^ goes on up the bay and so comes to the surface. It is most unfortunate that there was not time to make a complete transverse section through station X. Presumably the condition will be due to tidal action, but just how it is produced is not evident in the present state of our knowledge. II am informed by Dr. A. G. Huntsman that observations taken during the summer of 1916, nearer the shore on each side, showed this much more markedly, so that the isotherms should really dip quite rapidly near the coast in this profile. His observations appear to indicate a current entering at the mouth of the bay and passing up the Nova Scotia side, producing a corresponding current in an outward direction on the New Brunswick side. A somewhat similar condition, with peculiar tidal changes, was demonstrated in the St. Croix River by Craigie in 1914. (Craigie, E. Horne. “Hydrographic Investigations in the St. Croix River and Passama- quoddy Bay in 1914,” Contributions to Canadian Biology, 1914-1915.) 132 DEPARTMEl:^T OF TEE EAYAL 8ERYIGE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 C. R orizonial Distribution of Temperature. In the hope that more light might thereby he thrown on the subject, three maps have been constructed, showing the distribution of temperature in the surface water (fig. 20) and at depths of ten fathoms and thirty fathoms respectively (figs. 21 and 22). As pointed out above, figure 20 shows an indication of an influx of warm surface water, which passes along the south shore and then turns across the bay (see foot note on page 131). If this represents a current in this direction, however, the deeper water should be colder than on the other side, as it must come in from the cold Labrador current, and we have already seen that the results both seasons tend rather the other way. Figures 21 and 22 show no sign of such a circulation, but rather eombine with the four profiles to indicate a simple tongue of cold water up the middle of the bay. The cold area on the slope of Grand Manan in the 1914 profile especially supports this. There is nothing at ten fathoms corresponding in any way to the area of colder water appearing at the surface of station X (8-46° surface temperature) and points east of it, nor does the conformation of the shore appear to suggest any satisfactory explana- tion. That proposed at the end of the previous section appears to be the only one at present. The isolated area of warmer water east of Grand Manan (station II) in fig. 20 does not seem to be explicable on the basis of the present data either. The probable position of the 10° C. isotherm along the north shore is indicated by a broken line, although, of course, there are not sufficient data to locate this properly. DEDUCTIONS FROM DATA OBTAINED IN ST. MARY BAY. From the data obtained in St. Mary bay (table II) a plan of the distribution of temperature in the surface water of that bay has been drawn (fig. 23). It shows a rather uniform arrangement with gradually increasing temperature as one passes up the bay from Petit Passage, the shape of the isotherms suggesting that there may be a current up each side with a reverse current down the middle. Immediately below Petit Passage the effects of the tremendous tidal currents through that channel are visible, producing a rather complicated arrangement of the isotherms, due apparently to several interfering cross-currents. The arrangements of the water must, of course, vary very greatly at different states of the tide and the fact that all the observations must be taken at different times makes it improbable that the diagram represents such a condition as ever exists at any one time. It has been thought worth while also to include a diagram representing a longi- tudinal section of St. Mary bay (fig. 24), although it must be fully recognized that such a profile, constructed from temperature data taken at the surface and the bottom only, is of a very tentative nature. The figure shows gradual and apparently rather uniform rise of temperature as one passes up the bay, just such as might be expected, the colder area at the surface of station 15 being the only indication of the cross-cur- rents suggested by the surface diagram (fig. 23). No doubt if temperatures at inter- mediate depths had been taken, more might have been seen. The relations of the cold water appearing at the bottom of stations 13 and 15 are shown by fig. 25, which repre- sents a line carried down the bay from station 13 somewhat farther west than the line in fig. 24. It is seen that this cooler water is spread out sideways from a layer which probably approaches the surface about the mouth of the bay, and occupies almost the whole depth at station 22. It will be noted that, the bay being rather shallow through- out, the temperatures are all comparatively high. The bottom temperatures in the Annapolis basin (stations 26-33, table II) are peculiar in being much lower in m^any cases (especially station 31) than any water entering from the river (station 33) or any present in Digby Gut (station 25). summary. This set of observations is a continuation and extension of that made in 1914. The stations have been selected in such a way as to form three transverse sections and HYDROGRAPHIC IHYESTIGATIORS 133 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a one longitudinal section of the hay of Fundy, thus making it possible to get a fairly clear idea of the temperature distribution in this interesting body of water by exam- ining the profiles constructed and the accompanying diagrams showing the horizontal distribution of temperature at the shallower-levels. ' The observations made at the stations where work was carried on in 1914 show little difference in surface temperature, but markedly colder water below. The fact that a seasonal difference of only six weeks makes such a great difference in the tem- perature of the deep water shows how great is the effect of vertical mixing due to the very great tides. This effect is also seen in the large areas of very uniform tempera- ture found in both years. The results obtained at stations near the mouth of the bay show an interesting agreement with observations made by Helland-Hansen in the open Atlantic. The state- ment of this investigator that the temperature of the surface water is, as a rule, higher than the air temperature is not borne out by the Bay of Fundy observations, nor by those of the Challenger expedition in this region of the Atlantic. A slight rise of temperature at an intermediate depth, seen in three stations near the mouth of the bay, gives evidence of deep currents, but no data are available from which definite information concerning these can be obtained. There is a clear indication that the water on the Nova Scotia side of the lower part of the bay is, on the whole, warmer than on the New Brunswick side, and the plan of the surface temperatures suggests a current of warm surface water from the Atlantic fiowing in along the south shore and then turning north about half way up the bay, so that its influence is not visible in the higher profiles. All the other evidence, however, indicates a simple tongue of cold water up the middle of the bay. Several points with regard to the surface temperatures remain unexplained. The plan of distribution of temperature in the surface water of St. Mary bay shows a rather uniform increase of temperature in the upper part of the bay, with indications of certain currents and tidal disturbances. The longitudinal profile, which is based upon insufficient data, gives no suggestion of any peculiar or striking condi- tions. In conclusion, it remains only to express our indebtedness to Dr. Philip Cox, who accompanied us on both cruises, and Mr. J. E. McMurrich, who joined the party on the second, as well as to Dr. A. B. Macallum, Dr. C. C. Benson, and Dr. A. G. Hunts- man for valuable assistance and criticism. We are also deeply indebted to Professor Vachon, Laval University, for the trouble he took in re-titrating the water samples. TABLE T — Temperature Records for Bay of Fundy Stations in 1915. 134 jjepartment of the natal service 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 AX July 29 12.15 P.M.- 1.10 P.M. Sand. 34 F. 1 Flood. 12-34° 10 10° 9-54° 9-54° 9-54° 9 54° AIX 1 , • o D o 0 J 0 • . ^gjOOQOCCOOCO : ; . . IIIX .T3OO0OOOO ! : r ^ .-I fl 2 1-1 E 20 GO 30 00 OO 00 . 13 1-1 ■< t-r :/2 loic TIX .9 ‘^§t-(N00 3;05C. . •“5 HM XI. ^ • rM^I • .^ooooooo §g«g-g f-< gK3Srt5!55 ; “Ei;oi>i:«iooo ; -t CO X. oc • rvi 1 .Gi..'rtooOooooo sh gor. rfioocicocoocoo t>l>. Hico IX. C^J • r\i 1 • •'Coooooo .0 ^ot^l^CQ^OiC^ .CO -llo-l VIII. OCJ rtOMiOOOOi-i(MOO 1 ^coSi3>^..OC^2^'^20l^iOT)HCC gio^i:- ^ HCO IV. 1 20 .• 1 1— t 1 ^ . ..; o 0 o o o 1 lO •Oi^'T3^Ci.j'5'^20o go 0 O 1— IQOCO a cS'^-Q(MCOK5COi-rH(NGOt-t- 2 ^ ^ L t- lb Ill CO 1—1 .. «Oo ooooo o -Oi— It-! Ctio'^'^o o (Na5C505C5 2 (M t>- (M t-l O O to »0 ■^’cO Sp^^005?OCCilOiOlOlO o i— to o o o r(- -I- o CO CO CO to I'o tO 1-1 .. .'Coooo ooooo f“8gs^^88$gs ^ -HiCl ■'J' ooooooo '”'5 • o i-t -rf E 'O o ?D t-. tO °0 ^ CO ?D 00 ^ ^20|^jgp3 C ^ O'-'OOOiOi-t^t^COOt^ -T; 2 1 ' i-i E — -2 O 35 X t'- to to ?D CO to ^,_hp^ ^J2 copct’-' CO to Station. ; • • " • , rr ‘O O C O O O O O . • • •■£''" rH CO TO to CO t- ; :5=« . • . • (t3 0) " " " • ti ii ■ . • . • 0/ O • •eg s - : 5: j 0,0/ 2 4jg — =: = : = r = r c3 . O ^ • S 1; P,fr^ pq " It 75 F o 00 o 35 M „ 100 F . . I. „ 114 F Table II. — Temperatures in St. Mary Bay and Annapolis Basin in 1915. (“Centigrade.) HYDROGRAPHIC INVESTIGATIONS 135 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a d 1-5 CO ^ dH HCC’-I 22. July 13 6.55 A.M. Rock. 19-5 F. i Flood. 11-sr 9 63° 8-09° 33. 1 "S r ^ ^ 1 o July 7 4.35 P.M. Sand. 2-5 F. ^ Flood. 14 05° 11-39° 10-77° 1 2 ^ ° °- I O 2 S'-! ^ O h-5 or: (M 1—1 1 lO 1 1 d CO ^ p&l ^ « rH "3 ^ 00 ^ t- d d HKf^rHrH c: July 8 8.50 A.M. Sand. 18 F. k Ebb. 15-00° 12-79° 8-G8° 1 20. July 13 10.30 A.M. Sand. 28 F. 1 Flood. 13-54°* 10 09° 8-34° 31. 1 >,<13 3 0 (M 05 1 .^0 ^ lOM • • • 1 1-5^- 00 ooS . ... . . >.<--SfcSg§8 1 OO* [ 19. .- •T3 0 O o ' J Oi! O ® O 1 >-1 ’-1 .S.OH'iSlSSS G July 13 11.15 A.M. Rock. 26 F. 1 Flood 15-67° 10-48° 8 ■69" 28. J uly 24 9.05 A.M. Mud & shell. 7 F. Flood. 16 32° 9-41° 8-54° la 1 t- ^ - ° ° 1 1 -wo ^ , • I— 1 rH ' 00 16. 1 . . ,o . . (M 27. ! T3 0 d CO 1 OOr-CC l_^ J/J '-^'CrH rH co' j July 7 1.45 P.M. Gravel. 15 5 F. Ebb. 15 •GO- 13 -95° 11-37° 15. July 8 11.45A.M. Rock. 18-5 F. 1 Ebb. 15-65° 10 12" 8-44° j 1 July 23 10.15 A.M. Mud. 6 F. k Ebb. 15-57° 11-14° !)05° CO July 7 12.10 P.M. Mud. 14 5 F. 1 Ebb. °-i ■ O CO CO r— 1 . ^H 1 ! CO • pq .jf 0 c 'o io ^ i£or§05'^^<^G i-O . Ph mKiH o 25, 00 g dii[V-d°'5 0COO >;Ph 0 ^ 2 X ^ CO txi ^^C§«H^-05 05 * d 1 oi 1 1 July 7 10. .30 A.M. Mud. 7 F. 4 Ebb. • 0 o • 00 "M t^CO • CO iL • r— 1 rH 1 w 1 ! ^ X r o 0 ! o ^ 'io 1 t-5 0 ^ rnterH i-H (M July 13 8-15 A.M. Rock. 8-5 F. g Flood. 12-09° 10-9.3° 10-29° . ^ 1 j July 7 11.15A.M. Mud. 4F. § Ebb. ■ c o 00 rfH ^ CO 12. July 8 10.20 A.M. Rock. 14 -5 F. i Ebb. 15-58° 12 80° 8-29° 23. OO . 0 R 0 *0 !M 5 0 Station. Date Time Bottom. Depth Tide .ciir Lemperature Surface Temperature Bottom Temperature Station. 1 Date Time Bottom . . .* Depth Tide Air Temperature.. Surface Temperature. . Bottom Temperature Station. Date ... Time Bottom Depth Tide... Air Temp Surface Temperature. Bottom Temperature 15 Fathom Temperature.. .. 38a— 10 136 BEPARTME'NT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Table III. — Specific Gravity, Chlorine Content, and Salinity of Water Samples from Bottom of St. Mary Bay Stations in 1915. Station. Sp. Gt. at 15-56° C. % Chlorine. % Total Salts. Station. Sp. Gt. at 15-56°C. % Chlorine. % Total Salts. 1 10243 1-817 3-276 13 10248 1-832 3-304 2 (1-819) (3-280) 14 10249 1-842 3-322 3 10248 1-825 3-291 15 10249 1-849 3-334 4 10247 1-833 3-306 16 10247 1-840 3-318 5 10247 1.832 3-304 17 10248 1*845 3 327 6 10248 1-835 3-309 18 10245 1 835 3 309 7 10248 1-835 3 309 19 10247 1-855 3-346 8 10247 1 831 3-302 20 1U247 1 869 3-370 9 10248 1-842 3-322 21 10248 1-866 3-365 10 10248 1-842 3 322 22 10245 1-861 3-354 11 10246 1-841 3-319 23 10249 1-857 3 347 12 10249 1-836 3 311 24 10248 1-861 3-353 The density of each water sample was determined at room temperature by means of a delicate hydrometer, and corrected to read at 15.56° C. by Buchanan^s Diagram.^ The methods of analysis and of calculating the salinity were those of Dittmar.^ 1 Report on the Scientific Results of the Voyage of H.M.S. Challenger. Physics and Chemistry, Vol. I, 1884. J. Y. Buchanan. “ Report on the Specific Gravity of Samples of Ocean Water observed on board H.M.S. Challenger, during the years 1873-76.” Diagram 1. William Dittmar. ” Report on Researches into the Composition of Ocean Water col- lected by H.M.S. Challenger during the years 1873-76.” pp. 4 and 40. Figs. 1-4. Temperature curves for stations I. to IV. respectively. 38a— lOi Figs. 11-15. Temperature curves for stations XI. to XV. respectively. ff, % 8 GEORGE V SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a A. 1918 Figs. 16. Isothermal profile for section of Bay of Fundy from East Quoddy Head to Petit Passage. “ 17. Isothermal profile for section of Bay of Fundy from St. John to Digby. “ 18. Isothermal profile for section of Bay of Fundy from Quaco Head to Port Lome. “ 19. Isothermal profile for longitudinal section of Bay of Fundy from Cape Ohignecto to station III. Fig. 20. The Bay of Bundy, showing temperatures of the surface water. Fig. 22. The Bay of Fundy, showing temperatures of the water at a depth of 30 fathoms. Fig. 23. St. ]\fary Bay, showing temperatures of the surface water. Figs. 24 and 25. Longitudinal isothermal profile of Sf. Mary Bay. ' \ A 1918 I SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a 38a— 10b SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a A. 1918 f 8 GEORGE V VIII. EXAMINATION OF AFFECTED SALMON, MIRAMICHI HATCHERY, NEW BRUNSWICK. By F. C. BL4RRISON-, D.Se., F.R.S.C., etc., Principal of ilacdouald College, Ste. Anne de Bellevue, P.Q. On October 11, 1915, I received a telephone message from Dr. A. B. Macallum Secretary-Treasurer of the Biological Board of Canada, with reference to a diseased condition of the salmon in the hatchery at South Esk, X.B. He also informed me tnat Dr. Huntsman, of the L niversity of Toronto, was leaving in order to investigate the trouble, and if I thought it wise to do so I could join him and proceed to the Latchery. I got into telephonic communication with Dr. Huntsman on his passing through ifontreal, and after discussing the situation thought it best to remain at the labor- atory to examine the diseased fish that Dr. Huntsman would send me in order that I night investigate the disease, for it seemed better to attempt the finding out of the trouble with all bacteriological facilities to hand, which would have been lacking at the hatchery, and which at that time it was impossible to take there. Retaining Pond at the Miramichi Hatchery, South Esk, N.B. On October 14, I received a copy of the letter which Dr. Macallum received from ne Deputy Minister of the Department of Xaval Service, readiner for the methods which were subsequently used for the inoculation of the live gold fish. Before the gold fish could be inoculated it was necessary to work out in some detail the various organisms which were isolated from the salmon. The principal biological and cultural characteristics of those were as follows : — A. 1. A medium sized bacillus with rounded ends, occasionally bent, which occurs singly and sometimes in short chains. Actively motile, stains well with methylene blue, and is gram negative. [ Gelatine Plates: — I hourSj colonies just visible to the naked eye. I J^8 hours, colonies 2 mm. in diameter, round, with a liquefying centre saucer- ^ shaped. Centre of the colony dense with a mass of deposited bacteria, j With § objective edges of the colony seemed slightly fimbriate, and the mass 1 within the centre might be seen moving. 3 days^ colonies had grown to between 5 and 9 mm. in diameter, but with similar appearance to that at 48 hours. Jf. days^ geletine completely liquefied. Gelatine Stick: — Growth is best at the top. Line of puncture filiform. hours, Liquefaction begins, extending to the sides of tube and about 2 mm. in depth. Ji8 hours, growth uniform, line of puncture a cloudy area 10 mm. in diameter with small outgrowths into gelatine forming a cloudy cylinder. At the surface ; liquefaction is stratiform to a depth of 4 mm. j 3 days, the growth has increased, stratified liquefaction extended to a depth I of 7 mm. and the cloudy area looks like a saccate cylinder, j 8 days, liquefaction to a depth of 8 mm. I 10 days, there is a distinct dark stratum underneath the liquefied area. I 13 days, very slight increase. Beef Peptone Agar, Jf8 hours: — I Colonies 1-2 mm. diameter, round, raised, entire edge, glistening white apx>earance. With the § objective the edges were entire, colonies dense, and grandular with a narrow clear margin. 3 days, colonies 2-5 mm. diameter, round, more massive and dense, convex, whiteish to light brown in centre. 38a— 11 154 DEPARTMEIiT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 | Sloped Beef Peptone Agar, Blood Heat (37.5): — | Little change after three days’ growth. The organism grew fairly well at blood heat. ! 24 hours, spread over about half the sloped surface. ' . hours, growth denser, spreading, flat, glistening, smooth, semi-opaque.: whitpish. No further change. Glucose Agar Slope: — 24 hours, at room temperature, smooth, vigorous, whitish, moist and spread- ing. Cloudiness near the growth. 5 days, colony more cloudy, considerable gas production and the column of agar is burst apart in the middle. Glucose Agar Shck:—24 hours. Growth vigorous over surface and pronounced! cloudiness from the surface to a depth of 10 mm. I 48 hours. Increase in growth and a few gas bubbles appear on the line of puncture. No further change occurs. Beef Broth: — 24 hours, strong, cloudy. S days, much heavier. Sediment flocculent. 7 days, yellowish-green appearance in the upper layer otherwise no change. iJunhams's Solution: — The organism grew well in Dunham’s solution, and at the end of 5 days at room temperature was tested with Ehrlich test, allowed to stand 20 minutes and- the results then recorded. This organism was negative to this test. No Indol. Milh:— \ 24 hours, no change. ! 3 days, coagulated with extrusion of slight amount of whey. 5 days, curd has become firmer, and a cheesy smell developed. I 7 days, slightly more whey extruded; « No other change, although observed for some twenty days. Litmus Milh : — 24 hours, no change. | 48 hours, no change in constituency, but colour is changed to avellaneous.M 5 days. Colour uniform, slight digestion with separated whey, soft curd, : yellowish ring around glass, smell disagreeable. 3 weeks.— Card still undigested, whey yellowish, yellow ring, curd avellaneus, ! few gas bubbles on shaking. ; Potato : — ! 24 hours. Moderate, dry, slightly raised, cream-coloured growth. | 48 hours Increase of growth, dry, raised, slightly rugose, cream-yellow colour. | 6 days. Abundantly raised, massive, rugose growth, cream colour at margins and * pinkish on top. Odour unpleasant and slightly pungent, resembling that on j milk. I 8 weeks. No change. ! A. 2. I Small bacillus with rounded ends, short, often in pairs, actively motile, stains well with methylene blue, and is gram negative. j 1 Chromotaxia sen Nomenclator Coloriion. P. A. Saccardo. AFFECTED SALMON, MIRAMWHI HATCHERY 155 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Gelatine Plates: — hours. Colonies just visible to the naked eye. Jt8 hours. Colonies have attained a size of 2-3 mm. in diameter; round, saucer- j'p shaped. In the centre a dense mass of deposited bacteria with liquefying area around. With § objective interior of the colony is glumose. Edges clearer, but less distinct than A. 1. 3 days. In moderately seeded plates there is complete liquefaction. : Gelatine SticTc: — i ,i - ~ -tst - | hours. Growth uniform. Line of punctures a cloudy area 5 mm. in diameter 8 along line. Liquefaction begins in 24 hours, extending to sides of tube and 3 mm. in depth. Jf8 hours Increase in growth with similar appearance, and stratified liquefaction to a depth of 5 mm. Liquefaction gradually increases, i days. 10 mm. deep and the remainder of the tube saccate liquefies. 6 days. Liquefaction to a depth of 4 cm. 10 days. Liquefaction of the gelatine in the tube complete. Beef Peptone Agar: — ^ hours room temperature. Colonies 1-2 mm. in diameter, raised, glistening, whitish colony by reflected and greenish opalescent by transmitted light. With i objective edges entire, centre granular with a clear hyaline margin all around- . S days. Not much increase in size, but more in density. Colony becoming whiter and more convex, somewhat resembling a yeast colony. Beef Peptone Agar, at 37° C.: — Very slight growth at ^ hours, after which there was no further growth. Glucose Agar Slope: — 2^ hours. Abundant, flat, slightly spreading, smooth, moist, whitish growth Ao further change noticed until about second week, when the agar becomes brownish beneath the slope. Glucose Agar Stick: — 21^ hours. Growth filiform on surface, thin and spreading. Hot characteristic. It8 hours. ■ Gas bubble on surface and below- Afterwards no further .change. Beef Broth: — 21i- hours, strong clouding, which increases, with abundant sediment. Ho further change. Dunham's Solution: — 5 days, at room temperature; tested with Ehrlich’s reagents; allowed to stand for 20 minutes and then recorded. Ho Indol. \mh:— I ^ 2 If hours. Ho change. . \ 3 days. Coagulated with extrusion of slight amount of whey. 5 days; Curd becomes firmer, and cheesy smell develops- i ^ Amount of whey increases up to seventh day, after which there is no further , change. , j 38a— llj ,1 156 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Litmus Milk : — | 2Ji. hours. No change. ' j Jf8 hours. No change in colour or consistency; on shaking numerous small gas ! bubbles appear and form a foam on surface. j 6 days. Coagulated, moderately firm curd, liliacinus in colour. About a quarter j of the tube is whey, and much darker in colour (atro-violaceus). 3 weeks. There is a reddish ring at the surface, considerable digestion, whey ' occupying three-quarters of the tube, isabellinus in colour. Curd flocculent, ; avellaneus; odour slightly cheesy. Lotato: — 2Ii. hours. Growth moderate, filiform, slightly raised, cream-yellow colour. This ; increases, and in 6 days growth is moderate, raised, rugose, moist, shiny; dirty cream-yellow, j darker in centre where growth is most massive. 1 3 weeks. No further change. Medium-size bacillus with rounded ends, resembles A. 1 in appearance. Active j motile, stains well with methylene blue, and is gram negative. | Gelatine Plates: — | 21^ hours. Just visible to the naked eye. Growth rapid. I Ji8 hours. Colonies are 2-5 mm. in diameter, round. Liquefaction saucer-shaped, | inner ring dense, caused by deposited bacilli. With t objective the edges of 1 the colonies are fimbriate centre grumose and flocculent. Masses of the bacteria can be seen in movement. ;j 3 days. Colonies increase to 12 mm. in diameter, saucer-shaped liquefaction, jj whitish in centre, more transparent at the margin. To the naked eye the edges are entire, but with a microscope slightly fimbriate. There is a cheesy ’ smell on opening the plates. s Jf days. Plates are liquefied. Gelatine Stick: — 2U hours. Kesembles A. 1, but slightly less growth. _ ^ ^ ;| J^8 hours. Line of bacteria is filiform, smooth on surface. Liquefaction strati- -j form, 4 mm. deep. Liquefaction continues. |j 10 days. Liquefaction is 1 cm. deep with medium beneath darker in colour, but < clear. j Jgar Plates: — Ji8 hours. Colonies are 1-3 mm. in diameter, round, raised, yellowish-white. With § objective edges are entire, dark in centre, granular, gradually becoming lighter to margin, which is clear. 3 days. Colonies are round, white, edges entire, brownish in centre. Convex. ^ days. No change. Agar Slope, 37° C.:— 2Jf hours. Very slight growth, filiform. 7 days. No further change. Glucose Agar Slope, 20°: — A spreading, fiat, white, shiny growth; agar beneath very cloudy. Cream yellow. No gas. AFFECTED SALMON, MIRAMICEI HATCHERY 157 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Glucose Agar Stick: — Growth filiform, spreading; cream colour at centre, lighter at margins. Cloudy to half-way down the agar. Beef Broth: — 2If. hours. Clouding moderate. Sediment. 3 days. Growth heavier, slight pellicle. 5 days. Ring and pellicle. 7 days. Yellowish-green colour in upper layers. Subsequently no change. Dunham's Solution: — Grown for five days at room temperature, tested with Ehrlich test, allowed to stand 20 minutes and then recorded. No Indol. Milk:— Fifth day. No change until the fifth day, when there is coagulation with soft curd, cheesy odor. Curd gradually becomes harder and the whey greenish in colour. Digestion takes place to about half the volume. Litmus Milk: — The colour is gradually bleached and in 1^8 hours is avellaneus. 5 days. Coagulation takes place in 5 or 6 days, a soft, fine curd which gradually digests. Blue ring at the top; separated whey is isabellinus in colour. 3 weeks. Greenish-blue colour; whey thick, curd avellaneus, odour unpleasant. Potato: — 2Jf hours. Growth moderate, raised, filiform, cream-yellow in colour. Jf8 hours. Growth becomes dirty and ochraceus, slightly rugose. Growth gradu- ally changes to ferrugineus in colour. 3 weeks. No change. A. 4. A small bacillus, short, rather stout, with rounded ends. In appearance resembles A. 2. Actively motile, stains well with methylene blue, and is gram negative. Gelatine Plates: — hours. Just visible to the naked eye. J^8 hours. Colonies punctiform (less than 1 mm.) white and glistening, with f objective they are seen to be round, with entire edges, and granular. 3 days. Colonies slightly punctiform, Avhite, glistening, convex, capitate. With § objective edges entire and granular. No further change. Gelatine Stick: — 2If. hours. Growth unifrom, line of bacteria filiform. Ji8 hours. Growth filiform to villous. Four gas bubbles on line of bacteria. 3 days. There is more growth. Line of bacteria villous to papillate. 10 days. Slight depression at the point of puncture may be noticed, but no lique- faction. 13 days. Liquified area around the line of puncture. 158 DEPARTME'NT OF THE ^AYAL EERYICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Agar Plates: — hours. Colonies are filiform, glistening, raised. With § objective the colonies are round, dense in centre, and granular, clearer at margin, edges entire. 3 days. Colonies slightly larger, opalescent, white. No further change. Gelatine Agar Slope at 37° C; — Little, if any, growth observed. Continuous observation for 7 days. Glucose Agar Slope: — Growth moderate, moist, shiny, slightly raised, whitish. 3 weeks. Agar is brown beneath the slope. Glucose Agar Stick: — Growth filiform, thin surface, growth spreading. Gas bubbles along line of punc- ture. No further change except the agar becomes brown beneath the surface to a depth of 1-2 cm. Beef Broth: — hours. Slight clouding and sediment. 3 days. Clouding and sediment increase slightly. No further change. Dunham/ s Solution: Grown for five days at room temperature, tested with Ehrlich test, allowed to stand 20 minutes and then recorded. Indol positive. Milk:— 5 days. No change visible. 6 7 days. On shaking tube a gassy foam rises to the surface. 10 days. Milk had coagulated, hard curd, whitish whey. Litmus Milk: — No change in appearance in hours. 48 hours. Abundant gas which rises to the surface in small bubbles. This was noticed each day up to the sixth day, and the foam was very heavy. The milk gradually coagulates and forms a blue ring down one side of the tube, remainder is a firm curd adhering to the tube. Bleached cream colour. Potato: — 24 hours. Moderate growth, filiform, slightly moist, cream coloured. 48 hours. Becomes slightly rugose. 6 days. Growth slight, slightly raised, and a dirty yellow (melleus). 3 weeks. No further change. B. 1. This organism on examination was found to resemble in all respects A. 1. B. 2. A small size bacillus about times as long as wide, rounded end, frequently in pairs. Actively motile, stains well with methylene blue, negative with gram. AFFECTED SALMON, MIRAMICEI HATCHERY 159 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a' Gelatine Plates: — hours. Visible to the naked eye. hours. Punctiform, colony raised, glistening, whitish. § objective shows round, dense, granular colony, entire edges. No further change. Gelatine Stich: — 2J/. hours. Growth uniform, round, filiform; no liquefaction. Jf8 hours. Growth uniform, no liquefaction to surface. 3 days. Slight depression at the boint of bacteria. No liquefaction. Agar plates: — J[f8 hours. Uniform, 1 m.m. in diameter, round, glistening, colony. With | object- ive round, dense, shading to lighter; granular, edges entire. 3 days. Colonies are glistening and bluish white. No further change. Agar slope 37° C. : — 7 days. Very slight growth, one or two small colonies appearing on the surface but otherwise no change. Glucose Agar Slope: — Moderate growth, spreading, flat, moist and whitish. JfS hours. A few gas bubbles appear and slight increase in growth. 3 weeks. Agar is brown underneath the slope. Glucose Agar Stick: — Filiform, slight growth on surface, gas bubbles along line oi puncture. No further change except for browning of the agar underneath the surface. Beef broth: — 24 hours. Moderate growth, moderate sediment. 3 days. Growth slightly heavier. 5 days. Clearing. No further change. Dunham's Solution: — Grown for five days at room temperature, tested with Ehrlich test, allowed to stand 20 minutes and then recorded. Indol positive. Litmus Milk : — 24 hours. No change. 48 hours. A fine foam on the surface when tube is shaken. Colour liliaceous, no ' coagulation. 6 days. Much gas in foam form. , No coagulation. Colour liliaceous. Colour I gradually bleaches. Blue ring forms on surface. Bluish whey but little digestion. Potato : — 24 hours. Filliform, dry, raised, colour niveus. 6 days. Growth becomes slightly raised and more massive. 3 weeks. No change. B. 3 Kesembles in all respects A. 4- 160 DEPARTME^^T OF THE NAVAL SERVICE B. 4. 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Resembles in all respects A. C. 1. Small to medium bacillus about twice as long as broad, slightly rounded ends. Actively motile, stains somewhat unevenly with methylene blue, gram negative. Gelatine Plates: — 2If. hours. Colonies visible to the naked eye. hours. Colonies punctiform, round, white, raised and glistening. § obje<3tiYe round, evenly dense and granular with entire edges. No further change. Gelatine Stick: — Growth uniform, line of puncture filiform, 4 gas bubbles along line of puncture. 10 days. Depression at the point of puncture. 13 days. Line of bacteria has liquefied. Agar Plates: — JfS hours. Colonies are punctiform, 1-1-| mm. in diameter, round, raised, white, glistening. With § objective colonies are round, dense in centre, clear margins, granular, entire edges. No further change. Agar, 37° C.:— 2Ji hours. Moderate growth, flat, slightly spreading, smooth and translucent. No further change. Glucose Agar Slope: — Flat, moist, spreading, whitish growth, few gas bubbles. No further change except browning of the agar beneath surface. Glucose Agar Stick: — 2It. hours. Filiform, growth spreading on surface. Ji8 hours. Few gas bubbles along line of puncture. No further change. Beef Broth: — 2If hours. Moderate clouding, flocculent, abundant sediment. 5 days. Clearing. No further change. D unham" s Solution: — Grown for five days at room temperature, tested with Ehrlich test, allowed to stand 20 minutes and then recorded. Indol positive. Litmus Milk: — 2k hours. No change. Jf8 hours. Slight amount of gas, colour somewhat lighter, no coagulation. 6 days. Much gas in foam form. No. coagulation. Colour liliaceous. Subsequently milk coagulates, blue ring, surface clear, whey on one side, curd adhering to two- thirds of the tube; bleached to a cream colour and of firm consistency. AFFECTED ^ALMOX, MIRAMICHI HATCHERY 161 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Potato : — Slightly raised, moderate growth, cream-yellow. 3 weeks. No further change. D. 1. Medium-size bacillus, with slightly rounded ends, actively motile, stains well with methylene blue, gram negative. Gelatine Plates: — Colonies visible to the naked eye in hours. 48 hours. Uniform, round, white, glistening colony; § objective round, granular, dense to the edge, edges entire. 3 days. Colonies become more dense. Convex. No further change. Gelatme Stick: — 48 hours. Line of puncture is villous. Slight softening of the gelatine on the surface. Subsequently growth along line of puncture becomes villous to papillate, soften- ing gradually extending along line of puncture. Agar Plates: — 48 hours. Punctiform to 1 mm. in diameter, round, white, raised, glistening colony; § objective colonies round, dense in centre to clear margin, granular, edges entire. 3 days. Slight increase in sizes; otherwise no change. Agar slope, 37° C.: — — No growth at this temperature. Glucose Agar Slope: — Moist, flat, spreading, whitish growth. Agar becomes brown beneath the growth, but no further change. Glucose Agar Stick: — Line of puncture filiform, spreading on surface, three or four small bubbles appear in 48 hours and slight increase in growth ; otherwise no change except browning under growth. Beef Broth: — 24 hours. Growth moderate, sediment moderate and flocculent. 5 days. Clearing. No further change. Dunham's Solution: — Grown for five days at room temperature, tested with Ehrlich test, allowed to stand 20 minutes and then recorded. Indol positive. Litmus Milk: — 24 hours. No apparent change, but on tapping the tube small gas bubbles rise to the surface. 48 hours. Gas more pronounced. Colour liliaceous. 6 days. Foamy gas. No coagulum. Colour liliaceous. 3 weeks. Blue ring on surface cleared away along one side, remainder firm curd adhering to the tube. Bleached cream colour. 162 DEPARTMEI^T OF THE 'NAYAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918^ J^otato : — Moderate growth, raised, rugose, waxy, cream yellow in colour. E. 1., E. 2. and E, 3. Resemble A. 1. F. 1. Medium size bacillus with rounded ends. Actively motile. On staining with methylene blue there are two or three dark granules in most of the organisms. Gram negative. Gelatine plates : — 2Jf. hours. Just visible to the naked eye. Round, white, glistening, t object- ive brown, edges entire, granular. Subsequent liquefaction. Gelatine Stick: — Growth uniform, line of puncture filiform, growth becomes slightly heavier and on the 6th day there is a slight liquefied depression. 10 days. Liquefaction is infundibuliform. 13 days. Complete liquefaction. Agar Plates: — Agar slope, 37° : — Very slight, if any, growth (7 days). Glucose Cigar slope: — Filiform, non-spreading growth. Glucose Stick: — Filiform growth, nothing on the surface. 6 days. Slightly heavier, subsequently no change. Beef Broth: — Slight clouding, flocculent sediment. 3 days, clearing. No further change. iJunhanis Solution: — Grown for five days at room temperature, tested with Ehrlich test, allowed to stand 20 minutes, and then recorded. Very weak Indol. Litmus Milk : — 6 days. No change visible until 6th day, when colour becomes darker. This increases. 6 weeks. Colour is atrocyaneus. There is progressive digestion without coagulation. Potato : — Whitish growth restricted and filiform. 3 weeks. No further change. G. I. Medium size moderately thick bacillus with rounded ends, very considerable variation as to si.ze, actively motile, stains well with methylene blue, gram negative. AFFECTED SALMO:t^, MIRAMIGEI HATCHERY 163 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Gelatine plates: — 2Jf. hours. Just visible to the naked eye. Ji8 hours. Punctiform. 8 days. 1-5 mm. in diameter, round, saucer-shaped, liquefaction. Whitish in colour, most dense near centre. Radiating lines like the spokes of a wheel from the centre consisting of deposited bacteria. With I objective edges are entire and interior granular to grumose. 4 days. Plates have liquefied. Gelatine Stich: — Jf8 hours. Liquefaction heavier, 6 mm. in depth. This increases and is strati- form to sacchate. In ten days tube is completely liquefied. Agar Plates-. — Agar slope ^ 37° : — Very slight growth, in 24 hours. hours. More abundant growth, spreading, flat, glistening, semi-opaque. 3 days. Slightly heavier. No further change. Glucose Cigar slope: — Moist, white, spreading, smooth. Gas in condensation water. 3 weeks. Cream-yellow colour at the base of the slope, and centre of surface growth. Glucose Stick: — Filiform, slightly spreading on surface, 3 or 4 gas bubble along line of puncture. No further change. Beef Broth : 2Jf. hours. Strong, cloudy, moderate sediment. 3 days. Pellicle over entire surface. 7 days. Yellow-cream colour in the outer layers. No other change. Dunham* s Solution: — Grown for five days at room temperature, tested with Ehrlish test, allowed to stand 20 minutes, and then recorded. Indol very strong production. Litmus Milk: — Jf8 hours. Colour is lighter. 2 days. Alkaline digestion commences. 6 days. Almost complete digestion, remaining curd, in fine particles, dirty viola- ceous in colour. Whey | of tube. Semi-transparent and avellaneous in colour, no odour. Blue ring at surface. Potato : — 2J^. hours. No apparent change. Jf8 hours. Slight growth, filiform, yellowish. 6 days. Moderate growth, slightly raised, moist on the moist part of potato and dry at the top, ferruginious in colour. 3 weeks. Colour is redder, otherwise no further change. 164 DEPARTME'S^T OF TEE ^AYAL SERYIOE H. I. 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 A short to medium stout bacillus, actively motile, stains well with methylene blue, is gram negative. Gelatine Plates : — 2Jf hours. J ust visible to the naked eye. days. Punctiform, later liquified. Gelatine Stick: i Growth uniform, filiform. ’ ^8 hours. Slightly liquefying, 2 mm. in depth, stratiform. Liquefaction increases i and is slightly sacchate with flocculence> ■ 10 days. Liquefaction becomes infundibuliform. 15 days. Whole tube is liquefied. Agar Plate : — 58 hours. Round, uniform, glistening, colony. With I objective round, edges slightly erose. Slightly granular colony. 3 days. Colony becomes more massive and bluish white; otherwise no further change. Agar Slope, 37° : — Very slight growth, one or two colonies. Increases along line of puncture. 7 days. No further change. Glucose Agar Slope: — Thin, translucent, moist, film in 24 hours. No further change. Glucose Stick: — • Filiform. No surface growth. ^ Beef Broth: — 25 hours. Slight clouding, flocculent and abundant sediment. f - 3 days. Clearing. ' 7 days. No further change. Dunham/ s Solution: — ! Grown for five days at room temperature, tested with Ehrlish test, allowed to stand ’ 20 minutes, and then recorded. Indol very strong. ^ Litmus Milk: — I 25 hours. No change. ' 58 hours. Tubes become darker in colour, atro-violaceous. No coagulation. \ Subsequently there is gradual digestion. Whey first with a violet shade, throughout, which gradually concentrates as a deep blue ring on top, and curd becomes semi-transparent, isabellinus in colour, and thick but not viscous. A little undigested curd at bottom of tube. (3 weeks.) Potato : — 25 hours. Very slight growth. 5 days. Growth moist, slightly raised, smooth. Colour brown, light testaceous. 3 weeks. Colour changes somewhat between rosaceous and testaceous. No further change. AFFECTED SALMON, MIRAMICHI HATCHERY 165 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a SUMMARY OF CHARACTERS. Broth. Aga r. Gel. Plate. Potato. Milk. S O tic Diam. over 1 Chains. j Spore.s, Capsules. Motile. j Gram. 1 Cloudy. be S S 1 Pellicle. Sediment. 1 Shiny. I Dull. 1 Chroin. Round. Liquef. 1 Mod. Colour. Grows at 37° Acid curd. 1 Rennet curd. Casein pep. X d O O fi c C c A 1 + -b -b + + -b -b -b -b -b + I + A 2 — + — — -b — + — — -b -b — — -b -b + -b -b — - + -b — -b A3 — -t- — — -b — -b -b -b + -b — — -b + -b + -b — -b -b - — A 4 — + — — -b — + — — + -b — — -b — -b -b — — + — -b -b -b B2 — + — — -b — + — — -b + — — + — + -b -b — -b -b ± -b -b Cl — + — — -b — -b — — -b -b — — + — -b -b + — -b -b -f -b -b D 1 — + — — -b — -b — — -b + — — -b — -b -b — — -b — -b -b -b FI — -b — — -b — + — — + — -b — -b -b — — — — -b -b — -b G 1 — -b — — -b — -b — -b + — — + -b + -b -b — -b + — -b + HI.... B Sal- + -b -b ■ -b -b " -b + -b -b -b -b + ~ -b monis l^estis. 9 -b + " + + + + -b -b + -b + -b — — Characteristics of the Micro-organism {Bacillus salmonis pestis Patterson). Morphological Characters. A short, thick bacillus with rounded ends, varying in length, occurring singly and in pairs lying end to end. Actively motile, non-spore-bearing, does not stain with Gram’s method, grows rapidly and profusely at the room temperature, but shows little or no growth at 31’° C., and is killed at this temperature in about six days. The organism exposed to a mixture of ice and salt for a week not only survived that low temperature, but grew profusely while in the mixture. Involution forms were only observed in glucose media. It appears to be a strict aerobe. Pathogenic to fislr, non-pathogenic to frogs, mice, and guinea-pigs. Cultures. — Room Temperature. Gelatine Plates. — In about three days small, greyish, pin-point colonies appear, with a ring of liquefaction around them of a transparent greyish colour, which rapidly increases, the plate becoming completely liquefied in about 36 hours after their appearance. The dense pin-point centre and transparent area of liquefaction around is markedly characteristic of the bacillus, together with the very rapid liquefaction of the gelatine. Gelatine Stab. — Profuse growth along needle track at the end of 18 hours, which gra- dually increases and rapidly liquefies the gelatine. Carhol Gelatine, 1 per cent Stah. — Slight growth in 18 hours along needle track, which gradually liquefies the gelatine. Carhol Gelatine, -05 per cent Stah. — The growth is more profuse. Carhol Gelatine, >03 per cent, Stah. — Very profuse growth. 166 DEPARTMEH^T OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Room Temperature. 37° C. Agar Streak : — Dense, profuse, cream-coloured moist shining growth along needle track in 18 hours, with irregular margin, which gradually spreads over the surface of the agar. Growth barely visible. Agar Smear : — Small pin-j>oint cream-coloured colonies at the end of 18 hours with irregular spreading transparent margins. Agar Glucose Stab : — Profuse cream-coloured growth along needle track for about half an inch at the end of 24 hours, spreading on the surface. The agar gradually becomes cloudy ft om the surface and parallel to it, and extends for about half an inch down the media. No gas production. Agar Glucose Plate _ Cream-coloured colonies with moist shining surface and white cloudiness around each Colony. Blood Serum : — Bouillon : — At the end of 18 hours the bouillon becomes cloudy throughout, with a marked skim on the surface and clinging to sides of tube, with a slight deposit at the bottom. Bouillon {Glucose) : — Similar to ordinary bouillon, but growth much more profuse Bouilloti Taurocholate Glucose : — Slight growth, turning the media slightly red. No gas formation Litmus Milk : — In about 48 hours there is a distinct acid reaction, which gradually increases, and in about seven days the milk becomes coagulated and gradually digested. Peptone Water : — Marked cloudiness throughout at the end of 18 hours. Gives no indol reaction. Potato : — Very profuse yellowish brown growth at the end of 18 hours, raised on the surface of media like blisters, with moist shining surface. Agar (A naerobically) : — No growth No perceptible growth.. Very slight growth. No growth. No perceptible change. Very slight cloudiness at- the end of 48 hours. Gives no indol reaction. Very slight growth in 48- hours. No growth. The organism also withstands the effect of ordinary water, sterile water and sea- water for a considerable time, as flasks of those inoculated with it and kept at the room temperature for over a month gave profuse growths when reinoculated on agar. It does not, however, survive more than a week in distilled water. It also keeps well on sub-cultures, as tubes of agar inoculated from sub-cultures about a year old gave pro- fuse growths in about 18 hours. The chief characteristics of the bacillus are those: — Actively motile, non-spore-bearing bacillus. On sub-culture it grows profusely in 18 hours at the room temperature. On sub-culture it grows profusely when exposed to 0 deg. C. for a week. Shows little or no growth at 37° C. Is hilled at 37° C. (98-6° F.) in about six days. Liquefles gelatine with extreme rapidity. Coagulates and digests milk. Forms a cloudiness in glucose agar in the neighbourhood of the growth. Grows well in sea water. Strict aerobe. Involution forms only observed on glucose media. Does not stain with Gram’s method. Pathogenic to flsh. ^on-pathogenic frogs, mice, and guinea-pigs. ' 'f AFFECTED SALMOy, MIRAMWHI HATCHERY 167 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a CONCLUSIONS. (1) The fungus Saprolegnia ferax is not the cause of the salmon disease. (2) The disease is due to the invasion of the tissues of the fish by a special bacillus {Bacillus salmonis pestis). (3) The bacillus gains access through abrasion or ulceration of the skin, and the disease is apparently not contracted when the skin of the fish is in a healthy state. . (4) Bacillus salmonis pestis can be transmitted from dead diseased fish to other dead fish in the same water. (5) Bacillus salmonis pestis can be transmitted from dead fish to living fish in the same water, and since dead fish are a suitable nidus for the growth of the bacillus, it is obviously desirable to have all dead fisih removed from the river immediately they are observed, and burned, as by simply burying, the germ is left in a condition to be again carried into the stream. (6) The fact that the bacillus grows profusely when placed in a freezing mixture of ice and salt, while a temperature of 37° C. soon destroys it, shows that the cold season is more favourable to its growth. (7) Fish akin to salmon are more susceptible to the disease than others, as rain- bow trout, river trout, and sea trout when attacked succumbed in from two to four days, while dace and gold-fish died in about 18 and 35 days, respectively. (8) Bacillus salmonis pestis grows well in sea water, whereas Saprolegnia does not grow at all; therefore a diseased salmon entering the sea, and returning to the river apparently free from fungus, cannot be said to be free from the disease. GOLD-FISH experiment. Late in November a number of gold-fish were purchased and placed in a large tank in one of our laboratories. The change of water resulted in a few dying, so to avoid any errors due to management we kept them for a month before inoculation. They were then removed from the aquarium and two fish were placed in each of eight large museum jars, and kept thus for another week. The water was changed every third day, and the fish fed every alternate day. The inoculation was carried out in the following manner: The fish was taken out with the band and the top of the head and part of one side near the gills gently rubbed with sandpaper until there was a slight effusion of blood, and this abraded area was then rubbed with a platinum oese of 3 mm. charged with material taken from a 24-hour-old agar slope culture. A separate piece of sandpaper was used for each fish. Several loopsful of the culture were added to the water of each jar. In this way organisms Al, A2, A3, A4, Bl, B2, Cl, Dl, El, FI, Gl were inocu- lated in duplicate, and four fish were rubbed with sandpaper but not inoculated. The fish were observed daily, and the inoculated water was changed on the third day. The control fish rubbed with sandpaper and not inoculated are still alive, and of the inoculated fish, one in each of the jars inoculated with A, A2, B2, 01, and Dl, died 22, 30, 34, 27, 43 days ofter inoculation. Bacteriological examination was made of these fish, but in no case was I able to obtain from the dead fish the organism which was inoculated. Evidently these organisms were non-pathogenic to gold-fish. One fish in each of the jars from which the dead fish were taken remains alive, and, at the time of writing (May 10) appear quite normal. Of course' there is the possibility that some of the organisms isolated might be pathogenic for salmon and not for gold-fish. Patterson states with reference to his B. salmonis pestis that: — “Dace inoculated with this bacillus died as the result of inoculation in from two to seven days. Dace, river trout, sea trout and gold fisli inoculated 168 DEPART31ENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 with Saprolegnia remained healthy. Dace, sea trout and one gold fish inocu- lated with Saprolegnia and B. salmonis pestis died in various periods of time (2 to 18 days) except the gold fish which died after inoculation and showed signs of the fungus on the gill covers. No attempt was made to make cultures from the dead gold fish.’^ Patterson concludes that: — “ Saprolegnia grows on live fish in the presence of the organism, which breaks down the superficial tissues and forms a suitable nidus for the fungus to grow on.” I had no Saprolegnia to try similar experiments. The difficulty of obtaining and keeping fish for experiments in a laboratory unequipped for such work, and the difficulty because of lack of laboratory equipment to carry out experimental work at the hatchery, will have to be overcome before any decisive experiments can be undertaken. It is, however, significant that all organs apparently healthy in the salmon examined contained bacteria in large numbers, and of comparatively few species, and I am unable to state or find in any literature or obtain information as to the bacterial content of the normal organs of fish, or how soon after death, and to what extent, these organs are invaded by bacteria. Very large numbers of bacteria were found in the eggs from a number of the fungus-infected salmon, and under normal conditions one would scarcely expect to find so many bacteria present. All that can be stated at present is that Patterson’s organism, B. salmonis pestis, was not found, and that the large number of bacteria present accompanying the Saprolegnia may have some pathogenic role, but the rules of proof (Koch’s postulates) would have to be worked out where fish, the means of keeping them, and laboratory facilities are provided. 8 GEORGE V SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a A. 1918 IX REPORT ON AFFECTED SALMON IN THE MIRAMICHI RIVER, NEW BRUNSWICK. (By A. G. Huntsman, B.A., M.B., F.R.S.C., etc., Curator of the Biological Station, St. Andrew’s, New Brunswick.) In the early part of October, 1915, Air. G. J. Desbarats, the Deputy Minister of the Naval Service, requested that the Biological Board arrange an investigation of a disease which had broken out among the salmon in the Northwest Miramichi river. I was instructed to proceed to the Miramichi hatchery. South Esk, New Brunswick, examine the conditions there, investigate the possibility of organisms other than bac- teria being responsible for the disease, and arrange for the shipment of material for bacteriological examination to Principal F. C. Harrison, of Macdonald College, Ste. Anne de Bellevue, Que. The hatchery was visited on October 11 and 12. It is located near the mouth of a small stream which empties into the Northwest branch of the Miramichi river, a few miles from Newcastle. Mr. Donald Morrison, the local inspector of fisheries, and Mr. Win. Sheasgreen, the officer in charge of the hatchery, gave every assistance. Down the stream from the hatchery is a pond for retaining the salmon previous to the stripping at spawning time. It consists of a portion of the stream enclosed by boards, with spaces between for the circulation of the water. The water is changed regularly by the action of the tide and by the current of the stream. The level of the water in the pond is prevented from falling too low by a dam across the stream below the pond. A large proportion of the fish in the pond had been officially reported to be visibly affected, and I found white patches of fungus with extensive ulcerations in the centre of many of the patches in the worst cases. The head, the back, and the tail were the parts that in most instances showed evidence of the disease. In the earlier stages the affected parts were seen to be covered with a greyish thin film of fungus, which was easily rubbed off. If the fish were removed from the water these greyish patches could scarcely be. seen. The fish that were in the worst condition were sluggish, came inshore into the shallow water, or fioated near the surface with the fins exposed. Frequently the caudal fin was partly out of the water and the head very low, the fish fioating at an angle approaching the vertical. Mr. Sheasgreen gave the following information on October 12: — “ During the latter part of September small marks, chiefly on the head, were noticed on a large proportion of the fish in the pond. A few marked fish (those with definite wounds) had been received from the fishermen. It has been the custom whenever an opportunity presented to take these marked fish from the pond and bury them. The records show that twenty-two fish were taken out from the 18th to the 21st of September, three on the 25th, and five on the 28th. On the outbreak of the disease (the last of September) at first only dead fish were removed, but later badly infected living ones as well. Beginning with September 30, fish were received every day, never less than seven, and once as many as thirty-eight. The dead fish were all well covered with the fungus. On October 6 we began to reject some of the fish brought in by the fishermen, who by this time were noticing the fungus on some of the fish that they were catch- ing. Of the fish brought in there were no large number badly marked previous 38a— 12 ■ 1G9 170 DEPARTME^NT OF TEE FATAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 to October 6. They all showed, if any, only slight marks, and no evident fungus. From that date on, from 15 to 30 per cent (2 to 4 out of every dozen) of the fish taken each day from three traps near the hatchery, of which records were kept, showed signs of the disease, and were rejected. The fish from a trap 2^ miles up the river showed twenty-six affected out of a total of fifty-two on October 6, twenty-two out of 40 on October 8, and three out of thirteen on October 11, apparently showing a steady improvement as if the infected fish had passed up the river. Up to nearly the 8th of October the salmon in the pond did not seem to be as active (jump as much) as in previous years, but since that date there has been a marked improvement. • Last year (1914) there were 2,636 salmon in the pond. This year the pond has been enlarged and is from one-quarter to one-third larger than last year, ihe number of fish that had been placed in the pond previous to Sep- tember 30 was 2,308. , not been noticed in the salmon in any year previous 0 this, although salmon in the Gaspe region are reported to have had fungus disease last year.” From a comparison of the numbers of the fish and the sizes of the pond it is evident that there has been far less crowding of the fish this year than last. As to ten^erature, the Monthly Weather Eeviews of the Meteorological Service show that at Chatham, 20 miles from the hatchery at the mouth of the Miramichi river, the mean monthly temperatures for the months of August and September, 1915, are only slightly (-6 and -2°) above the averages for those months for the past forty years. And for the month of September both the mean temperature and the maximum tem- perature are lower than for the same month in 1914. The temperature records for the water at the hatchery are incomplete. Tem- peratures were observed in the hatchery from August 30 to September 20. The records show a range from 50° to 68 °F., with an average temperature of about 58°. Tem- peratures have been observed in the retaining pond from October 6 to 20, and show a range from 46° to 52°, the temperature remaining comparatively uniform during that period. Temperatures observed in the hatchery from October 14 to 20 show that on bright days the temperature in the pond is two to three degrees higher than in the natchery, and on cloudy days about the same as in the hatchery. Judging from this, the temperature in the pond has at no time since fish were put in (September 11) been higher than 65°F. Temperature does not appear to have been a special causative factor in 1915. The gradual lowering of the temperature has doubtless helped to stop the spread of the disease, Mr. Sheasgreen stating that on October 20 no new diseased fish were appearing. As to the place of origin of the disease, the presence of diseased fish among those caught in the traps over a considerable period of time indicates that the disease was present for some distance up and dowm the Northwest Miramichi river. Diseased fish were not noticed among those taken from the traps until one week after the disease had been observed in the pond. Mt. Sheasgreen states that he and his assistants buried all the fish removed from the pond. This obviates the possibility of fish from the pond having carried the infection to the fish in the river, although not the possibility of the pond having served as a source for the distribution of the infection up and down the river. The avenue of infection appears to have been chiefly through abrasions of the skin. The principal parts seen to be affected in the early stages of the disease were: the tip of the snout, the margins of the jaws, the top of the head, and the middle line of the back, c^id the margins of the fins. These are the parts most liable to injury in the traps or in the cars used for transporting the salmon to the retaining pond. An examination of the fish caught in the traps and brought to the retaining pond on AFFECTED SALMOE IN MI RAMI CHI RIVER 171 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a October 12, all with no visible disease, showed that the great majority had some abrasions, the commonest being on the tip of the snout, the top of the head, and the margins of the fins (particularly the caudal). There were also net marks around the middle of the head and the marks of fish lice (removal of scales) along the middle line of the back in a number of cases. These marks explain the usual distribution of the fungus, the other parts of the body — for example, the sides — being attacked only in the later stages. The vigour of the fish declines with the spread of the fungus. Fish with well- developed but localized patches of fungus on the head or elsewhere, or with wounds raw or bleeding, appeared to be nearly as vigourous as healthy fish. But if the fungus were present over much of the surface they were sluggish, came close inshore or floated near the surface with the fins, particularly the caudal, sticking out of the waTer. In the last stages they dropped to the bottom of the water on their sides. The only data with reference to the rate of spread of the disease have to do with a fish put in clean on October 4th and removed on the 12th in a sluggish condition, with the fungus covering most of the surface, but so slightly developed tuat it was not easily seen after the fish had been removed from the water. The salmon-louse {LepeophtJieirus salmonis (Kroyer), see Wilson, 1905, p. 640] was found on a fairly large proportion of the fish taken from the traps. It occurred chiefly along the middle of the back between the fins. It appears to be responsible for the removal fo the scales and doubtless determines the location of the disease in this region. The fungus proved to be Saprolegnia, several species of which are commonly found growing on dead organic matter in fresh water. Prof. J. H. Faull of the University of Toronto, to whom material was submitted, informs me that it belongs to the jerax group of Scuprolegnia, but since no oospores could be seen (they are rarely found) exact identification was impossible. Several species of the ferax group occur on dead or diseased fishes (Hofer, 1906, p. 106.) The growth and extension of the Saprolegnia proceeds pari passu with the disease and may be taken as an evidence of the extent of the disease. Whether its relation to the disease is to any extent a causal one or whether it is merely an accompaniment, may well be disputed. An examination of the internal organs of the diseased salmon revealed no distinct lesions. A microscopic study of the body fluids and of sections of the organs likewise levealed nothing. We may conclude that the disease is confined strictly to the skin and subjacent parts. The bacteriological examination of the diseased fish was in the hands of Principal Harrison. However, having some material, I handed over to Dr. H. K. Detweiler of the Pathological Department, University of Toronto, portions of the skin from fish in various stages of the disease. He very kindly had sections made and stained with thionin blue in order to demonstrate, if possible, the presence of the Bacillus salmonis pestis, which was found by J. Hume Patterson (1903) in cases of the salmon disease occuring in Great Britain. He informs me that no positive results have been obtained. Negative results in such a case prove nothing. The gross characters of this disease appear to be identical with those of the well known salmon disease that appeared in the form of an epidemic among the salmon in certain rivers in the north of England and Scotland in 1877. It spread in the course of a few years to the neighbouring rivers up and down the coast and has con- tmued in an endemic state in the waters of Great Britain ever since. No means 0.^ successfully combatting it has as yet been found. The Saprolegnia ferax was for many years considered to be the cause of the disease (Stirling, 1878 and 1879, and Walpole and Huxley, 1882). In 1903, however, Patterson published the results of investigations which went to show that Saprolegnia was not 38a— 12^ 172 DEPARTMENT OF TEE NATAL SERTIGE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 responsible for the disease, but a Bacillus (B. salmonis pestis). The Bacillus alone brought about the death of fish, but not the Saprolegnia alone. The latter was able to grow in tissues ■ already invaded by the Bacillus. The Bacillus grew in sea water, but the Saprolegnia did not. Salmon affected by the disease while in salt water would therefore not show any fungus until after arriving in fresh water. Patterson states that the cold season is more favourable for the growth of the Bacillus and Malloch (1910, p. 117) states that the colder the weather the worse the disease becomes. But Patterson’s experiments merely show that the Bacillus grows better at I C. (32° F.) than at 37° C. (98.6° F.), whereas at room temperature (60° F. ?) | Fife growth was very much more rapid than at 0° C. In the case of the disease in the Miramichi river, Mr. Sheasgreen has stated that the condition of the fish in the pond improved rapidly during the latter half of October and at the same time the number of diseased fish taken in the traps decreased. The lower temperature may have been responsible for this, either by improving the condi- tion of the fish or by decreasing the rate of spread of the infection. For eradicating the disease our only hope, and that a slender one, is to systematic- ally remove all dead and diseased fish as soon as discovered. Patterson recommends that they be burned and n^ot huried, since the organisms survive in the dead fish and may be carried again into the streams. Unless due to some undiscovered temporary factor, tbe disease is practically certain to appear again. Whatever organism may be most responsible for the disease, the latter being an affection of tbe skin, will be influenced by other organisms as well, and there will also be a number of contributing factors, the chief of which will be those that lower tbe general vitality of tbe fish. In the case of the salmon retained for spawning purposes, an effort should be made in the future to improve the conditions in the ponds, parti- cularly with regard to renewal of the water and the attainment of the most suitable temperature, so that the fish will be affected as little as possible. If the disease reap- ^ pears, experiments should be instituted to determine the conditions best adapted to ‘ prevent its spreading. ' The use of the fish for spawning purposes raises the question of the possible effect of the disease on the eggs or on the next generation. The Deputy Minister informs i me under date of April 6, 1916, that in three hatcheries, supplied from the Miramichi ' retaining pond, the loss had already reached a figure of from 42 per cent to 61 per cent of the original number of eggs. It seems probable that many infected fish had recovered, as maintained by Mr. Sheasgreen, and that these gave eggs of greatly lowered , vitality. The fish stripped were all in good condition, and precautions were taken to ’ prevent any infection reaching the eggs from the exterior of the fish or from the pond, j What would be the result if some of the infection did reach the eggs? The Sapro- I legnia is known to attack fish eggs, but it is at least probable that this occurs only i when the eggs are of low vitality. Also Saprolegnia spores are so widely distributed ^ as to be present in the water in the hatcliing troughs in any case, although those from ' the fish may belong to a more virulent strain. It is improbable that the bacteria, which may have a causal relation to the disease in the salmon, will attack the salmon eggs. Plehn (1911) found that Bacterium sal- monicida, which produces furunculosis in the brown trout (Salnvo fario) attacked neither the eggs, the alevins, nor the fry of the trout, but did attack the yearlings. It is therefore quite unlikely that the disease can be transmitted through the fry and by that means be carried to the streams in which fry from Miramichi eggs may be planted. It is possible, however, that it might be carried in the water used for shipping the eggs or fry. It is very desirable that during a future season other rivers should be investig- ated. It has been claimed that in tlie rivers of Great Britain the salmon disease was present in a sporadic form previous to tlie outbreak in 1877. AFFECTED SALMON' IN MIRAMICHI RIVER 173 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a LITERATURE. Hofer, B. Handbuch der Fischkranklieiteii. Stuttgart. 1906. ^Malloch, P. D. Life-History and Habits of the Salmon, etc. London. 1910. Patterson, J. H. The Cause of Salmon Disease. Pub'n., Fishery Board for Scotland. 1903. Plehn, M. Die Furunkulose der Salinoniden. Centralbl. f. Bakt., etc., I Abt., Origi- nale, Bd. 60, Ht. 7, p. 609, 1911. Stirling, A. B. Notes on the Fungus Disease atfecting Salmon. Proc. Roy. Soc. Edin.,. vol. IX, p. 726. 1^78. Additional Observations on the Fungus Disease, etc. Proc. Roy. Soc. Edin., voL X, p. 232. 1879. Walpole and Huxley. Or. Saprolegnia in Relation to the Salmon Disease. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc., vol. XXII, new series, p. 311. 1882. Wilson, C. B. North American Parasitic Copepods belonging to the Family Caligidae.^ Part I. The Caliginae. Proc. U. S. Nat. Museum, vol. XXVIII, p. 479. 1905. 8 GEORGE V SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a A. 1918 X THE SMOKING OF “HADDOCKS” FOR CANADIAN MARKETS— AN IN- VESTIGATION CONDUCTED AT THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL STATION AT ST. ANDREW’S, N.B. By Miss Olive Gair Patterson, M.A., M.B., University of Toronto. 1. mTRODUCTION. The production of finnan haddie is an industry of some importance on the coasts of the Maritime Provinces. This importance, however, is not national, in degree, as it is on the Scottish coast. There is not the demand on the market for finnan haddie “ Made in Canada ” that there might quite well be, if it were made to become the equivalent of the Scotch article of diet in flavour and texture. The processes used in both countries are somewhat similar, it is true, being based on the original method used in the little Scottish town of Findon on the north coast. Variations were intro- duced by the different fish-curers, which were considered expedient or profitable to them, but at times detrimental to the culinary value of the fish, upon which followed a lowering of both the market value and the demand on the market for this excellent foodstuff. The point of first importance in the Scottish industry was the improvement of the flavour of fresh fish, and, of second importance, was the preservation of the fish. These are in the reverse order in the industry as developed in this country. Many of the markets are far distant, and flavour has been sacrificed to preservation, but often inferior, second-rate or slightly tainted fish are used in producing the finnan haddie, so that the quality of the finished product is poor or, at any rate, not to be relied upon. The best of the catch is put up for exportation on ice, fresh, and until these first quality ones are used to make finnan haddie, the Canadian market will not increase its demand for them, the consumer preferring to purchase the fresh fish off ice rather than the smoked one of doubtful origin and quality. It is surely the part of wisdom to create the demand on the market by first producing a more excellent haddie, and then to encourage fish curers to reach and keep up that standard of excellence. 2. SCOTTISH METHOD. The method of producing finnan baddies, as practised in Aberdeenshire, the most important Scottish centre of the industry, includes the processes of splitting, salting, j and smoking. “ The fresh haddock is first treated by removing the head, splitting, eviscerating, and then giving an extra cut behind the backbone from the right-hand side in order to ' expose to view and facilitate the curing of the thick muscles of the back- This supple- ■ mentary cut does not extend to the tail. The fish is then salted for half an hour in j strong brine, and, after draining, is ready for smoking Peat and sawdust are used in producing the smoke; the fish, which are placed on sticks in tiers one above the other, receive constant attention during their short stay of five or six hours in the ! dense smoke which the peat produces. _ Smaller fish are cured separately, the time of both pickling and smoking being . diminished so that the flesh does not become tough — on the contrary, these lightly cured small fish are a great delicacy. The Canadian method of curing differs in some important essentials from the ‘ Scotch, besides varying in minor details. 1 Excerpt from H. M. Smith’s “ Note on Scotch Methods, etc.” U.S. Commission of Fish and Fisheries, 1901. 175 176 bepartme:nt of the ^'AYAL service 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 3. CANADIAN IMETHOD. (1) No vertebral cut is made after splitting. Bacteriological tests of tbe flesh under the backbone of finnan haddie only forty-eight hours old gave positive cultures of trimenthylamine-producing bacteria in many cases.^ (2) The smoke is produced by burning hardwood, preferably beech or birch. The smoke is, consequently, not so dense and the process has to be continued for a much longer period of time, fifteen to eighteen hours, when the fish is a rich golden brown colour, the edges almost brittle, and the flesh in the middle thick portions still moist and scarcely flavoured by the smoke. (3) At times the fish are allowed to stand one to three days before curing, ostensibly^ to allow the blood to drain away, but this can be accomplished in one hour on ice, so- that one fails to see the point of this lack of expeditiousness. 4. CONDITIONS ESSENTIAL FOR SUPERIOR PRODUCT. The endeavour was made to determine, if possible, what were the optimum con- ditions for the production of finnan haddie par excellence on the coasts of the Canadian- Maritime provinces. That these conditions would differ from the Scotch has been pointed out — for example, in the absence of peat as fuel, and the demands of distant markets ; and under these latter circumstances a certain sacrifice of flavour to preserv- ing property must be made, still, it is quite within the limits of possibility to so stan- dardize the industry that these variable conditions would be altered to suit the require- ments of the market for which the fish were destined. These variable conditions are: — (1) Time of the fish in brine. (2) Quality of brine. (3) Quality of smoke. (4) Time of smoking. (5) Method of splitting. 5. SCIENTIFIC TESTS OF CURING METHODS. Most of these conditions w^ere varied in the tests described below. The record of the flavour of the different baddies when cooked was made from the opinions obtained from several individuals to whom were given samples of the various products. Experiment 1. — The first haul of haddock were cured according to the method used by certain of the New Brunswick curers — except that here, as in each test, perfectly fresh fish and of approximately the same size were used. That the fish should be of the same size and weight is important, as a comparison otherwise would be obviously inaccurate. Experiment 2. — The fish in this lot were smoked for varying periods of time, the salting being constant. Experiment 3. — In this the conditions were reversed. Smoking time constant and time in the brine varied. Experiment Jf. — Small fish were used and both conditions were varied to produce a delicately flavoured lightly-cured fish. Experiment 5. — In this the preservative value of the salt content of the fish is shown and its limit, as far as palatibility is concerned. Experiment 6. — In this the method is applied to the hake. Experiment 7. — Proves the advisability of the dorsal incision. 2 Bacteriological examinations were made by Dr. F. C. Harrison, MacDonald College, and his report appears in the present volume of Biological Contriibutions. SMOKING OF HADDOCK 177 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Exper- iment. Date. Preparation. Salting. Smoking. f Xo. 1.. July 20. . . Split abdominally — e V iscerated — wash - ed clean. 25 minutes’ brine of sufficient concen- tration to float a fish. Then allow- ed to drain . (a) ,30 minutes as above. (/>) 30 minutes as above. 18 hours over slow hardwood fire. No. 2.. 1 August 2. . . Split abdominally — eviscerated. G hours over old wood to which was added creo- sote. 15 hours m - No. 3.. August 4, one dozen large fish | lb. Split abdominally . Eviscerabid. Kept on ice overnight — Well washed. (a) 30 minutes 2 hours 18 hours 18 hours (c) 4 hours 18 hours . No. 4.. August 10, one dozen small fish 4-1 lb. Opened d orsally given the extra cut along the vertebrae. (a) 15 minutes {a) 1. 5 hours. . . . 2. 10 hours .3. 15 hours. .... (6) 30 minutes ih) 10 hours No. 5. . August 10. As above . ic) 1 hour (^*) 1 . 10 hours 2. 15 hours No. 0. . August 18, ten small hake. Split abdominally. . . (a) Salted h hour About 10 hours until brown colour. Very windy day . . ■ (&) Salted 1 hour i V Remaiks. Colour— dark brown — edges very dry — almost brittle. Colour — light brown. Flesh — soft. Flavour — delicate. Colour— darker. Flesh — firm. Flavour— excellent. Preserved 4 days. Plxcellent flavour. Flesh not tough nor too salty. Flesh too salty but not tou g h en e d , Salt could be re- moved b}’ previous soaking. Texture too tough. Preserved 17 days at 10° C. 1. Insufficiently fla- voured. 2. Still moist — fla- vour delicious. 3. Flesh crumbly — did not hold to- gether in cook- ing. Preserved nine days. 4. Flavour not so good as when saltf^d 15 minutes but flesh firmer and of better keeping quality Flavour— somewhat coarsened texture- otherwise good . Excessive salt re- moved by three washings previous to cooking — 20 minutes. Flavour— about the same as above. Preserved— 3 days to 20. Texture coarsen- ed somewhat. Flavour— inferior to haddock but rea.son- ably good. Texture — inferior to haddock, but reason- ably good. Too salty — much too long for these fish which are thinner than the haddock. 178 DEPARTMENT OF TEE NATAL SERTICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Details of Experiment 7 —Estimations of the NaCL content of the fish muscle and inner portions to determine approximately how much the flesh under the backbone absorbed within a given time. The portions were extracted with 10 vols. water for three hours_ with frequent stirring— 10 c.c. of the boiled filtered extract were used in the estimations. Exj). No. Sample. c.c. N/11 .silver ni- trate used. E(iuivalent in grams NaCl. Per cent in moist mu.scle. 83 Salted ^ hour, flesh under bone. . 1 '965 c.c. 0- 01965 1 " 965 84 Salted 2 hours, flesh under bone. 2‘5 c.c. 0 025 2‘i. 87 Salted 4 hours, flesh under bone. 8-26 C.C. 0-0826 8-26 86 Salted 4 hours, flesh from surface 11 05 C.C. 0 1105 11-05 Obviously, this table shows that it takes some four hours for the flesh under the bone to approximate that of the external portion of the flesh in salinity, and affords a strong argument for the exposure of the back muscle to the saline by making the vertebral cut. 6. CONCLUSIONS. (1) The splitting of the fish in the usual way, but also making an additional cut along the vertebral column is the most effective method of preparation. (2) The fish are freed from blood by allowing to remain on ice 1 to 2 hours. They should then be washed freely with fresh water. (3) Small fish should not be salted more than 15 minutes. Larger fish up to four pounds should not be salted more than one hour if the texture of the fish is to be pre- served, and half an hour is the optimum length of time in saline for the flavour of the fish. (4) Ten hours over a beechwood sawdust, or old-wood smoke produced a delici- ously flavoured fish. Fifteen to eighteen hours browns and dries the fish and aids in its preservation by more thorough drying. These conditions should be altered to suit the market, the more lighty cured fish being utilized in the home markets and the heavier-salted for the distant ones. The chief condition to be emphasized, however, is the utilization, for the production of finnan haddie, of first-class perfectly fresh haddock, and the keeping of it cold after it is prepared. 8 GEORGE V SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a A. 1918 I I XL ^ SOME OBSEKVATIONS ON HADDOCKS AND “ FINNAN HADDIES ” RELATING j TO THE BACTERIOLOGY OF CURED FISH. By Principal F. C. Harrison^ D.Sc., Macdonald! College, P.Q. During the month of July, 1915, the writer whilst at the Biological Station, St. Andrews, N.B., examined bacteriologically the intestinal content of twelve haddocks. The haddocks were caught about a mile to two miles from the station, were brought to the laboratory, opened, and a portion of the intestine ligatured and removed. An opening was then cut into the piece with sterilized scissors, and a heated platinum needle thrust in, and the small amount adhering to the needle was transferred to about 5 c.c. of sterilized water and thoroughly shaken. Plates were made from the dilution, from 1 to 3 03se being used for each plate. Plates were made with: — Haddock sea water gelatine 12 per cent. Beef peptone sea water gelatine 12 Lactose litmus sea water gelatine 12 “ In this manner the intestinal content of twelve fish was plated, and a large number of isolations made. At the same time a microscopical examination of the intestinal contents was made. Smear preparations invariably showed numerous bacilli, mostly small forms, no cocci and no spirilla. The bacterial content of the twelve fish was similar. Ten different species of bacteria were isolated; of these four were liquefiers, and about 25 per cent of the total number of colonies from each fish belonged to this group. Many of the plates gave a strong odour of trimethylamine, and one or two of the pure cultures gave this odour. In the mixed cultures, however, in the plates the odour of this substance was much stronger. The most common organism which was found in eight of the twelve fish was a small bacillus, motile, producing small depressions in gelatine plates, with numerous smaller colonies around the edge, rapidly liquefying, producing H2S, indol, and trime- thylamine, gas in glucose, but not in lactose, coagulating milk with digestion, and in short appearing to be closely related to B. vulgaris (Hauser). This organism has the greater interest of all those isolated because it was found subsequently in the flesh, and on the surface of smoked haddock (finnan haddie) cured at the station, and also from some spoiled haddock received from a packer. A short account of the methods employed in securing the fish may be of interest. The fish were caught near the biological station, and as soon as landed they were split, salted for one and a half hours in brine of sufficient density to ffoat the fish, and smoked for eighteen hours. For six days after smoking the fish were kept in the laboratory at a temperature ranging from 60° to 70° F., and then pieces were removed from different parts of the dried fish, each piece was thoroughly scorched and dropped into flasks containing haddock sea-water peptone broth. Other pieces of fish were obtained thus : The backbone was cut near the tail, care- fully raised, and a portion of the flesh beneath was cut out with a sterilized knife, the piece seized with sterilized forceps and held in the flame until well scorched on the outside, and then dropped into a culture flask. 179 180 DEPARTME^^T OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 All llasks thus inoculated were held at room temperature; twenty-four hours later all showed turbidity. Gelatine and agar plates were made from the various flasks, and the colonies which developed were isolated in the usual manner- From this source a number of organisms were secured, and of these four were similar to those previously obtained from the intestinal content of fresh baddies. In October, 1915, a circular of inquiry was sent to a number of fish dealers and, in response to a request for spoiled fish, a box of spoiled “ baddies ” was received during the course of the winter. They were covered with a semi-slimy growth, giving a watersoaked appearance. At numerous places there were whitish points resembling bacterial colonies. The flesh was somewhat softened, and the fishy odour much inten- sified. From gelatine plates made from this fish the writer secured the liquefying bacillus already mentioned, and large numbers of Torulce. The most significant fact, therefore, in this piece of work is the presence of lique- fying bacteria belonging to the B. vulgaris group in the intestinal canal of fresh had- dock, and the presence of this organism on and in the flesh of smoked haddocks, and smoked haddock that were spoiled. The amount of salt and the duration of the smoking period to produce fiiAiatn baddies of good flavour are not sufiicient to kill the organisms present on the fish after they are gutted, and the antiseptic action of salt and smoke is not sufficient to inhibit the slow growth of organisms. The writer, after studying the methods of curing haddock, has been impressed with the general carelessness displayed in allowing fish to remain for many hours exposed to warm air and sunlight before gutting and salting. True, that these observations were made under summer conditions when comparatively few haddocks are cured; but the effect of such treatment results in a large increase in the number of bacteria pre- sent on the fish, and consequent quicker spoiling of the smoked article. In winter these conditions would be better, and although the writer has never had the opportunity of studying winter conditions, he has been impressed by the great difference in flavour between fish salted and smoked at the biological station during the winter of 1915-16, and those bought from various dealers in Montreal. From one or two experiments on the percentage of dry matter, total ash, and chlorides as NaCl made on a few fish sent to this laboratory, the writer suggests that such determinations should be made of a series of fish for which the amount of salt used, the salting and smoking period were known. Further, from the bacteriological standpoint some work should be done on haddock smoked under winter conditions. May, 1916. 8 GEORGE V SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a A. 1918 XII THE BACTERIOLOGY OF SWELLED CANNED SARDINES. By Wilfrid Saddler. M.Sc., B.S.A. Introduction. In a survey of the literature relating to the bacteriology of “ canned fish ” it is found, with a few exceptions, that the investigations recorded have been undertaken in connection with proved and alleged cases of food poisoning. Consequently the data available are largely interrelated with data on the bacteriology of canned meats, and of ordinary meats as supplied unpreserved. The exceptions of which I have knowledge are the investigations of Prescott and Underwood (1897)^ on “ Micro-organisms in the Cannery Industries” ; the work of Macphail associated with Bruere (1897)^ on “Dis- colouration in Canned Lobsters ” ; and the recent work of Obst on “ A Bacteriological Study of Sardines” (1916)*'^. Prescott and Underwood working on cans of spoiled clams and lobsters isolated species of bacteria, two classed as micrococci, the other seven as bacilli. The investigators found the cans to be badly decomposed, in some cases almost entirely liquefied, much darkened in colour and of a very disagreeable odour. Of the bacilli, six coagulated and digested milk, while none of the seven produced gas in sugar solutions. According to the descriptions given, certain of these cultures bear, a close resemblance to some recorded by me among the organisms in class II on pages 211-213. Both strains of micrococci isolated by these workers failed to coagulate milk, and failed to produce gas in sugar solution. The bacteria were not named. Macphail and Bruere^ in their 'work on lobsters isolated and recorded the features of four strains of bacteria ; two were cocci, and two were fine rods. Each of the four were inoculated into sterile cans of lobster, and in due course the rules of proof were satisfied. Some of the organisms I have isolated — ^Class I — bear a resemblance to cer- tain of the strains described by Macphail and Bruere, but it is impossible to express a definite opinion as to their mutual identity. Obst® in the report of her investigations on “ A Bacteriological Study of Sardines ” states that a bacillus, designated “ Bacillus A ”, has been found in pure culture in two hundred and eighty-seven swelled sardine cans. The organism is a spore-former* hundred and eighty-seven swelled sardine cans. The organism is a spore-former* and according to Obst is possibly identical with B. Walfischrauschhrand (Ivar Nielsen)."* The only reference I can find to the bacillus of Nielsen^ fails to give full cultural details. In the fall of last year I was in communication with Mrs. Obst, but at that time her report was not available; as I have received no copy I consider it probable that it is not yet published. From the reference cited® which extracts a recent paper read before the Society of American Bacteriologists I am unable to compare any of my strains with the Bacillus A”. The reference does not mention the thermal death point in laboratory media, but states that the organism after inoculation into cans of sardines survives bathing in boiling water for hours. With the strains described in my report no experiments under commercial conditions have yet been conducted. For the present I am not justified in going further than to state that based on such information as is available, it is improbable that the strains isolated by me are identical with the “ Bacillus A ” of Obst. The relationship of bacteria to sardines was discussed by Auche ^ (1894), but the paper is not available. * In the strains I have isolated Class I, no evidence cf spores has been demonstrated. 181 1 182 DEPARTME'NT OF THE iYAFAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 The association of mussels with food! poisoning is cited by Yaughan, 1892® ; citing from Vaughan’s paper: — “ That chemical poisons may he transmitted from the lower animals to man in the food is shown hy the history of poisoning with mussels and with fish. As early as 1827 Comibe described in detail the symptoms induced by the eating of poisonous mussels, and a valuable contribution to the same subject has recently been made by Schmitdmann, who has found that non-poisonous mussels placed in the water of Wilhelmshaven soon became poisonous, and that the poisonous mussels from the harbour soon lose their harmful properties when placed in the open sea. Linder has found in the water of this bay and in the 1 mussels living in it a great variety of protozoa, amoeba, bacteria, and other low j forms of life, which are not found in the water of the open sea, nor in the | non-poisonous mussel. He has also found that if the water of the bay be j filtered, non-poisonous mussels placed in it do not become poisonous. He there- fore concludes that poisonous mussels are those which are suffering from disease due to residence in filthy water.” In view of the close relationship to mussels of clams, a variety of shell-fish canned in both New Brunswick and Maine, U.S.A., the observations of Linder cited by Yaughan are of considerable interest. In the same paper Yaughan describes the case of one of his own patients who showed poisoning symptoms after eating freely of canned salmon. The patient under treatment recovered. Yaughan submitted the remains of the salmon to various tests' and found an organism which he describes as follows: — “ The only germ which could be found, either by direct microscopic exam- ination or by the preparation of plate cultures, was a micrococcus, and thi& ' was present in the salmon in great numbers. This germ grew fairly well in beef-tea, but the injection of five cubic centimeters of the beef-tea culture of : different ages failed to affect white rats, kittens or rabbits. However, this ; micrococcus when grown for 20 days in a sterilized egg, after Hueppe’s method of anaerobic culture, produces a most potent proteid poison. The white of the ’ egg becomes thin, watery, markedly alkaline, and 10 drops of this suffices to , kill white rats. “Evidently in the preparation of the salmon this can was not sterilized; ' it was sealed, and for months, possibly longer, this germ had been growing anaerobically, and elaborating a chemical poison.” i Savage, in England who has investigated many outbreaks of food poisoning, has ^ isolated B. enteHtides from tinned salmon. Griffiths, cited by Yaughan and Novy^, | claims to have isolated a ptomaine saordinin from sardines. ! In view of the types of bacteria I have isolated in the present investigation, it is of importance to note that Poels ^ in Rotterdam has isolated varieties of B. ooli ^ from cases of food poisoning due to the eating of meat from a supposedly healthy animal. McWeeney^ considers that meat poisoning outbreaks are due to organisms of the following groups : — (a) The Typho coli group, including B enteritides (Gaertner). (h) The group of putrefactive aerobes {Proteus, etc.). (c) The obligate anaerobes (B. botulinis). It will be seen, images 192, 209, that of the organisms I have isolated, some strains are varieties of the Proteus group, and some varieties of the B. coli group. Yaughan and Novy® describe the most common form of food poisoning that caused by con- tamination of foods with saprophjAic bacteria; such bacteria either before or after the food has been eaten, elaborating chemical poisons. BACTERIOLO’OY OF SARDINES 183 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a PRESENT INVESTIGATION. The investigation herein described of the ^‘Bacteriology of Swelled Canned Sar- dines ” has been undertaken on behalf of the Biological Board of Canada. The work was commenced in the summer of 1916 at the Marine Biological Station, St. Andrews, N.B., and has since been continued in the laboratories at the college. To the canners the appearance of “ swells,’’ as they are termed, in the cases of canned fish sent out from the factories is a matter of considerable concern. The desirability of under- taking experimental work in the hope of eliminating any risk of cans developing the swelled condition, occurred to the principal of Macdonald College, Dr. F. C. Harrison, in the summer of 1915. At that time Dr. Harrison was engaged at the marine station, St. Andrews, in the examination of haddock attacked by a bacterial disease, and it was while conducting this investigation that the problem discussed herein came under his notice. The matter was brought to the attention of Dr. A. B. Macallum, secretary of the Board, and in due course it was my good fortune, on the recommendation of Dr. Harrison, to be asked to take up the work. The procedure to be .adopted was left entirely in my own hands. Dr. Macallum, and Dr. A. G. Huntsman, curator of the marine station at St. Andrews, have throughout given me every encouragement, and the greatest possible help in every way which seemed likely to assist in the elucidation of the problem. On arriving at the station in J uly, the necessary arrangements were made by Dr. Huntsman enabling me to visit a number of the New Brunswick canning factories. Later it was made possible for us to visit several of the largest plants operating in the State of Maine. I was thus brought into close touch with the industry of canning as a commercial undertaking, had exceptional opportunities of seeing the methods of packing as generally adopted, and accumulated a store of information as a result of discussions with the canners themselves. Factories were visited which were engaged in the canning of herring, sardines, haddock, and c^ams, respectively. It is hardly necessary to say that the sardines of New Brunswick and the State of Maine are small herrings. It was apparent that the canning factories were principally concerned in the packing of sardines ; and while both during the summer and since returning to the college, swelled cans of sardines, herring, haddock, lobster, and shrimps have been gradually accumulating, the work has up to the present been confined entirely to sar- dines and possible influences affecting the same. After nine months’ work, I find that I have been able to do little more than touch the fringe of the problem, considered as a whole. The report here presented therefore is principally concerned in recording the work accomplished up to the present, such conclusions as it is legitimate to draw at this early stage, and such information as to methods and media used in the labora- tory as will make the work of some service to the continuance of the investigation. Under the circumstances I do not propose to enter into a detailed description of the equipment, methods of treatment and system of packing of the fish, and general procedure of the factories engaged in the canned fish industry; such will be more appropriate when the work has progressed to a more advanced stage. The one phase of the canning process of which brief mention must be made at this point is the tem- perature employed in the so-called sterilization of the cans when packed and finished. As the most common size of can produced from all the factories is one weighing from 3 to 4 ounces, the temperatures given shall be those applied to cans of this size. In the majority of the factories visited, the cans are immersed in baths of boiling water for a period of 1^-2 hours. That completes the heating process. Briefly the essen- tials of the treatment of the fish — which have been salted in the boats as taken from the weirs, — on arrival at the factory is as follows : immersed in a mixture of sea-water and salt for 1 to hours; spread on racks, termed flakes, in thin layers, and for 10 184 DEPARTMENT OF THE NATAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 minutes placed in flowing steam; dried in room through which hot air is continually circulated, for 1 hour; heads discarded and the remainder of the fish arranged in the cans; oil automatically added, and tops put on, and fastened by either the “rolling’’ or the “ pressing ” process. The cans are then heated as specified above. In some fac- tories the preliminary steaming for 10 minutes is dispensed with, and a continuous progression through a bath of cottonseed oil at a temperature of 200° C. is substituted, this occupying 2 to 3 minutes. In one factory where the fish are fried in oil for 3 minutes or so, the final heating is done under pressure at a temperature of 225° F. for a shorter period. It should be added that in all the sardine factories visited, the most careful super- vision is exercised in the final packing of the cans in cases before shipping. Each individual can is rapidly passed through the hands of an expert “tapper” who discards cans displaying any irregularity, such being reprocessed or entirely discarded. The project of the investigation may be logically stated thus: “Essentially to deter- mine whether or not the swelling of the cans is due 'to the activities of bacteria.” If on examination, and when submitted to suitable cultural methods strains of bacteria are isolated, the procedure to be as follows: — . . . 1. Purify and obtain in pure culture. 2. Determine the morphological, biological and biochemical characteristics of the organisms. 3. Inoculate the strains obtained in pure culture into normal cans and record condition at stated intervals. 4. Treat “control” normal cans in a similar manner except for the inocula- , tion with the culture. 5. If swelling occurs in the inoculated cans, and no change is noted in the ' “ control ” cans, the presumption is raised that the swelling is due to the organ- isms used for inoculation. 6. Examine the “swelled” cans and determine in culture the presence or ’ absence of bacteria. . • T. If bacteria are found, purify and compare culturally with the strains used for inoculation. 8. If on comparison the strains be found culturally identical with those ^ used for inoculation the cause of the “swelling” has been established; andexperi- ■ mental proof has been obtained to warrant the statement “ that the swelling of ^ the cans is due to the activities of bacteria.” ; a The data recorded in this report show that up to this point, the work has been , successfully accomplished in so far as concerns certain strains of bacteria; and the “ Postulates of Koch ” have been satisfied. While at the biological station, I not only visited the factories as already stated, but many swelled cans of sardines were secured, and a number of organisms in the cans isolated in culture. An attempt was also made to discover the source of the organisms. Samples of sea water taken from the weirs, samples of oil and tomato sauce as used in the packing, intestines of fresh herrings, and the excreta of herrings were obtained. No organisms were found in the oil; the tomato sauce in sealed recep- tacles as imiK)rted from Italy has still to be examined; but from the sea water, herring intestines, and h(u-ring excreta several strains of bacteria were isolated. These, with those 1 found in the sardine cans, I brought back on my return to the laboratory here. During the succeeding months a number of the cultures have died out, and those remaining from sea water, herring intestines, or excreta, fail to produce gas in carbohydrates. BACTERIOLOGY OF EARDIYES 185 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a For the sake of conveuience I have divided the strains of bacteria isolated at St. Andrews and at various times during the fall and winter into two main classes: — Class I. — Gas-producers. Class II. — Non-gas-producers. For obvious reasons my attention has been principally confined to the gas pro- ducers, Class I, and it is to the descriptions of these that the cultural part of the report is chiefly directed. Kegarding the influence of those organisms included in Class II on the condition of the fish in swelled cans, I am not in a position to express any opinion. Many of them have, however, been submitted to certain preliminary tests, the results of which are recorded, pages 211-213. Beyond this I have not gone, and no comments respecting the class are made. Concerning the gas-producers. Class I, 8 strains have been described morpho- logically, biologically and biochemically. The detailed descriptions are found on pages 192-207. On pages 208 and 209 a sununary arranged in tabular form is shown. The number of cultures described in Class I, and those more briefly referred to in Class II, bear no relationship to the total number of cultures isolated in the course of the work. As was to be expected, preliminary tests of a differential nature revealed the fact that many strains were in duplicate, and sometimes even in triplicate. By repeated series of tests the duplicates or triplicates were gradually eliminated. In the pages devoted to the cultures in Class II, pages 211-213, a note is added as to the comparative frequency of the respective strains. In eliminating strains from the cultures in Class I, greater precautions were taken on account of their closer relation- ship to the abnormal condition of the cans. Some of the final cultures described represent the individual strains, after the elimination of as many as four or five strains which had been found to have the main characteristics in common. Three cultures of Class I were finally eliminated to avoid duplication in description, just prior to the preparation of the manuscripts, these being identical with cultures, 34, 37, and 64, respectively. To continue the statement as to the project of the investigation, initiated on page 184, it is further required, that in order to confirm the work up to the present and complete the investigation it is desirable: — 9. That many more cans shall be examined and the contents cultured. 10. That if possible the source of the responsible organisms be determined, and also the stage at which infection takes place. 11. That experiments be conducted both under laboratory conditions, and under conditions prevailing in the canning factories, with a view to deter- mining the most satisfactory means of eliminating swelling.” 12. That possibly the pathogenicity or degree of pathogenicity of the strains proved responsible for the swelling ” be determined by inoculation into suit- able laboratory animals. Arrangements have been made by Dr. Huntsman whereiby during a later season I shall have opportunities of determining if possible the source or sources of the causal organisms of the swelled condition of cans of sardines. The future scope of the laboratory work will necessarily include examination of swelled cans of other varieties of fish, including those of which mention is made on page 183. When visiting the canning factories last summer the manager of one of the largest of these told me that a pressing problem with which he had to contend was the frequent appearance among sardine cans of what are termed “ sour flats.” The condition is one of which there appears at present to be no satisfactory explanation. The product is rendered unmarketable, and the condition is one which cannot be detected until the cans are opened. 38a— 13 186 DEPARTME'NT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 MEDIA EMPLOYED. In this investigation I have used media prepared from fish concoctions, the ordinary laboratory media, and certain special media. In the early part of the work when experimenting with methods prior to the adoption of a definite procedure, difficulty was experienced in growing some of the strains isolated. The colonies developing on some of the plates at this time were too small to be suhcultured. I therefore utilized the marine resources at hand and prepared media from fresh herrings, from clams, and from seaweed, using fresh sea water instead of tap or distilled water. It was found later that the organisms which necessitated this media were those I have put in the main Class II, the non-gas-producers. After successive subculturing in the laboratory these same strains have grown moderately well on the usual standard media. The organisms of my main Class I, the gas-producing strains, have grown well in the standard media. The growth of some strains has been more luxuriant on herring media or clam media, but the use of such has gradually been eliminated for two reasons : — (1) the satisfactory growth obtained on standard media, and the convenience of its use; (2) the necessity of using the standard media in order to compare the strains isolated with varieties already described in literature. Herring Broth. — Fresh herrings obtained direct from the weirs were washed in run- ning water and ground up, no portions discarded, through a meat grinder, mixed with sea water, 1 part ground herring to 1-2 parts sea-water, and heated for several hours in the steamer or autoclav. The mixture was allowed to cool and the fat skimmed off; again heated, and strained through cheese cloth. The strained liquid served as the standard herring extract. Varying strengths of broth were made up, good results being obtained with the following mixture: — 500 cc standard broth, ✓ 1,000 cc. sea water, 15 grams peptone. The ingredients were heated together in the steamer, neutralized with n/20 NaOH to + 10 (phenol phthalein indicator), cleared with white of egg, tubed and sterilized in the usual way. Herring Agar. — To 500 cc. of the standard broth, mentioned above, were added 500 cc. or 1,000 cc. sea-water, peptone at the rate of 1 per cent and agar at the rate of 1-2 per cent; the whole heated together until ingredients dissolved, neutralized to +10, cleared with white of egg, filtered, tubed and sterilized in the usual way. Clam Agar. — Fresh clams were dug up on the bench, washed in running water, opened and ground through meat grinder; to this was added sea water at the rate of 1 part clams to 2 parts sea water, and the whole heated for several hours in steamer or autoclav. The stewed mixture was strained through cheese cloth ; this filtrate constituting the standard broth. To 500 cc. of the standard broth were added 1,000 cc. sea water, peptone at the rate of 1 per cent, and agar at the rate of 1-2 per cent; the whole heated together until ingredients dissolved, neutralized to +10, cleared with white of egg, filtered, tubed and sterilized in the usual way. I have also steamed clams in the shell in sea water, approximately weight for weight; retaining the juice which has a typical “sheen” ; then after open- ing the clams using them as described above. In the earlier part of the work the medium was used successfully to some considerable extent; and in comparison with standard beef peptone agar it appeared to exercise a selective action towards certain strains of bacteria BACTERIOLOGY OF SARDIXES T87 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a obtained from various sources. This in all probability would be due to the glycogen content. AVhile the use of this medium has for some time been dis- continued, I propose to test its value for certain phases of the laboratory analyses. Baur’^® in working at Kiel on the denitrifying bacteria used and recom- mends a broth of which mussels are the essential component. Beef Peptone Agar. — Standard methods.^^ Beef Peptone Gelatine. — Standard methods.^^ Glucose Agar. — One per cent glucose added to agar prepared as above, immediately before tubing. LoeffiePs Blood Serum.'^‘^ Loefflers Typhoid Solution — This medium containing malachite green has been recommended by Loeffler for use in culturing strains of the colon-paratyphoid- typhoid group. Aesculin Agar^^. — Bor specific reaction of organisms of the colon-aero genes group; loops of a broth culture spread on plates. MacConhey's Neutral Bed Bile Salt Lactose Broth^^. — Bor reduction test of organ- isms of the colon-aero genes group. I Bouillon for Y oges-ProsTcauer Reaction.^^ j \ Bouillon for Methyl Red Reactioh.'^'^ \ Solution for Reduction of Nitrates to Nitrites — Giltay's synthetic solution was used. , Dunham Solution for Indol Production.^^ . Glucose Broth. — One per cent glucose in Dunham solution. \Fermentation Broths. — Bor the fermentation reactions I have used ten test substances. It will be seen that in addition to the glucose salicin I have adopted the use i of another glucoside aesculin — used in conjunction with iron citrate by Harrison ’ and Vanderleck — as a fermentable test substance in Dunham broth. I have i been using aesculin for this purpose during the last four months in connection I with work on the gas producing organisms in the Ottawa river water, and find ‘ a correlation in the black reaction of the aesculin agar medium, and the pro- ' duction of acid and gas in aesculin used as a carbohydrate test substance. Litmus MiVk.’^^ \ METHODS. I j On account of the comparative paucity in the literature, of descriptions of .actual [' methods adopted in the isolation of bacteria from swelled canned fish, the procedure I i have followed has largely been determined by experience as the work has progressed. ■ This procedure has been changed as better methods suggested themselves, and in the isulturing from the many cans still awaiting examination I propose further changes Liffecting detail, while the use of additional media which will be to the advantage of the work has suggested itself. Isolation of Bacteria from the Cans. The oily greasy surface characteristic of the cans with pronounced swelling neces- litated the use of a disinfecting agent which would disinfect, and remove the oil, at the 38a— 13J 188 DEPARTME2iT OF THE I^AYAL EERYWE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 same time. Absolute alcohol has proved to be simple in application and quite satis- factory. The cans were first cleaned with a weaker alcohol (70 per cent to 90 per cent) then thoroughly treated with the absolute alcohol. Can openers, forceps, and dissect- ing scissors were immersed in alcohol ^nd fiamed immediately before use. When a sufiiciently large aperture had been made in the can, pieces of fish and a portion of the oil or sauce were removed with forceps and pipettes and inoculated into tubes of liquid medium. At the commencement, it was at once obvious that direct plating from the cans would not be at all satisfactory on account of the oily nature of the contents; liquid media have therefore been used for the first inoculation from the cans, the procedure having the additional advantage in that such media serve as enrichment fluids. I first used peptone broth (Dunham), herring broth, and nutrient broth; later, the addition to the series of glucose peptone broth proved to hyuve advantages. As a result of the additional knowledge provided by a study of the strains of organisms already worked out, it will be desirable in further work to use media having differential quali- ties for the first inoculations; in addition to the broths already in use. The tubes were incubated at 37° C. except during the six weeks spent at St. Andrews, 'when all cultures were kept at room temperature. The broths were examined in 18-24 hours for growth; if no growth were apparent, further incubation was resorted to; if growth could be noted, series of plates were made. The preliminary incubation in broth tubes had the additional advantage to those already mentionea, in that the oil had risen to the surface leaving the sub-surface liquid comparatively free. Finely drawn out pipettes with the finger over the end were passed through the layer of oil, and the culture fluid drawn up. After suitable dilutions had been made, plates were poured using herring agar, clam agar, beef peptone agar, and glucose agar; in the more recent work glucose agar being used almost solely. The plates were incu- bated— temperatures as aforementioned — and when growth was sufficient, those colonies most common were streaked on agar slopes; from these the necessary purifi- cation by plates being made. Note. — The preliminary incubation in broth tubes was in some cases, but not always, duplicated aerobically” and anaerobically. The following apply to the main Class I: — Microscopic examinations. — The microscopic preparations were uniformly made from beef peptone agar slopes incubated 18 to 24 hours at 37° C. ^Gram's Stain. — The gas-producing organisms. Class I pages 192-207, display an unu- sual degree of resistance to decolorisation with alcohol in the Gram method of staining. When treated by the usual method, — decolorisation with alcohol uu- til no further colour can be washed out, — each of the eight strains recorded would be classified as Gram positive. The shade of violet is not as deep as that which is typical of the classic Gram positive reaction, but the result is much nearer positive than negative. On prolonged soaking in absolute alcohol, 30 to 40 minutes, the reaction is definitely Gram negative. Films made from a typical Gram positive lactic acid producing organism withstood the decolor- isation with alcohol for 40 minutes The organisms herein discussed should therefore be described as Gram nega- tive, displaying an unusual degree of resistance to the decolorisation with alcohol. Motility. — Hanging drops for these tests were made from the water of condensation, agar slopes; young cultures incubated at 37° C., never longer than twenty-four hours. Inoculaiion of Media. — All tubes of media used for the determination of cultural fea^ tures and biochemical reactions were inoculated from young peptone broth cultures of the particular organism. The use of peptone salt solution instead BACTERIOLOGY OF FAR DINES 189 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a of nutrient broth eliminated to a minimum any risk due to the presence of muscle sugar. It may be mentioned that repeated tests for the presence of muscle sugar in the peptone used gave a negative reaction based on the absence of acid and gas; the tubes being inoculated from an active strain of the B coli group. Prior to the inoculations of the series, peptone broth tubes were inoculated from agar slopes, and incubated at 3T° C, After 18 to 24 hours, usually about 20 hours, the whole series of media would be inoculated with the broth from a 1 cc. pipette ; 2 to 3 drops of culture to each tube. Slopes of solid media were streaked with a standard 3 mm. loop platinum needle. The number of tubes involved and the amount of test substances necessitated have been considerable throughout the work, and to insure economy of expense and time, strictly quan- titative estimations of the gas evolved have not been carried out other than by means of the Dunham tube. In view of the method noted above, however, the results are truly comparative throughout. Moreover, for the particular pur- pose of the present work the essential point to be decided regarding the ferment- ation of the test substances to gas is this — does a' particular culture produce gas, or does it not produce gas? It is not only of considerable interest, but of much practical and classificatory value to know whether the amount of gag produced in a given time at a given temperature from a given substance Jis great or small. Such information can be comparatively well shown by the use of the Dunham tube. Indol Production. — The tubes to be tested for Indol were incubated at 37° C. for 7 days; the Bohme Ehrlich test being used. Reduction of Nitrates. — The Giltay solution was tested after 3 to 4 days incubation at 37° G., for the presence of nitrites. The sulphanilic acid and a-naphthylamin reagents were used. Voges ProsTcauer Reaction. — After 48 to 72 hours incubation at 37° C. the culture tested with a strong solution of KOH. The test if positive has usually shown the typical eosin shade in the upper layers, within 2 hours at room temperature. Methyl Red Reaction. — Determined after incubation at 37° C. for 48 to 72 hours. Cans of Sardines*. General Description. Appearance of Cans and Conditions of Contents. Owing to the varieties of “ brands ” of sardines produced by the canning fac- ;ories, the various methods of packing adopted, and the different substances utilized for (he giving of flavour and consistency to the finished product, it is not possible other han in a general way to described the conditions met with in my examinations. Normal cans. — In outward appearance there is a complete absence of any “bulg- ng”; the top and bottom are either quite flat or almost imperceptibly concave. On baking, there is no “rattle” and scarcely any movement of the contents can be leard. When opened with the cutter, there is no expulsion of air or gas, with little f any exuding of the oil or other material used in the process of packing. The contents are firm, not macerated, and often white in colour; this last, how- iver, depending to some extent upon the materials used in the packing. The smell is nildly characteristic of the fish, qualified by the variety of oil or tomato sauce used. There is in appearance and odour a complete absence of putrefaction. The fish are aturated to a greater or lesser extent with the oil, sauce, or other flavouring agents ised, but without losing their firm and solid condition. The oil or sauce will be seen s a layer over and in the interspaces between the individual fish, rather than actually within the bodies. 190 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Siuelled Cans. — Outwardly the cans vary from a slight ‘^bulged” appearance to a more pronounced swelling. The top and bottom are forced out as a result of the pressure, and present a decided convex surface. As the swelling becomes greater the oil or sauce will be forced out between the soldered parts of the can, and in pronoun- ced cases the outside surface is greasy and wet, and possibly covered with the oil or sauce. . Swelled cans, when shaken, have a characteristic “ rattle ” on account of the extra space within, resulting from the swelling. When the cans are opened, gas is ex- pelled, accompanied in advanced swellings by portions of the liquid contents. In ad- vanced cases there is a tendency for the oil or sauce to pour out over the surface of the cans. The condition of the contents varies considerably. Usually the fish are macerat- ed, disintegrated, and soft, and are intermixed with the oil or sauce; they have lost their entity. The odour is variable, — frequently it is not unpleasant, resembling to an accentuated degree the natural smell of normal sardines. In other instances a pronounced putrefactive odour is evident. It may be that the putrefactive odour is present at all times and is masked by the spices or other ingredients of the sauce. That is a point wdiich can only be definitely pronounced upon after a more extended investigation. CANS EXAMINED. Up to the present I have examined forty cans, normal and swelled. The cans have been obtained personally or by express: (1) direct from various canning factories in the province of New Brunswick and in the State of Maine, U.S.A. (2) From the Health Department of a city in the Maritime Provinces. (3) From retail grocery stores. M-any of the normal cans, representative of the various factories, proved to be sterile; from some have been isolated spore forming bacteria, inactive on fermentable carbohydrates, — see page 211, Culture 21 and in no instance have gas producing organisms been found. From certain of the swelled cans I have isolated a variety of strains of gas pro- ducing bacteria, none of which show evidence of spore formation. The cans from which these strains have been isolated are representative of three of the factories engaged in canning; and for the sake of clearness these factories have been specified as Packer A, Packer B, and Packer G, respectively. Further, from swelled cans I have also isolated strains of bacteria which fail to ferment any of the carbohydrates used as test substances (pages 212-213). It remains, therefore, to be added that from some cans apparently swelled ” I have failed to isolate gas producing bacteria. As already stated (page 185) the organisms isolated from the various sources have for the sake of convenience been arranged in two main classes : — Class I. — Gas producers. Class II. — Non gas-producers. The gas-producers (see pages 192-207) have been isolated solely from swelled cans • I sardines. Of the swelled cans examined the majority were obtained from sources ■ and 3 (page 190). Some were submitted by source 2. Under the circumstances it has seemed desirable to use some means of differentiation. Accordingly the swelled cans obtained: (1) from the canning factories, and (3) from retail grocery stores have been designated ‘^Swelled cans. Series 1’’; those submitted by (2) a certain City Health Dcpartmoiit, “Swelled Cans Scries IT.” BACTERIOLOGY OF SARDJNE(^ 191 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Siuelled Cans, Series I. Can. I, Packer B. — ^Obtained direct from canning factory; packed with tomato sauce; characteristic “swelled” appearance. The pressure of the gas was so great that on the can being opened part of the contents were strewn over the laboratory bench. The odour was pleasant, though pungent, and may best be described as the natural smell of normal sardines accentuated. It is of interest to note that the plates made, using herring agar, rapidly developed at room temperature a putrid smell resembling, as expressed by a laboratory colleague, that of an “oriental latrine.” See Culture 32, Class I. Can. II, Packer A. — Obtained from a retail grocery store; packed in cottonseed oil; same brand as those of “Swelled Cans, Series II”. This can was passed as saleable and normal by a reputable salesman, and on personal examination of his stock I retained it as suspicious. I have no knowledge as to the date of packing. In appearance the can was slightly swollen, convex, but there was no evidence of oil exuding due to pressure, of gas. On opening, a percep- tible amount of gas was forced out. The contents were soft and desintegrated ; colour slightly darker white than normal ; odour an accentuation of the normal. See Culture 34, Class I. Can III, Packer A. — Source and brand as Can II of this series. This can submitted to me by the salesman. The appearance of the can, the appearance, condition, and colour of the contents identical with description applied to Can II. See Culture 35, Class I. Gan IV , Packer B. — Source and brand as Can I of this series. In this can the swelling had not progressed as far as in ean I, and on opening the gas was not so profuse. The general description there applied to the contents and to the nature of the subsequent plates is equally applicable in this instance. See Culture 36, Class I. Can V, Packer B. — Source and brand as Can I of this series. The extent to which the can had swelled, and the further description used above for Can IV apply here. See Culture 37, Class I. Can VI, Packer G. — Obtained direct from canning factory; packed in tomato sauce; characteristic “swelled” appearance top and bottom convex. On open- ing a small amount of gas escaped. The odour was not unpleasant, and may be described as the natural smell of normal sardines accentuated. The con- tents of the can were not nearly so much disintegrated as noted in some pre- viously mentioned, were somewhat^ dry, and a little less hard than the con- tents of normal cans. See Culture 64, Class I. Swelled Cans, Series II, Packer A. A cargo of sardines exported by packer A had been sunk in a harbour, remaining under water for six weeks. When the cargo was salvaged, a proportion of the cans were visibly swelled. The local Health Department submitted a number of these cans for examination, as a result of which the cargo was condemned. Such cans, of course, do not repi’esent the “ swelled cans ” of commerce. As, however, their condition and the nature of their contents appeared somewhat similar to the swelled cans obtained from other sources, the characteristics of some of the organisms isolated have been included in this report. 192 DEPARTMEIiT OF THE FAYAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 To differentiate from the swelled cans obtained direct from the canning factories and from retailers I have designated the salvaged cans as “ Swelled cans, series II.” The brand of sardines of which this cargo consisted is one of the least expensive brands on the market; cottonseed oil is used. Can II. — On shaking, perceptible “rattle” characteristic of the swollen cans. On opening with the cutter escape of gas and pronounced putrefactive odour; contents soft and disintegrated; colour dirty white with tendency to redness in inner portions. See Culture 24, Class I; Ctilture 14, Class II. Can III. — 'Characteristic “ rattle ” ; escape of gas and pronounced putrefactive odour on opening of can; contents soft and disintegrated, and of a dirty white colour. See Culture 26, Class I; Culture 16, Class II. ORGANISMS OF THE GAS-PRODUClNG TYPE. Culture 21. Source: Can II, Ser. II, Packer A. Morphology. — Microscopically: coccus forms to short thick rods twice as long as broad; average length! -8 — 1 jx *Gram negative. Prom old agar cultures no evidence of spores. Motility. — In hanging drop occurring singly, in twos and in chains; some individuals with rapid movement, some having slow undulating motion. Cultural Characteristics. — Agar slope. — 36 hrs. 37° C. — growth luxuriant, raised, glistening, iridescent, yellowish-white by transmitted light. Loeijier's Blood Serum. — 24 hrs., 37 C. moderate, yellowish-white, no liquefaction. Ldejflers Malachite Green Sol. — Green precipitate or weak coagulum at bottom of tube; this very slowly changes and within 14 days partially digested; liquid portion assuming brownish tint. Gelatine Stah. — Room temperature; liquefaction begins in 24 hrs. crateriform ; in three days liquefaction on surface and along track of needle, crateriform to infundibuliform ; growth very slimy on this medium; in 7 days yellowish, cloudy stratiform extending 1 cm. from surface, remainder infundibuliform with heavy yellow flocculent sediment to bottom of tube. In 18 days liquefaction not yet complete; upper portion heavy milky even cloudiness, merging into layers of semi-transparent cloudiness, the lower portion a heavy ferric-yellow mass of precipitate. Nutrient Broth. — 24 hrs. 37°C. — heavy clouding with bluish rim; in 3 days floc- culent flakes of bluish tint on sides of tube ; in 5 days very heavy dense even clouding, watered silk appearance; this condition persists. Hening Broth. — Condition similar to above; very heavy growth; in 9 days a loop of the liquid sihowing decided iridescent bluish sheen. Milh. — In 24 hrs. unchanged, except that much froth on shaking; in 3 days coagulated, soft curd, some whey expressed; in 9 days yellow digested fluid 2/3 of tube, remainder white soft curd; in 14 days ropiness noted, and medium almost entirely digested with slight amount of flocculent curd at bottom of tube; in 5 weeks almost wholly turbid yellowish digested fluid with slight jelly-like yellowish iridescent flocculent curd on base of tube. BACTERIOLOGY OF EARDTYES 193 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Litmus MilJc. — In 24 hours much froth on shaking-, violaceus for 1 cm. from surface, remainder paler; in 3 days partly coagulated soft curd, violaceus; in 9 days digestion proceeding, fluid yellowish; in 14 days blue rim at surface, medium 5/6 digested, reddish brown tint; in 5 weeks slight flocculence, curd at base of tube, remainder partially cleared and tinted dark purpureus to heliotrope. Aesculin agar. — I loop from peptone broth culture streaked on plates. In 24 hours growth but no deflnite black reaction; later assumes brown to black tint, moderate growth. Aesculin broth. — In 24 hours black reaction. MacConhey's N.R.B. Broth. — No reduction to canary yellow in 24 hours. Gelatine colonies. — (1st appearance) room temperature, in 72 hours liquefaction well advanced; individual colonies up to 3 mm. diameter, round, saucer- shaped, entire edges; liquefaction typical of the proteus group, ceiint: ol colony dark white spot -25 mm. diameter, remainder of colony varying from clear space to flne precipitated granules. Under the low power objective opaque centre, edges entire; medium tinted green, and distinct earthy smell. Agar colonies. — 20 hours at 37° C., growth moderate, surface colonies round, con- cave, glistening, raised, distinctly radiate; by transmitted light young colonies bluish, older colonies becoming whiter, more opaque and darker in centre. Sub-surface colonies small but well defined, white. Under low power object- ive surface colonies distinctly yellowish with entire edges; on focussing through, dense and dark; structure cannot be defined; smaller colonies dark centre, then pale yellow, and near the edges almost transparent. Sub- surface colonies well defined, edges entire, yellow to dense. Temperature Relations: — Thermal death point. — 10 minutes’ exposure in nutrient broth at 60° 0. Optimum temperature. — Cultures incubated at room temperature and at 37° C. grow well. Most satisfactory growth at 37° C. Vitality on Culture Media. — The culture survives several months in artificial medium, agar or gelatine. Relation to Oxygen. — The culture is a facultative anaerobe; incubated for 36 hours under anaerobic conditions moderate growth on glucose agar as discrete colonies along track of needle 1-2* mm. diameter; by transmitted light convex, dark white centres, paling to blue at edges. Growth is not so luxuriant as under aerobic con- ditions. Biochemical Reactions : — Indol production : Indol not produced. Keduction of nitrates: Nitrates to nitrites. Voges-Proskauer reaction: Positive. Methyl red reaction: Alkaline. Fermentation of Carbohydrates. — This culture does not rapidly ferment many of the carbohydrates. In 24 hours lactose is but feebly fermented to acid; saccharose, mannite and xylose are fermented to acid and gas with profuse frothing; arabinose and inulin give slight gas; while gas appears in glycerine 194 BEPARTME^NT OF THE HAVAL 8ERYIGE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 only after a period of 72 hours. The remaining substances used are fermented moderately well in 24 hours to acid and to gas. Glucose. Lactose. Saccharose. Mannite. Dulcite. + + +— ++ +-t- .|-_ Adonit. Kaffinose. Arabinose. Xylose. Salicin. ““ ++ ++ ++ + + Aesculin. Glycerine. Inulin. + + + + + + + = acid. ++ = acid and gas. Culture 26 Source: Can III, Ser. II, Packer A. Morphology. — Microscopically, rods to times as long as broad; average length 1-6 IX with many longer forms even in young cultures. Gram negative* ; from old agar cultures no evidence of spores. Microscopic preparations made from cultures of this organism incubated at the same and at different temperatures have shown much variation in morphology ; successive plate culturing, however, has failed to show impurity. Motility. — In hanging drop occurring singly, and in twos, sometimes side by side; longer forms noted; non-motile. Cultural Characteristics: — Agar Slope. — 36 hours, 37° O., moderate, along track of needle, glistening yel- lowish-white by transmitted light. Ldefflers Blood Serum. — Growth slight after 72 hours. No liquefaction. Loefflers Malachite Green Solution. — 24 hours, 37° C., coagulated as soft junket- like curd attached to sides and bottom of tube, green, with pale green liquid expressed. After 14 days no change. Gelatine Stah. — Room temperature — in 3 days scant growth, filiform, no lique- faction; in 18 days no change apart from increased growth, no liquefaction. Nutrient Broth. — 24 hours, 37° C., moderate clouding, no pellicle, no sediment, no ring; in 3 days watered silk appearance; in 9 days no change except slight sediment at bottom of tube. Herring Broth. — Similar to above, but much more luxuriant growth. Milk. — In 24 hours at 37° O., no coagulation, much froth on shaking; in 3 days coagulation beginning; in 5 days firm coagulum, no gas, no digestion; in 16 day 3 curd slightly split by gas. In 5 weeks shrinking of curd, but no digestion. Litmus Milk. — In 24 hours violaceus, much froth on shaking, no coagulation; in 3 days liliaceous with weak coagulum ; in 5 days curd slightly cracked by gas. In 5 weeks no digestion ; pale lilac to Isabella. Aesculin agar. — One loop from peptone broth culture streaked on plates; no reaction. Aesculin hroth. — In 24 hours. Slight change but no black reaction; later medium darkened slowly in several days becoming black. MacConkey's N.R.B. hroth. — No reduction to canary yellow in 48 hours. Gelatine Colonies. — (1st appearance), 72 hours at room temperature. Surface colonies yellowish white by transmitted light, mm. diameter; a charac- teristic depression immediately around edge of colony could be seen on tilt- ing the plate; no bluish appearance; no liquefaction. Under the low power objective colonies pale yellow, with paler rim, and entire edges, structure finely granular. BACTERIOLOGY OF SARDINES 195 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Agar colonies. — 20 hours. 37° C. Growth slow, punctiform, scarcely visible to the eye. Examined 3 days; by transmitted light surface colonies greyish white, elliptical and round, the larger colonies 0-5 mm. diameter. Subsurface colonies similar to above; majority of the colonies immediately under the surface. Under the low power objective all colonies appeared dense, com- pact with edges entire to slightly serrated. Temperature Relations: — Thermal death point. — 10 minutes exposure in nutrient broth at 60° C. Optimum temperature. — On agar grows moderately well, room temperature and at 37°C. Vitality on Culture Media. — The culture survives several months in artificial medium, agar or gelatine. Relation to Oxygen. — Incubated for 36 hours under anaerobic conditions, scant growth on glucose agar, small gas bubbles in medium, clouding of condensation water. While growth is noted, the organism prefers aerobic conditions. Biochemical reactions: — Indol production : Indol not produced. Reduction of nitrates: ? Voges-Proskauer reaction: Negative. Methyl red reaction: Slightly acid. Fermentation of Carbohydrates. — The carbohydrates used are but feebly acted upon by this culture. In each case, however — with exception of inulin — those substances which are fermented to gas have shown the positive reaction within 24 hours at 37°C., and no further gas production has taken place even after 5 days. The Andrade indicator has changed to a clear scarlet and no reduction has taken place after prolonged incubation. The two substances most easily acted upon are glucose and saccharose. Glucose. Lactose. Saccharose. + + + + + + Adonit. Raffinose. Arabinose. — — + + + + Aesculin. Glycerine. Inulin. + + + - -t:±; + = acid. -H- = acid and gas. Mannite. -f + Xylose. + + Dulcite. + - Salicin. + + Culture 32. Source: — Can. I. Ser. I. Packer R. Morphology : — Microscopically short thick rods twice as long as broad; average length 1-6 g staining unevenly with Kiihne’s methylene blue; some longer and thinner forms, but repeated replating has failed to show impurity. Gram negative*; from old agar cultures no evidence of spores. Motility. — In hanging drop occurring singly and in twos, actively motile, progression as in semi-circles. Cultural Characteristics: — Agar Slope. — 36 hours 37° C., luxuriant, raised, thick, along track of needle, glis- tening, iridescent, yellowish white transmitted light, medium slight tendency to brown. 196 DEPARTMENT OF THE NATAL 8ERTICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Herring agar. — 20 hours 32° O., growth abundant and heavy along track of needle, contoured, yello wish- white ; spreading over slope as bluish film of discrete colonies, transmitted light, glistening, iridescent; heavy clouding condensa- tion water. Loefflers Blood Serum. — 24 hours 37° C., moderate, moist, spreading; no liquefac- tion after 7 days. LoeffieFs Malachite Green Sol. — Coagulated as soft junket like curd attached to sides and bottom of tube, green, gas bubbles, light green clear fluid expressed ; after 14 days coagulum as precipitation on sides of tube, no reduction of colour. Gelatine Stah. — Koom temperature — 24 hours filiform, no liquefaction; in 4 days growth abundant; in 1 week no liquefaction and no change in medium, growth equally good in stab and on surface; no liquefaction in 21 d,ays. Nutrient broth. — 24 hours 37° C., moderate, clouding, slight pellicle easily dis- lodged, pale bluish rim at top, very slight tendency to flocculency; in 48 hours flocculent precipitate suspended and at bottom; in 7 days discrete par- ticles adhering to tube at surface, even clouding, clotted sediment on shaking. Herring broth. — Similar to above, but much heavier. Milk. — 18 hours, 37° C., much froth on shaking, no coagulation; in 72 hours coagulation beginning, frothy ; in 4 days weak coagulum with whey expressed, gas bubbles, curd splitting, whey white cloudy; in 10 days condition accen- * tuated, no liquefaction. Litmus milk. — In 18 hours frothy, no coagulation, violaceus, merging into light violaceous near bottom of tube ; in 48 hours liliaceous, frothy, no coagulation ; in 72 hours still frothy, coagulation beginning; in 4 days coagulated, some whey expressed, curd split by gas holes; in 14 days bleached with red rim at top. Aesculin agar. — 1 loop from peptone broth culture streaked on plates. In 24 hours 37° C. growth brown-black reaction. Aesculin broth. — In 24 hours, black reaction. MacConkey's N.B.B. broth. — No reduction to canary yellow in 48 hours. Gelatine colonies. — Room temperature (1st appearance). In 72 hours growth luxuriant and rapid; surface colonies up to i — 1 mm. diameter, white and glistening; depression around edge of colony, as if gelatine under tension — See Culture 26. Smaller colonies bluish to white, round; subsurface colonies small, bluish to bluish white. Under low power objective surface colonies dense, pale-yellow, with paler rim and entire edges, structure finely granular; subsurface colonies similar with homogenous structure, round, edges clearly defined and entire. Agar colonies. — 20 hours 37° C., growth rapid, abundant, surface colonies — 2 mm. diameter, concave, smooth, glistening, tendency to striate; by trans- mitted light ferric to yellowish-white centre, paling to blue tint at edges, smaller colonies bluish white; subsurface colonies up to -5 mm. diameter, yellowish-white. Under low power objective surface colonies finely granular structure, ferric-yellow paling at edges, edges entire; subsurface colonies dark “ mound ” appearance in centre, remainder pale lemon, finely granular with tendency to grumose, edges entire. Herring agar colonies. — Two to three times diameter of above, nmbonate, radiate, concentrically ringed. llACrERIOLOC.Y OF FARDINES 197 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Temperature Begulations : — Thermal death point. — Some variation has been exhibited and further tests require to be made; tests performed up to the present indicate the T.D.P. to be around 60° C., exposed for 10 minutes in nutrient broth. Optimum temperature. — Cultures incubated at room temperature and at S'!® C. grow well; most satisfactory growth at 37° C. Vitality on culture media. — The culture survives several months on artificial medium, agar or gelatine. Relation to Oxygen: — The culture is a facultative anaerobe; incubated for 36 hours at 37° C. under anaerobic conditions moderate growth on slope of glucose agar; medium cracked and split by gas bubbles, much froth in tube and heavy clouding of condensation water. The organism appears to grow equally well in the presence or in the absence of oxygen. Biochemical Reactions: — Indol production: Indol not produced. Reduction of nitrates : Nitrates reduced to nitrites. Voges Proskauer reaction: Negative. Methyl red reaction: Alkaline. Fermentation of Carbohydrates. — The action of this culture on lactose is feeble and slow, gas not appearing until the second day; dulcite is but slightly fermented to acid and no gas is produced. Aesculin is fermented to acid and gas in 24 hours and in 9 days the Andrade indicator reduced to a lemon yellow turbid iridescent colour, while no reduction is noted in the case of salicin. All the other test substances are fermented to acid and to gas rapidly with profuse frothing and heavy turbidity within 24 hours. Glucose. Lactose. Saccharose. Mannite. Dulcite. ++ ++ ++ ++ +— Adonit. Raffinose. Arabinose. Xylose. Salicin. ++ ++ ++ +-f Aesculin. Glycerin. Inulin. + + + + + + + = acid. ++ = acid and gas. Culture 3.1}-. Source: Can. II., Ser. I., Packer A. Morphology. — Microscopically varying from coccus forms to short rods; the majority 8-1 long and twice as long as broad, many thinner; stains unevenly with Kiihne’s methylene blue; Gram negative*; from old agar cultures no evidence of spores. Motility. — In hanging drop occurring singly and in twos; actively motile. Cultural Characteristics: — Agar slope. — 36 hours at 37° C., moderate along track of needle, glistening irides- cent, bluish by transmitted light, gas bubbles in medium presumably due to fermentation of the muscle sugar in beef extract. In agar culture 2 months old distinct sliminess has been noted. 198 DEPARTMEI^T OF TEE NATAL SERTICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Herring agar. 20 hours 32 C., growth abundant, contoured, yellowish white growth along track of needle, spreading over slope as bluish film of discrete colonies; glistening, iridescent; heavy clouding of condensation water. Loeffier’s Blood Serum. — 24 hours 37° O Moderate, ferric yellow growth, no liquefaction after 7 days. Loeifier's Malachite Green Sol. — In 24 hours 37° O. coagulated as described in culture 32; in 14 days medium assuming a greenish brown tint, no definite reduction and no liquefaction. Gelatine stah. — Eoom temperature — 24 hours filiform, no liquefaction, equally good on surface and in stab ; in 4 days growth abundant ; in 7 days no lique- faction and no change in medium; no liquefaction in 21 days. Nutrient hroth. — 18 hours 37° C., clouding moderate, slight pellicle; on shaking small fiakes perceptible in medium; bluish rim; slight viscid sediment; in 72 hours cloudy waves, as watered silk, some fiocculent precipitation in sus- pension. Herring hroth. — Similar to above, but heavier. Milk. — 18 hours 37° O., much froth on shaking, no coagulation; in 48 hours, weak coagulum beginning; in 72 hours coagulated with gas and expulsion of whey, curd later splitting with gas holes. Litmus milk. — 18 hours 37° C., much froth on shaking, liliaceous, no coagulation; in 48 hours weak coagulation beginning; in 72 hours coagulated, gas, whey expressed, later bleaching to isabella and much splitting of curd by gas. Note. — ^Milks and litmus milks incubated for 2 months have appeared to be slowly digesting; up to the present I have been unable to verify this and further tests must be made to establish the final condition of the clot. Aesculin agar. — 1 loop from peptone broth culture streaked on plate. In 24 hours at 37° C., reaction brown-black. Aesculin hroth — In 24 hours black reaction. MacConkey’s N. R. B. Broth. — In 48 hours, 37° C., slight reduction to eosin tint, but no final reduction to canary yellow. Gelatine colonies. — Eoom temperature (1st appearance) surface colonies up to ^ mm. diam. ; by transmitted light bluish-white, glistening, almost transparent, resembling more the description of the B. typhosus colonies than the typical B. Coli colony; flat; subsurface colonies smaller, white to yellow-white, depres- sion around edges, see Culture 32. Under the low power objective surface colonies pale yellow, paling near rim with hedges entire; structure finely granular with clearly defined border around more dense central structure; subsurface colonies similar. Agar colonies. — 20 hours 37° 0., growth moderate, not so rapid as other cultures; surface colonies 1-H mm. diameter, round, concave, glistening; by trans- mitted light bluish with pin-point dark white centre, distinctly radiate. Subsurface colonies dirty white; organism growing better just under surface. Under low power objective surface colonies dark centre, remainder of colony faintly discernible as finely granular lemon yellow, with edges entire; sub- surface dark, compact, too dense for structure to be differentiated, edges entire. Temperature Relations: — Thermal death point. — 10 minutes exposure in nutrient broth at 60° C. Optimum temperature. — Cultures incubated at room temperature and at 37°C. grow well; most satisfactory growth at 37°C. Vitality on Culture medium. — The culture survives several months on artificial medium, agar or gelatine. BACTERIOLOGY OF SARDINES 199 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Relation to Oxygen. — The culture is a facultative anaerobe; incubated for 36 hours at 37°C. under anaerobic conditions growth scant on slope as fine discrete colonies; heavy growth and clouding in condensation water. Slope broken and cracked by gas bubbles, these J cm. diameter and extending throughout the medium; much froth. Biochemical Reactions: — Indol production : Indol not produced. Reduction of Nitrates: Nitrates reduced to nitrites. Voges-Proskauer reactions: Negative. Methyl red reaction: Alkaline. Fermentation of Carhohydrates. — The culture has a characteristic action upon dulcite; this test substance being fermented profusely to gas in 48 hours; acid and some gas produced within 24 hours. In aesculin, gas appears -within 48 hours. Inulin is fermented to gas only after 7 - 10 days incubation. The remaining test substances are fermented moderately well to acid and gas with- in 24 hours; but in no case on further incubation is the reaction profuse as in the fermentation of dulcite. Glucose. Lactose. Saccharose. + + + + + + Adonit. Eaffinose. Arabinose. + + + -f- Aesculin. Glycerine. Inulin. + + + - + + + = acid. ++ = acid and gas. Mannite. + + Xylose. 4 + Dulcite. + + Salicin. + + Culture S5. Source: Can. Ill, Ser. I, Packer A. Morphology : Microscopically large coccus forms to short thick rods; -8 /x diam. to 1 fi long; stain evenly with Kiihne’s methylene blue; Gram negative*; from old agar cultures no evidence of spores. Mohility: In hanging drop appearing singly and in twos; no motility. Cultural characteristics: — Agar Slope. — 36 hours 37° C., moderate to abundant along track of needle, glis- tening, iridescent, porcelain white by transmitted light. Herring Agar Slope. — 20 hours 32° 0., growth abundant, yellowish white along track of needle raised edges, glistening iridescent, by transmitted light the thinner parts bluish discrete colonies. Ldefflers Blood Serum. — 24 hours 37° 0., luxuriant, moist; no liquefaction after 7 days. Ldefflers Malachite Green Solution: — 24 hours 37°C. Coagulated junket like coagulum clinging to sides of tube, gas; in 72 hours reduced greenish yellow; in 14 days reduced to yellowish-brown slimy looking liquid, partially digested. Gelatine Stah. — Room temperature, in 24 hours filiform growth equally good sur- face and stab, no liquefaction, slight gas — presumably from muscle sugar — growth luxuriant.' No liquefaction in 21 days. Nutrient Broth. — 18 hours 37° C., clouding even, no pellicle, no sediment, bluish rim at surface; in 48 hours heavy clouding, viscid sediment at bottom on shaking; in 72 hours flocculent suspension, later sediment increasing, medium becoming clearer, and flocculency. 200 DEPARTMENT OF TEE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Herring Broth. — Moderate clouding, bluish rim at surface, pellicle, viscid pre- cipitate on shaking; in 4 days very heavy brown-black sediment, later floc- culency and heavy clouding. Milh-. — In 18 hours at 37° C., frothy but no coagulation; in 72 hours coagulation commencing, gas; in 4 days gas holes in curd, frothy; in 10 days clear whey on surface of soft gassy curd. In 2 months no digestion. i Litmus Milk. — In 18 hours 37° lilaceus, much froth and gas, no coagulation; in 72 hours coagulation beginning; in 10 days tinted whey on surface of soft ’ curd pinkish to isabella ; no digestion in 2 months. ' Aesculin agar. — 37° 0. One loop from peptone broth culture streaked on plates; 1 in 24 hours reaction brown to black. ! Aesculin broth. — '37° C. Black reaction in 24 hours. } MacConkey’s N.R.B. Broth. — 37°. In 48 hours no reduction to canary yellow. | Gelatine Colonies. — (Room temperature) (1st appearance). Surface colonies up to I mm. diameter, bluish white to white, glistening, smaller colonies more distinctly blue; depression around colonies as noted Culture 32. Subsurface colonies yellowish white, small. Under low power objective the centre yellow- ish brown dense compact surrounded by pale border J diameter of colony; edges entire, clearly defined and hyaline. The differentiation of border from centre bears a close resemblance to colony of Asiatic cholera (plate 227 Kolle & Wassermann Atlas Tafel 10), and is not unlike plate 45 of colon colony | (Park & Williams, Path. Micro-organisms, 6th edition, page 110). In the large surface colonies the whole structure is more homogeneous. Subsurface , colonies appear similar. Agar colonies. — 20 hours 37° C., surface colonies 1^-2 mm. diameter. Flat to umbonate, growth rapid, colony round, surface smooth, glistening, iridescent. , By transmitted light ferric-yellow centre paling to bluish at edge. Subsur- face colonies punctiform. Under the low power objective surface colonies are ? dark in centre, “ mound ” appearance, gradually merging to pale lemon-brown ' colour, structure finely granular to grumose; subsurface colonies similar. ; Temperature relations: — Thermal Death Point. — 10 minutes exposure in nutrient broth at 60° C. . Optimum Temperature. — Cultures incubated at room temperature and at 37°C. ^ grow well; better growth at 37°C. j Vitality on Culture Media. — Suiwives several months, in artificial media, agar ^ or gelatine. ■ ! Relation to oxygen. — Facultative anaerobe; incubated at 37°C. for 36 hours under anaerobic conditions, moderate bluish growth by transmitted light, on glucose agar; spreading over slope as bluish film, small discrete colonies with centre more opaque. Condensation water heavily clouded; much froth; medium throughout tube riddled with gas bubbles. The organism appears to grow equally well aerobically or anaerobically. Biochemical Reactions: Indol production: Indol not produced. Production of nitrates: Nitrates reduced to nitrites. Voges-Proskauer reaction: Positive. Methyl red reaction: Alkaline. Fermentation of Carbohydrates. — The action of the culture on dulcite is vari- able but it evidently is able to ferment this alcohol to gas, some tests being BACTERIOLOGY OF ISARDINES 201 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a positive, some negative; the alcohol adonit on the other hand is fermented to acid and profuse gas with frothing in 24 hours. The action on inulin is somewhat characteristic, fermentation to acid and gas with frothing in 24 hours; no other strain isolated has such pronounced effect on this test sub- stance. Within 24 hours all the remaining carbohydrates are fermented to acid and profusely to gas with very pronounced frothing. In general this culture is much more active in its fermentation reactions than any of the cultures hitherto described. Glucose. Lactose. Saccharose. Mannite. Dulcite. + + + + + + + + A z±z Adonit. Raffinose. Arabinose. Xylose. Salicin. + + + + + + Aesculin. Glycerine. Inulin. + + + + + + + + + -1- + = acid. ++ = acid and gas. - Culture 36. Source: Can IV. Ser. I. Packer B. • Morphology. — Microscopially varying from very short stumpy rods to forms twice as ! long as broad; the majority -8-1 p. long, staining unevenly with Kiihne’s methy- lene blue; Gram negative*; from old agar culture no evidence of spores. f . . Motility. — In hanging drop occurring singly and in pairs; extremely active motility. Cultural Characteristics: — Agar slope. — 36 hours 37°C., moderate along track of needle, glistening iridescent. Porcelain to yellowish white by transmitted light. Herring Agar slope. — 20 hours at 32° C., growth moderate, slightly raised, dry but glistening, some discrete colonies, by transmitted light blue to yellow. I Loefflers Blood Serum. — 24 hours 37° C., moderate, glistening. No liquefaction Ij after 7 days. ij Ldeffler's Malachite Green Sol. — 24 hours 37° C., coagulated as Culture 34, much gas; in 72 hours reduced to greenish yellow. In 14 days coagulum not further reduced but precipitation on sides and bottom of tube; ferric-yellow liquid expressed. Gelatine stah. — Room temperature — in 24 hours Uliform growth equally good on surface and in stab; in 48 hours no liquefaction growth on surface showing, moist ; in 4 days growth luxuriant ; in 7 days growth becoming brown, medium J slightly tinted; no liquefaction arter 21 days. Nutrient Broth. — 18 hours 37° O., moderate even clouding, no pellicle, bluish rim at top, no sediment; in 48 hours heavy clouding watered silk appearance, later sediment noticeable; no pellicle even after 10 days, j Herring hroth. — Moderate growth, clouding flocculent suspension, bluish rim, I no pellicle; in 48 hours brown viscid sediment precipitated; in 10 days ring on surface, very heavy flocculent growth, black sediment; Milk. — 18 hours 37 °C. Much gas on shaking, with froth persistent, no coagula- tion; in 14 days weak coagulum commencing and coagulation slowly com- pleted when examined at the end of two months. Litmus Milk. — In 18 hours no coagulation, much froth on shaking with froth persisting; violaceus merging into heliotrope; no further change in 10 days; in 14 days lilaceus, no coagulation; when examined 6 weeks late coagulation complete, lilaceus. 38a— 14 202 DEPARTMEl:^T OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Aesculin agar. — One loop from peptone broth culture streaked on plates; in 24 hours 37° C. brown to black reaction. Aesculin broth. — The typical black reaction not given after 7 days; change only to brown. MacConhey’s N.R.B. broth. — In 48 hours 37° C. an eosin tint but no reduction to canary yellow after 7 days. Gelatine oolonies. — Eoom temperature (1st appearance) in 72 hours surface colo- | nies small, average ^ mm. diameter, glistening flat, round; by transmitted | light bluish white, almost transparent ; characteristic ring in gelatine as noted. | Culture 32; surface colonies yellowish white, small, round. Under the low | power objective surface colonies round distinctly granular and dark yellow centre, surrounded by pale border and edges entire and hyaline; on gelatine, the colonies unlike those previously described. N.B. — On referring to the notes made when this culture was originally isolated six months ago, I find that on agar the colonies were characteristically different from the colonies of Cultures 32, 34 or 35. It is of interest to note that this individuality has been maintained throughout a period of this length, and in spite of having many times been subcultured on labora- tory media. Agar Colonies.-— ‘iO hours, 37°C. growth rapid; surface colonies 1-1^ mm. dia- meter; fiat, glistening, iridescent; some colonies extending as thin blue pro- tuberances over the medium ; by transmitted light colonies bluish, little darker and more opaque in centre. Subsurface colonies up to -25 mm. diameter. Under the low power objective surface colonies coarsely granular, immediate . centre slightly darker and well defined; remainder same structure throughout; edges entire; subsurface colonies compact, grumose to ‘‘mound-like” structure; ‘ often the surrounding medium a light ferric colour due to precipitated gra- ‘ nules with no definite outline. Temperature Relations: — |j Thermal Death Point. — 10 minutes exposure to 60° C. in nutrient broth. • sj Optimum Temperature. — Growth satisfactory when incubated either at room J temperature or at 37 °C. Most satisfactory growth at 37 °C. Vitality on Culture Media. — The culture survives several months on artificial . media, agar or gelatine. i Relation to Oxygen: — Uacultative anaerobe; incubated for 36 hours at 37° C. under | anaerobic conditions grows on glucose agar as pale bluish thin film along track ; of needle, transmitted light; spreading over slope as discrete colonies; heavy cloudy growth in condensation water; much froth in tube, gas bubbles ^ cm. diameter } throughout medium. The organism grows equally well aerobically or anaerobic- ally. Biochemical Reactions: Indol production Indol not produced. Reduction of nitrates Nitrates reduced to nitrites. Voges-Proskauer reaction Positive. Methyl red reaction Alkaline. Fermentation of Carbohydrates: The culture ferments lactose to acid, but gas is not produced until 72 hours after inoculation; the amount then is small and no increase is observed on further incubation; glucose, saccharose, xylose, arabinose, and mannite are fermented to acid with profuse evolution of gas within 24 hours. The action upon raffinose is feeble. The Andrade indicator BAG TE RIO LOGY O F >SV1 R I) IX E S 203 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a is rapidly decolourized in the aesculin, assuming a lemon yellow tint, such persisting; this colour is partially dtie to the glucoside itself. Glucose. Lactose. Saccharose. Mannite. Dulcite. + + + + + + + + — Adonite. Raflinose. Arabinose. Xylose. Salicin. Aesculin. + - + — Glycerine. + - -f- + Inulin. + - + ■+ + = acid. + + = acid and gas, Culture 37. Source: Can V. Ser. I. Packer B. Morphology. — Microscopically rods, three times as long as broad; average length 1-Q g. Stain evenly. Gram negative*; from old agar cultures no evidence of spores. Motility. — In hanging drop occurring singly and in twos; motile; movement varying from revolving motion to a wavelike undulating motion. Cultural Characteristics: — Agar slope. — 36 hours, 37° C., luxuriant along track of needle, raised, glistening,, iridescent, yellowish-white by transmitted light; gas bubbles in medium pre- sumably from muscle sugar in meat extract. At times, particularly in the older cultures, agar growth decidedly slimy, drawing out on the needle. In 7 days, medium lemon to brown. HerHng agar. — 20 hours at 32 °C. Along track of needle hea\^, raised, compact, greyish white, glistening, spreading as thick blue-green veil, by transmitted light slightly iridescent, heavy clouding of condensation water. Loeffier^s Blood Serum. — 24 hours, 37° 0., luxuriant, raised, white, spreading, no liquefaction in 7 days. Ldefflers Malachite Green Sol. — In 24 hours precipitated light greei:t coagulum on sides of tube; in 48 hours reduction to yellow beginning in 7 days reduced to yellow and almost entirely digested. Gelatine Stab. — ^Room temperature — in 24 hours liquefaction commencing; in 48 hours crateriform to extent of 3mm, continuing down the stab as infundi’buli- form; in 7 days liquefaction complete and medium sharply divided into layers; immediately below surface liquefaction appears the colour of turbid whey, in successive layers turbidity and cloudiness gradually disappearing; heavy yellow flaky precipitate at bottom. Nutrient Broth. — 18 hours, 37° 0., heavy clouding, surface iridescent, pellicle, bluish rim easily detached on shaking — life-belt form — medium slightly floc- culent; in 4 days clouding very heavy, bluish rim; later sediment. Herring Broth. — Very similar to above but heavier growth; in 4 days heavy cloud- — ing and thick bluish white pellicle; later flocculent. Milh. — 18 hours, coagulation commencing; in 48 hours coagulated with gas and digestion well advanced; in 10 days more than half digested, whey yellowish, heavy pellicle, soft curd; in 14 days gas bubbles still persisting, digestion pro- ceeded, I tube, the soft curd adhering to the glass, digestion not proceeding directly from surface to bottom. At a later date when the organism had 38a— 141 204 DEPARTME'NT OF TEE NATAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 ' been in pure culture for several months, a decided ropiness was noted, milk ■ tubes being distinctly slimy within 24 hours after inoculation. This feature ' appears to have developed under cultivation and has since persisted. ! Litmus Milk. — In 18 hours violaceus, no coagulation; in 48 hours gas, heavy pellicle, coagulated and digestion proceeding; in 4 days a yellow digested fluid extending 2cm. below surface, remainder violaceous; in 10 days 4 digested, remainder soft gelatinous curd ; in 14 days except for tint, appearance very similar to milk as noted above. i Aesculin agar. — 1 loop from peptone broth culture streaked on plates. In 24 hours black reaction. MacConkey’s N.R.B. Broth. — In 24 hours heavy growth. No reduction to canary yellow. Later colour slightly changed but no deflnite reduction. i Gelatine Colonies. — (1st appearance.) Room temperature in 72 hours liquefaction | well advanced ; individual colonies up to 3mm. diameter, round, saucer-shaped, | characteristic of the organisms of the proteus group; centre of colony dark I white spot *25 mm. diameter, then clear space, then semi-transparent rim. Under the low power objective opaque centre merging into myceloid filaments, ; then clear space, and heavily clouded borders with entire edges; medium unchanged, no characteristic smell. Agar colonies.- — 20 hours at 37° C. growth rapid, surface colonies concave, 1^- 2Jmm. diameter; very slimy after repeated sub-culturing drawing out on needle 10-15cm. ; glistening; by transmitted light distinctly radiate, whole colony bluish but slightly more opaque in centre; subsurface colonies bluish | to white. Under the low power objective surface colonies brownish with dark j opaque centre in some, finely to coarsely granular; some colonies same stnic- , ture throughout; edges entire hyaline. Subsurface colonies distinct, grumosei to mound like. ' ■I Temperature Relations: — Thermal death point. — 10 minutes exposure in nutrient broth at 60° C. {j Optimum temperature. — Cultures incubated at room temperature and at 37° C. grow well. Most satisfactory growth at 37° C. j Vitality on Culture Media. — The culture survives several months in artificial medium agar or gelatine. ; Relation to Oxygen. — The culture is a facultative anaerobe ; incubated for 36 hours ] under anaerobic conditions moderate growth on glucose agar slope, bluish tint; I very heavy clouding of condensation water; on the slope seen as discrete colonies varying from a thin bluish film to converse moist colonies 1 mm. diameter with .j ferric yellow centre paling towards edges. The medium riddled with gas bubbles ^ - 1 cm. diameter, much froth in tube. This organism appears to grow equally | well aerobically or anaerobically. I Biochemical Reactions : — | Indol production: Indol produced. ! Reduction of Nitrates: Nitrates reduced to nitrites. I Voges-Proskauer reaction: Positive. j ^fethyl rod reaction: Alkaline. j I er mentation of Carbohydrates. — This culture ferments lactose feebly to acid, the Andrade indicator showing reduction in 48 hours, and no gas is produced. Raffinose, glycerine and inulin are fermented to acid with slight production of gas ; the gas in glycerine not appearing until the second day. The remaining fermentable substances are acted upon rapidly, evolving gas profusely within ^ BACTERIOLOGY OF SARDINES 205 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a 24 hours. It will be seen that of the two glucosides used, salicin and aescu- lin, the former only is fermented to gas. In the later cultural experiments a distinct sliminess appeared in all tubes, in peptone broths with and without added sugars; a pale white rim at surface observed to be slimy after several days at 37° 0. Glucose. Lactose. Saccharose. Mannite. Dulcite. + + + — + + + + — Adonit. Raffinose. Arabinose. Xylose. Salicin. — — + + + + Aesculin. Glycerine. Inulin. - + + + + + + = acid. ++ = acid and gas. Culture 6If. + + + + Source Can. VI., Ser. I, Packer C. From this source four strains have been isolated — 64, 64a, 64b aerobically, and 64c anaerobically. The similarity of the strains in culture is such that a detailed descrip- tion of each is not warranted. There are, however, certain cultural differences in 64a^ 64b and 64c as compared with 64, which I have thought worthy of special mention^ and these have been noted in the following description : — Morphology. — Microscopically varying from coccus forms to short thick rods; the former *8 p. diameter, the latter times as long as broad; Gram negative.* The culture has been recently isolated, and no evidence of spores has been obtained; this feature cannot at present be finally reported upon. Motility. — In hanging drop occurring singly and in twos; very actively motile; meteoric flashing across the field. Cultural Characteristics: — Agar Slope. — 24 hours, 37 °C., moderate along track of needle, flat, slightly con- toured, edges well defined, iridescent, by transmitted light yellowish white with bluish edges. Ldeffler's Blood Serum. — Moderate, no liquefaction; in 72 hours moderate, much less than culture 65. Loefflers Malachite Green Sol. — 24 hours 37° C., precipitate at bottom of tube, no coagulum, liquid turbid, pea green colour; in 7 days yellowish brown turbid fluid with ferric precipitate at bottom. Gelatine Stah. — Room temperature — 24 hours, filiform, no liquefaction; in 7 days no liquefaction, growth luxuriant, surface and in stab; yellow growth in stab. Nutrient Broth. — 24 hours 37° C., even clouding abundant, ‘watered silk” appear- ance, no pellicle, no sediment; in 7 days clouding even, no pellicle, heavy viscid yellowish white sediment at bottom of tube. . . v • ‘U I ' Milk. — 24 hours 37°C., frothy on shaking, no coagulation; in 72 hours soft coa- gulum, much gas, whey expressed, curd shrinking; in 7 days white turbid whey, curd shrinking and split by gas. ’ "T Litmus milk. — In 24 hours liliaceous, much froth on shaking, no coagulation; in 72 hours soft coagulum, bleached to Isabella, curd perceptibly shrinking; much gas ; in 7 days completely bleached with heliotrope rim at surface, depth of 2 cm. turbid tinted whey, curd rapidly disintegrating and permeated with gas holes. N.B. — This culture is violent in its action upon milk. 206 DEPARTME'NT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Aesculin agar. — 1 loop peptone broth culture streaked on plates. In 24 hours 37° C., black reaction. Aesculin broth. — In 24 hours, 37°'C‘., black reaction. MacConTcey's N.R.B. Broth. — In 48 hours, 37° C., reduced to canary yellow. Gelatine Colonies. — Room temperature (1st appearance) — identical with Culture 35 — 64a presents some variation. In 72 hours growth rapid abundant, more luxuriant than any of foregoing cultures; surface colonies up to 1 mm. diameter, compact, white, opaque with tendency to capitate, round; the smaller colonies bluish to bluish white. Subsurface colonies small compact. Under the low power objective surface colonies have appearance identical with the literature descriptions of the coli colony, edges entire centre dark and opaque; subsurface colonies pale yellow in colour, very finely granular, slightly darker in centre. See Culture 35. Agar Colonies. — 20 hours, 37° C., growth rapid, flat, surface colonies l|-2^ mm. diameter, round with tendency to spread; by transmitted light distinct bluish appearance, glistening, iridescent. Subsurface colonies up to 0-25 mm. diameter bluish to white. Under the low power objective surface colonies have small well defined dark centre, remainder lemon coloured; structure coarsely granular to grumose, edges entire, hyaline and well defined; pale radiate filaments — star-like rays — emanate from the colonies into surround- ing medium. Subsurface colonies dark grumose to “ mound-like.” Agar Colonies SJ^a. — 20 hours 37° C., growth rapid, surface colonies bluish from 1-2 mm. diameter, glistening, iridescent, tendency to run together, forming blue film over agar. Subsurface colonies up to 1 mm. diameter white to yellowish white; some force their way to surface and appear as yellowish- white in centre, spreading on surface to 3 mm. diameter, blue, flat, concen- trically ringed, contoured, edges undulate to lobate. Under the low power objective surface colonies (majority) finely granular at centre to grumose near edge; in some instances characteristic protuberances over agar as in culture 64, edges entire; subsurface lemon yellow, edges entire. T emperature Relations : — Thermal Death Point. — Exposed in nutrient broth for 10 minutes at 60° C. organ- ism survives; exposed for 10 minutes at 70° C. no subsequent growth; exact temperature not yet definitely determined. Optimum Temperature. — Grows well at room temperature and at 37 °C. More satisfactory growth at 37° C. Vitality on Culture Media. — Not yet determined. Relation to Oxygen: — The culture is a facultative anaerobe; incubated for 36 hours under anaerobic conditions at 37°C. the medium — glucose sugar — is split, riddled with gas bubbles and upper portions blown to top of tube, much froth; heavy cloudy condensation water permeated whole medium. The organism grows with extreme rapidity both aerobically and anaerobically. Chemical Reactions : Iiidol production: Indol not produced. Reduction of nitrates: Nitrates reduced to nitrites. Voges-Proskauer reactions: Positive. Methyl red reaction: Alkaline. Fermentation of Carbohydrates. — The culture fails to ferment dulcite and adonit to acid or gas. All other test substances used are fermented within 24 hours BACTERIOLOGY OF SARDINE8 207 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a to acid, and profusely with much frothing to gas. In the glucose, lactose, saccharose, mannite, raffinose, and arabinose tubes the Andrade indicator is completely reduced within 24 hours, the reduction in the xylose, salicin and aesculin tubes being slower. Compared with the other cultures described herein, the rapid and violent action upon the carbohydrates is both distinctive and characteristic, as also is the rapidity with which the Andrade indicator is decolourized. The decolourized tubes when tested with methyl red show decided alkalinity. The rapid reversion to an alkaline reaction is a point of considerable interest. Slftt. — The fermentation reactions are identical with those of the above culture, but a striking difference, which may be but temporary however, has been noted in the action upon the Andrade indicator. No reduction of the indi- cator in any tubes was noted within 24 hours; in 72 hours glucose, mannite, arabinOse, xylose and salicin had changed from the scarlet tint of the acid reaction to a deep pink shade. In 7 days the glucose, arabinose, and xylose tubes only were completely reduced giving an alkaline reaction to methyl red. I have as yet no explanation to offer regarding this apparent selective action towards the Andrade indicator; the inoculations were made at the same time, the same amount of the respective peptone broth cultures being added as the inoculum, such broth cultures being the same age, and all medium used of the same standard stock. In this connection it may be of interest to mention that for some months I have been experimenting with Congo red as an indicator in connection with routine water analyses for the colon group; these experiments are as yet not suffi- ciently complete for publication; I have used this indicator in sugar broths as a confirmatory test and find that the strains 64 and 64a exhibit again, as in the Andrade indicator, a selective action. Glucose. Lactose. Saccharose. + + + + + + Adonit. Eaffinose. Arabinose. + + + + Aesculin. Glycerine. Inulin. + -t +d= + + ++ = acid and gas. + = acid. Mannite. Dulcite. + + — — Xylose. Salicin. + + + + Gas-Pkoducing Orangisnis, Summary, Morphological and Biological Features. 208 DEPARTME'NT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 •ODJUOg Can II, Ser. II. Packer A. Can V, Ser, I, Packer B. Can. I, Ser. I, Packer B. Can. IV, Ser. I, Packer B. Can III, Ser. II, Packer A. Can II, Ser. I, Packer A. Can III, Ser. I, Packer A. Can VI, Ser. I, Packer C. 'uoS -Axq 05 uoi^'^py; facul. anaer. prefers aerob. facul. anaer. fac. anaer. fac. anaer. facul. anaer. prefers aerobic facul. anaer. facul. anaer. facul. anaer. •ojn^r? -jodmoj^ tuuuii^do .o o o o ooo o o '-'cc eo 00 CO co^c^ CO CO CO *5d q5i39a QO Q T30 O O O O CO CO CO CO CO t- •q50jg -a H'xSl s^AaquoQOUj^ No reduc- tion. Slight reduc- tion. No reduc- tion. No reduc- tion. No reduc- tion. No reduc- tion. No reduc- tion. Reduced to canary yellow. •j-cSy uqnosay Brown Black Black Brown Black Brown Black e No reaction. Black Brown to Black Black ‘mm a Coag. 72 hrs. dig. _ Coag. 18 hrs. dig. slimy. Coag. 72 hrs. Coag. 14 days. Coag. 72 hrs. Coag. 48 hrs. Coag. 72 hrs. no dig. Coag. 72 hrs. •q^ojg 5uau5u^ Cloud. heavy Cloud heavy pell. Mod. cldg. pell. Mod, no pell. Mod. cloud. Mod. cloud. Even cloud, no pel. Abun. cloud. •q^5g auI5^qaf) Liq. Liq. No liq. No liq. No liq. No liq. No liq. No liq. ’loS uaa.i{) a5iqo'B{'Bj\[ Coag. part, dig. Reduced. Coag. no reduc. Coag. sigh, reduc. Coag. no reduction. Coag. not reduced. Coag. reduction. Precip. reduction. •uiu.iag poo]g Mod. no Liq. Lux. no Liq. Mod. no Liq. Mod. no Liq. Sit. no Liq. Mod. no Liq. Lux. no Liq. Mod. no Liq. -.xloig .njSy Lux. Lux. Lux. Mod. Mod. Mod. Mod. to Lux. Mod. •.^5iIjjoi\[ -b -U Wave- like C + Act. -b Act. -b Act. + Very act. •sajodg 1 1 III III •UIT?5g 1 1 III III •X5foioqdaoi\[ Coc. to Rod Rod Rod Rod Rod Coc. to Rod Coc. to Rod Coc. to Rod •ajtuiuQ 24 b 37 32 36 26 34 35 64 a Sliminess noted as digestion proceeds, b Slirniness appearing after successive subculturing. c Motion as in semi-circles, d See page 197. e Aesculin fer- mented to gas, but no action on aesculin agar, f Not yet definitely determined, see page 206, Gas-Producing Organisms Summary, Biochemical Beactions. r ' BACTERIOLOGY OF SARDMES SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a •aojuog Can II. Ser. II. Packer A. Can V. Ser. I. Packer B. Can I. Ser. I. Packer B. Can IV. Ser. I. Packer B. Can III. Ser. II. Packer B. Can III. Ser. I. Packer A. Can III. Ser. I. Packer A. Can VI. Ser. I. Packer C. •mraUT + + + 1 + + + + + + + + + •0uuaDXi.n ' + 4* I 1 1 -H -f- I 8U,«oA|0 + + ^ + 'unnosav ^ + 4- 4- u,inos0> +-++!»+ + + + •uioir'cc '4-..- 4- + 1 4- -p 4- 4- j + + + 1 + + + + •asoT^v i4-4-4-4--I-4-4-4- ^ ^ 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- -880U!q«av + + + + + + + + •asouqi^H + + •a!jiuopy 1 1 1 1 1 1 4- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4- 1 •ap.o|nQ 1 1 1 1 1 ^4* 4" I I 4- 1 4- 1 4- "^4- -P 1 •a;;iuu'Bj\[ 4--P4--P4-4-4-4- -P4-4-4-4-4--P4- •asoj'Bqoo'cg 4-4-4-4--P4-4-4- -p-p-p-p-p-p-p-p •aso:;o'Bq[ 1 I -P + + -p + + 4- -P 4- "4- 4- 4- 4- -p *asoonj0 4-4-4--P4--P4-4- -p -p -p -p -p + *P 4* •pan l^q49J\[ Aik. Aik. Aik. Aik. Acid. Aik. Aik. Aik. •aan'cq | -soa j saSo^ + -P I 4- I 14-4- *UOt!I -anpa^ -P-P4--P^‘-P-P-P •lopui 1 -P 1 1 1 1 II •aan^HnQ 1 ^ 1 ^1 J? 1 iPiS 209 + Acid. ++ Acid and Gas. gGas after 72 hours. h Sliminess appearing after successive subculturing. i Note production of gas in one glucoside, not in the other. k Feebly to gas. 1 Reduced, lemon yellow. m Gas not produced until 72 hours. o Andrade indicator rapidly decolourised. p Carbohy- drates feebly acted upon, but positive within 24 hours. q Characteristically profuse. r Reaction very slow. s Pronounced and rapid action upon carbohydrates. 1 Action on inulin pronounced, more so than any of the series. x The carbohydrates attacked are fermented profusely to gas within 24 hours; rapid reduction of Andrade indicator and characteristically rapid reversion to alkalinity. 210 DEPARTME~NT OF THE FATAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 EXPERIMENTAL SWELLED CANS. Having’ isolated strains of gas-producing bacteria from swelled cans of sardines, and having determined their cultural features and biochemical reactions, the next step was to attempt the experimental swelling of normal cans by inoculation of organisms already isolated. Up to the present I have used three cultures for this purpose — cul- tures 35, 37 and 64. These three cultures on the basis of their biological and bio- chemical reactions are sufficiently differentiated (pages 199-207) to warrant indivi- dual trials. A number of normal cans of sardines were most courteously supplied by the manager of the Chamcook factory, St. Andrews, N.B. Some of the cans were of sardines packed in cottonseed oil, olive oil having been used for the remainder. The cans had to be “ punched,” inoculated, and again sealed. In order to eliminate as far as possible any error of manipulation I obtained by courtesy of the chief engineer, the services of the college plumber, who undertook the soldering. To avoid trouble from escaping oil, the cans were placed on end, rather than flat on the bottom. By the usual method a layer of solder was first spread over a portion of the can; this I cleaned and sterilized with absolute alcohol, and then with a sterile awl punched a hole 3 mm. diameter. From a Icc. pipette, 2 to 3 drops of a young peptone broth culture of the desired organism were quickly dropped in; a small square of sterilized tin heated in the flame was at once placed over the hole, and the soldering process performed. The layer of solder previously spread over the can assisted materially in making the pro- cess effective. In this manner cans were inoculated with the respective cultures; the control cans receiving exactly the same treatment minus the inoculation. The cans, each placed in the half of a large petri dish, were incubated at a temperature of 30° to 33° C. They were examined at frequent intervals, and in 4 days swelling was observed in those inoculated. In 7 days the swelling has become so pronounced that there appeared to be danger from explosions. The cans were examined. Normal Cans. — (Punched and resoldered). These appeared perfectly normal; no oil in petri dish, no moisture on outside of can, no swelling, no “ rattle ” on shaking. When opened there was no escape of gas; contents firm in texture, flesh the white of the normal sardines, and comparatively dry ; odour typical and mild ; normal in every resiject. INOCULATED CANS. Can So. — Inoculated with culture 35, oil in petri dish and on surface of can; pro- nounced swelling, top and bottom of can, convex; on shaking, the typical ‘‘rattle” of the original “swells”; when opened escape of gas and exuding of oil. The contents were soft, moist, and disintegrated to an even greater degree than in many of the original “ swells.” The oil was intermixed with the macerated sardines, and gas bubbles were very evident throughout the whole. The colour was a little darker than normal. The odour was not putre- factive, but an accentuation of the typical normal swell. The conditions noted were as evident on the side immediately opposite the point of inocula- tion, as at the point of inoculation itself. The condition of this can and its contents was in every respect identical with the conditions found when examining the original typical “ swells,” but accentuated. Can 37. — Inoculated with culture 37. The description given of can 35 is here strictly applicable; no variation could be noted. Can GJt. — Inoculated with culture 64. The swelling of this can was more pro- nounced, otherwise the description given of can 35 is here strictly applicable in every respect. Isolation of Organisms. — Pieces of fish were taken from the respective cans and inoculated into series of liquid media; glucose peptone broth, peptone broth, and nutrient broth respectively. These tubes were incubated at 37° C. for 24 hours. BACTERIOLOGY OF SARDINES ?11 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Pronounced clouding of the media by each inoculum was by that time evident. Plates were made on glucose agar, and after incubation at 37° C. for 24 hours, typical colonies were picked off and streaked on agar slopes. Subsequently series of inoculations were made, and the organisms isolated proved to be identical respectively with the strains with which the experimental cans were inoculated. Cultures 35, 37 and 64 respectively have experimentally produced typical swelled cans, have been re-isolated and proved culturally identical with the original strain. The Postulates of Koch ” have been satisfied. ORGANISMS WHICH DO NOT PRODUCE GAS. Culture 7. Source : Herring Excreta. Morphology : — Spore forming rods, occurring singly, in twos and in long forms. Gram negative. Cultural Characteristics : — Nutrient hroth. — In 24 hours at 37°C., membranous pellicle, medium clear; 1 month yellow sediment, medium clear. Milk. — In 5 days pellicle, no change; in 1 month yellow turbid digestion extending 3 down tube. Litmus Milk. — In 24 hours no change; in 10 days pellicle, sediment, digestion with colour varying from yellow to dark purple. Gelatine Stah. — Room temperature, liquefaction beginning in 2 days. In 5 days napiform to a depth of 5 mm., remainder filiform; in 14 days liquefaction still proceeding with lower part of stab a discrete villous growth; medium ferric lemon. Biochemical Reactions: — Indol: not produced. Nitrates: not reduced- Glucose broth : acid, even clouding, no gas. This culture in its reactions is typical of many strains isolated from herring excreta. Culture 21. Source: Normal Can sardines, Packer A. Morphology. — Extremely long thin rods, forming spores; in hanging drop occurring singly and in twos, motile. Gram positive. Cultural Characteristics : — Nutrient hroth. — In 24 hours at 37°C., slight clouding, no pellicle; in three days membranous cup-shaped pellicle, medium cloudy; later, pellicle luxuriant, thick creamy, medium yellowish brown. Milk. — No change up to 5 days, when weak coagulum beginning; in 9 days tubes half cogulated; in 16 days yellow digestion nearly complete, remainder of medium firm hard curd. Litmus Milk. — No change in 24 hours; in 3 days pellicle, upper layers of milk dark purple, remainder violaceus, no coagulation; in 9 days digested with- out previous coagulation to muddy looking yellowish brown liquid. Loeffiers Blood Serum: — Rapid liquefaction. 212- DEPARTMENT OF TEE NATAL EERTICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Gelatine Stah:—Room temperature, in 24 hours crateriform liquefaction beginn- ing; proceeding slowly in 7 days to 5 cm. from surface of stab; in 18 days not complete, layers of yellowish precipitate. Biochemical Reactions: — Indol : not produced. Nitrates: not reduced. Glucose broth : acid, chiefly at surface, no gas. From the same can, and other normal cans, strains were isolated which according to the reactions noted proved to be identical with this culture. Culture 13. Source: Swelled Can I, Series II, Packer A. Morphology. — Large coccus, occurring as staphylococcus, no spores. Gram positive. Cultural Characteristics: — Nutrient broth. — 24 hours at 37° C., moderate, cloudy; no pellicle. Milk. — In 5 days no change; no change in 1 month. Litmus milk. — As milk. Gelatine Stab. — Eoom temperature. In 2 days no liquefaction; in 5 days scant growth filiform to discrete; in 14 days medium faintly browned, growth in stab discrete and ferric yellow tint; no liquefaction, growth better under surface. Biochemical Reactions: — Indol : not produced. Nitrates: ? Glucose broth: Acid, even clouding, no gas. Culture 28. Source: Same Can as Culture 13. Morphology. — ^Long rods many times longer than broad, oval spores formed; Gram negative; in hanging drop appear singly; in twos and in long chains; motile with gliding movement. Cultural Characteristics : — NutHent Broth. — 24 hours 37° C. Moderate, cloud5'-, slight pellicle; in 1 mouth cloudy with flocculent yellow sediment. Milk. — In 5 days no change; in 1 month digested completely, yellow turbid fluid. Litmus Milk. — In 10 days dark purple fluid with no previous coagulation; un- changed in 1 month. Ldeffler's Blood Serum. — Rapid liquefaction. Gelatine Stab. — Room temperature, in 2 days slight liquefaction noted; in 5 days liquefaction progressed to depth of 2 mm., stratiform, remainder of stab dis- crete colonies; in 14 days liquefaction 1 cm. depth, stratiform yellowish layers Biochemical reactions : — Indol: not produced. Nitrates: not reduced. Glucose broth: Acid, upper part, pellicle, no gas. Cultures 13 and 28 typical of several strains isolated from such cans. BACTERIOLOGY OF SARDINES 213 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Culture IJf.. Som'ce: Swelled Can II, Series II, Packer A. Morphology. Long rods many times longer than broad; spores. Gram positive; in hanging drop occurring singly, in twos, and in chains; appear at first immobile but prolonged examination reveals slow laboured movement, some individuals appearing to push themselves along. Cultural Characteristics: — Nutrient hroth. — 24 hours 37° C., cloudy, fiocculent pellicle; in 10 days heavy clouding with some flocculency; in 1 month clouding and yellow precipitate at bottom of tube. Milk. — In 5 days no coagulation, ring, pellicle; in 1 month coagulated, some yellow whey expressed. Litmus milk. — In 24 hours no change; in 10' days lilac, no coagulation; in 1 month coagulation, and some whey expressed. Gelatine Stdh. — Koom temperature — in 2 days moderate growth, dip in gelatine; in 5 days crateriform liquefaction and spreading gro^yth on surface of stab; in 14 days liquefection varied from V-shaped to crateriform to depth of 1 cm., cloudy; remainder of stab discrete. Biochemical reactions: — Indol: not produced. Nitrates: not reduced. Glucose broth : acid, more particularly near the surface, no gas. Culture. s 'o -C o Spore formation. Motility. Gram’s stain. Nutrient broth. Milk. 1 Litmus milk. 1 Loeffler’s blood j .serum. j (xelatine stab. Indol. Reduction of nitrates. Glucose broth. Source. 7 Rod. + V Pellicle, Slow Digest. Liquef. + - Herring med. clear. digest. excreta. 21 Rod. + + + Clouding, Slow Digest. Rapid Liquef. later coag. slowly liquef. slow. - + - Sardines, pellicle. later without Packer A, dig. previous Normal can. coagln. 13 Coccus. ? + Moder. No No No cloudy. change. change. liquef. — ? + ~ Swelled Can I, Ser. IT, Packer A. 28 Rod. + + Cloudy, Slow Cleared Rapid Liquef. _ _ + - As Culture later digest. with no liquef. slowly. 13 pellicle. coag. 14 Rod. 4- 4- + Cloudy. No Slow Liquef. _ _ -f- Swelled Can feeb change. digest. aher II (Ser. IT) 14 days. Packer A. 16 Coccus. — — + Cloudy, Coag. Coag. Liquef. _ _ + - Swelled Can later slow. slow. slowly. , HI (Ser. II) precip. Packer A. 214 DEPARTMENT OF TEE NATAL EERTIGE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 BEIEF SUMMARY. 1. Forty cans of sardines, “ swelled,’’ and “ normal,” have been submitted to a bacteriological examination. 2. Cottonseed oil, and the excreta of fresh herrings have been examined. 3. From the “ swelled ’” cans eight) strains of gas-producing bacteria have been isolated, — Cultures 24, 26, 32, 34, 36, 36, 37 and 64. 4. The eight strains have been studied morphologically, biologically, and bioch- emically, and have been described, pages 192-207. (a) Two strains. Cultures 24 and 37, liquefy gelatine, and fail to ferment lactose; these are tentatively placed in the Proteus group, B. vulgaris (Hauser 1885), Migula 1900. (b) The remaining six strains are lactose-fermenting types. I consider that these include typical and a-typical types of the colon-aerogenes group (Escherich) ; but for the present an individual classification is not offered. 5. The features and reactions of the gas-producing bacteria have been summarized; pages 208 and 209. 6. Experimental ^‘swellings”, typical in every respect have been produced in the laboratory on inoculation with Cultures 35, 37, and 64 respectively. The organisms subsequently isolated have been proved culturally to be identical with those used for inoculation; thus satisfying the Postulates of Koch.” 7. No bacteria have been found in the cottonseed oil. 8. Non-gas-producing bacteria have been isolated from herring excreta, from swelled cans, and from a small percentage of the normal cans examined; brief notes are presented on pages 211-213. 9. No gas producing bacteria have been isolated from normal cans of sardines. I desire to express my indebtedness to Dr. A. B. ]Macallum; to Dr. A. G. Hunts- man; to Dr. F. C. Harrison; to the Maine Inspectors of the ‘^National Canners’ Association of America ” ; and to the proprietors and managers of the various canning factories which were visited with their permission. BACTERIOLOGY OF SARDIYES 215 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a REFERENCES. 1. Prescott and Underwood, 1897. Micro-organisms and Sterilizing Processes in the Canning Industries.” Technology Quarterly X, 1. P. 183-199. 2. Macphail and Bruere, 1897. “ Discolouration in Canned Lobsters.” Ottawa Supp. No. 2, 29th Annual Kept., Dept. Marine and Fisheries. 3. Obst, 1916. A Bacteriological Study of Sardines.” Abs. Bact. I, 1. P. 50. 4. Nielson, Ivar. 1890. “ Ein Stuck moderner Bakteriologie aus dem 12 Jan- rundert.” Central, fur. Bakt, u Parisit, erste abt, 7. 267. 5. Auchi, F., 1894. “ Comptes rendus de la Soc. de Biologic.” P. 18. 6. Vaughan, V. C. “ The infection of Meat and Milk.” Trans. 7th Inter. Congr. Hyg. Vol. Ill, Sec. III. P. 118-129. 7. Savage, W. G., 1913. ‘^Bacterial Food Poisoning and Food Infection.” M.O. Kpt. Local Govt. Bd. Food Rpts., No. 18. P. 46. 8. Vaughan and Novy, 1902. Cellular Toxins.” Lea Bros., Philadelphia, P. 262. loc. cit. P. 209. loc. cit. P. 188. 9. McWeeney. Meat Poisoning — Its Nature, Causation and Prevention.” Journ. Meat and Milk Hyg. Vol. I. John Bale, London. P. 1-31. (Note. — Separate not dated, evidently about 1909.) 10. Baur, 1902. Ueber zwei denitrificirende Bakterien aus der Ostsee.” Wissensch, Meeresuntersuch. Neue folge. Sechster Band. Abt. kiel. P. 21. 11. American Public Health Association, 1915. “Standard Methods of Water Analysis.” P. 77-137. 12. Besson, 1913. “ Text Book of Practical Bacteriology, etc.” Longmans Green, London. P. 53. 13. Besson, 1913. “ Text Book of Practical Bacteriology, etc.” Longmans Green, London. P. 410. 14. Harrison and Vanderleck, 1908. “Aesculin Bile Salt Agar for Water and Milk Analysis.” Trans. Roy. Soc., Can., Ill, Ser. II. P. 105-110. 15. Savage, 1906. “Bacterial Examination of Water Supplies.” Lewis, London. P. 215. 16. “Bacterial Destruction of Copepods.” Contrib. to Canadian Biol., 1917-18, Ottawa, 1918. Ref. 6, P. 227. 17. Clarke and Lpbs, 1915. “Differentiation of Bacteria of the Colon-aerogenes group.” Journ. Infect. Diseases. P. 17, 160-173. 18. Giltner, Cited by, 1916. “Microbiology.” Wiley, N.Y. P. 355. 19. “Bacterial Destruction of Copepods.” Contrib. to Canadian Biologj’, 1917-18. 20. Loc cit. P. 218. 8 GEORGE V SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a A. 1918 XIII. BACTERIAL DESTRUCTION OF COPEPODS OCCURRING IN MARINE PLANKTON. By Wilfrid Sadler, ]\r.Sc., B.S.A., Bacteriological Labatories, Macdonald College (McGill I^niversity), Province of Quebec, Canada. During the summer of 1916 I was investigating the bacteriological content of “Swelled Canned Fish’’ for the Biological Board of Canada at the Marine Station, St. Andrews, N.B. While there Dr. Arthur Willey (Professor of Zoology, McGill University) called my attention to the condition of some of the copepods — (Calanus finmarcliicus — upon which he was conducting researches. Under the microscope it was seen that many parts of the tissue of copepods which had died in culture flasks were completely destroyed by masses of what appeared to be bacteria. It was particularly noticed that the axial cavity in the first antennae was entirely occupied by a dense column of writhing organ- isms. Tubes of nutrient broth were inoculated direct from the copepods and after two days’ incubation at room temperature a definite clouding of the medium ^vas noted. At the reque.st and on the suggestion of Dr. Willey I have proceeded with the examination of the cultures secured, and have obtained in pure culture the organisms concerned. Three specific strains of bacteria have been isolated. Inasmuch as the work may have some practical significance in relation to the general subject of marine biology, and is of scientific interest, this report of the detailed studies of these organisms has been prepared. MEDIA EMPLOYED. I began by using various media prepared from fish concoctions in addition to the ordinary laboratory media. The latter, however, proved to be more satisfactory in every \vay and I have therefore confined myself to their use entirely. Beef Peptone Agar. — Standard methods^ — Beef extract being substituted for meat. Beef Peptone Gelatine. — Standard methods.^ Glucose Agar. — 1% glucose added to agar prepared as above, immediately before tubing. Sodium Indigo Sulphate Agar. — 3 per cent, sodium indigo sulphate with 2 per cent, glucose added to neutral agar, tubed and sterilized in flowing stream for three successive days. Tochtermanns Serum AgaP. — ^ For digestion test. Loeffiers Blood Serum. — ^ ” ?? ?? Aesculin Agar."^ — For specific reaction of organisms of the colon-aerogenes group. Loops of a broth culture spread on plates. eutral Red Bile Salt Agar.^ — Ditto, ditto. iX Bouillon for V oges-Proshauer reaction.^ — “ Bouillon for tJue Methyl Red Reaction.'^ — ^ Solution for reduction of Nitrates to JSiitrites. — Giltay’s synthetic solution was used, and also a peptone potassium-nitrate solution. 38a— 15 217 218 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 | Dunham Solution for Indol Production. — 1 per cent peptone, 5 per cent NaCl dissolved in distilled water, the reaction adjusted to + 10, medium cleared with white of egg, filtered, tubed and sterilized. After 7 days’ incubation at 37i°C. the cultures were tested for indol by the Bohme Ehrlich test® ; the development of a cherry red colour indicating the presence of indol. Fermentation hroths. — The various sugars, alcohols, glucosides used were pre- pared separately as 10 per cent solutions in distilled water, and sterilized for [ 15 minutes in flowing steam for three successive days. Immediately before i inoculation these were added to tubes of broth made up as for the indol test — ' the use of peptone water without beef eliminates any risk of the reaction t being masked by action on the muscle sugar — in such proportions as to give I a final 1 per cent sugar or other carbohydrate broth. Dunham tubes were used for the collection of the gas. For acid production the acid fuchsin indicator of Andrade,^ as adapted by Hollman, was used at the rate of 2 per cent. In the preparation of the indicator I have noticed as reported by Andrade, and Hollman that the colour which results from the addition of the normal caustic soda is preceptibly affected by being left open to the air. By adding the caustic soda to freshly prepared acid fuchsin solution at intervals through- out the day, leaving the reagent meanwhile exposed to the air, I have found that 2^ cc. n/NaOH will decolorize to the proper shade of amber 100 cc. fuchsin solution. Litmus Milk. — The milk freshly separated and tubed was sterilized for three suc- cessive days for 30 minutes in flowing steam. The litmus was made up separately ; a 7 per cent solution of “ Merck’s ” litmus in distilled water, heated in the steamer for 30 minutes and left over night in the incubator, filtered, sterilized for three successive days in flowing steam and added to the milk immediately before inoculation at the rate of li per cent. Hote: It will be seen from page 224 that culture III of this paper exhibited an unusual degree of sensitiveness to the litmus. For this reason I now consider the proportion of the indicator added to be of some importance. * CULTUKAL STUDIES. Culture I. Morphology. — Microscopically — 24-hour-old agar culture at 37° C. — short rods vary- ing up to 1-6 fx long and 1 jx broad; some larger forms; stains unevenly with Kuhne’s methylene blue, and is Gram negative. No spores are formed and no capsule shown. Motility. — Decided brownian movement, but not the violent agitation noted in culture III. No motility. Cultural Characteristics: — Agar Slope. — 24 hours at 37°C. growth luxuriant, raised, slightly spreading, moist, glistening, porcelain-white, edges echinulate. Glucose Agar Slope. — Gas, growth luxuriant, raised, moist, glistening, woolly appearance, haze, porcelain-white, spreading. T ochtermann s Serum Agar Slope. — Resembling growth on glucose agar, but no woolly appearance. In 8 days growth had permeated medium as flakes; gas, heavy precipitate collected at base of slope. Loeffiers Blood Serum. — Moderate, spreading, flat, no digestion, no discolouration. In 7 days no digestion ; colour Isabella, luxuriant, moist, slightly raised, iridiscent. BACTERIAL DESTRUCTION OF COPE PODS 219 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Sodium Indigo Sulphate Agar Slope. — Luxuriant, raised, moist, spreading, no reduction. In 8 days no reduction. Gelatine Stah. — 21 °C. 24 hours, growth filiform, equal surface and stab. In 7 days as before; gas bubbles — presumably from the muscle sugar in the beef extract — in tube. In 6 weeks no liquefaction, growth brown, echinulate, medium unchanged. Nutrient Broth. — 37 °C. 24 hours. Clouding abundant, medium clearing, flaky sediment at bottom, bluish rim at top. In 3 days flocculent yellowish-white rim at top, easily dislodged on shaking. Medium almost clear. Potato. — Abundant along track of needle, glistening, contoured, Isabella colour, growth slightly raised; in 3 days iridiscence perceptible and medium slightly browned. Milk. — Coagulation in 24 to 30 hours; curd broken by gas bubbles. In 6 weeks curd contracted, no digestion. Litmus Milk. — In 20 hours lilac, much gas, no coagulation; in 36 hours coagula- tion with gassy curd ; in 5 days curd bleached ; in 6 weeks no digestion. Aesculin Agar. — ^Luxuriant, moist, black reaction. Neutral Red Bile Salt Agar. — Luxuriant, raised, glistening, moist. Characteristic red reaction. Peptone Broth + Aesculin. — Black reaction. Gelatine Colonies. — (1st appearance) 5 days at 21°C. Surface colonies up to 1 mm. diameter, raised, slightly darker in centre, paling towards edges. Under the low power objective homogenous, granular, edges entire. Agar Colonies. — 24 hours at 37° C. Surface colonies up to 3 mm. diameter, raised, concave, glistening, yellowish-white at centre, paling towards edges, edges entire, colonies bluish by transmitted light. Under low power objective edges entire, finely granular, amorphous. Temperature Relations: — Thermal Death Point. — 10 mns. exposure in nutrient broth at 60° C. Optimum Temperature. — 37° C. Cultures incubated at 37°, 21°, and 14°C. respec- tively. Vitality on Culture Media. — Active cultures have been recovered from agar after 5 months at temperature of 15°-20°C. Relation to Oxygen. — Facultative anaerobe; glucose agar. Biochemical reactions: — Indol production: Indol produced. Reduction of nitrates : Nitrates reduced to nitrites. Voges-Proskauer reaction: Negative. Methyl red reaction : Acid. Fermentation of Carbohydrates : — Glucose. Lactose. Saccharose. Maltose. Mannite. + + + + + + + + + + __ Dextrine. Salicin. Raffinose. Adonite. Inulin. + + + + + + + + + + Glycerine. + + + = acid. t ++ = acid and gas. I 38a — 15^ Dulcite. + -f Xylose. + + 220 DEPARTME^'T OF THE NATAL SERTICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Culturally and biochemically this organism is a variation of the B. coli type according to the description of Escherichd^ The variety I have isolated differs from the original description in that it is non-motile and ferments saccharose to acid and gas. The degree of importance to be attached to any one character has been discussed at considerable length in the literature during the last thirty years; owing to the fact that this organism is used as a presumptive test for faecal contamination in systematic water analysis. Of the two variations from the original type mentioned above, the presence or absence of motility may first be considered. There has been a tendency by some workers to consider a non-motile form of B. coli (Escherich)i^ as B. aerogenes (Escherich)’h This position, hovvever, is not sub- stantiated by the researches of Escherich and Pfaundler, MacConkey, Jackson and others. Escherich and Pfaundler^- in describing the original B. ooli state that generally there is motility, sometimes slight; a characteristic movement as of short forward pushes; swinging in space with sometimes no change of place is also noted. The absence of definite motion as recorded by Tafel, Frankel and others is cited in the same paper. Lembke^^ considers that motility in B. coli is variable. McWeeney^"* in discussing what he would regard as the genuine B. ooli remarks; “on the motility of individuals or its absence I hesitate to lay much stress.” Houston^^ in using .a broad classification for the true colon group adopts his “fiaginac” test which leaves open the question of motility. Durham^® considers that all members of the true colon group are probably motile ; but in the same paper states ; “speaking generally morpho- logical characters are not of much value for subdivision of these bacteria.” MacConkey^’^ discusses the infiuence of temperature and medium on motility; and while he considers the presence or absence as important he says : “it is very difficult to arrive at a conclusion witli regard to this character.” Ellis^^ has proved the presence of flagella in five species of the genus Bacterium which were hitherto held to be non- motile; and he considers that all the genus Bacterium when suitably cultivated can be shown to be motile. His conclusions would appear to be not sufficiently substantiated oil the data given. The English Commission on the Standardization of Methods for the bacteriological examination of water^^ ; and the American Commission on Standard jMethods^ each specify motility as one characteristic of the true B. coli-, but a com- parison of the two standards reveals variance as to the significance to be attached to this specific feature. Prescott and Winslow-^ consider the sugar fermentations, par- ticularly the fermentations of glucose and lactose, are of prime importance. Savage-^ considers motility as one of the essential characters of the true B. coli. Migula-- includes B. neapolitanus (Emmerich) ^3 which is non-motile, as identical with B. coli (Escherich). Tims while the concensus of opinion is undoubtedly in favour of specifying motility as a character of the true B. coli, there would seem to be no justification ai'cording to iiresent classification for excluding from this type an organism prepon- deratingly similar and placing it with B. wrogenes (Escherich)^^ on account solely of the absence of motility. TTarrison-® raises the question as to whether, provided the argument re motility is admitted, it removes B. neapolijtanus to a different genus from J*>. coli. 'J'h(' second variation to which 1 have referred (page 219) is the fermentation of saccharose to acid and gas. B, coli (Escherich) has no action upon saccharose. Theobald Smith, (dted by Prescott and Winslow-^ stated in 1893 that B. coli could be divid('d into two distinct sub-types, — the one negative to saccharose or in other words the original B. coli, and the other fermenting this sugar to acid and gas. Durham^® isolated saccharose — i)ositive organisms and gave the name B. coli comwunior, since <*ontr:u*tcd to />. communior. Jackson-^ hns classified the organisms of the lactose fermenting tyj)e and confirms the sub-type B. communior of Durham. The classifica- tion of Jackson has sinca' been adoi)ted by the laboratory section of the American Public Health Association,'* and on this continent has received almost general approval. Psing saccharose and dnlcite as differential fermentation tests Jackson considers BACTERIAL DESTRUCTIOy OF CORERODS 221 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a those organisms positive to lactose and duleite as B. coli (Eseherich)^® ; })ositive to lactose, saccharose and duleite as B. communior (Durham) positive to lactose and saccharose but negative to duleite as B. cerogenes (Escherich)!^ positive to lactose but negative to saccharose and duleite as B. acidi-lacticir* Further subdivision accord- ing to the action on mannite and raffinose are used for further differentiation. MacConkey uses the Voges-Proskauer reaction as one of his ditierential tests and finds that the true B. coli is always Voges-Proskauer negative, while the B. wrogenes lype is VogCi-Pr' skauer positive. In the same paper he revives the n.ime B. n- jooU- tanus (Emmerich) and uses this nomenclature for his saccharose positive duleite positive strains instead of the name given by Durham — B. cunun iMa< r'-nkey obtained a pure culture labelled B. neapolitanus from Krai, and out of 480 coli-like organisms isolated from human and animal faeces he found that 23 per cent gave bio- cJiemical reactions identical with the Krai culture used by him as control, ilc states that he cannot agree with Migula in describing B. neapolitanus (Emmerich) as iden- tical with B. coli (Escherich). As, however, the differentiation by means of carbo- hydrates other than glucose and lactose has been amplified since the classification by Migula, the conclusions of both Migula and MacConkey on this particular point are t.t ri'ectly legitimate. Jordan^^, in designating the saccharose-positiva dulcite-positive group uses B. communior and B. neapolitanus interchangeably; biochemically this as correct, but the former is motile (16), the latter non-motile^®. Levine-® who apparently follows MacConkey has lately studied 333 strains of lactose fermenting bacteria from various sources. He goes one step further and giving 5. neopolitanus its original character of non-motility according to Emmerich^^, uses that nomen- clature to include non-motile forms of B. communior (Durham). To say the least it is interesting to revive B. neapolitanus as a sub-type of B. coli (Escherich) in view of the following statement by Jordan^^*'^: “According to a strict application of the rules of priority, the bacillus now known as B. coli should be called B. neapolitanus/’ The dates of the original publication by Emmerich and Escherich^®, of course bear out Jordan’s statement. However, according to the first descriptions of Emmerich-® and Escherich^^’ the former found a non-motile strain and the latter a motile strain of a lactose fermenting organism. Later work already referred to has separated these two strains on the basis of saccharose fermentation^®. We thus have two features in which the respective strains differ. A propos of the stand taken by Durham and McConkey, Harrison-® opens the question as to whether it is legitimate to name as a species, an organism differing only in the fermenting of one sugar. It would therefore seem legitimate, on the ground of present day classification, to tentatively characterize the organism I have isolated-a non-motile, lactose, saccharose, duleite positive, Voges-Proskauer negative strain, — as a variety of the sub-type B. neapolitanus of the classic B. coli type of Escherich. To use B. neapolitanus con- flicts with the nomenclature B. communior more usually accepted for the strains giving identical reactions. If motility is considered, B. neapolitanus and B. communior are not strictly the same; but to use the single characteristic, absence or presence of motility, to separate B. communior and B. neapolitanus, and at the same time to say that a non-motile form of colon is identical with a motile form may seem inconsistent. The difficulty can be overcome by the tentative classification of the organism I have isolated as a non-motile strain of the sub-type B. communior (Durham) of the type B. coli (Escherich) ; or to take the differentation further, as B. neapolitanus , a sub-type of B. coli (Escherich). Culture II. Morphology. — ^Microscopically — 24-hours-old agar culture at 37°C. — rods varying up to 1-6 IX long and -8 /x broad; some not much longer than broad; stains evenly with Kiihne’s methylene blue and is Gram negative. No spores; no capsules have been demonstrated. [ 222 DEPARTME'NT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Motility. — Eapid movement, darting to and fro, many revolve as on an axis. Cultural Characteristics: Agar Slope. — 24 hours at 37 °C. — moderate, bluish by transmitted light, moist, glistening, slightly raised, later becoming by transmitted light yellowish in centre gradually merging into transparency. Glucose Agar Slope. — Gas, growth moderate to luxuriant, glistening, slightly raised. Tochtermanri s Serum Agar Slope. — Moist, slightly raised, bluish by transmitted light, spreading discrete colonies, gas. In 8 days growth had become yellow, much water of condensation, heavy greyish-white precipitate at base of slope. Lbefflers Blood Serum. — Moderate, filiform, moist, glistening, no liquefaction, no discolouration. In 7 days no digestion, no discolouration. Sodium Sulphate Agar Slope. — Raised, spreading, moist, no reduction. In 8 days no reduction. Gelatine Stab. — 21 °C., 24 hours, growth filiform, equal surface and stab; 7 days, tendency to echinulate. In 6 weeks no liquefaction, growth yellowish-brown; characteristic lateral growths resembling a poplar tree against the horizon; medium unchanged. Nutrient Broth. — 37°C. 24 hours. Clouding abundant, no pellicle, no sediment, bluish rim at top. In 1 week, slight sediment; otherwise no change. Potato. — Moderate, fiat, yellowish-white along track of needle. Milk. — In 6 weeks no change. Litmus Milk. — Varies from no change to a tint slightly more alkaline than con- trol; blue rim at top. ^ Aesculin Agar. — Black reaction, growth less luxuriant than in Culture I. j Neutral Red Bilesalt Agar. Moderate, pink reaction. ; Peptone Broth A Aesculin. — ^Black reaction. •! Gelatine Colonies. — 5 days at 21°C. — colonies up to 5 mm. diameter; under low ' power objective granular; edges lobular to contoured, centre dark with paling towards edges. Deep surface colonies granular centre with dark concentric rings. i Agar Colonies. — 24 hours at 37° C. — surface 1 mm. diameter, raised, concave, bluish by transmitted light, round, smooth, edges entire. Under low power objective granular, edges entire. \ i I Temperature Relations: — | Thermal death point: 10 minutes exposure in nutrient broth at 55 °C. I Optimum temperature: 37°C.; cultures incubated at 37°C., 21°C. and 14°C. respectively. Vitality on Culture Media: — Active cultures have been recovered from agar tubes after 5 months at tempera- ture of 15°-20°C. Relation to Oxygen: — Facultative anaerobe; glucose agar. Biochemical reactions : — Indol production ; Indol not produced. Reduction of nitrates: Nitrates reduced to nitrites. Voges-Proslcauer reaction: Positive, after 6 hours. Methyl red reaction: Faint acidity, shortly followed by reversion to alkalinity. BACTERIAL DESTRUCTION OF COPEPODS 223 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Fermentation of Carbohydrates: — Glucose. Lactose. Saccharose. Raffinose. Maltose. ++ - ++ -H- Mannite. Dulcite. Adonit. Salicin. Dextrine. Inulin. ++ ++ ++ Xylose. Glycerine. ++ -H- (slowly). + = acid. ++ = acid and gas. Note. — The fermentation of lactose to acid is faint, and in two days reduction is noted. The classification of this culture must be purely tentative. It will be seen that while saccharose, maltose, mannite, salicin and dextrin are fermented to acid and gas, the organism fails to ferment lactose to gas and only faintly to acid. This has persistently been the case through several months; on one occasion, however, a small bubble of gas — 1 mm. diameter — appeared in a Durham tube. This I have been unable to obtain since, confirming in triplicate. MacConkey states : “ It has been my experience that where an organism produces acid and gas in one medium and apparently only acid in another, under proper subcultivation the organism will pro- duce gas in the second medium.”^^ Harrison in this laboratory has frequently cited to me verbally his own experience in this matter, which bears out the statement of MacConkey. While the organism is definitely motile it differs from B. cloacae of Jordan^® in that it fails after three months to liquefy gelatine, fails to ferment lac- tose to gas, and fails to coagulate milk after several weeks. Rogers Clarke and Evans^° found that the group of the types they isolated from grains — Group B — fermented to acid and gas glucose, saccharose, mannite, glycerine and adonit, but like my culture failed to ferment lactose; on the other hand this group liquefied gelatine.^® These workers consider that such group has at best only a slight connec- tion with the colon-cero genes group. Taking the classification adopted by the American Public Health Association ^ the culture would be ruled out of the colon-cero genes group at once on account of its failure to produce gas ironi lactose; further, milk is not coagulated. Certain of the biochemical reactions would tend to suggest the Gaertner group. According to Besson^^ the organisms of this group are negative to lactose, saccharose, salicin, raffinose and inulin; while those carbohydrates to which the group is positive include dulcite. This organism, it will be noted, is negative to dulcite, lactose and inulin but positive to saccharose imd salicin. Jordan^^ in a study of 74 strains of the Gaertner group 'cites that the reaction to dulcite and xylose is variable, but includes dextrine among the fermentable substances not attacked; thus establishing at once a similarity and a variation respectively as compared with the organism here described. In the same paper Jordan describes strains where reaction to litmus milk cannot be differentiated from the control. Savage in a classification of the Gaertner group divides such into two oub-groups : — a. True-Gaertner bacilli; b. Para-Gaertner bacilli; to which he had previously drawn attention in reports to the Local Government Board, 1906-7-8. Citing from Savage: “The bacilli of the para-Gaertner sub-group 4ire a number of organisms, for the most part unnamed, which appear to be not very uncommon in the healthy animal and human intestine, and which are of chief interest from their close resemblance to true- Gaertner bacilli. . . . They can only be culturally differentiated from the true-Gaertner organisms by an extended series of fermentation tests while they fail to be agglutinited by immunizing animals with 224 DEPARTMEN T OF THE NIAYAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 any of the members of the true-Gaertner sub-group. They are also for the most part non-pathogenic. They have not so far been found as a cause of disease in man or in animals.” Until I am able to secure for comparative cultural tests strains of this sub-group from Dr. Savage, it would not be wise to attempt a more definite classification of the organism herein discussed. In view, however, of the decided variation from the Voges-Proskauer type of the colon-cero genes group as lately given by Levine,-^ and considering the many cultural features and fermentative reactions which suggest at j any rate a distant relationship to the para- Gaertner group, it seems not undesirable ; to suggest that based on the cultural features and biochemical reactions this organism | be considered tentatively as an atypical form of the para-Gaertner group according | to Savage.^^ Culture III. Morphology. — Microscopically the organism appears as a coccus, in pairs, in masses, and as short streptococci; the average diameter from a 24-hour-old agar culture at 37° C. being -8 p, stained with Kiihne’s methylene blue. The organism is Gram positive and non-spore-forming; capsules faintly discernible. Motility. — Tests for motility made in hanging drop of condensation water from a young agar culture. No motility. Violent agitation can be noticed, and rotation of the cells as on an axis, but the position in the drop is unchanged. Cultural Characteristics: — Agar Slope. — 24 hours at 37° C. growth scanty, bluish by transmitted light, filiform, flat, with later a tendeney to spreading. Glucose Agar Slope. — Growth moderate, heavier than on agar, discrete colonies, flat, spreading, glistening. Toclitennanns Serum Agar Slope. — Growth scant to moderate, bluish by trans- : mitted light, heavy clouding of the condensation water. In 5 days slight digestion of the medium noted. Ldefflers Blood Serum. — Growth filiform, medium channelled and slightly darker i in colour. lu 5 days growth glistening, yellowish, slight digestion. Sodium Indigo Sulphate Agar Slope. — Faint growth, no reduction of colour, 21 hours. In 14 days reduced to reddish brown. Gelatine Stah. — 21° C. In two days liquefaction beginning. In 7 days stratiform liquefaction for of tube, even clouding with yellowish flocculent precipitate at bottom. Liquefaction complete in I month. Nutrient Broth. — 37° C. even clouding, moderate, no pellicle, no sediment; later medium cleared. Potato. — Barely discernible growth in 24 hours. In 3 days faint growth, flat, spreading, white, metallic lustre. Milk. — 37° G. In 36 hours weak coagulum, no gas noted. In 72 hours digestion had begun, a clear lemon coloured liquid extending for h tube. In 7 days tube half fluid, curd soft, gelatinous, bright and of a solidity resembling macaroni; easily desintegrated on shaking; after 2 months some curd still remaining, lemon yellow in colour, consistency as before. Litmus milk. — The reaction of the organism to this medium is unusual, and it is due to the sensitiveness here discovered that I have adopted the uniform per- centage of litmus, noted on page 218. If litmus be added at the rate of 11 ix?r cent coagulation preceded by bleaching takes place within 36 to 48 hours. Digestion then begins and proceeds slightly more rapidly than in the milk, the contents of the tube varying in colour from a lemon yellow to claret with decided fluorescence in 72 hours. In 2 mionths digestion is not complete, 1-2 cm. of a jelly-like claret coloured curd remaining. BACTERIAL DEe^TRLCTlON OF COPE PODS 225 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a If the quantity of litmus added be more than II per cent the reaction is quite ditferent, varying according to the percentage of litmus added. There may or may not be coagulation, the colour varying from isabella to a muddy purpureus; flakes of tinted curd can later be noted. In 2 months a condition resembling broken jelly of a variety of shades of purpureus has been recorded. A note referring to this phenomenon in greater detail is being published else- where. Aesculin agar. — Growth moderate, flat, dry, brown to black. Neutral Red Bile Salt Agar. — Growth scant, no characteristic colour reaction. Peptone Broth Aesculin. — Black in 12 hours. Gelatine Colonies — (1st appearance). — 21°0. 4 days, punctiform to pinhead colo- nies, depression in medium commencing; under the low power objective struc- ture compact, finely granular, paler towards the edges; edges ciliate. Agar Colonies. — 37° C. growth slow. 24 hours colonies -5 mm. in diameter, growth tends to be subsurface. Under the low power objective colonies round or eliptical, edges entire to undulate, internal structure granular, dark halo in surrounding medium. Temperature Relations. — Thermal death point. 10 minutes’ exposure in nutrient broth at 60° C. Optimum temperature. 37°G. ; cultures incubated at 37°C'., 21°C. and 14°C. respectively. Vitality of Culture Media: — Active cultures have been recovered from agar tubes after 5 months at tempera- ture of 15°-20°C. Relation to Oxygen. Facultative anaerobe. Under anaerobic condition on glucose agar, growth visible in 24 hrs. at 37°0. Biochemical Reactions : — Indol production : no indol in 7 days. Beduction of nitrates: no reduction to nitrites. Voges-Proskauer reaction: negative. Methyl red reaction : acid to methyl red. F ermentation of Carbohydrates : — Glucose. Lactose. Saccharose. Maltose. Mannite. Dulcite. + + + + + Dextrin. Salicin. Raffinose. Adonite. Inulin. Xylose. + + Glycerine. + = acid. +-H = acid and gas. In accordance with the cultural results this organism is properly included among the liquefying streptococci. Winslow takes the Str. gracilis of Escherich, Lehmann and Neumann as the “type centre” of these liquefiers. He considers that the various streptococci which peptonise gelatine more or less actively are variants of this type; intermediate between it and some of those characterized by Andrews and Ilorder I find, however, a closer resemblance to an organism described by MacCallum and Hastings^® as Micrococcus zymogenes. This was isolated from a fatal case of acute' endocarditis, and while it shows the same main characteristics as Sfr. gmrilis. it 226 DEPARTME~NT OF TEE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 liquefies serum slightly and subsequent to coagulating milk digests the clot. This organism was later found by Birge,^'^ It is in the two last characteristics that I find the close resemblance to M. zymogenes noted above. The original description of Str. gracilis of Escherich cited by Winslow includes non-liquefaction of blood serum and failure to coagulate milk; but summing up the variations Winslow provisionally defines his ‘‘type centre” Str. gracilis as follows: Small coccus, appearing in chains, ferments lactose and coagulates milk, may ferment mannite and salicin, liquefies gelatine actively. While the organism I have described appears to have certain particular character- istics, I hesitate to depart from Winslow’s view regarding the relationship of the variants in his tentative group of streptococcus liquefiers I conclude therefore that this organism which culturally and biochemically is identical with the M. zymo- genes of MacCallum and Hastings^® should be placed as a variety of the type Str. gracilis. \ SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS. 1. Three strains of bacteria have been isolated from the destroyed tissue of cope- pods which had died in culture flasks. 2. Summarized, the biological features are as follows: — — I. Rod-form. II. Rod-form. III. Coccus. ■Gram’s Stain Luxuriant No liquef + Moderate ... No liquef + -f Scant. Liquef. Scant. Slight digest. Coag. and digest 60°C. 37°C. Spores • Capsule Motility Agar Gelatine Potato Abundant .... No digestion . . . Coagrulasr Moderate Lioetfler’s Blood Serum No digestion. . . . No change . . . Milk Thermal death pt hO«C Optimum temperature, . . 37°C’ 37°C 3. Summarized, the biochemical reactions are: — — I. II. III. Indol + Nitrate nnluction + 4- — V oges-Proskauer — 4- — Methyl Red Acid. Faintly acid, later alkal. Acid. ■Olucose -h + 4-4- 4- Lactosi* “i" - 4- - 4- Saccharose -h+ -h4- -f Raffinose ... -f+ — — Maltose + -H 4-4- -f Mannite -f-I -f Lulcite + -4- — — Adonit(! -h + — — — Salicin -14- -f-f 4- Dextrine +4- 4-4- -H Tnulin 4" — — Xylose 4-1 4-4- — <;iycerine 4-4- -14- -|- = acid, -f-h = acid and gas. BACTERIAL DESTRUCTION OF COPEPODS 227 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a 4. Based on their cultural features and biochemical reactions the organisms are -classified as follows: — Culture I. — Tentatively as a non-motile strain of the sub-type B. communior (Durham) of the type B. coli (Escherich) ; or to take the differentiation further, as B. neapolitanuSj a sub-type of B. coli (Escherich). Culture II. — Considered tentatively as an atypical form of the Para- Gaertner group after Savage. Culture III. — Identical with M. zymogenes and placed as a variety of the type of liquefying streptococci. Streptococcus gracilis. 5. No inoculations of these cultures have been made into healthy copepods owing to distance from the sea. 6. It is not legitimate to draw any definite conclusions regarding the relationship of these organisms to the destruction of the copepods, as no inoculation experiments have been carried out, and the postulates of Koch have not yet been satisfied. Accord- ing to the descriptions presented, however, the evidence is strong in favour of Culture III being a possible causal agent. I wish to thank very cordially Dr. E. C. Harrison for his kindness in reading the proofs, and particularly for his valuable and critical assistance with regard to the elassification of the B. coli group; and Dr. Arthur Willey for the initial suggestion that I should undertake the investigation. EEFEEENCES. 1. American Public Health Association, 1915 — “ Standard Methods Water Analysis,” 77-137. 2. Besson, 1913 — Text Book Practical Bact., etc.,” (Longmans), 53. 3. Besson, 1913 — Text Book Practical Bact., etc.,” (Longmans), 52. 4. Harrison and Vanderleck, 1908 — “ Aesculin Bile Salt Agar for Water and Milk Analysis,” Trans. Eoy. Soc. Can. III. Ser. II, 105-110. 5. Savage, 1906 — “ Bacteriological Examination of Water Supplies,” London, 221. 6. Voges and Proskauer, 1898 — “Zeit. fur Hyg.” 28, 20. 6. Harden, 1905, 1906 — “ On the Voges-Proskauer Eeaction for Certain Bacteria,” Proc. Eoy. Soc., 77, 424. 6. Levine, Max., 1916 — “ The Significance of the Voges-Proskauer Eeaction,” ■Jour. Bacteriology I, 153-164. 6. Clark and Lubs, 1915 — Differentiation of Bacteria of the Colon- Aerogenes Family by Indicators.” Jour. Infectious Diseases, 17, 160-173. 6. Levine — “ Correlation of the Voges-Proskauer and Methyl-red Eeactions on the Colon-Aerogenes group.” Jour. Infec. Diseases, 18, 358-367. 6. Levine — Private Communication. 7. Clarke and Lubs, 1915 — “Differentiation of Bacteria of the Colon-Aerogenes Oroup.” Jour. Infectious Diseases, 17, 160-173. 8. Bohme, 1905 — Centrall. fur Bakt, Abt. I, Orig. XL, 129-133. 9. MacConkey, 1909 — Journal of Hygiene, 9, p. 91. 9. Hollman, 1914 — “Decolorized Acid Fuchsin as an Acid Indicator in Carbo- hydrate Fermentations.” Journ. Infec. Dis., 15, 227-233. 228 DEPARTME^^T OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 10. Escheridi, 1886 — “ Darmbak. des Sauglinji-s, Stuttgart.” 11. Migula 1886 — “ System der Bakt,” 396. 12. Escherieh and Pfauiidler, 1903 — “ Haiidbueh d. Path. Mikroorg,” Kollo and Wassermann. Zweiter Band, 341-342, 13. Sschericdi and Pfauiidler, 1903 — Handbuch d. Path. Mikroorg,” Kolle and Wassermann. Zweiter Band, 406. 15. ELouston, 1905 — “Bacteriological Examination of Milk.” Special Keport, { London County Council, 37. 1 16. Durham, 3ourn. Exp. Med., V., 354-388. | 17. MacConkey, 1909 — “Lactose Fermenting Bacilli.” Journ. Hygiene, 9, 88. j 18. Ellis, 1904 — “Discovery of Cilia in the genus Bacterium.” Centrl. fur Bakt. 11, 241-251. 19. 1901 — “Keport of the English Commission.” Jour. State Med. XII, 471. 20. 1913 — Prescott and Winslow. “ Elements of Water Bacteriology,” Wiley, 104. 21. Savage, 1906 — “ Bacteriological Examination of Water.” Lewis, 82-83. 22. ]\ligula, 1900 — “ System der Bakterien,” 734. 23. Emmerich, 1885 — “ Untersuch. ub. die Pilze d. Cholera asiastica.” Arch, fur Ilyg., Bd. 3. Mace (full description) 1891 — “ Traite Pratique de Bacteriologie.” Paris, 498. 24. Jackson, 1911 — “Classification of the B. coli Group.” Journ. Infec. Dis., 8, 241. 25. Jordan, 1916 — “ General Bacteriology.” Saunders Co., 275. 25a. Loq. cit., 273. 26. Levine, 1916 — “Preliminary Note, Classification of the Lactose Fermenting ; Bacteria.” Journ, Bacteriology, I., 619-621. 27. MacConkey, 1905. — “Lactose fermenting Bacteria in Faeces.” Journ, Hyg. 5, 333-379. 28. Harrison, 1917 — Private communication. 29. Jordan, 1890 — “ Keport Mass. State Board of Health.” 836. 30. Kogers Clarke & Evans, 1915 — “ Charact. of Bacteria of Colon type occurring on Grains.” Journ. Infec. Dis., 117, 137-159. 31. Besson, 1913 — “ Text Book Practical Bacteriology, etc.” Longmans, 442. 32. Jordan, 1917 — “ Dilferentiation of the Paratyphoid-Enteritides Group.” Journ. Infect. Diseases, 20, 456. 33. Savage, 1913 — “ Bacterial Food Poisoning and Food Infection.” Med. Off. Ke])ort, Local Govt. Board, 1913. Food Keports, No. 18, 33. 34. Winslow, (\-E. A. and A. K., 1908 — “ Tlie Systematic Kelationship of the CV)ccaceae.” Wiley, New York, 161, 169, 170. 35. Andrews llorder, 1906 — “A Study of the Streptococci pathogenic for Man.” Lancet, II., 708. 36. MacCallum, W. G. & Hastings, W., 1899 — “A case of Acute Endocarditis caused l)y .\F. Zymogenes.” Journ. Ex]). IMcd. IV., 521. 3>7, Hirgc, 1905. 37. Hirge, 1905 — “ Some 01)servations on the Occurrence of INF. Zymogenes.” fFolius IFoi)kiiis IFos[). Bull. XVI., 309. 38. Ksclicricli lUigula, 1900 — “System der Bakterien,” 31. 8 GEORGE V SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a A. 1918 XIV BATHYMETRIC CHECK LIST OE THE MARINE INVERTEBRATES OF EASTERN CANADA WITH AN INDEX TO WHITEAVES' CATALOGUE.^ (By E. M. Kindle and E. J. Whittaker.) INTRODUCTORY NOTE. The primary object of this paper is to bring together in columnar form all of the available information relating to the depth at which the various species of marine invertebrates live which are known from the Atlantic coastal waters of Canada. The value of the segregation and graphic presentation of any group of facts relating to invertebrate environment is obvious from the standpoint of ecology. The significance of many factors in the environment of faunas becomes clearly apparent only when treated in this way. There is no factor in marine faunal environment winch more readily lends itself to this kind of analysis than bathymetric data. Such data ihough nearly always given by marine Zoologists are generally placed obscurely in the midst of extraneous matter and almost never shown in tabular or easily comprehensible form. Bathymetric range of fossil faunas is a factor which enters into many problems in palaeontological correlation and it is very desirable that the palaeontologist as well as the zoologist should have access to the recorded bathymetric data in tabular form relating to present marine faunas. There perhaps is no group of facts pertaining to recent faunas of greater significance to stratigraphic palaeontologists than those relating to the bathymetric range of species. The geologic importance of knowing the present range in depth of the marine shells now living in the Gulf of St. Lawrence is clearly apparent to the geologist who attempts to use the fossil Pleistocene shells of the St. Lawrence valley in interpreting the details of its Post-glacial history. The geological and zoological importance of this class of data has induced the authors to bring together in columnar form the recorded information regarding the bathymetric range ol species as recorded by Dr, Whiteaves together with the data published by later authors. In order to facilitate rapid comparative examination of the bathymetric data it has been recorded in columnar form, five columns being used. The first three of these columns icorrespond respectively to the intertidal or beach, the laminarian and the coralline zones. The intertidal zone extends between low and high tides; the laminarian zone reaches from low-water mark to 15 fathoms; the fourth column includes depths of from 50 to 100 fathoms which may be termed the subcoralline zone. The 100 fathom line marks the approximate margin of the continental shelf. All of the records exceed- ing this depth have for convenience been placed together in a single column. The bathymetric check list has been brought up to date by the examination of the papers on the marine invertebrates of Eastern Canada which have appeared since the publication of Dr. Whiteaves’ paper. Where these later contributions have furnished new bathymetric information its source is indicated by a number following the species name which refers to the bibliographic list at the end of this paper. The authors have also undertaken in the following pages to make more easily ^(accessible and usable the large amount of information on the marine faunas of '^'Eastern Canada contained in Dr. Whiteaves’ Catalogue of the Marine iiivertebrata :>f Eastern Canada^ by the preparation of an index to it. Many zoologists have doubt- 1 Publishec with the permission of the Director of the Canadian Geological Survey. - Geol. Survey of Canada, 1901. 229 r 230 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 less, like Professor Prince, felt that the usefulness of this catalogue ‘‘would be vastly increased by the addition of an index.”! The importance of this volume to the zoolo- gist IS evident and its interest to the geologist dealing with the Pleistocene is almost ^u ally great. The student of the Pleistocene fossils of eastern Canada and the ISTew England States finds it desirable to refer constantly to this valuable work. The omis- sion from it of an index however, has made such reference difficult and wasteful of time and caused the student of both the Pleistocene and Eecent shells to make much less use of the catalogue than its value warrants. The present index to the species ol this catalogue, which number more than 1,000, is intended to remove this bar to frequent and easy reference to the wealth of information concerning the Atlantic coast faunas of Canada which was brought together by Dr. Whiteaves. ' In a paper having the object and scope of the present one, it does not appear desir- ^le to attempt any revision of the nomenclature. The nomenclature adopted bv Whiteaves has therefore been followed throughout and where later authors have used names different from those accepted by Whiteaves for the same forms cross references to the latter have been used. All of the names which appear in the synonomy of the Whiteaves catalogue will be found in the general index. Bathymetric Tables .2 Bathymetric Range. Min. and Max. Depth, Inter- tidal Zone. Fathoms. 1-15 15-50 50-100 100 Protozoa. t Reticularia {Foraminifera), Ammodiscus incertus, d’Orbigny Biloculina oblonga Montfort Biloculina ringens Lamarck 35 Bolivina punctata d’Orbigny 35 Bulimina aculeata d’Orbigny Bulimina elegantissima d’Orbigny Bulimina pyrula d’Orbigny Cassidulina crassa d’Orbigny Cassidulina laevigata d’Orbigny Cornuspira foliaceus Philippi Cristellaria crepidula F. and M Cristellaria lituus d’Orbigny Cristellaria rotulata Lamarck Globigerina aequilateralis ? 11 Haplophragmium canariense d’Orbigny 35 Haplophragmium cassis Parker Hippocrepina indivisa Parker Lagena apiculata Reuss Lagena distoma P. and J Lagena globosa W. and J Lagena laevis Montagu Lagena rnarginata W. and B Lagena melo d’Orbigny D.W 6- 313 I.T.-S.W. D.W 18-D.W... 7- 250 30-D.W... 10-D.W... 18-250... . F. 51-200 10-20. 16-20., 100+., 10-313, 16-313. 250.... 30 100+.. .... X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X * X X H 1 X X 1 "Note.— The Maximum and minimum depth recorded for each species is indicated in the first column. Ihe bathymetric range is also indicated graphically by checking each species in each of the columns in which Its range falls, thus facilitating rapid comparative examination of the recorded data. Sometimes the iniormation regarding bathymetric range is of an approximate or comparative nature and in such cases some one of the following symbols has been used for expressing range not recorded in linear units. o — Low water mark D.W. — Deep water. F. — Free swimming. I.T. — Intertidal. P. — Parasitic. S.W. — Shallow water. <3 — Depths less than 3 fathoms. > 100— depths greater than 100 fathoms. 10 — Depth in fathoms. I Ottawa Naturalist, vol. 15, 1912, p. 171. ! MARIXE lyVERTEBRATES 23 V SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Bathymetric Tables — Continued. Protozoa — Con. Reticula ria ( Foram inifera) — Con . Lagena ornata Willdenow Lagena semistriata Willimason Lagena squamosa Montagu Lagena striatopunctata P. and J Lagena sulcata P. and J Miliolina agglutinans d’Orbigny Miliolina bicornis W. and J. 35 Miliolina ferussacii d’Orbigny Miliolina oblonga Montfort 35 Miliolina secans d’Orbigny Miliolina seminulum L. 35 Miliolina subrotunda Montfort Miliolina tricarinata d’Orbigny Miliolina trigonula d’Orbigny Nodosaria (Dentalina) communis d’Orbigny.. Nodosaria (Glandulina) laevigata d’Orbigny. Nodosaria (Dentalina) pauperata d’Orbigny.. Nonionina scapha F. and M Nonionina labradorica Patellina corrugata Williamson 35 Polymorphina compressa d’Orbigny Polymorphina lactea W. and J. 35 Polystomella arctica P. and J Polystomella striatopunctata F. and M. 35. . . Pulvinulma karsteni Reuss Reophax lindens Parker : Reophax scorpiurus Montfort Rhabdammina abyssorum M. Sars Rhabdammina discreta Brady Rotalia beccarii Linnaeus 35 Spiroplecta biformis P. and J Textularia agglutinans d’Orbigny Textularia variabilis Willdenow Trochammina inflata Montfort Truncatulina lobatula W. and J. 35 Uvigerina angulosa Willdenow Uvigerina pygmaea d’Orbigny Vaginulina spinigera Brady Valvulina conica P. and J Verneuilina polystropha Reuss 35 Virgulina squamosa d’Orbigny Silicoflagellata, Radiolaria and Ciliata. Acanthonia echinoides (Clap. & Lach) 11 Acanthostaurus pallidus F Amphorella subulata (Ehrb) Daday 11 Codonella ventricosa 11 Codonella lagenula (Clap & Lach) 11 Cyttarocyclis denticulata var. gigantea Brandt. 11 Distephanus aculeatus (Ehrenberg) Distephanus speculum var. regularis Lemmermann 11 Ebria tripatrtita (Schum) Lemmermann 11. Plagiacanthus arachnoides Clap. 11 Ptychocyclis urnula Clap. & Lach. 11 Strombidium sulcatum C. & L. 11 Tintinnopsis beroidea Stein 11 Tintinnopsis campanula Ehrb. Daday 11. Tintinnopsis davidow Daday 11 Tintinnopsis cylindrica 11 Tintinnopsis lobiancoi 11 Tintinnus acuminatus (C. & L. )11 Tintinnus obliquus (C. & L.) 11 Bathymetric Range. Min. and Max. Depth. 30-100.^. 30-100.?. 30 30 16-50... 10-50 2-50. . . . 35-50 2-50. . . . <50. . . . 2-313 <50 18-50 <50.... 30-50 30-313. . .. 35-b.'w.' ? 15- 100. . . . I.T.-40... . 10-50 2-313 30-50 2-300 30-250. . . . 10-50 16- 20 20-D.W... 2-313. 10^0.. 4-D.W. D.W... 30-90.. D.W... D.W... 10-20.. F... F S.W.-313. Inter- tidal. Zone. 1-15 Fathoms. 15-50 50-100 100 t X ? X f X r X r X ? X X f X 232 DEPARTME}^^T OF THE NAVAL ^^ERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Bathymetric Tables — Continued. PoRiFERA (Sponges). Calcarea. Ainphoriscus thorn psoni Lambe. Grant ia canadensis Lambe Heteropia rodgeri Lambe Leucosolenia cancellata Verrill. . Sycon asperum Lambe Sycon protectum Lamlje Demos pongiae. Ai-temisina suberitoides Vosmaer C’halina oculata (Pallas) C'ladorhiza abyssicola M. Sars C'ladorhiza grandis Verrill Cladorhiza nordenskioldii Fristedt Clathria delicata Lambe ; Gliona celata Grant 35 Craniella cranium (Muller) Desmacellapeachii (Bowerbank) var, groenlandica Fristedt ' Desmacidon (Homaeodictya( palmata (Johnston) 35, 47 Esperella lingua (Bowerbank) Esperella modesta Lambe Eumastia sitiens O. Schmidt Gellius arcoferus A^osmaer Gellius fiagellifer Ridley & Dendy Gellius laurentinus Lambe Halichondria panicea Johnston 35 lophon chelifer Ridley & Dendy Myxilla incrustans (Johnston) Phakellia ventilabrum (Johnston) Polymastia mamillaris (Muller) Poljmiastia robusta Bowerbank 35 (^uasillina brevis (Bowerbank) Iteniera mollis Lambe Reniera rufescens Lambe Stylocordyla borealis (Loven) Suberites ficus (Johnston) Subcritcs hispidus (Bowerbank) Sub(‘rit('s montalbidus C'arter I’entorium semisuberites (Schmidt) I’heiK'a muricata (liowerbank) Tri0 X X X Artacama canadensis McIntosh 38 30 X Artacama proboscoidea Malmgren 44 30 50 X Axiothea catenata Malmgren = Axiothella catenata 33 Brada granosa Stimpson 4-6 X Brada granulata Malmgren 17 60-80 X Brada sublaevis Stimpson Brada villosa Rathke 13 Chaetozone setosa Malmgren 17 80 X Chaetozone setosa canadensis McIntosh 17 Chaetozone whiteavesi McIntosh 17 Chaetozone ?17 Chone duneri Malmgren 44 FVinrip f*f faiivpii MpTntn.sth 44 5-20 X X Chone infundibuliformis Kroyer 17. .... 110-170 . X Chone princei McIntosh 44 Chone sp. 17 20 X Cirratulus cirrhatus (Fabricius) 17 Cistenides granulata (L) ... 17-40 O-50 X X X X Cistenides hyperborea Malmgren 38 = Pectinaria hyperborea 17 50 220. . . . X X 238 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Bathymetric Tables — Continued. Bathymetric Range. Min. and Max. Depth. Inter- tidal Zone. 1-15 Fathoms. 15-50 50-100 100 X Chaetopoda — Con. Polychaeta — Con. Clymenella torquata (Leidy) Drilonereis canadensis McIntosh 2 Enonella bicarinata Stimpson Ephesia gracilis Rathke Ephesia sp. 13 Erentho smitti Malmgren 44 Eteone cylindrica OErsted Euchone lawrencii McIntosh 44 Euchone rubrocincta 17 Euchone tuberculosa (Kroyer) Malmgren 17 Eumenia crassa OErsted Eunice oersted ii Stimpson Eunice ? 2 Eunoa nodosa (Sars) Eunoa oerstedi Malmgren 17, 35 Eunoa spinulosa Verrill Euphrosyne borealis OErsted Eupolynoe anticost iensis McIntosh 17 Eupolynoe occidentalis McIntosh Eusyllis tubifex Gosse Filograna filograna Berkeley 17 Flabelligera affinis Sars 17 Glycera dibranchiata Ehlers 3 Glycera siphonostoma Delle Chiaje 3 Goniada maculata OErsted 3 Goniada norvegica Oersted 3 Grymaea spiralis Verrill Harmothoe imbricata (L) 17, 35, 47 Isocirrus ? sp. 33 Laenilla glabra Malmgren 17 Laetmonice armata Verrill Laetmonice filicornis Kinberg 17 Laetmonice producta var, assimilis McIntosh Lagisca rarispina (Sars) Lagisca rarispina var. occidentalis M’Intosh Lanassa nordenskioldi Malmgren 38, 44 Leaena abranchiata Malmgren 17 Leanira tetragona OErsted Leanira yhleni ? Malmgren Leodice vivida (Stimpson) Lepidonotus squamatus (L) 17, 35, 47 Lumbricoclymene sp. 17 Lumbriconereis cf. assimilis McIntosh 2 Lumbriconereis fragilis (Muller) 2, 17, 35 Lumbrinereis hebes Verrill 17 Maldane sarsii Malmgren 17, 33 Malmgrenia whiteavesii M’Intosh Melinna cristata (Sars) 35 Myriochele heeri McIntosh 34 Myxicola steenstrupi Kroyer 17 Naidonereis quadricuspida IRainville {fide, Verrill). Nemidia (?) canadensis M’Intosh Nemidia (?) lawrencii M’Intosh Nephthys caeca (Fabricius) 17, 47 Nephthys canadensis M’Intosh Nephthys ciliata (Muller) 35 Nephthys incisa Malmgren 17, 35 Nephthys lawrencii M’Intosh Nephthys longisetosa OEr.sted = Autolytus lon- gisetosa 12 Nephthys picta Ehlers Nends abyssicola Stimpson Nereis denticulata Stimp.son O-60... o 125., . 170 . . 5 80 110-220 20-85.. 200 45-60.. 17-76.. 85 7-75. . . . 100 51 40 7-85.... 100-120, 150.. . 60. . . . o-llO.. 125... 7 50-150 75 85 7 110-220. . 210 I.T.-80.. . 45 200 O-430... . .. 5-80 20-30 110-220.. . 10-90 40 3-80. . . 56-80.. 25-40. . . . 2-430 7.. . . 30-80 40. . . o X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X MA RI^'E JNTERTEBRA TES 239 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Bathymetric Tables — Con tinned. Bathymetric Range. — Min. and Max. Depth. Inter- tidal. Zone. Fathoms. 1-15 15-50 50-100 1 100 X Chaetopoda — Ccn. Polychaeta — Con. 20 X O-106.. X X X X o-lO . X 7 X 175 X 8-D W X X X X Nothria conchylega (Sars) 12 = Onuphis conohy- lega Sars 2, 35 7-125 . . . X X X X Nychia amondseni Malmgren = Gattyana amond- seni (Malmgren) McIntosh (17) 50. 75 X Nychia cirrhosa (Pallas) = Gattyana cirrhosa 7 80 X X X 75 212 X X 75 150 X X Onuphis quadricuspis Sars 2 D.W . X 5 X Ophelia radiata Della Chiaje 12 10-12 . . . X Owenia (or Ammocharis) filiformis Della Chiaje. . Pholoe minuta (Fabricius) 110 220 X 8 X Pholoe tecta Stimpson 4 . . . x Phyllodoce catenula Verrill Phyllodoce groenlandica OErsted 5 25 X X Phyllodoce mucosa OErsted 17 30 60 X X Phyllodoce sp. 17 . 80 X Pista cristata (0 F.Moller) 38 44 75 210 X X Polycirrus sp. 38 Polydara concharum Verrill 10 100 X X X Polynoe gaspeensis M’Intosh 100 212 X P'^tumdl^ npglprtn Mnlmgrpn 17 45 75 X X Potamilla oculifera (Leidy) o 60 . X X X Potamilla reniformis (O.F. Moller) 44 Potamilla torelli Malmgren 34 85 X Praxilla gracilis Sars = Praxillella gracilis Sars 17 33 7 112 . . X X X X PrflTn'llfl miilleri CSars) 15-40 .. X Praxillella collaris (Claparede) 33 Prfixillf'lln prfi f'tf'T’iri issfl (Mnlmgrpn) Verrill .33. .. . 7 X Praxillella sp. 17 X Prinripfspin sf.ppnst.rnpi Ma.lmjrrpn . . . 45-220 X X X Protula americana M'Intosh X Protula media Stimpson 35-50 X Rhynchobolus capitatus (OErsted) = Glycera capitata 3, 35 . o 17 X X Sabp.llfi prnpVif\ptr>ptr*rus tyqji^u'^ Sf^r*® 1-3 3S 30-40 X Spirorbis borealis Daudin (?) = Spirorbis spirillum ??? 17 S.W X SniTlVT'KlC />QTir>ol Iq + IIC VkTininO^ 17 7 X Spirorbis carinatus Montagu D.W X 240 DEPARTMEls T OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Bathymetric Tables — Continued. Bathymetric Range. Min. and Max. Depth Inter- tidal Zone. Fathoms. 1-15 15-50 50-100 100 X Chaetopod.x — Con. Polychaeta — Con . Spirorbis granulatus (Muller) ■. Spirorbis lucidus (Montagu) Spirorbis quadrangularis Stimpson 35 Spirorbis spirillum Linnaeus 17, 35 Spirorbis stimpsoni Verrill Spirorbis validus Verrill 17 Spirorbis vitreus (Fabricius) Sthenelais limicola Ehlers Tecturella flaccida Stimpson Terebella brunnea Stimpson Terebella figulus Dalyell 38 Terebellides stroemii M. Sars 17, 38, 43 Thelepus cincinnatus (Fabricius) 17, 35, 38 Thelepus cincinnatus var. canadensis M’Intosh Trichobranchus glacialis Malmgren 38 Troplionia aspera Stimpson 17 Trophonia plumosa (Muller) = Stylarioides mosa, Muller, 13 Verm ilia serrula Stimpson 10-50 X 4-80 X 10-17 X I.T.-60.. X X 10-80 X 7-60 X 20-30 3-15 X X X X X X X X plu- I.T 7-220 .... 7-200 . .. 51 7- 80 8- 125.... 50 X X X X X X X X .... X Gephyrea. Chaetifera. Sternaspis lossor Stimpson 17, 35, 47 Achaeta. 2-90 X X X X X X X X Phascolion allierti Sluiter 32 Phascolion strombi Montagu 32, 35 47 I’hascolion .strombi canadensis Gerould 32 Phascolion strombi fusca Gerould 32 Phascolion tuldcola Verrill. I’hascolo.soma borcale Keferstein = P. margarita- ceurn (Sars) 32 T^hascolosoma caementarium (DeQuatrefages) Idiascolo.soma hamulatum Packard l^riapulus caudatus f Lamarck Priapulus pygmaeus Verrill 700-900.. 2-1061. . . 33-206 . . . 100-1000. 85 30-75.. . . 2-90 8 4-5 X X X X X X X X X X X X Brachiopoda. Articulata. Hemithyris psittacea (Gmelin) 19 4'erebratalia .“^pitzbergensis (l)avid.son) . . Terebratclla labradorensis (Sowcrby) Terebratulina septontrionalis (Couthouy) 1-60 X 20-120 1340 12-220 X X X X X X X POLYZOA. ( 'hcilostomata. B ania adrniramla Packard Bo(-elIaria ciliata (L) 28, 35 Biowerbankia gracilis caudatus (Ilincks) 28, 35 Bugula cucullifera Osburn 28, 35 Bugula rruirrayana (Johnston) 28, 35 Gaberea elli.^^ii (Fleming) 9, 28, 35 Gelh'pora avicularis Ilincks C'ellepora canaliculata Busk 28, 35 Gellcpora contigua Smitt 28 Gollepora pumicosa (li) 50 7-96 X 40 25 7-110 X 6-100 X 45 40-51 45 X X X XX X X X X X X X MA fUXE IXVERTEBRA TES 241 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Bathymetric Tables — Continued. Bathymetric Range. — Min. and Max. Depth. Inter- tidal. Zone. Fathoms. 1-15 15-50 50-100 100 X PoLYZOA=Con. Cheilostomata — Con . 4-50 . . . X X 15-D.W.. X X X 1-50 . . X X 0-1 X Escharoides sarsii Smitt 28 10-60 X X X 220 X .50 X Flustra carbasea Ellis & Solander 28 7-30 X X 56 X 30 X Flustra serrulata Busk 28 7-110 X X X X X 2.5-120 X X 0-110.. .. X X X X Gemellaria loricata var. americana (Lamouroux) . . 10 X 18 . ... X Hippothoa expansa Dawson 75-212. . . . X X Kinetoskias smittii Danielssen 194 X Lagenipora spinulosa Hincks Lepralia hippopus Smitt 28 25 X Lepralia (Discopora) megastoma Smitt Lepralia pertusa (Esper) 3 36 X X Lepralia spathulifera Smitt 9, 28 30 X Membranipora craticula Alder 28, 35 7-38 X X Membranipora cymbiformis Hincks 13-20 X X Membranipora dumerilii Audouin) Membranipora flemingii Busk 28 1-20 X X X AfeTnbra.nipnra. IfleroiYi’i iAiidmn’n'l 30 Membranipora lineata L. 9 10-50 X X Membranipora monostachvs Busk 47 1-6 X Membranipora sophiae Busk Membranipora sophiae var. armifera (Hincks) X Membranipora spinifera Hincks 28 25-45 X Membranipora trifolium (Searles Wood) 28 25 X Membranipora unicornis Fleming 28, 35 8-25 .... X X Membraniporella crassicosta Hincks 28 10-50 X X X Menipea ternata (Ellis & Solander) 9, 28, 35 6-110 X X X Microporella ciliata (Pallas) 28, 35 8-25 X X ' Monoporella spinulifera Hincks = Mucronella spi nulifera 28 25 X Mucronella abyssicola (Norman) Mucronella pavonella (Alder) Mucronella peachii (Johnston) 35, 47 1-6 X Mucronella praelucida Hincks 28 2.5-60 X X Mucronella ventricosa (Hassall) 28 35 14-25 . . . X X Myriozoum coarctatum (Sars) 28 25-60 X X Myriozoum planum (Dawson) = Schizoporella plana, Da.wson 28 25 X Myriozoum subgracile D’Orbigny 10-50 X X Porella acutirostris Smitt 35 . Porella bella (Busk) Porella concinna (Busk) 9, 28, 35 10-60 X X X Porella elegantula (D’Orbigny) Porella, elegantula, var papposa Pae.kard 45 X Porella laevis (Fleming) . . 56 X Porella minuta (Norman) Porella perpusilla Busk 28 80 X Porella proboscidea Hincks 28 20-38 X Porella propinqua Smitt Porella saccata Busk 28 25-110. . . . X X X Porella skenei (Ellis & Solander) 28 40-75 X X 242 DEPARTME't^T OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Bathymetric Tables — Contin ued. Min. and Inter- Max. tidal Depth. Zone. Baihymetric Range. Fathoms. 1-15 15-50 50-100 100 X PoLYZOA — Con. Cheilostomata — Con . Porella skenei var. plana Hincks Porella struma (Norman) 28 Porella surcularis (Packard) = Cellepora surcu- laris 28 Porina tubulosa Norman 35 Ramphonotus minax (Busk) Retepora elongata Smitt Rhamphostomella bilaminata Hincks Rhamphostomella costata Lorenz 28 Rhamphostomella ovata (Smitt) 28 Rhamphostomella plicata Smitt Rhamphostomella radiatula (Hincks) 28 Rhamphostomella scabra (Fabricius) Rhamphostomella scabra var. labiata (Stimpson) Schizoporella auriculata (Hassall) 28, 35 Schizoporella biaperta (Michelin) 35, 47 Schizoporella cincta Hincks (var.) Schizoporella cruenta (Norman) Schizoporella hyalina (L) 9 = Hippothoa hyalina, 28 Schizoporella linearis (Hassall) Schizoporella sinuosa (Busk) 9, 35 Scruparia clavata Hincks 9 Scrupocellaria americana Packard Scrupocellaria scabra (Van Beneden) 35 Scrupocellaria scruposa (L) Smittia arctica Norman 35 = S. porifera 28 Smittia Candida (Stimpson) Smittia globifera (Packard) Smittia landsborovii (Johnston) Smittia producta (Packard) Smittia reticulatopunctata Hincks 28 Smittia trispinosa (Johnston) 28, 35 Umbonula verrucosa (Esper) 96. . . . 40-75. 10-110. S.W.... 56-96. 38. . . . 25-80. 25-45. 45. 8-50. 1-56. 56 30-313. 6-30. 17-45. 35. . . . 30-45. 45... 25-45. C. cri- Cyclostomata. Crisia denticulata (Lamarck) 28 Crisia eburnea (L) 9, 28, 35 Crisia eburnea var. cribaria Stimpson baria 28, 35 Diastopora obelia Johnston Diastopora patina (Lamarck) Discofascigera lucernaria (Sars) Fasciporina flexuosa (Orbigny) Horncra lichenoides (L) Idmonea atlantica (Forbes) Johnston 9 = Tubuli- pora atlantica 28, 35 Idmonea serpens (L) 9 Lichenopora clypeiformis (Orbigny) Lichenopora hispida (Fleming) Lichenopora regularis (Orbigny) 28 Lichenopora verrucaria (Fal)ricius) 28, 35 Stornatopora diastoporoides (Norman) 35 Stornatopora granulata (Milne Edwards)... Stornatopora penicillata (Fabricius) Tubulipora expansa (Packard) Tubulipora fimbria Lamarck Tubulipora flabellaris (Fabricius) 9, 28, 35 Tubulipora lobulata Hassall 10^5. O-200. 18-45. 30-96. 7 50-96. 220.. . 40-45. 30. . . . 30-96. 25... 7-60. . 50. MARTXE IXVFJRTEIiRA TES 243 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a B ATH YM ETH ic TABLES — Con tinned. Bathymetric Range. Min. and Max. Depth Inter- tidal. Zone. Fathoms. 1-15 15-50 50-100 100 X Ctenosomata. Alcyonidium gelatinosum (L) Alcyonidium mytili Dalyell 35, 47 Barentsia gracilis M. Sars Barentsia major Hincks 35 Flustrella hispida (Fabricius) Pedicellina nutans Dalyell 9 96. . , 1-16, 3-13 X X MOLLUSCA.a Pelecypoda. Anomia aculeata Muller 42. . . : Anomia simplex d’Orbigny 35, 46 Area (Bathyarca) glacialis Gray Area (Bathyarca) pectunculoides Scacchi Astarte banksii (Leach) Astarte banksii var. globosa Moller Astarte banksii var. striata Leach Astarte castanea Say 35, 42 Astarte compressa (L) Astarte crebricostata Forbes Astarte crenata Gray 46 Astarte lactea Broderip & Sowerby Astarte quadrans Gould 5 Astarte subaequilatera Sowerby 42 Astarte undata Gould 35, 42, 46 Astarte undata var lutea Perkins Axinopsis orbiculata var. inaequalis Verrill & Bush. Cardium (Cerastoderma) ciliatum Fabricius 19, 35, 42 Cardium (Laevicardium) mortoni Conrad 35 Cardium (Cerastoderma) pinnulatum Conrad 35 3-100.. 2-8.... 70-430. 10-60 . . 70-80.. 5- 20... 10-50.. 112-313 15-120. 6- 40. . . 50 ,5-100.. 5-100.. 10-60 2-5.. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 42, 46, 2-80 X Clidiophora gouldiana Dali 46 = Pandora goul- diana 35, 42 Cochlodesma leanum (Conrad) 35 Crenella decussata (Montagu) Crenella faba (Moller) Crenella glandula (Totten) 35, 42 Crenella pectinula (Gould) Cryptodon (Axinulus) ferruginosus (Forbes) Cryptodon gouldii Phillipi Cryptodon (Axinulus) inaequalis Verrill & Bush.. . Cryptodon obesus Verrill = Thyasira obesa 46. . . Cryptodon planus Verrill & Bush Cumingia tellinoides (Conrad) Cuspidaria arctica (M. Sars) Cuspidaria glacialis G. O. Sars Cuspidaria pellucida (Stimpson) Cyprina islandica (L) 42 Cyrtodaria siliqua (Daudin) Cytherea convexa Say 42, 46 = Callocardia morr- huana 35 Dacrydium vitreum (Moller) Ensis directus (Conrad) = E. americanum Gould 35, 46 0- 30. 2-19. 20-60 1- 15. 0-60. , 200-313... 10-313. . . . 14- 49 8-100 190 . . . . 50-313.... 40 6-90 15- 50 I.T.-15... 100-313.. . 0-40 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X f X X a. Note. — Students of the geographic distribution of the Mollusca will find it instructive to compare with this list the following two papers by Dr. Wm. H. Dali : “ Checklist of the Recent Mollusks of the Northwest coast of America from the Polar sea to San Diego, California,” pp. 1-44, 1916. S. West Museum, Los Angeles, Calif. “Report on the Mollusca of the Arctic coast of America collected by the Canadi.Tii Arctic Expedition west from Bathurst Inlet.” Scientific Results of the Expedition, — in the press. 244 DEPARTME-NT OF THE RA VAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Bathymetric Tables — Continued. Mollusca — Con . Pelecypoda — Con. 46 15-50.. 15-50.. 50-59 . . 10-20 . 6-110 . 38-313. 10-50.. 15-60. . 0-30.... I.T.-6 3-80. . . 38-125. 10-200. I.T.-7. . . I.T.-25.. 0-100 0-100 I.T.-40.. 4-10 I.T.-40... I.T.-45.. I.T.-19... 5H-100.. 30 1- 17 4-80 4-100. . . . <3 a 40-50 . . . . 2- 15 200-313. . 1-100. . . . 4-20 . . 115-430. 57-400. . 3-100.. . I.T.-6... 15-25. . . 18 0-50 10-60. . . 17 r 2-5. . 0-10. 0-19. 0-19. 13-15. . . 6-19. . . . 10-50. . . 10-60. . . I.T.-14. 0 3-50 . . . 0-6 Epitonium groenlandicus Perry Kellia suborbiculari.s (Montagu) Kennerlia glacialis (Leach) Leda minuta (Muller) Leda pemula (Muller) 19 Leda pernula var. jacksonii Gould Leda tenuisulcata (Couthouy) 35 Limatula subaurieulata (Montagu) Liocyma fluctuosa (Gould) Lyonsia arenosa (Moller) Lyonsia hyalina Conrad 35, 42, 46 Macoma balthica (L) 42 = M. balthica fusca 35, Macoma calcarea (Gmelin) 19, 46 Macoma inflata Verrill & Bush Megayoldia thraciaeformis (Storer) 42 = Yoldia thraciaeformis 35 Mesodesma deauratum (Turton) Modiola (Brachydontes) demissa (Dillwyn) 35, 46 Modiola modiolus (L) 19, 35, 46 Modiolaria corrugata (Stimpson) 35, 42 Modiolaria discors (L) 19, 42 46 = M. laevigata 35 Modiolaria nigra (Gray) 19, 35, 46 Mulinia lateralis (Say) 35 Mya arenaria L. 19, 35, 42, 46 Mya truncata L19 Mytilus edulis L. 19, 35, 42, 46 Nucula delphinodonta Mighels 35, 42 Nucula expansa Reeve Nucula proxima Say 35, 46 Nucula proxima var. trunculus Dali Nucula tenuis (Montagu) 19 Ostrea virginica Gmelin 35 .l^anopaea (Panomya) norvegica Spengler Pecten gibbus var. borealis Say 35 J’ecten ((^amptonectes) groenlandicus Sowerby... lYcten (Chlumys) islandicus Muller 19, 35 Pecten (Placopecten) magellanicus (Gmelin) 19, 35, 42, 46 I’ecten (Cyclopecten) pustulosus Verrill lYcten (Camptonectes) vitreus (Chemnitz). Periploma fragilis (Totten) 46 Petricola pholadiformis Lamarck 46 l^ortlandia glacialis (Wood) Rochefortia mt)ll('ri (Morch) Saxicava rugo.sa (L) 42, 46 = S. arctica 19.. Scrripes groenlandicus (Gmelin) 19 Sili(iua co.stata (Say) 35 Sili(iua sciuama (Blainville) Solenomya bon'alis Totten = Solcrnya borealis 35 Solenomya v('lurn Say = Solemya velum 35., Spisula (Ilemimactra) polynyma (Stimpson) Spisula (Hemimactra) solidissima (Dillwyn) 35, 46 'rellina (Angulus) teneraSay35 'Feredo dilatata Stimpson d'eredo naval is fv. 35 d'hracia conradi Couthouy 35 Thracia myopsis (B('ck) Moller Thracia truncata Miglu'ls Adams 42 d'ottenia gemma (Totten) = Gemma gemma 35. d'urtonia minuta (F'abricius) \'en(>ricardia borealis (Conrad) 19, 35, 42, 46 Venus rnercenaria L. 25 a In Ivong Island Sound, the Oyster flourishes in 70 to 80 feet of water, gical Station Hull. No. 3 p. 11, 1905. Bathymetric Range. Min. and Max. Depth. Inter- tidal Zone. 1-15 Fathoms. 15-50 50-100 100 x .1. L. Kellog, La. Gulf Biolu- MA RIXE J X VERTEBRA TES 245 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Bathymetric Tables — Continued. Min. and Max. Depth Bathymetric Raxge. Inter- tidal. Zone. Fathoms. 1-15 1.5-50 50-100 100 X M OLLU SC A — Con . Pelecypoda — Con . Xylophaga dorsalis Turton. . . . Yoldia limatula (Say) 35, 46... Yoldia myalis (Couthouy) 19.. Yoldia sapotilla (Gould) 35, 42. Yoldiella frigida (Torell) Yoldiella lucida (Loven) Zirfaca erispata L. 35 2-30 X 20 4-100 X 100-313 40-313 0-70 X X X X X X X X X X X Scax>hopoda. Dentalium agile M. Sars Dentalium entalis L. 42 Dentalium occidentale Stimpson Siphonodentalium affine M. Sars Siphonodentalium lobatum (Sowerby) 20-60 . .50-300 .35. . , . Gasteropoda. X X X X X Acmaea rubella (Fabricius) Acmaea testudinalis (Muller) 19, 35, 42, 46. Acrybia flava (Gould) Admete couthouyi (Jay) 19. iEolis papillosa (L) = Aeolidia papillosa 35 iEolis purpurea Stimpson iEolis stellata Stimpson Alderia harvardiensis (Agassiz) Alexia myosotis (Draparnaud) 35 Amaura Candida Moller Amauropsis islandica (Gmelin) Amicula vestita (Boderip & Sowerby) Anachis haliaeti (Jeffreys) Ancula sulphurea Stimpson Aporrhais occidentalis Beck 19, 42, 46 Astyris lunata (Say) 35 Astyris rosacea (Gould) 35 Astyris zonalis (Linsley) 35 Bela angulosa Sars Bela bicarinata Couthouy Bela bicarinata var. violacea (Mighels & Adams) . Bela cancellata (Mighels) 42 Bela cancellata var. canadensis Verrill & Bush. . . Bela concinnula Verrill Bela decussata (Couthouy) 42 Bela exarata (Moller) Bela gouldii Verrill Bela harpularia (Couthouy) 35, 42 Bela impressa Beck Bela incisula Verrill Bela mitrula (Loven) Bela nobilis (Moller) 46 Bela pingelii (Moller) Bela pleurotomaria (Couthouy) 35, 42 Bela rosea Sars Bela sarsii Verrill Bela scalaris Moller 42 Bela woodiana (Moller) Bittium nigrum Totten = B. alternatum 35 Buccinum ciliatum (Fabricius) 19 Buccinum cyaneum Bruguiere Buccinum cyaneum var. perdix (or finrnarchianum) (Beck) Mdrch 19 20-35 a I.T .50 10-60 I.T.-20... I.T I.T I.T I.T 20-50 67-96 I.T.. 2-120 1-19. 8-60. 8.. . . 0-100... 0-100... 25 16-42.. 10-100. 5-18. . . 16-41 . . 10-190. ,5-110.. 10-20.. 2-80... 45 1-80... 2-57. .. 10-20. . 10-100. 15 I.T. -5. ,3-112.. 45-100. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X a The young are dredged in 15 fathoms. 246 DEPARTMEN T OF THE NATAL EERTICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Bathymetric Tables — Continued. Bathymetric Range. — Min. and Max. Depth. Inter- tidal Zone. Fathoms. 1-15 15-50 50-100 100 X Gasteropoda — Con. 0-15 X I.T X 60 ? X ? a 8-15.. . . X Buccinum undatum L. 19 = B. undulatum Muller 35, 42, 46 I.T.-170. . X X X X X 25-40 X 150 X 3-10 X 110-200. . . X 10-100. . . . X X X I.T X 4-25 X X 96 X 96-200 X X 1-15 X 60 ? X 20-200 X X X- Cingula minuta (Totten) 35 Cingula multilineata (Stimpson) T.T.-l.... X X Coryphella diversa (Couthouy) 19 4 X Coryphella mananensis (Stimpson) 35 20-90 •. X X Coryphella stimpsoni Verrill 0-51 X X X Crenella decussata Montagu 20-60 X X Crenella faba Fabricius 30 Crpnplln, glandiiln, (^Pof.tpn'l O-60 X X X Crenella pectinula (Gould) Crepidula convexa Sav 35 I.T.-15.. . X X Crepidula fornicata (L) 35, 46 I.T.-19. . . X X X Crepidula plana Say 35, 46 I.T.-45. . . X X X Crucibulum striatum (Say) 35, 42, 46 O-30 X X Cylichna alba (Brown) 19 35 46 2-60 X X X Cylichna occulta (Mighels & Adams) I3endronotus arborescens Muller )19, 35 0—45 X X Dendronotus robustus Verrill I.T.-98. . . X X X X I3iaphana debilis (Gould) 6-50 X X T3ifl.ph;ina. liipmnlis ^^Gr>i]I,hniiyI 1?) 40 X Doris planulata Stinipson I.T X Doto coronata (Gmelin) 35 15 X Doto formosa Verrill 35 Kulima stenostoma Jeffreys Unmi'np.M. str^lif.n.rin LSnyl .*1.5 I.T X TJn.nlpyiJi rnpnd>Pf>t’hi (Mighpis A’" -\fla.ins) . . .35-60 X X lanthina fragilis Lamarck 35 Issa lacera (Muller) 90-92 X T .}»funa glapiii Hs Mrillpr 96 X Lacuna ncritoidea Gould T,;iPiin;j. vinpt,«. (Mfjnt.n.cru'l 1-30 X X T ,ppf*tji. pfippji. (O. F. Muller') 19, 42 17-50 X X T «^ | \rork| « \f 220 T .r^piflnplpfi r^js) pnnppl Im f.^i^ Snwprby 95 X T in. pbii rnp;i. ISti'mpsnn) 2,5-70 X X Litorina litorea (L) 19, 35, 42, 46 Litorina palliata (Say) 19, 35, 42, 46 I.T.-6. . . . I.T X X Jvitorina rudis (Maton) 19, 35, 42 I.T X .3 60 X X X Lunatia heros (Say) 43, 46 = Polynices heros 35.. . T.unatia heros var. triseriata (Say) 46 = Polynices triseriata 35 I.T.^0... I.T.-40... . X X X X X X Lunatia immaculata (Totten) = Polynices irnma- culata 35 0-25 X X a Tlie youiiK an; drodKod in 21 fathoms. 1/ A RIXE IX TER TERRA TES 247 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Bathymetric Tables — Continued. Bathymetric Range. — Min. and Max. Depth. Inter- tidal. Zone. Fathoms. 1-15 15-50 50-100 100 X Gasteropoda — Con . 45 X Margarita acuminata (Sowerby) Mighels & Adams 40 X 10-60 X X X X Margarita cinerea var grandis (Morch) G. O. Sars. 42 10-60 • X X Margarita helicina (Fabricius) 19, 42 I.T X 4-60 X X X Margarita undulata Sowerby 42 = Margarites un- 3-50 X X 15 X Melampus bidentatus Say Melampus lineatus Say 35, 46 I.T I.T X X 2-15 X Menestho striatula (Couthouy) = Couthouyella. striatula 15, 35 7-204 X X X X 4 X Nassa (Ilyanassa) obsoleta Say 35, 46 0-6 X Nassa (Tritia) trivittata Say 35, 46 I.T.-60... 19-110 X X X X X X X Neptunea decemcostata (Say) 42, 46 0—15 X X 10-60 X X X Odostomia bisuturalis (Say) 15, 35 Odostomia fusca (Adams) 35 3-6 X Odostomia seminuda (Adams) 35 2-10 X Odostomia trifida (Totten) 35 o X Odostomia (Menestho) trifida bedequensis Bartsch 15 Odostomia (Chrysallida) willisi Bartsch 15 Onchidoris muricata (Muller) 3-21 X X Onchidoris pallida (Stimpson = Lamellidoris pallida, ,3.5 25 X Phib’nft cingnla.ta. G. O. Sars 90 . X Philine finmarchica M. Sars 90 X Philinfi fra.gilis G. O. Sa.rs 90 X Philine lima (Brown) 19 10-15 X Philine qiia.dra.ta, CSen.rles Wood) 180-220 . . X Polycera lessonii Orbigny O-20 X X Puncturella noachina (L) 42 I.T.-50. . . X X X Puncturella princeps Michels 30 Purpura lapillus (L) 42 = Thais lapillus 35, 46 Ptychatractus ligatus (Mighels) 3() I.T. 15-60 X X X Retusa gouldii (Couthouy) Retiisa. nitidnla, IT.oven) 200 X Retusa pertenuis (Mighels) 19, 42 8-10 X Scalaria (Acirsa) costulata (Mighels) Scalaria groenlandica Perry 42 = Boreoscala groenlandica 35 10-109. . . . X X X X Scapha.nder piinetosf.ria.tiis ^Mighels) 19 200 X Scisssurella crispata Fleming 4-790 X X X X Sipho os.sia.ni TFrielel 180 X Sipho pubescens Verrill) 88-91 X Sipho pygmaeus (Gould) 42 O-430 X X X X Sipho stimpsoni (Morch) 42 0-112 X X X X Sipho spitz bergensis (Reeve) 1-60 X X X Sipho ventricosus (Gray) Skeneia plaiiorbis (Fabricius) .35 I.T X Solariella, ob.sciira, ('Conthony') 10-60 X X X Solariella obscura var. bella 10-90 X X X Solariella. va.ricoaa. iMighel.s A’- .Adams) 1-60 X X X Thais lapillus (L) 46 0-6 X Tonicella marmorea (Fabricius) 19, 42 O-50 X X Tornatina canaliculata (Say) 35 3-5 X Trachydermon albus (L) O-50 X X Trachydermon ruber (L) 35 = Trachydermon rubrum 19 °-40 X X 248 DEPARTMENT OF THE NATAL 8ERT1CE 8 GEORGH V, A. 1918 Bathymetric Tables — Continued. — Bathymetric Range. Min. and Max. Depth. Inter- tidal Zone. Fathoms. 1-15 15-50 50-100 100 X Gasteropoda— Con . Trichotropis borealis Broderip & Sowerby 19 10-50 X X Trichotrppis conica (Beck) Moller 30 3-60 X X X Tritonofusus latericeus (Moller) 20-357. . . . X X X Tritonofusus stimpsoni lirulatus Verril 35, 46 3-20 X X 30 X 20-80 X X 16-60 X X 38-50 X Trophon truncatus (Strom) 30 X Turbonilla (Pyrgiscus) hecuba Dali & Bartsch 30. . 19 X Turbonilla interrupta var. fulvocincta (Totten)... 2-10 X Turbonilla (Pvrgiscus) edwardensis Bartsch 15 40 X Turbonilla (Pyrgiscus) whiteavesi Bartsch 15 10-60 X X X 2-15 X O-50 X X 1-15 X 57 X 0-17 X X V*^lutina (Limneria) undata (Brown) 42 1.5 X Volumitra groenlandica Beck 7 Volutopsis norvegica (Chemnitz) Pteropoda. Clione limacina (Phipps) 19, 35 F Limacina gouldii (Stimpson) F Cephalopoda. Dibranchiata. Chiroteuthis lacertosa Verrill F Gonatus fabricii (Lichtenstein) F Histioteuthis collinsii Verrill F I Ilex illecebrosus (Lesueur) 42 = Ommastrephes illecebrosa 35 F Ommastrephes megapterus (Verrill) F liossia hyatti Verrill 57-100 X HnssiM Siililevi.s Verrill ... 42-101 X X X Kossia (?) tenera (Verrill) 85 X Octopoda. ( lefnpiis eretieii.s Prf»5?eli 60-101 . . . X X Oetopiis If'ntiis Verrill 120-602 . . X Octopus obesus Verrill 160-300. . . X (le.tnpiis pi.«5 47 O-106. X X X Libinia emarginata Leach 5, 35, 47 I.T.-19. . . X X X Neptiinus sayi Milne Edwards X 254 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Bathymetric Tables — Continued. Bathymetric Range. — Min. and Max. Depth. Inter- tidal Zone. Fathoms. 1-15 15-50 50-100 100 X Arachnid A. Pycnogonida. Ammothea achelioid.es Wilson X X 85 Nymphon grossipes (0. Fabricius) 35 12-110. . . . X X X Nymphon hirtuni J. C. Fabricius O-50 X X Nymphon longitarse Kroyer 16-90 X X Nymphon macrum Wilson 35-110. . . X X X Phoxichilidium maxillare (Stimpson) I.T.-55. . . 50 55 . . . x X X X X Pycnogonum littorale (Strom) I.T.-430. . X X X X X Chordata. Amaroucium glabrum Verrill 23, 26, 35 O-80 X X X Amaroucium pallidum Verrill = Aplidium palli- dum 23, 35 0-471 X X X X 51 X Ascidia complanata Fabricius = Phallusia prunum 29 = Ascidiopsis prunum 26 I.T.-150.. X X X X X Ascidia falcigera Herdman 85 X Boltenia bolteni (L) 30 30-56 .... X X Boltenia bolteni (L) var. rubra = Pyura ovifera 29 Boltenia ciliata Moller = Pyura ovifera 29 30-56 X X .30 X Boltenia elegans Herdman = Pyura ovifera 29 and Boltenia ovifera 26, 47 51 X Botrylloides aureum Sars 23, 26 Rotrylliis f.spee. iinHet.l S.W.-160.. X X X X 50-96 X Caesira canadensis 26 I.T X Caesira intumescens Van Name 29 39 X Caesira septentrionalis Traustedt 29 .50 X Chelyosoma geometricum Stimpson = C,maclea- yanum 26, 29 6-54 X X X Ciona tenella (Stimpson) = C, intestinalis (L) 29.. Dendrodoa aggregate pulchella Verrill 29 5-127 X X X X 10^0 X X Dendrodoa carnea Agassiz 26, 29 = Cynthia carnea 35 S.W.-39... X X Dendrodoa grossularia Van Beneden 29 45 X Didemnopsis tenerum (Verrill) 23, 26 10-76 X X X Eugyra glutinans (Moller) 35 6 X Eugyra pilularis Verrill 35 = Bostrichobranchus pilularis 29 i-120 X X X X X Glandula arenicola Verrill = Tethyum molle 29... Glandula fibrosa Stimpson = Pandocia fibrosa 29.. Glandula mollis Stimpson = Tethyum molle 29.. . Halocynthia echinata (L) 35 = Pyura echinata 29 and Boltenia hirsute 26 10-150. . . . X X X 30-238 X X X 10-150. . . . X X X X 0-1 20 X X X X Halocynthia pyriformis (Rathke) = Pyura auran- tium 29 and Tethyum pyriforme americanum Halocynthia rustica (L) = Tethyum rusticum 29. . O-120 X X X X 8 X Halocynthia tuberculum (Fabricius) = Tethyum coriaceum Alder & Hancock 29 10-225. . . . X X X X Holozoa clavata (Sars) 26,29 ? Lcptoclinum albidum Verrill = Tetradidemnum albidum 23, 26 S.W.-150.. X X X X 0-1 10 X X X X Leptoclinum albidum var. luteolum = Tetradi- demnum albidum 29 o-llO X X X X T.,«‘pf.nnHnulps fRpmpn.sjis HjprlcHn 2.3 100-1582. . X Li.ssoclinum aureum Verrill 23, 26 S.W.-IOO.. X X X X Macroclinum pomun Sars 23 75 ,\ ATi'propo.smiis naprpn.«i VH.r» Na.mp 29 26-36 X Molgula littoralis, Verrill = Caesira citrina 29 & C’aesira littoralis 26 I.T.-126.. X X X X X MA RISE ISTERTEBRA TESi 255 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Bathymetric Tables — Continued. Bathymetric Range. — Min. and Max. Depth. Inter- tidal. Zone. Fathoms. 1-15 15-50 50-100 100 X Chordata — Con. Molgula pannosa Verrill 35 = Caesira pannosa 26, 29 10-80 X X X X Molgula papillosa Verrill 35 = Caesira papillosa 26, 29 10-100. . . . X X ^lolgula producta Stimpson 35 = Caesira producta 29 I.T.-29.. . X X X Molgula retortiformis Verrill = Caesira retorti- formis 26, 29 10-125. . . . X X X X Pera crystallina (Moller) = Caesira crystallina 29 . Pelonaia arenifera Stimpson = P. corrugata 26, 29.. Phallusia obliqua (Alder) 29 = Phallusioides obliqua 26 10-30 X X 15 X 33-320. . . . X X X Polycitnr kiikenthali (Cott.schaldt.) 2.3 8-225 X X X X X X Tethyum finmarkense Kiaer29 11-67 X Tethvum mortenseni Hartmeyer 29 45-350. . . . X X X BIBLIOGRAPHY, 1902-16. Coe, W. R. and Kunkel, B. TT. 1. On Cerebratulus melanops n. sp. Gulf of St. Lawience. Biological Bulletin, Boston, 1903, Vol. IV, No. 3. McIntosh, W. C. 2. On Canadian Eunicidae dredged by Dr. Whiteaves of the Canadian Geological Survey in 1871-73. Notes from the Gatty Marine Laboratory. Annals of Natural History, 1903, seventh series, Vol. XII, pp. 149-164. On the Goniadidse, Glyceridse, and Ariciidae procured by Hr. Whiteaves in the Gulf of St. Lawrence in 1872-73. Notes from the Gatty Marine Laboratory, Annals of Natural History, 1905, 7th series, Vol. XV, pp. 51-54. Richardson, H. 4. Isopods of North America. Bulletin United States Nationa IMuseum, 1905, No. 54, pp. 1-727. Rathhun, Mary. 5. Fauna of New England. Occasional Papers,, Boston Society of Natural History, No. 5, 1905, pp. 1-117. Clark, H. L. 6. The Apodous Holothurians. Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, 1907, Vol. XXV, pp. 1-231, Dali, W. H. 7. A Review of the American Volutidae. Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections, 1907, Vol. XLVIII, pp. 341-373. Pilsbry, H. A. 8. The Barnacles in the United States National Museum. United States National Museum Bulletin 60, 1907. Cornish, G. A. 9. Report of the Marine Polyzoa of Canso, N.S. Contributions to Canadian Biology, 1902-5 (1907), pP- 71-81. (39th Report of the Department of Marine and Fisheries, Fisheries Branch.) 256 DEPARTME^^T OF THE NATAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V„ A. 1918 Scott, Thomas. BIBLIOGRAPHY, 1902-16 — Continued. 10. On Some Entomostraca from the Gulf of St. Lawrence. Transactions Natural History Society of Glasgow, 1907, New series, Vol. VTI, 1902-5, pp. 46-52. Wright, R. Ramsay. 11. The Plankton of Eastern Nova Scotia Waters. Further Contributions to Canadian Biology, 1902i-5 (1917), pp. 1-19. (39th Report of the Department of Marine and Fisheries, Fisheries Branch.) McIntosh, W. C. 12. The Opheliidse, Scalibregmidse and Telethus:e dredged by Dr. Whiteaves in the Gulf of St. Lawrence, Canada. Notes from the Gatty Marine Laboratory, Annals of Natural History 1908, 8th series, Vol. 1, pp. 385-387. 13. Sphserodoridse, Chlorsemidse and ChsetopteridcC dredged in the Gulf of St. Lawrence by Dr. Whiteaves. Notes from the Gatty Marine Laboratory, Annals of Natural History 1908, 8th series, Vol. II, p. 540-541. Sharpe, R. W. 14. A further Report on the Ostracods of the United States National Museum. Proceedings of the U. S. Nat. Mus. 1908, Vol. XXXV, No. 1651, pp, 339-430. Bartsch, Paul. 15. Pyramidellidse of New England and the adjacent region. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. 1'90'9, Vol. 34. No. 4. pp. 67-113. Bigeloio, H. B. 16. Ccelenterates from Laibrador and Newfoundland, collected by Mr. Owen Bryant in 190S. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1909, Vol. 37, pp. 301-320. Moore, J. P. 17. The Polychsetous Annelids dredged in 1908 by Mr. Owen Bryant off the coast of Labrador, Newfoundland and Nova Scotia. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1909, Vol. 37, pp. 113-146. Rathbun, M. J. 18. The Crustacea of the Labrador Coast. Appendices II & VI to, “Labrador” by Grenfell & Others’, 1909, MacMillan & Co. Johnson, C. W. 19. The Molluscs of Labrador. Appendix III to, “Labrador” By Grenfell & Others’, 1909, MacMillan & Co. Ashworth, J. II. 20. The Annelids of the family Arenicolidse of North and South America inc’uding an account of Arenicola glacialis Murdoch. Pi-oc, U. S. Nat. Mus. 1910, Vol. 39, pp. 1-32, text figs. 1-14. McMurrich, J. Playfair. " 21. The Actiniaria of Passamaquoddy Bay with a discussion of their synonymy. Trans. Roy. Soc. of Can. 1910, 3rd. ser. Vol. IV, sec. IV, pp. 59-83, plates 1-3. Sharpe, R. W. 22. Notes on the Marine Copepo'da and Cladocera of Woods Hole and adjacent regions in- cluding a synopsis of the genera of the Harpacticoidea. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1910, Vol. 38, pp. 405-436. Van Name, W. G. 23. Compound Ascidians of the coast of New England and neighbouring British province.s. Proc. Bos. Soc. Nat. Hist. 1910, Vol. 34, No. 11, pp. 339-424. McIntosh, W. C. 24. On Nevaya whiteavesi, a form with certain relationships to Scherocheilus, Grube. from Canada. On the Cirratulidae dredged in the Gulf of St. Lawrence, Canada by Dr. Whiteaves. Notes from the Gatty Marine Laboratory, St. Andrews; Annals and Magazine of Nat. Hist. 1911, Vol. 7, 8th ser. No. 38, pp. 145-173. Caiman, W. T. 25. The ('rustacea of the Order Cumacea in the collection of the United States National Museum. I’roc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1912. Vol. 41, pp. 603-676. MARINE INYERTEBRATES 257 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a BIBLIOGRAPHY, 1902-16 — Continued. Huntsman, A. G. 26. Ascidians from the coasts of Canada. Trans. Can. Inst. 1912, Vol. IX, pt. 2, No. 21, pp. 111-148. MacDonald, D. L. 27. On a collection of Crustacea made at St. Andrews, N.B. Contr. to Can. Biology 1906-10 (1912), pp. 83-84. Osl)urn, Raymond C. 28. Bryozoa from Labrador, Newfoundland and Nova iScotia collected by Dr. Owen Bryant. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1912, Vol. 43, pp. 275-289. Van Name, W. G. 29. Simple Ascidians of the coasts of New England and neighbouring British provinces. Proc. Bo.s. Soc. Nat. Hist. 1912, Vol. 34, No. 13, pp. 439-619. Dali, W. H. t6 Bart sell, Paul. 30. New Species of Molluscs from the Atlantic & Pacific coasts of Canada. Viet. Mem. Mus. 1913, Bull. No. 1, p. 139-144. Fraser. C. MacLean. 31. Hydroids from Nova Scotia. Viet. Mem. Mus. Bull. 1913, No. 1, p. 158-180. Gerould, J. H. 32. The Sipunculids of the Eastern coast of North America. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1913, Vol. 44, No. 1959, pp. 373-457. McIntosh, W. C. 33. On the Maldanidee dredged m the Gulf of St. Lawrence by Dr. Whiteaves 187 1-73. Notes from the Gatty Marine Laboratory, St. Andrews'. Annals and Magazine of Nat. Hist. 1913, 8th ser. Vol. XI, pp. 119-128. 34. On Myriochele heeri collected by Dr. Whiteaves in the Gulf of St. Lawrence 1873. Notes from the Gatty Marine Laboratory. 'St. Andrews. Annals & Magazine of Nat. Hist. 1913, 8th ser. Vol. XII, pp. 166-169. Summer, F. B., Oslncrn, R. C., and Cole, L. J. 35. A Biological Survey of the Waters of Woods Hole and vicinity. Bureau of Fisheries Bulletin 1913, Vol. XXXI, Part II, Sec. Ill, pp. 549-734. Willey, A. 36. Notes on Plankton collected across the mouth of the St. Croix River opposite the Biolo- gical Station at St. Andrews, N.B. Proceedings Zoological Society of London, 1913, Vol. 1, pp. 283-292. Koehler, R. 37. A contribution to the study of Ophiurians of the United States National Museum. U. S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 84, 1914, pp. 1-172. McIntosh, W. C. 38. On the Chaetopteridae, Amphictenidae and Ampharetidae dredged in the Gulf of St. Larence, Canada by Dr. Whiteaves. Notes from the Gatty Marine Laboratory. Annals & Magazine of Nat. Hist. 1915, 8th ser. vol. 15, pp. 47-53. Hansen, II. J. 39. The Crustacea Ephausiacea of the U. S. National Museum. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1915, Vol. 48, pp. 59-114. Stock, V. 40. Parasitic Copepods of the Bay of Fundy Fishes. Contr. to Can. Biology 1911-14 (1915) pt. 1, pp. 69-71. Supplement to the 47th Annual Report of the Dept, of Marine & Fisheries, Fisheries Branch. Huntsman, A. G. 41. A New Caprellid from the Bay of Fundy. Contr. to Can. Biology 1911-14 (1915), pt. 1, pp. 39-42. (Supplement to the 4 7th Annual Report of the Dept, of Marine & Fisheries, Fisheries Branch. ) 258 departme:nt of the ^^ayal i^ervice BIBLIOGRAPHY. 1902-16— Concluded. 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Detiveiler^ J. I/, ‘ ®*P‘- Of Marine & Fisheries, Ptaheries Nutting, C. E. ”• t”:;irSunl«ru' TNaHonaT Bonneviellid*. McIntosh, TY. C. “■ ‘’’wwteavS‘?n ®‘- Lawrence Canada by Dr Notes from the Gatty Marine Laboratory. Annals & Magazine Nat. Hist. 1916, 8th ser., Vol. 17, pp. 59-63. PUshry, H. A. 4d. The Sessile Barnacles (Cirripedia) contained in the collection of U. S. National Museum including a monograph of the American species iNationai Museum U. S. Nat. Mus. 1916v Bull. 93, pp. 1-366. Kindle, E. M. ''■ mtawa Invertebrates n, Western Nova Scotia. MARIXE INVERTEBRATES 259 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a INDEX The numbers at extreme right refer to the pages in Whiteaves’ Catalogue of the Marine Invertebrates of Eastern Canada; numbers in the left-hand column refer to the Bathymetric tables in the preceding section of this paper. A Abietinaria abietina. See Sertularia abietina. Acanella arbuscula. See Acanella normani. Acanella normani Acanthogorgia armata Acanthonia echinoides Acanthonotozoma serratum Acanthonotus inflatus. See Acanthotozoma inflatum. Acanthonotus serratus. See Acanthonotozoma serratum. Acanthostaurus pallidus Acanthostephia malmgreni Acanthotozoma inflatum Acanthozone cuspidata Acartia clausi Acartia giesbrechti. Acaulis primarius Aceros phyllonyx Achelia spinosa Acirsa. See Scalaria. Acmaea rubella Acmaea testudinalis Acrybia flava Actaeon trifldus. See Odostomia trifida. Actinauge nexilis Actinauge nodosa. See Actinauge verrillii. Actinauge verrillii Actinernus nobilis Actinia carneola. See Stomphia carneola. Actinia crassicornis. See Urticina crassicornis. Actinia dianthus. See Metridium dianthus. Actinia marginata. See Metridium dianthus. Actinia nodosa. See Chondractinia nodosa. Actinia plumosa. See Metridium dianthus. Antinia sipunculoides. See Bdwardsia sipunculoides. Actinia tuedise. See Bolocera tuediae. Actinobolus borealis. See Venericardia borealis. Actinoloba dianthus. See Metridium dianthus. Actinopora regularis. See LSee Amaroecium pallidum. Amouroucium glabrum. See Amaroucium glabrum. Ainouroucium pallidum. See Amaroucium pallidum. Ampelisca eschricbtii Ampelisca gaimardi. See Byb'lis'ga'iAiardi'k Ampelisca macrocephala Ampelisca pelagica. See Ampelisca macrocephala Ampelisca typica ’ Ampharete gracilis V 907 Ampharete grubei 937 Amphipbolis elegans . 236 Ampbiporus agilis ' * ’ */ ' ' \ 237 Ampbiporus angulatus 937 Ampbiporus heterosorus 937 Ampbiporus lactifloreus 237. Ampbiporus roseus 237 Ampbiporus stimpsoni. See Ampbiporus angulatus Ampbiporus (?) superbus 237 Amphi.spbyra debilis. See Diaphana debilis. Amphisphyra biemalis. See Diaphane hiemalis. Ampbi.sphyra pellucida. See Diaphana debilis. Ampbitboe crenulata. See J’ontogeneia inermis. Ampbitboe fulvocincta. See Halirages fulvocinctus. Ampbitboe inermis. See Pontogeneia inermis. Ampbitboe lasvuiscula. Sec Calliopius laeviuscula. Ampbitboe maculata. See Ami)bithoe podoceroides. Ami)bithoe i)anopla. See Pleustes panoplus. Ampbitboe podoceroides 050 Ampbitboe punctata 250 Ampbitboe rubricata ’ ’ ’ ’ 250 Ampbitboe sera. Sec Acantbonotozoma serratum. Ampbitboe virescens. See Ampbitboe punctata. Amphitbonotus catapbractu.s. See Paramphithoe catapbracta and I’leustes panoplus. 155 10 263 222 222 222 74 74 59 65 64 65 65 65 65 222 221 AIARIXE IXYERTEBRA TES 261 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Amphitonotus eclwardsii. See Rhacotropis aculeatus. Amphitrite cincinnata. See Thelepus cincinnatus. Amphitrite cirrhata Amphitrite groenlandica Amphitrite intermedia Amphitrite plumosa. See Trophonia plumosa. Amphiura canadensis Amphura exigua Amphiura holbolli. See Amphiura sundevalli. Amphiura sundevalli Amphiura squamata. See Amphipholis elegans. Amphiura tenuis. See Amphipholis elegans. Amphorella subulata Amphoriscus thompsoni Anachis costulata. See Anachis haliaeti. Anachis haliaeti Anatina fragilis. See Cochlodesma fragilis. Anatina leana. See Cochlodesma leanum. Anatina papyracea. See Periploma fragilis. Anceus americanus. See Gnathia cerina. Anchorella sp Ancula sulphurea Angulus tener. See Tellina (Angulus)- tenera. Anomalocera patersoni. See Trenaeus patersoni. Anomia aculeata Anomia electrica. See Anomia simplex. Anomia glabra. See Anomia simplex. Anomia psittacea. See Hemithyris psittacea. Anomia simplex Anomia squamula. See Anomia simplex. Anonyx ampulla. See Anonyx nugax. Anonyx appendiculata. See Anonyx nugax. Anonyx edwardsii. See Onisimus edwardsii. Anonyx exiguus ? Anonyx horringli. See Tryphosa horringii. Anonyx lagena. See Anonyx nugax. Anonyx minutus. See Orchomena minutus. Anonyx nobilis. See Anonyx nugax. Anonyx nugax Anonyx pallidus Anonyx politus Anonyx producta. See Anonyx pumilus. Anonyx pumilus Antedon eschrichtii Antedon quadrata Antedon tenella Antennularia antennina Anthea tuediae. See Bolocera tuediae. Anthomastus grandiflorus Anthoptilum grandiflorum Anthothela grandiflora Anthura brachiata. See Calathura brachiata. Antinoe sarsii Apherusa bispinosa Aphrodita aculeata Aphrodita cirrata. See Harmothoe imbricata. Aphrodita imbricata. See Harmothoe imbricata. Aphrodita squamata. See Lepidonotus squamatus. Aphrodite columba. See Serripes groenlandica. Aphrodite minuta. See Pholoe minuta. Aphrodite punctata. See Lepidonotus squamatus. Aplidium despectum Aplidium pallidum. See Amaroucium pallidum. Aporrhais occidentalis Area (-Bathyaroa) glacialis Area minuta. See Leda minuta. Area (Bathyarca) pectunculoides Area pernula. See Leda pernula. Area raridentata. See Area (Bathyarco) pectunculoides. Area rostrata. See Leda pernula. Area tenuis. See Nucula tenuis. Archaster arcticus. See Leptoptychaster arcticus. Archaster florae. See Psilaster florae. Bathymetric Whiteaves’ Tables. Catalogue. 2.37 2.37 2.37 73 2.3 fi 59 2.3 «! 59 236 59 231 232 12 245 ISO 249 245 207 243 115 243 115 250 235 250 234 250 235 250 234 250 2.34 235 43 235 44 2.35 4.3 232 29 234 31 234 34 234 32 237 85 250 2.37 87 254 265 245 177 243 128 243 128 262 DEPARTMEI^T OF THE XAVAL SERVICE Archaster tenuispinus. See Pontaster hebitus. Architeuthis megaptera. See Ommastrephes megapterus. Arcturus baffini Arenicola marina. See Arenicola piscatorum. Arenicola piscatorum Argilloecia sp Argis lar. See Nectocrangon lar. Argulus alosae . . . Argulus fundulus Argulus (spec, undetermined) . . . Aricia quadricuspis (?). See Naidonereis quadricuspida. Arrhoges occidentalis. See Aporrhais occidentalis. Artacama canadensis Artacama proboscoidea Artemisina suberitoides Ascidia callosa. See Ascidia complanata. Ascidia camea. See Halocynthia tuberculum. Ascidia clavata. See Boltenia bolteni. Ascidia complanata • Ascidia echinata. See Halocynthia echinata. Ascidia falcigera Ascidia geometrica. See Chelyosoma geometricum. Ascidia monoceros. See Halocynthia rustica. Ascidia pyriformis. See Halocynthia pyriformis. Ascidia rustica. See Halocynthia rustica. Ascidia tenella. See Ciona tenella. Ascidia tuberculum. See Halocynthia tuberculum. Ascidiopsis complanata. See Ascidia complanata. Ascidiopsis prunum. See Ascidia complanata. Asellodes alta. See Janira alta. Asellus groenlandicus. See Jaera albifrons. Astacilla americana. See Astacilla granulata. Astacilla granulata Astacus groenlandicus. See Spirontocaris groenlandica. Astacus homari. See Amathilla homari. Astarte banksii Astarte banksii var. globosa Astarte banksii var. striata * \ Astarte castanea ! . ! Astarte compressa Astarte crebricostata Astarte crenata Astarte elliptica. See Astarte compressa. Astarte globosa. See Astarte banksii var. globosa. Astarte lactea Astarte lutea. See Astarte undata var. lutea. Astarte portlandica. See Astarte quadrans. Astarte quadrans Astarte semisulcata. See Astarte compressa. Astarte striata. See Astarte banksii var. striata. Astarte subaequilatera. Astarte sulcata. See Astarte undata. Astarte undata Astarte undata var. lutea Asteracanthion albulus. See Stichaster albulus. Asteracanthion berylinus. See Asterias forbesii. Asteracanthion forbesii. See Asterias forbesii. Asteracanthion groenlandicus. See Leptasterias groenlandica. Asteracanthion littoralis. See Leptasterias littoralis. Asteracanthion pallidus. See Asterias vulgaris. Asteracanthion polaris. See Asterias polaris. Asteracanthion rubens. See Asterias vulgaris. Asteracanthion stellionura. See Asterias stellionura. Asterias arenicola. See Asterias forbesii. Asterias aculeata. See Ophiopholis aculeata. Asterias bidentata. See Ophiacantha bidentata. Asterias caput medusae. See Gorgonocephalus eucnemis. .Asterias crispatus. See Ctenodiscus crispatus. Asterias endeca. See Solaster endeca. Asterias enopla Asteria equestris. See Hippasteria phrygiana. Asterias forbesii Asterias gramilaris. See Tosia granularis. Asterias groenlandica. See Leptasterias groenlandica. 1 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 i Bathymetric Whiteavesi Tables. Catalogue.! 250 240 237 77 249 217 249 249 249 216 237 237 37 232 17 254 266 254 267 250 240 243 133 243 134 243 134 243 133 243 130 243 132 t 243 132 i 243 130 243 133 i 243 131 t 243 131 5 235 55 235 54 MA liIXE ly VERTEBRATES 263 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Bathymetric Tables. Asterias littoralis. See Leptasterias littoralis. Asterias militaris. See Pteraster militaris. Asterias oculata. See Cribrella sanguinolenta. Asterias ophiura. See Ophiopholis aculeata. Asterias papposa. See Crossaster pappulus. Asterias phrygiana. See Hippasteria phrygiana. Asterias polaris 235 Asterias sanguinolenta. See Cribrella sanguinolenta. Asterias spongiosa. See Cribrella sanguinolenta. Asterias stellionura 235 Asterias tenella. See Antedon tennella. Asterias tenera. See Leptasterias tenera. Asterias vulgaris 235 Astrogonium granulare. See Tosia granularis. Astrogonium phrygianum. See Hippasteria phrygiana. Astronyx loveni 236 Astropecten arcticus. See Leptoptychaster arcticus. Astrophyton eucnemi®. See Gorgonocephalus eucnemis. Astrophyton lamarckii. See Gorgonocephalus lamarckii. Astrophyton scutatum. See Gorgonocephalus agassizzi. Astyris lunata 245 Astyris rosacea 245 Astyris zonalis 245 Atylus bispinosus. See Halirages bispinosus. Atylus vulgaris. See Pontogeneia inermis Aurelia aurita. See Aurelia flavidula. Aurelia flavidula 232 Auricula bidentata. See Melampus bidentatus. Auricula denticulata. See Alexia myosotis. Auricula myosotis. See Alexia myosotis. Autolytus longisetosus. See Nephthys longisetosa. Axinopsis orbiculata var. inaequalis 243 Axinulus. See Cryptodon. Axinus ferruginosus. See Cryptodon (Axinulus) ferruginosus. Axionice flexuosa. Axiothea catenata 237 Axiothella catenata. See Axiothea catenata. B Balanus balanoides Balanus crenatus Balanus elongatus. See Balanus balanoides. Balanus hameri Balanus improvisus Balanus ovularis. See Balanus balanoides. Balanus porcatus Balanus rugosus. See Balanus crenatus. Balticina finmarchica Barentsia gracilis Barentsia major Bathyarca glacialis. See Area (Bathyarca) glacialis. Bathyarca pectunculoides. See Area (Bathyarca) pectunculoides. Beania admiranda Bela americana. See Bela scalaris. Bela angulosa Bela bicarinata Bela bicarinata var. violacea Bela cancellata. See also Bela sarsii. Bela cancellata Bela cancellata var. canadensis Bela concinnula Bela concinnula var. acuta. See Bela mitrula. Bela decussata Bela exarata. See also Bela concinnula. i! Bela exarata || Bela gouldii I Bela harpularia ; Bela harpularia var. rosea. See Bela rosea. Bela impressa ; Bela incisula I Bela mitrula I Bela nobilis 249 249 249 249 249 234 243 243 240 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 245 Whiteaves’ Catalogue. 55 55 54 62 180 179 ISO 30 13S 75 214 214 215 214 215 35 114 114 94 196 199 199 197 197 194 198 194 196 195 199 198 194 192 264 DEPARTMEXr OF THE XATAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE A. 1918 Bela ping-elii Bela pleurotomaria Bela rosea Bela rugulata. See Bela gouldii. Bela sarsii Bela scalaris Bela turricula. See Bela scalans. Bela woodiana Bernhardus streblonyx. See Eupagurus bernhardus. Beroe cucumis. See Idyia roseola. Beroe ovum. See Mertensia ovum. Beroe pileus. See Pleurobrachia rhododactyla. Bicellaria ciliata Biloculina oblonga Biloculina ringens Bittium alternatum. See Bittium nigrum. Bittium greenii. See Cerithiopsis costulata. Bittium nigrum Bolina alata Bolivina punctata Bolocera tuediae Boltenia bolteni Boltenia bolteni var. rubra Boltenia burkhardti. See Boltenia ciliata. Boltenia ciliata Boltenia clavata. See Boltenia bolteni. Boltenia elegans Boltenia hirsuta. See Halocynthia echinata. Boltenia ovifera. See Boltenia elegans. Boltenia oviformis. See Boltenia bolteni. Boltenia reniformis. See Boltenia bolteni. Boltenia rubra. See Boltenia bolteni. Bopyrus abdominalis. See Phryxus abdominalis. Bopyrus hippolytes. See Gyge hippolytes. Bopyrus mysidum. See Dajus mysidis. Boreoscala groenlandica. See Scalaria groenlandica. Bostrichobranchus pilularis. See Eugyra pilularis. Botrylloides aureum Botryllus (spec, undetermined) Bougainvillia carollinensis Bougainvillia superculiarlis Bowerbankia gracilis var. caudatus Brada granosa Brada granulata Brada sublaevis Brada villosa Bradycinetus sp Briareum arboreum. See Paragorgia arborea. Briareum grandiflorum. See Anthothela gandiflora. Brisinga americana. See Odinia americana. Buccinofusus kroyeri. See Tritonofusus kroyeri. Buccinum boreale. See Buccinum cyaneum. Buccinum carinatum. Sec Buccinum glaciale. Buccinum ciliatum. See also Buccinum gouldii and Buccinum tottenii. Buccinum ciliatum Buccinum cretaceum. See Tritonofusus kroyeri. Buccinum cyaneum Buccinum cyaneum var. patulum Buccinum cyaneum var. perdix (or finmarchianum) Buccinum donovani Buccinum finmarchianum. See Buccinum cyaneum var. perdix (or fin- marchianum). Buccinum glaciale. See also Buccinum donovani. Buccinum glaciale. . . Buccinum gouldii Buccinum groenlandicum. See Buccinum cyaneum. Ruccinum groenlandicum var. finmarchianum. See Buccinum cyaneum var. perdix (or finmarchianum). Buccinum groenlandicum var. patulum. See Buccinum cyaneum var. patulum. Buccinum humphreysianum. See Buccinum cyaneum and Buccinum gouldii. Ruccinum hydrophanum. See Buccinum cyaneum. Buccinum labradorenso. See Buccinum undatum. Bathymetric Whiteaves’ Tables. Catalogue. 245 196 245 199 245 196 245 197 245 193 245 195 240 93 230 10 230 10 245 235 43 230 10 234 41 254 269 254 269 254 270 254 270 254 254 266 232 232 240 237 77 237 237 77 237 249 217 245 1S5 245 1S3 245 1S4 245 1S4 246 187 246 186 246 MA RIXE IXV ERIE BRA TES 265 V SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Buccinum lapillus. See Purpura lapillus. Buccinum lunatum. See Astyris lunata. Buccinum rosaceum. See Astyris rosacea. Buccinum scalariforme. See Buccinum tenue. Buccinum sericatum. See Buccinum cyaneum. Buccinum tenebrosum. See Buccinum cyaneum. Buccinum tenue Buccinum tottenii Buccinum truncatum. See Trophon truncatus. Buccinum tubulosum. See Buccinum donovani. Buccinum undatum Buccinum undulatum. See Buccinum cyaneum and Buccinum undatum. Buccinum zonalis. See Astyris zonalis- Bugula cucullifera Bugula flexilis. See Kinetoskias smittii. Bugula murrayana Bugula umbella. See Kinetoskias arborescens. Bulbus flavus. See Acrybia flava. Bulimina aculeata Bulimina elegantissima Bulimina pyrula Bulla canaliculata. See Tornatina canaliculata. Bulla corticata. See Cylichna alba. Bulla debilis. See Diaphana debilis. Bulla gouldii. See Retusa gouldii. Bulla hiemalis. See Diaphana hiemalis. Bulla hyalina. See Diaphana debilis. Bulla insculpta. See Haminea solitaria. Bulla lineolata. See Philine lima. Bulla nucleola. See Cylichna alba. Bulla obstricta. See Tornatina canaliculata. Bulla occulta. See Cylichna occulta. Bulla pellucida. See Diaphana debilis. Bulla pertenuis. See Retusa pertenuis. Bulla puncto-striata. See Scaphander punctostriatus. Bulla reinhardi. See Cylichna occulta. Bulla solitaria. See Haminea solitaria. Bulla triticea. See Cylichna alba. Bulla velutina. See Telutina laevigata. Bullina canaliculata. See Tornatina canaliculata. Bunodactis Stella. See Cribrina Stella. Bunodes spectabilis. See Cribrina Stella. Bunodes Stella. See Cribrina Stella. Byblis gaimardii Bythocythere turgida Bathymetric Whiteaves’ Tables. Catalogue. 246 184 246 182 246 181 240 240 93 230 10 230 10 230 10 2.50 22.3 249 217 c Caberea ellisii Caberea hookeri. See Caberea ellisii. Caesira canadensis Caesira citrina. See Molgula littoralis. Caesira crystallina. Pera crystallina. Caesira intumescens Caesira littoralis. See Molgula littoralis. Caesira pannosa. See Molgula pannosa. Caesira papillosa. See Molgula papillosa. Caesira producta. See Molgula producta. Caesira retortiformis. See Molgula retortiformis. Daesira septentrionalis ZJalanus finmarchichus 3alanus helgolandicus Calathura brachiata Caligus americanus. See Caligus curtus. Caligus curtus Jaligus rapax Calliope laeviuscula. See Calliopius laeviusculus. -alliopius laeviusculus Talliostoma occidentalis. See Calliostoma occidentale. Halliostoma occidentale Callista convexa. See Cytherea convexa. ^allocardia morrhuana. See Cytherea convexa. Calocaris mcandreae ,-alycella syringa 38a — 18 240 93 ' 254 254 254 249 249 250 242 249 216 249 250 227 246 160 253 257 232 23 I 266 DEPARTME^'T OF THE FATAL SERTICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Calyptraea (Dispotaea) striata. See C.’ucibulum striatum. Campanularia amphora Campanularia caliculata Campanularia flexuosa Campanularia groenlandica Campanularia hincksii Campanularia Integra Campanularia johnstoni. See Clythia johnstoni. Campanularia magnifica Campanularia neglecta Campanularia verticillata Campanularia volubilis Camptonectes groenlandica. See pecton (Oamptonectes groenlandicus. Camptonectes vitreus. See Pecten (Camptonectes) vitreus. Camptonectes (Palliolum) vitreum. See Pecten (Camptonectes) vir- tr^us. Cancellaria buccinoides. See Admete couthouyi. Cancer aculeatus. See Spirontocans groenlandicus. Cancer amaenus Cancer araneus. See Hyas araneus. Cancer bernhardus. See Eupagurus bernhardus. Cancer bipes. Se( Nebalia bipes. Cancer borealis. See also Cancer amaenus. Cancer borealis Cancer irroratus. See Canser amaenus and Cancer borealis. Cancer nugax. See Anonyx nugax. Cancer oculatus. See Mysis oculata. Cancer opilio. See Chionoecetes opilio. Cancer phalangium. See Chionoecetes opilio. Cancer sayi. See Cancer amaenus. Cancer spinus. See Spirontocaris spinus. Canthopsis harvardiensis. See Alderia harvardiensis. Caprella linearis Caprella lobata. See Caprella linearis. Caprella longimanus Caprella robusta. See Caprella stimpsonii. Caprella sanguinea Caprella septentrionalis. See Caprella linearis. Caprella stimpsonii Capulacmaea radiata Capulus radiatus. See Capulacmaea radiata. Cardita borealis. See Venericardia borealis. Cardium (Cerastoderma) ciliatum... Cardium groenlandicum. See Serripes groenlandicus. Cardium islandicum. See Cardium (Cerastoderma) ciliatum. Cardium (Laevicardium) mortoni Cardium (Cerastoderma) pinnulatum . , *’ Caridion gordoni Cassidulina crassa Cassidulina laevigata Catablema vesicaria Caudina arenata , . . . ! . Cellepora annulata. See Cribrilina annulata. Cellepora avicularis Cellepora canaliculata / Cellepora cervicornis. See Escharoides sarsii. Cellepora contigua Cellepora hyalina. See Schizoporella hyalina. Cellepora laevis See Porella laevis. Cellepora nitida. See Schizoporella hyalina. Cellepora ovata. See Rhamphostomella ovata. Cellepora pumicosa Cellepora ramulosa. See Cellepora pumicosa. Cellepora scabra. See Phamphostomella scabra. Cellepora skenei. Sec Porella skenei. Cellepora surcularis. See Porella surcularis. ( ellei)ora verrucosa. See Cellepora pumicosa and P^mbonula verrucosa. Celleporaria incra.ssata. See Porella surcularis. Celleporaria surcularis. See Porella surcularis. Cellularia peachii Cemoria noachina. See Puncturella noachina. Cephalothrix linearis CentroiT)edon ])umilus \ Centroi>agi s hamalus ” Bathymetric Whiteaves Tables. Catalogue r 232 232 232 232 233 233 233 233 233 233 253 253 250 250 251 251 246 243 243 243 253 230 230 233 235 240 240 240 240 241 237 251 249 23 22 22 22 0 9 261 262 219 220 219 220 16S 12S 129 129 255 10 10 47 109 109 109 109 92 68 MA R[XE IX VERTEBRA TES 267 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Bathymetric Tables. Centropages typicus 249 Cerapus fucicula. See Podoceros fucicula. Cerapus rubricornis. See Ericthonius difformis. Cerapus rubiformis. See Ericthonius difformis. Cerastoderma. See Cardium. Ceratoisis ornata 234 Cerebratulus cylindricus 237 Cerebratulus fuscus 237 Cerebratulus luridus 237 Cerebratulus medullatus 237 Cerebratulus melanops 237 Cerebratulus truncatus. See Lineus truncatus. Cerianthus borealis 234 Cerithiella whiteavesii 246 Cerithiopsis costulata 246 Cerithiopsis costulatus. See Cerithiella whitevesil. Cerithiopsis greenii 246 Cerithium arcticum. See Cerithiopsis costulata. Cerithium greenii. See Cerithiopsis greenii. Cerithium reticulatum. See Bittium nigrum. Cerithium sayii. See Bittium nigrum. Ceronia deaurata. See Mesodesma deauratum. Chaetoderma nitidulum 246 Chaetozone setosa 237 Chaetozone setosa var. canadensis 237 Chaetozone whiteavesi 237 Chaetozone sp. ? 237 Chalina oculata 232 Chelyosoma geometricum 2.^4 Chelyosoma macleayanum. See Chelyosoma geometricum. Chemnitzia bisuturalis. See Odostomia bisuturalis. Chemnitzia nivea. See Turbonilla nivea. Chemnitzia semin'uda. See Odostomia seminuda. Chionoecetes opilio 253 Chirodota laevis 235 Chiridotea coeca 251 Chiridotea tuftsii 251 Chirodota oolitica. See Trobhostoma coliticum. Chiroteuthis lacertosa 248 Chiton albus. See Trachydermon albus. Chiton alveolus. See Lepidopleurus alveolus. Chiton cancellatus. See Lepidopleurus cancellatus. Chiton cinereus. See Trachydermon ruber. Chiton emersonii. See Amicula vestita. Chiton fulminatus. See Tonicella marmorea. Chiton marmoreus. See Tonicella marmorea. Chiton mendicarius. See Hanleyia mendicaria. Chiton ruber. See Trachydermon ruber. Chiton vestitus. See Amicula vestita. Chlamys (Placopecten) clintonius. See Pecten (Placopecten) magellanicus. Chlamys ( Aequipecten) irradians. See Pecten gibbus var. borealis. Chlamys islandica. See Pecten (Chlamys) islandicus. Chondractinia nodosa 234 Chrondrocanthus cornutus 249 Chrondrocanthus merlucii 249 Chone duneri 237 Chone cf. fauveli 237 Chone infundibuliformis 237 Chone princei 237 Chone sp 237 Chrysodomus spitzbergensis. See Sipho spitzbergensis. Cingula (Onoba) aculeus 246 Cingula arenaria 246 Cingula (Alvania) areolata 246 Cingula carinata 246 Cingula (Alvania) castanea 246 Cingula globulus 24 6 Cingula (Alvanea) .ian -meyeni 246 Cingula minuta 246 Cingula multilineata 246 Cingula semicostata. See Cingula carinata. Ciona intestinalis. See Ciona tenella. Ciona tenella 254 Cirolana borealis 251 38a— 18i Whi leaves’ Catalogue. 32 67 67 68 68 36 176 176 176 153 15 267 261 47 238 238 210 38 72 171 170 170 170 171 169 171 169 170 .267 268 DEPARTMENT OF THE NA VAL SERVICE Ci rol a n a con ch a r u m Cirolana polita Cirratulus cirrata. See Cirratulus cirrhatus. Cirratulus cirrhatus Cistenides granulata Cistenides hyperborea Cladocavpus cornutus. See Aglaophenopsis cornuta. Cladocarpus pourtalesii Cladocarpus speciosus Cladorhiza abyssicola Cladorhiza grandis Cladorhiza nordenskioldii Clathria delicata Clava leptostyla Clava niulticornis. See Clava leptostyla. Clavelina chrystallina. See Pera crystallina. Clidiophora gouldiana. . Clio borealis. See Clione limacina. Clio limacina. See Clione limacina. Clio retusa. See Clione limacina. Cliona celata Clione limacina Clione miquelonensis. See Clione limacina. Clione papilionacea. See Clione limacina. Clymene lumbricalis. See Nicomache lumbricalis. Clymene mulleri. See Praxilla mulleri. Clymene torquata. See Clymenella torquata. Clymenella torquata Clytia bicophora. See Clytia johnstoni. Clytia johnstoni Clytia noliformis Clytia (Orthopyxis) poterium. See Campanularia caliculata. Clytia volubilis. See Clythia johnstoni. Cochlodesma leanum Codonella lagenuia Codonel’.a ventricosa Columbella dissimilis. See Astyris zonalis. Columbella haliaeti. See Anachis haliaeti. Columbella lunata. See Astyris lunata Columbella rosacea. See Astyris rosacea. Conilei-a polita. See Cirolana polita. I'ornulariella modesta Cornuspira foliacea Coronula diadema Coronula regina Corymorpha glacialis. See Monocaulus glacialis. Corymorpha nutans. See Monocaulus glacialis. Corymorpha pendula. See Monocaulus glacialis. Corynoporella tenuis Coryne gravata. See Syncoryne mirabilis. Coryne mirabilis. See Syncoryne mirabilis. Coryphella diveisa .. Coryjiliella mananensis iloryphella stimpsoni Couthouyella striatula. See Menestho striatula. Crago septemspinosus. See Crangon vulgaris. Crangon norvegicus. See Pontophilus norvegicus. Ci-angon septemcarinatus. See Sabinea septemcarinata. Crangon vulgaris Craniella cranium Crassina elliptica. See Astarte compressa. Crassina latisulca. See Astarte undata. Ci-assina depressa. See Astarte crebricostata. Crassina striata. See Astarte banksii var. striata. Crassivenus mercenaria. See Venus mercenaria. Crenella decussata Crenella faba Crenella glandula Crenella i)ectinula Crepidula convexa Crepi0 Cythere emarginata 2.')0 Cythere leioderma 2.50 Cythere limicola 250 Cythere lutea 250 Cythere pellucida 250 Cythere tuberculata 250 Cythere villosa 250 Whit eaves’ Catalogue. 53 53 98 97 39 110 109 110 10 10 10 52 169 138 137 138 137 137 48 141 147 147 147 24 30 202 203 217 130 150 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 270 DErAUTMEyT OF THE AJAYAL EERY WE Cythere whitei Cytherea convexa Cytherea say ana. See Cytherea convexa. Cytherea sayii. See Cytherea convexa. Cytheridea (?) elongata Cytheridea papillosa Cytheridea punctillata Cytheridea sorbyana Cytherideis foveolata Cytheropteron angulatum Cytheropteron arcuatum Cytheropteron nodosum Cytheropteron vespertillo Cytherura (?) concentrica Cytherura (?) cristata Cytherura (?) pumila Cytherura (?) sarsii Cytherura (?) undata . Cyttarocyclis denticulata 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Bathymetr Tables. 250 243 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 231 Whiteaves’ Catalogue. 217 136 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 D Dacrydium vitreum Dajus mysidis Defrancia exarata. See Bela exarata. Defrancia lucernaria. See Discofascigera lucernaria. Defrancia nobilis. See Bela nobilis. Defrancia pingelii. See Bela pingelii. Defrancia scalaris. See Bela scalaris. Defrancia woodiana. See Bela woodiana. Dendrodoa aggregata var. pulchella Dendrodoa carnea Dendrodoa grossularia Dendronotus arborescens Dendronotus robustus Dendronotus reynoldsii. See Dendronotus arborescens. Dendronotus velifer. See Dendronotus robustus. Dentalium abyssorum. See Dentalium occidentale. Dentalium agile Dentalium dentate. See Dentalium occidentale. Dentalium dentalis. See Dentalium occidentale. Dentalium entalis Dentalium lobatum. See Siphonodentalium lobatum. Dentaliuni vitreum. See Siphonodentalium lobatum. Dentalium occidentale Desmacella peachii var. groenlandica Desmacidon (Homaeodictya) palmata Desmophyllum nobile Dexamine bispinosa. See Halirages bispinosus. Diadora noachina. See Puncturella noachina. Diaphana debilis Diaphana hiemalis Diaphana nitidula. See Retusa nitidula. Diaphana pertenuis. See Retusa pertenuis. Dias longiremis Diastopora obelia Diastopora patina DiastylivS goodsiri ,. . Diastylis luciferus Diastylis politus Diastylis Quadrispinosus Diastylis rathkii i >iastylopsis (?) resima Diastylis sc'orpioides. Diastylis sculptus Dicoryne flexuosa Dihtyocha aculeata. See Distephanus aculeatus. Didemnopsis tenerum Diphasia fallax Diphasia mirabilis Diphasia losacea 1 )i|)hyoj)sis camj)anulifera Discofascigera lucernaria Discopora liispida. See Lichenopora hispida. 243 120 251 236 254 254 254 246 206 246 206 245 152 245 152 245 152 232 17 232 17 234 42 246 202 246 202 249 242 112 242 112 27,2 252 244 252 246 252 245 252 244 252 252 245 252 233 19 254 233 26 233 26 233 26 233 242 113 }JA IfIXE IXTEirrEIiRA TES 271 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Discopora skenei. See Porella skenei. Discopora veri’ucosa. See Umbonula verrucosa. Discoporella clypeiformis. See Lichenopora clypeiformis. Discoporella hispida. See Lichenopora hispida. Dispotaea. See Crucibulum. Distephanus speculum var. regularis Distephanus aculeatus Doris arborescens. See Dendronotus arboressceiis. Doris coronata. See Doto coronata. Doris illuminate. See Polycera lessonii. Doris pallida. See Onchidoris pallida. Doris papillosa. See ^olis papillosa. Doris plaiiulata Doto coronata Doto formosa Drepanophorus lankesteri Drilonereis canadensis Duasmodactyla producta. See Thyonidium productum. Dulichia porrecta £ ] Ebria tripartita Echinarchnius atlanticus. See Echinarachnius parma. Ecliinarachnius parma • Echinaster oculatus. See Cribrella sanguinolenta. Echinaster sanguinolentus. See Cribrella sanguinolenta. Echinus drobachiensis. See Strongylocentrotus drobachiensis. Echinus granularis. See Strongylocentrotus drobachiensis. Echinus granulatus. See Strongylocentrotus drobachiensis. Echinus neglectus. See Strongylocentrotus drobachiensis. Edotea montosa. See Epelys montosus. Edwardsia farinacea Edwardsia sipunculoides Electra catenularia Electra pilosa Enonella bicarinata Ensatella americana. See Ensis directus. Ensis americanum. See Ensis directus. Ensis directus Entalis striolata. See Dentalium entalis. Eolis diversa. See Coryphella diversa. Eolis mananensis. See Coryphella mananensis. Eolis purpurea. See .^olis purpurea. Eolis stellata. See .®olis stellata. Epelys montosus Ephesia gracilis Ephesia sp Epigonactis fecunda Epimeria coniger. See Epimeria lonicata. Bpimeria cornigera. See Epimeria loricata. Epimeria loricata Epitonium groenlandicum Epizoanthus americanus. See Epizoanthus incrustatus. Epizoanthus cancrisocius. See Epizoanthus incrustatus. Epizoanthus incrustatus Epizoanthus paguriphilus Erentho smitti Erichthonius rubrioornis. See Erichthonius dif¥ormis. Ericthonius difformis Eschara elegantula. See Porella elegantula. li Eschara laevis. See Porella laevis. Eschara lobata. See Escharoides sarsii. [Eschara palmata. See Plustra solida. Eschara pavonella. See Mucronella pavonella. Eschara papposa. See Porella elegantula var. papposa. Eschara rosacea. See Escharoides sarsii. Eschara sarsii. See Escharoides sarsii. (Eschara scabra. See Rhamphostomella scabra. Escharella porifera. See Smittia arctica. {Escharipora annulata. See Cribrilina annulata. !Escharoides coccinea var. peachii. See Mucronella peachii. Escharoides sarsii Escharopsis lobata. See Escharoides sarsii. Bathymetric Whiteaves Tables. Catalogue. 231 231 11 246 207 246 204 24 6 204 237 66 238 2.51 220 231 236 63 234 37 234 37 241 96 241 95 238 88 243 143 251 240 238 78 238 234 39 251 227 243 ■ 235 36 235 36 238 251 221 241 102 272 BEPARTME'S^T OF THE NATAL SERVICE Esperella lingua Esperella modesta Eteone cylindrica Euchaeta marina Euohone (?) lawrencii Euchone rubrocincta Euchone tuberculosa . Eucope alternata. See Obelia geniculata. Eucope diaphana. See Obelia geniculata. Eucopella caliculata. See Campanularia caliculata. ?Eucranta villosa. See Eupolynoe occidentalis. Eucy there argus ICudendrium capillare Eudendrium cingulatum Eudendrium dispar Eudendrium rameum Eudendrium ramosum Eudendrium tenue Eudorella emarginata Eudorella hispida Eudorella Integra Eudorella pusilla Eudorellopsis Integra. See Eudorella Integra. Eugyra glutinans Eugyra pilularis Eulima stenostoma Eumastia sitiens Eumenia crassa Eunepbthya glomerata. See Eunepthya lutkeni. Eunepthya lutkeni Eunice sp. Euniceoerstedii Eunice vivida. See Leodice vivida. Eunoa nodosa Eunoa oerstedii Eunoa spinulosa Eupagurus bernhardus Eupagurus kroyeri Eupagurus pubescens Euphrosyne borealis Eupolynoe amticostiensis l*]upolynoe occidentalis Eupyrgus scaber Euryale scutatum. See Gorgonocephalus agassizzi. Eurycope robusta Euryecbinus drobachiensis. See Strongylocentrotus drobachiensis. !^'u) ytemora herdmani Eusirus cuspidatus h^usyllis tubifex Euthemisto bispinosa Euthemisto compressa Euthemisto libellula Evadne noi’dmanni Evadne vspinifera F Fasciola angulata. See Amphiporus angulatus. Fasciola rosea. See Amphiporus roseus. Fasciolaria ligata. See Ptychatractus ligatus. Fasciporina flexuosa Filellum expansum Filellum serpens Filograna filograna Flabelligera afhnis FlaV)ellum angulare Flabellurn goodei Flustra ahyssicola Flustra borealis l"''lustra carbasea Flustra digitata. See Flustra carbasea. Flustra ellisii. See Caberea ellisii. Flustra hispida. See Flustrella hispida. Flustra membranaceo-truncata Flustra papyrea. See Flustra carbasea. Flustra i)ilosa. See Electra pilosa. h'lustra securifi'ons 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Bathymetric Whiteaves Tables. Catalogue. 232 16 232 16 238 81 249 238 238 238 250 217 233 20 233 20 233 20 233 19 233 19 233 20 252 243 252 244 252 244 252 244 254 271 254 271 246 163 232 15 238 78 235 32 238 238 80 238 86 238 86 238 86 253 258 253 259 253 259 238 88 238 . 85 238 85 235 46 251 238 249 251 225 238 81 251 219 251 251 219 248 248 242 113 233 233 238 238 235 41 235 41 241 95 241 94 241 95 241 94 241 MARIXE IXYERTEBRArES 273 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Bathymetric Tables. Flustra serrulata 241 Flustra solida 241 Flustra trifolium. See Membranipora trifolium. Flustra truncata. See Bugula murrayana. Flustrella hispida 243 Flustrimorpha solida. See Flustra solida. Fovia affinis 236 Freyella americana. See Odinia americana. Funiculina armata 23.5 Fusus bamffius. See Trophon truncatus. Fusus cancellatus. See Bela cancellata. Fusus cinereus. See Urosalpinx cinerea. Fusus corneus. See Sipho stimpsoni. Fusus curtus. See Sipho stimpsoni. Fusus decemcostatus. See Neptunea decemcostata. Fusus harpularius. See Bela harpularia. Fusus islandicus. See Sipho stimpsoni. Fusus islandicus var. pygmaeus. See Sipho pygmaeus. Fusus kroyeri. See Tritonofusus kroyeri. Fusus latericeus. See Tritonofusus latericeus. Fusus (Volutopsius) norvegicus. See Volutopsis norvegica. Fusus pleurotomarius. See Bela pleurotomaria. Fusus pygmaeus. See Sipho pygmaeus. Fusus rufus. See Bela pleurotomaria. Fusus scalariformis. See Trophon clathratus. Fusus spitzbergensis. See Sipho spitzbergensis. Fusus stimpsoni. See Sipho stimpsoni. Fusus syrtensis. See Tritonofusus syrtensis. Fusus tornatus. See Neptunea despecta var. tornata. Fusus turricula. See Bela scalaris. Fusus ventricosus. See Sipho ventricosus. G <4alericulum undatum. See Velutina (Limneria) undata. Gammaracanthus macrophthalmus 251 Gammarus dentatus. See Melita dentata. Gammarus locusta 251 Gammarus macrophthalmus. See Gammaracanthus macrophthalmus. Gammarus mutatus. See Gammarus locusta. Gammarus ornatus. See Gammarus locusta. Gammarus pulex. See Gammarus locusta. Gammarus purpuratus. See Mehta dentata. Gammarus sabini. See Amathilla homari. Gattyana amondseni. See Nychia amondseni. Gattyana cirrhosa. See Nychia cirrhosa. Gellius arcoferus 232 Gellius flagellifer 232 Gellius laurentinus 232 Gemellaria dumosa. See Gemellaria loricata var. americana. Gemellaria loricata 241 Gemellaria loricata var. americana -241 Gemellaria willisii. See Gemellaria loricata. Gemma gemma. See Tottenia gemma. Gemma totteni. See Tottenia gemma. Glandula arenicola 254 Glandula fibrosa 254 Glandula mollis 254 Globigerina aequilateralis. 230 Glycera capitata. See Rh3'nchobolus capitatus. Glj'cera dibranchiata 238 Glj'cera siphonostoma 238 Glj'cera viridescens. See Goniada maculata. Glj'cimeris arctica. See Panopaea (Panomya) norvegica. Gb’cimeris siliqua. See Cyrtodaria siliqua. Gnathia cerina 251 Gonatus fabricii 248 Goniada maculata 238 Goniada norvegica 238 Goniaster equestris. See Hippasteria phrygiana. Gonothyraea gracilis 233 Gonothyraea loveni 233 Gorgonia lepadifera. See Primnoa reseda. Whiteaves' Catalogue. 95 95 114 64 34 223 223 16 16 16 91 92 267 267 267 242 210 79 274 DEPARTMEyT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE Gorgonia reseda. See Primnoa reseda. Gorgonocephalus agassizii Gorgonocephalus eucnemis Gorgonocephalus lamarckii Grammaria abietina Grammaria gracilis Grammaria robusta. See Grammaria abietina. Grantia canadensis tJrymaea spiralis.. Gyge hippolytes * .. .. H Halcyonium carneum. See Alcyonium carneum. Halecium beani Halecium halecinum Halecium minutum Halecium muricatum Halecium robustum. See Lafoea robusta. Halecium sessile Halecium tenellum Halichondria incrustans. See Myxilla incrustans. Halichondria panicea Halichondria ventilabrum. See Phakellia ventilabrum. Haliclystus auricula. See Halyclystus auricula. Halirages bispinosus Halirages fulvocinctus Halocynthia echinata Halocynthia pyriformis Halocynthia rustica Halocynthia tuberculum Halophila borealis. See Flustra borealis. Halyclystus auricula Haminea solitaria Hanleyia mendicaria Haploops setosa Haploops tubicola Haplophragmium canariense Haplophragmium cassis Harmothoe imbricata Harpacticus chelifer. . . Harpinia fusiformis Helix haliotoides. See Velutina laevigata. Helix laevigata. See Velutina laevigata. Hemeschara struma. See Porella struma. Hemimactra solidissima. See Spisula (Hemimactra) solidissima. Hemithyris psittacea Henricia sanguinolenta. See Cribrella sangiiinolenta. Hetairus debilis . Hetairus gaimardii. See Spirontocaris gaimardii. Hetairus tenuis Hetarofusus balea. See Limacina gouldii. Heterofusus retroversus. See Limacina gouldii. Heteronereis arctica. See Nereis (Lycoris) pela,gica. Heteropia rodgeri Heteroteuthis tenera. See Rossia (?) tenera. Hippasteria i)lana. See Hippasteria phrygiana. Hippasteria phrygiana Hippocrepina indivisa Hijtpolyte aculeata. See Spirontocaris groenlandicus. Hippolyte fabricii Hippolyte gaimardii. See Spirontocaris gaimardii. Jlil)polyte gordoni. See Caridion gordoni. Hippolyte groenlandica. See Spirontocaris groenlandicus. Hil)polyte macilenta TTippolyte phippsii. See Spirontocaris turgida. Hippolyte polaris. See Spirontocaris polaris. liippolyte projecta Hippolyte pusiola. See Spirontocaris pusiola. Hippolyte securifrons. See Spirontocaris spinus. Hippolyte sowerbaei. See Spirontocaris spinus. Hiiu)olyte sowerbyi. See Spirontocaris siiinus. Hippolyte spinus. See Spirontocaris spinus. Hippolyte turgida. See Spirontocaris turgida 8 GEORGE Bathymetric Tables. 236 236 236 233 233 232 238 251 233 233 233 233 233 233 232 251 ? >1 254 254 254 254 233 246 246 251 251 230 230 238 249 251 240 253 253 232 236 230 253 253 253 ^ A. 1918 Whiteaves’ Catalogue. 62 61 62 28 28 12 73 236 24 25 25 15 226 226 268 268 268 269 29 201 154 223 222 10 10 ■ 84 231 91 253 252 12 50 10 249 249 250 MA laXE IXYERTEBUA TES 275 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Hippothoa borealis. See Hippothoa divaricata. Hippothoa catenularia. See Electra catenularia. Hippothoa divaricata Hippothoa divaricata var. expansa. See Hippothoa expansa. Hippothoa expansa Hippothoa hyalina. See Schizoporella hyalina. Hippothoa rugosa. See Electra catenularia. Histioteuthis collinsii Holothuria frondosa. See Pentacta frondosa. Holothuria laevis. See Chirodota laevis. Holothuria pellucida. See Thyonidium pellucidum. Holothuria phantapus. See Psolus phantapus. Holothuria priapus. See Priapulus caudatus? Holothuria squamata. See Lophothuria fabricii. Holozoa clavata Homarus americanus Hornera borealis. See Hornera lichenoides^ Hornera lichenoides Hyale littoralis Hyas araneus Hyas coarctatus Hydractinia echinata Hydractina polyclina. See Hydractinia echinata. Hydrallmania falcata Hydrobia minuta. See Cingula ininuta. Hymeniacidon lingue. See Esperella lingua. Hyperia medusarum. See Hyperoche medusarum. Hyperia oblivia. See Parathemisto oblivia. Hyperoche medusarum Hypothyris psittacea. See Hemithyris psittacea. I lanthina fragilis Idmonea atlantica Idmonea serpens Idmonea pruinosa. See Idmonea atlantica. Tdotaea marmorata. See Synidotea bicuspida. Idotea bicuspida. See Synidotea bicuspida. Tdotea coeca. See Chiridotea coeca. Idotea irrorata. See Idotea marina. Idotea marina Idotea montosa. See Epelys montosus, Idotea phosphorea Idotea robusta Idotea tuftsii. See Chiridotea tuftsii. Idothea baltica. See Idotea marina. Idothea metallica. See Idotea robusta. Idothea nodulosa. See Synidotea nodulosa. Idyia roseola Illex illecebrosus Ilyanassa obsoleta. See Nassa (Ilyanassa) obsoleta. lophon chelifer • • Iphimedia vulgaris. See Pontogeneia inermis. Irenaeus patersoni Isias clavipes Issa lacera Ischnochiton (Trachydermon) albus. See Trachydermon albus. Ischnochiton ruber. See Trachydermon ruber. Isocirrus? J Jaera albifrons Jaera copiosa. See Jaera albifrons. Jaera nivalis. See Jaera albifrons. Jaminia exigua. See Odostomia bisuturalis. Jaminia seminuda_ See Odostomia seminuda. Janira alta ’ Janira spinosa K Kellia ferruginosa. See Cryptodon (Axinulus) ferruginosus. Kellia suborbicularis Bathymetric Whiteaves’ Tables. Catalogue. 241 100 241 101 24S 209 2.") 4 2.J.3 255 242 112 2r,i 235 2.") 3 260 2.t3 260 233 21 233 27 251 21S 246 164 242 111 242 111 2.")1. 238 2.')1 239 251 239 23.1 43 248 210 232. 17 249 217 249 246 206 238 2.11 237 2.11 251 237 237 243 138 276 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE Kennerlia glacialis Keratoisis ornata. See Ceratoisis ornata. Kinetoskias arborescens Kinetoskias flexilis. See Kinetoskias smittii. Kinetoskias (Bugulopsis) flexilis. See Kinetoskias smittii. Kinetoskias smittii Kinnetoskias arborescens. See Kinetoskias arborescens. Krithe (Ilyobates) bartonensis Labiclocera aestiva Lacuna divaricata^ See Lacuna vincta. Lacuna glacialis Lacuna neritoidea Lacuna vincta Laenilla glabra. Laetmonice armata Laetmonice filicornis Laetmonice producta var. assimilis Laevicardium mortoni. See Cardium (Laevicardium) mortoni, Lafoea dumosa Lafoea fruticosa Hincks. See Lafoea gracillima. Lagoea fruticosa Sars Lafoea gracillima Lafoea pygmaea Lafoea robusta .. .. Lafoea symmetrica Lafystus sturionis Lagena apiculata Lagena distoma Lagena globosa Lagena laevis Lagena marginata. Lagena melo Lagena ornata Lagena semistriata Lagena squamosa Lagena striatopunctata Lagena sulcata Lagenipora spinulosa 1.. agi.sca rarispina'. Lagisca rarispina var_ occidentalis 1.. amellaria perspicua.’ See Marsenina glabra. Lamellidoris muricata. See Onchidoris muricata. Lamellidoris pallida. See Onchidoris pallida. Lamprops quadriplicata Lanassa nordenskioldi Laomedea amphora. See Campanularia flexuosa. Laomedea flexuosa See Campanularia flexuosa. (?) Laomedea gelatinosa. See Obelia commissuralis. Leachia granulata. See Astacilla granulata. Leaena abranchiata Leanira tetragona Leanira yhleni T..eda buccata. See Leda pernula var. jacksonii. Tjeda jacksonii. See Leda pernula var. jacksonii_ 1.. eda limatula. See Yoldia limatula. Leda minuta Leda myalis. See Yoldia myalis. ?Leda obesa. See Yoldiella lucida. Leda pernula Leda pernula var. jacksonii Leda (Yoldia) sapotilla. See Yoldia sapotilla Leda tenuisulcata '. 1.. cie.schara coarctata. See Myriozoum coarctatum. T..eieschara subgracile. See Myriozoum subgracile. T.,eodice vivida T.,epas balanoides See Balanus balanoides. Lepas fascicularis T>e])as fasciculatus. See Lepas fascicularis. 1.. ei)as hillii 1.. ei)eophtheirus hii)poglOvSsi Lei)eoi)htheirus salmonis Lepeta caeca. 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Bathymetric Whiteaves’ Tables. Catalogue. 243 144 241 94 241 94 250 217 249 246 174 246 173 246 173 238 87 238 87 238 87 233 24 233 233 24 233 233 24 233 251 277 230 10 230 10 230 10 230 10 230 10 230 10 231 10 231 10 231 10 231 10 231 10 241 98 238 85 238 86 252 238 238 238 S4 238 84 243 121 243 124 243 125 243 125 238 79 249 214 249 249 249 246 155 .17 A RIS E ly VERTEBRATES 277 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a L Jjepidonote cirrata. ^j'ee Ilarmotlioe imbricata. Lepiclonote punctata. See Lepiclonotus squamatus. Lepiclonotus squamatus Lepidopleurus alveolus Lepidopleurus cancellatus Lepralia abyssicola. See Mucronella abyssicola^ Lepralia annulata. See Cribrilina annulata. Lepralia bella. See Porella bella. Lepralia belli. See Porella concinna. Lepralia Candida. See Smittia Candida^ Lepralia concinna. See Porella concinna. Lepralia crassispina. See Porella skenei. Lepralia globifera. See Smittia globifera. Lepralia hippopus Lepralia byalina. See Schizoporella hyalina. Lepralia labiata. See Rhamphostomelia scabra var^ labiata. Tiepralia landsborovii. See Smittia landsborovii. Lepralia linearis. See Schizoporella linearis. Lepralia lineata. See Schizoporella linearis. Lepralia (Discopora) megastoma Lepralia minuta. See Porella minuta. Lepralia peachii. See Mucronella peachii Lepralia pertusa Lepralia plana. See Myriozoum planum. Lepralia producta. See Smittia producta. Lepralia punctata. See Cribrilina punctata. Lepralia spathulifera Lepralia trispinosa. See Smittia trispinosa_ Lepralia tubulosa. See Porina tubulosa. Lepralia ventricosa. See Mucronella ventricosa. Lepralia verrucosa. See Umbonula verrucosa. Lepralia vitrea. See Cellepora contigua. Leptasterias groenlandica Leptasterias littoralis Leptasterias tenera Leptocheirus pinguis lieptochelia fllum Leptochiton alveolus. See Lepidopleurus adveolus Leptochiton cancellatus. See Lepidopleurus cancellatus. Leptoclinides faeroensis Leptoclinum albidum Leptoclinum albidum var. luteolum Leptoclinum luteolum. See Leptoclinum albidum var. luteolum. Leptoplana ellipsoides Leptoptychaster arcticus Leptothoe danae. See Maera danae. Lernaea branchialis Lernaea branchialis var_ sigmoidea. See Lernaea branchialis. Lesaea minuta. See Turtonia minuta. Lestoteuthis fabricii. See Gonatus fabricii. Leucon nasicoides Leucon nasicus Leucosolenia cancellata Leucothoe glacialis. See Metopa glacialis. Leucothoe grandimanus Libinia emarginiata Lichenopora clypeiformis Lichenopora hispida Lichenopora regularis Lichenopora verrucaria Lima subauriculata. See Limatula subauriculata. Lima sulcata. See Limatula subauriculata^ Limacina gouldii " Limatula subauriculata Limax papillosus. See ^Eolis papillosa. Limneria undata. See Velutina (Limneria) undata. Limnoria lignorum Limnoria terebrans.' See Limnoria lignorum. Lineus sanguineus Lineus socialis Lineus truncatus Lineus viridis Linkia oculata. See Cribrella sanguinolenta. Linkia pertusa See Cribrella sanguinolenta. Bathymetric Whiteaves' Tables. Catalogue. 23S 86 24t> 1.54 246 153 241 101 241 102 241 101 241 101 236 56 236 56 236 56 251 225 251 242 254 254 265 254 265 236 63 236 49 249 216 252 243 252- 243 232 11 251 253 232 242 113 242 112 242 113 242 113 248 208 243 119 251 241 237 66 237 66 237 67 237 66 278 DEPARTMENT OF THE NATAL SERVICE Liocardium mortoni. See Cardium (Laevicardium) mortoni. Liocyma fluctuosa Liostomia eburnea Lisseclinum aureum Liithodes maia Litorina litorea Litorina palliata Litorina rudis Littorina arctica. See Litorina palliata. Littorina groenlandica. See Litorina rudis. Littorina littoralis. See Litorina palliata. Littorina littorea. See Litorina litorea. Littorina palliata. See Litorina palliata. Littorina rudis. See Litorina rudis. Littorina tenebrosa. See Litorina rudis. Littorinella minuta. See Cingula minuta. Lizzia octopunctata. Lobularia rubiforme. See Alcyonium rubiforme. Loligo illecebrosa. See Illex illecebrosus. Lophaster furcifer Lophohelia oculifera Lophothuria fabricii Lottia testudinalis. See Acmaea testudinalis. Lovenella whiteavesii. See Cerithiella whiteavesii. Loxoconcha sp Lucernaria auricula. See Manania auricula. Lucernaria phrygia. See Myriothela phrygia. Lucernaria quadricornis 1.. ucina flexuosa. See Cryptodon gouldii. Lucina gouldii. See Cryptodon gouldii. Lumara flava. See Thelepus cincinnatus. Lumbricoclymene sp Lumbriconereis cf. assimilis Lumbriconereis fragilis Lumbriconeris fragilis. See Lumbriconereis fragilis. Lumbricus cirratus. See Cirratulus cirrhatus. Lumbricus fragilis. See Lumbriconereis fragilis. Lumbrinereis fragilis. See Lumbriconereis fragilis. Lumbrinereis bebes I>unatia groenlandica Lunatia h^ros Lunatia heros var. triseriata. Lunatia immaculata T..unatia nana Lunatia triseriata. See Lunatia heros var. triseriata. Lupa pelagica. See Neptunus sayi. Lycoris See Nereis. Lyonsia arenosa Lyonsia hyalina .. .. Lysianassa appendiculata. See Anonyx nugax. Lysianassa spinifera. See Lysianax spinifera. Lysianax spinifera 1.. ysianop«is alba 1.. ytocarpus myriophyllum. See Thecocarpus myriophyllum. 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Bathymetric Whiteaves’ Tables. Catalogue. . 243 136 246 163 254 253 260 246 172 246 172 246 172 236 235 42 235 45 250 217 233 29 238 238 238 80 238 80 246 165 246 165 246 166 246 165 247 165 244 145 244 145 251 233 251 M Machaera costata. See Siliqua costata. Machaera nitida. See Siliqua squama. Machaera squama. See Siliqua squama. Machaeroplax bella. See Solariella obscura var. bella. Machaeroplax obscui-a. See Solariella obscura. Machaeroplax obscura var. bella. See Solariella obscura var. bella. Machaeroplax varicosa. See Solariella varicosa. Macoma balthica 244 Macoma balthica fu.sca. See Macoma balthica. Macoma calcarea Macoma fragilis. See Macoma balthica. Macoma fu.sca. See INIacoma balthica. Macoma inflata Macoma i)roxima. See Macoma calcarea. Macoma sabulosa. See Macoma calcarea. IVIacoma tenera. See Macoma calcarea, Macroclinum i)omuin 141 142 143 254 .l/.i RIXE IXTERTEBRA TES 279 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Bathymetric Tables. Mactra deaurata. See Mesoclesma deauratum. Mactra gigantea. See Spisula (Hemimactra) solidissima. Mactra lateralis. See Mulinia lateralis. Macti^a ovalis. See Spisula (Hemimactra) polynyma. Mactra polynyma. See Spisula (IHemimactra ) polynyma. Mactra ponderosa. See 'Spisula (Hemimactra) solidissima and S. polynyma. Mactra similis. See 'Spisula (Hem'imactra) solidissima and iS. polynyma. Mactra solidissima. See Spisula (Hemimactra) solidissima. Mactra tellinoides. See Cumingia tellinoides. Madrepora verucaria. See Lichenopora verrucaria. Maera danae 251 Maera sp 251 Maldane sarsii 233 Malmgrenia whiteavesii 238 Mamma (?) immaculata. See Lunatia immaculata Mammillifera incrustata. See Epizoanthus incrustatus. Manania auricula 233 Mangelia pyramidalis. See Bela pleurotomaria. Margarita acuminata . 247 Margarita alabastrum. See Calliostoma occidentale. Margarita arctica. See Margarita helicina. Margarita argentata. See Margarita olivacea Margarita bella. See Solariella obscura var. bella. Margarita campanulata. See Margarita helicina. Margarita cinerea 247 Margarita cinerea var. grandis 247 Margarita costulata. See Molleria costulata. Margarita glauca. See Margarita olivacea. 247 Margarita groenlandica. See Margarita undulata. Margarita helicina 247 ^Margarita obscura. See Solariella obscura. Margarita olivacea 247 :\Iargarita striata. See Margarita cinerea. Margarita striata. See Margarita undulata. Margarita umbilicalis 247 Margarita undulata 247 Margarita varicosa. See Solariella varicosa. Margarites undulatus. See Margarita undulata. Marsenina glabra 247 ^Marsenina groenlandica. See Marsenina glabra. ^Mayerella limicola 251 Meckelia olivacea. See Cerebratulus fuscus. Medusa aequorea. See Polycanna groenlandica. Medusa aurita. See Aurelia flavidula. Medusa capitata. See Cyanea arctica. Medusa digitale See Trachyneme digitale. Meganyctiphanes norvegica. See Nyctiphanes norvegica. Megayoldia thraciaeformis 244 Melampus bidentatus 247 Melampus corneus. See Melampus bidentatus. Melampus lineatus .247 Melania rufa. See Turbonilla interrupta var. fulvocincta. Melicertum campanula 233 Melinna cristata 238 Melita dentata 251 Melita goesii 251 Melphidippa sp 251 Membranipora armifera. See Membra nipora sophiae var. armifera. Membranipora craticula 241 Membanipora cymbiformis 241 Membranipora dumerilii 241 Membranipora flemingii 241 Membranipora flemingii var. trifolium. See Membranipora trifolium. Membranipora flemingii var. minax^ See Ramphonotus minax. Membranipora lacroixii 241 Membranipora lineata 241 Membranipora minax. See Ramphonotus minax. Membranipora monostachys 241 Membranipora pilosa. See Electra pilosa. Membranipora sacculata. See Membranipora trifolium. Membranipora solida. See Membranipora trifolium, Membranipora sophiae 241 Membranipora sophiae var. armifera 241 Membranipora spinifera 241 Membranipora trifolium 241 Whiteaves’ Catalogue. 224 224 75 85 30 158 159 159 157 158 158 15S 159 167 127 207 74 224 224 225 96 96 96 97 96 96 97 97 280 DEPAETME'NT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE ]Membranipora unicornis Membraniporella crassicosta Menestho aebula. See also Menestbo striatula. Menestho albula Menestho striatula Menipea fruticosa. See Bugula murrayana. ^lenipea ternata :\Iercenaria mercenaria. See Venus mercenaria. Mercenaria violacea. See Venus mercenaria. Mertensia cucullus. See Mertensia ovum, Mertensia ovum Mesalia lacteola. See Turritella reticulata^ Mesidotea entomon ’ Mesidotea sabinii Mesodesma jauresii. See Mesodesma deauratum. Mesodesma deauratum INIetaecus medusarum. See Hyperoche medusarum. Meterythrops robusta Metopa glacialis Metopa groenlandica Metridium dianthus Metridium marginatum. See Metridium dianthus. Metridium senile. See Metridium dianthus. Microcosmus nacreus Microporella ciliata Microsetella atlantica IMicrura afflnis Micrura rubra Mictheimysis stenolepis. See Mysis stenolepis. Miliolina agglutinans jNIiliolina bicornis iNIiliolina ferussacii INIiliolina oblonga Miliolina secans ]\Iiliolina seminulum Miliolina subrotunda Miliolina tricarinata Miliolina trigonula Millepora lichenoides. See Hornera lichenoides. IVlillepora reticulata. See Rhamphostomella scabra. Millepora skenei See Porella skenei. Millepora truncata. See Myriozoum subgracile. Modiola? cicercula See Crenella decussata. jModiola ( Brachydontes) demissa ^lodiola discrepans. See Modiolaria discors. IVIodiola glandula. See Crenella glandula. Modiola laevigata. See Modiolaria discors. ^Vlodiola modiolus Modiola nexa. See Modiolaria nigra. Modiola nigra. See Modiolaria nigra. ^lodiola pectinula. See Crenella pectinula^ Modiola plicatula. See Modiola (Brachydontes) demissa. Modiola? vitrea. See Dacrydium vitreum. Modiolaria corrugata ^Modiolaria discors ^Modiolaria discrepans. See Modiolaria nigra. Modiolaiia laevigata. See Modiolaria discors. Modiolaria nigra IMolgula littoralis IMolgula pannosa Molgula papillosa JMoIgula pilularis. See Eugyra pilularis. IMolgula j)roducta Molgula retortiformis ^lolleria costulata Molpadia colitica See Trochostoma coliticum. Moljiadia turgida. See Trochostoma turgidum. Monocaulus glacialis iMonoculodes borealis Monoculodes demissus Monoculodes nubilatus. See Oediceros lynceus. Monoculodes sp. indet Monoporella spinulifera Montacuta elevata. See Rochefortia molleri. 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Bathymetric Whiteaves’ Tables. Catalogue. 241 96 241 98 247 162 247 162 241 92 235 42 251 251 244 140 252 247 251 23E 251 234 37 254 241 98 249 237 67 237 67 231 10 231 10 231 10 231 10 231 10 231 10 231 10 231 10 231 10 244 120 244 120 244 121 244 120 244 121 254 270 255 270 255 270 255 270 255 270 247 157 233 21 251 229 251 229 251 229 241 108 MARINE INVERTEBRATES 281 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Morvillia undata. See Velutina (Limneria) undata. Mucronella abyssicola Mucronella ovata. See Rhamphostomella ovata. Mucronella pavonella Mucronella peachii Mucronella praelucida 1 Mucronella scabra_ See Rhamphostomella scabra. 1 Mucronella spinulifera. See Monoporella spinulifera. ; Mucronella ventr icosa Mulinia lateralis Munidopsis curvirostra Munna fabricii Munnopsis typica Mur ex clathratus. See Trophon clathratus. Murex (Trophon) gunneri. See Trophon clathratus var. gunneri. Mya arctica. See Saxicava rugosa. Mya arenaria Mya byssifera. See Saxicava rugosa. Mya crispata See Zirfaea crispata. Mya hyalina.” See Lyonsia hyalina. Mya norvegica. See Panopaea (Panomya) norvegica. Mya siliqua. See Cyrtodaria siliqua. Mya suborbicularis. See Kellia suborbicularis. Mya truncata Myrioohele heeri Myriothela phrygia I Myriotrochus rinkii Myriotrochus vitreus. See Myriotrochus rinkii. Myriozoum coarctatum i Myriozoum crustaceum. See Myriozoum planum. Myriozoum planum Myriozoum subgracile Mysella molleri. See Rochefortia molleri. Mysis mixta Mysis oculata Mysis spinulosus. See Mysis oculata. Mysis stenolepis Mytilus corrugatus. See Modiolaria corrugata. Mytilus decussatus. See Crenella decussata and Crenelila glandula. Mytilus demissus. See Modiola (Rirachydon-tes) demissa. Mytilus discors. See Modiolaris discors. Mytilus discrepans. See Modiolaria discors and Modioilaria nigra. Mytilus edulis Mytilus faba. See Crenella faba^ Mytilus pectinulus. See Crenella pectinula. Mytilus pholadis. See Saxicava rugosa. Mytilus rugosus. See Saxicava rugosa. Myxicola steenstrupi Myxilla incrustans N Naidonereis quadricuspida Nareda superba. See Amphiporus (?) superbus^ Nassa lunata. See Astyris lunata. Nassa (Ilyanassa) obsoleta Nassa (Tritia) trivittata Natica canaliculata. See Amauropsis islandica. Natica clausa Natica consolidata. See Natica clausa. Natica cornea. See Amauropsis islandica. Natica flava. See Acrybia flava. Natica groenlandica. See Lunatia groenlandica. Natica helicoides. See Amauropsis islandica. Natica heros. See Lunatia heros. Natica immaculata. See Lunatia immaculata. Natica nana. See Lunatia nana. Natica smithii. See Acrybia flava. i Natica triseriata. See Lunatia heros var^ triseriata. Neaera arctica. See Cuspidaria arctica. Neaera glacialis. See Cuspidaria glacialis. Neaera pellucida. See Cuspidaria pellucida. Nebalia bipes Nectocrangon dentatus Nectocrangon lar 38a— 19 Bathymetric Whiteaves’ Tables. Catalogue. 241 107 241 107 241 107 241 107 241 107 244 139 253 257 251 237 252 237 244 148 244 238 148 233 20 235 47 241 99 241 99 241 99 252 252 246 252 246 244 120 238 232 18 238 . 79 247 181 247 181 247 166 252 218 253 258 255 282 DEPARTME'NT OF TEE FATAL SERVICE Nemertes afRnis. See Micrura affinis. Nemertes socialis. See Lineus socialis^ Nemesis robusta * Nemidia (?) canadensis Nemidia (?) lawrencii Nephthys borealis. See Nepthys ciliata. Nephthys caeca Nephthys canadensis Nephthys ciliata Nephthys incisa Nephthys ingens. See Nephthys incisa. Nephthys lawrencii Nephthys longisetosa Nephthys picta Neptunea curta. See Sipho stimpsoni. Neptunea decemcostata Neptunea despecta. See Neptunea despecta var. tornata. Neptunea despecta var^ tornata Neptunea ossiani. See Sipho ossiani. Neptunea propinqua. See Sipho pubescens. Neptunea (Neptunella) pygmaea. See Sipho pygmaeus. Neptunea (Sipho) terebralis. See Sipho spitzbergensis^ Neptunea ventrioosa. See 'Sipho ventricosus. Neptunus sayi.. Nereis abyssicola • Nereis caeca. See Nephthys caeca. Nereis ciliata. See Nephthys ciliata. Nereis denticulata Nereis grandis. See Nereis virens. Nereis iris Nereis (Lycoris) pelagica Nereis virens Nerine cirrata. See Scolecolepis cirrata. Nerita islandica. See Amauropsis inslandica. Nevaya whiteavesi Nicania banksii. See Astarte banksii. Nicania banksii var. globosa. See Astarte banksii var. globosa. Nicania striata. See Astarte banksii var. striata. Nicolea zostericoila Nicomache? canadensis Nicomache lumbricalis Ninoe kinbergi Nodosaria (Dentalina) communis Nodosaria (Glandulina) laevigata Nodosaria (Dentalina) pauperata Nonionina scapha Nonioninan labradorica Nothria conchylega Nucula bellotii. See Nucula expansa. Nucula corticata. See Nucula delphinodonta. Nucula delphinodonta Nucula expansa Nucula inflata. See Nucula tenuis. Nucula jacksoni. See Leda pernula var. jacksonii. Nucula limatula. See Yoldia limatula. Nucula minuta. See Deda tenuisculcata. Nucula myalis. See Yoldia myalis. Nucula navicularis. See Megayoldia thraciaeformis. Nucula obliquata. See Nucula tenuis. Nucula proxima Nucula proxima var. truncu'lus Nucula sapotilla. See Yoldia sapotilla. Nucula tenuis Nucula tenuis forma inflata. See Nucula tenuis. Nucula tenuis forma typica. See Nucula tenuis. Nucula tenuisulcata. See Leda tenuisulcata. .Nucula thraciaeformis. See Megayoldia thraciaeformis. Nychia amondseni Nychia cirrhosa Nyctiphanes norvegica Nymphon brevicollum Nymphon giganteum. See Nymphon stroemii. Nymphon grossipes Nymphon hirtum Nymphon longitar.se Nymphon Nymphon stroemii 8 GEORGE V, A. 191 Bathymetric Whiteave Tables. Catalogu 249 238 85 ' 238 85 238 82 , 23B 83 2'38 82 238 83 238 83 1 238 82 1 238 83 I 247 188 1 S 247 187 253 261 238 81 238 81 239 81 239 80 239 81 239 239 239 239 75 . 239 t 231 10 . 231 10 231 10 231 9 231 239 79 . 244 124 : 244 123 ; 244 244 123 244 122 239 86 239 86 252 247 254 263 254 264 254 264 254 264 1 254 263 1 254 263 MA lUyK JXVERTEBRA TES 283 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a O Bathymetric Whiteaves’ Tables. Catalogue. Obelia commissuralis Obelia dichotoma Obelia gelatinosa Obelia geniculata Obelia longissima Obelia pyriformis Oceania languida. See Phialidium languidum. Ocnus ayresii. See Pentacta minuta. Octopus arcticus Octopus bairdii. See Octopus arcticus. Octopus lentus Octopus obesus Octopus piscatorum Odinia americana Odostomia bisuturalis Odostomia (Menestho) bisuturalis. See Odostomia bisotoralis. Odostomia exigua. See Odostomia bisuturalis. Odostomia fusca Odostomia rufa fulvocincta. See Turbonilla interrupta var. fulvocincta. Odostomia seminuda Odostomia striatula. See Menestho striatula. Odostomia trifida Odostomia (Menestho) trifida bedequensis Odostomia (Chrysallida) willist Oediceros affinis. See Monoculodes borealis. Oediceros lynceus Oediceros saginatus Oithona plumifera Oithona similis (?) Oligotrochus vitreus. See Myriotrochus rinkii. Omatoplea stimpsoni. See Amphiporus angulatus. Ommastrephes illecebrosa. See Illex illecebrosus. Ommastrephes megapterus Onchidoris muricata Onchidoris pallida Oniscus aculeatus. See Rhacotropis aculeatus. Oniscus arenarius. See Amathilla homari. Oniscus cuspidatus See Acanthozone cuspidata. Oniscus psora. See ^®ga psora. Oniscus pulex. See Gammarus locusta. Oniscus serratus. See Acanthonotozoma serratum. Onisimus edwardsii Onuphis conchylega. See Nothria conchylega. Onuphis es'chriohtii. See Nothria conchylega. Onuphis cf. holobrachia Onuphis quadricuspis Onuphis sicula Onychoteuthis fabricii. See Gonatus fabricii. Opercularella lacerata Ophelia glabra Ophelia limacina Ophelia radiata Ophiacantha anomala Ophiacantha bidentata Ophiacantha granulifera Ophiacantha spectabilis Ophiacantha spinulosa. See Ophiacantha bidentata. Ophiacantha varispina Ophiactis asperula Ophiocoma bellis. See Ophiopholis aculeata. Ophiocoma neglecta. See Amphipholis elegans. Ophioglypha lymani Ophioglypha nodosa Ophioglypha robusta Ophioglypha s^rsii Ophioglypha signata Ophioglypha stuwitzi Ophiolebes acanella Ophiolepis ciliata. See Ophioglypha sarsii. Ophiolepis scolovendrica. See Ophiopholis aculeata. Ophiolepis sundevalli. See Amphiura sundevalli. Ophiolepis tenuis. See Amphipholis elegans. Ophionemertes agilis. See Amphiporus agilis. Ophiopholis aculeata •38a— 191- 233 23 233 23 233 23 233 23 233 23 233 23 248 212 248 213 248 212 248 212 236 57 247 162 247 162 247 161 247 161 247 247 252 228 252 228 249 249 248 211 247 207 247 20T 252 238 239 239 239 80 233 239 78 239 78 239 ’ 236 60 236 60 236 61 236 60 236 61 236 236 236 58 236 58 236 57 236 58 236 58 236 61 236 60 284 DEPARTME-NT OF THE iVAFAL SERVICE Ophiopholis bellis. See OphiophoUs aculeata. Ophiopholis robusta. See Ophiog-lypha robusta. Ophiopholis scolopendrica. See Ophiopholis aculeata. Ophioscolex glacialis Ophiura bellis. See Ophiopholis aculeata. Ophiura elegans. See Amphipholis elegans. Ophiura nodosa. See Ophioglypha nodosa. Ophiura sarsii. See Ophioglypha sarsii. Ophiura stuwitzi. See Ophioglypha stuwitzi. Orchestia agilis Orchestia gryllus Orchomene minutus Orcula barthii . . . . Orcula punctata. See Thyonidium productum. Orthopyxis caliculata. See Campanularia caliculata. Orthopyxis poterium. See Campanularia caliculata. Osteodesma hyalina. See Lyonsia hyalina. Ostrea borealis. See Ostrea virginica. Ostrea canadensis. See Ostrea virginica. Ostrea grandis. See Pecten (Placopecten) magellanicus. Ostrea islandica. See Pecten (Chlamys) islandicus. Ostrea magellanica. See Pecten (Placopecten) magellanicus. Ostrea subauriculata. See Limatula subauriculata. Ostrea virginiana. See Ostrea virginica. Ostrea virginica Owenia (Ammooharis) filiformis vOxynoe glabra. See Marsenina glabra. P PagurU'S acadianus. See Eupagurus bernhardus. Pagurus bernhardus. See Eupagurus bernhardus. Pagurus irroratus Pagurus kroyeri. See Eupagurus kroyeri. Paragus longicarpus Pagurus pubescens. See Eupagurus pubescens. Pallene hispida. See Pseudopallene hispida. Pandalus annulicornis. See Pandalus montagui. Pandalus borealis Pandalus leptocerus Pandalus levigatus. See Pandalus montagui. Pandalus montagui Pandarus sinuarus Pandora glacialis. See Kennerlia glacialis. Pandora gouldiana. See Clidiophora gooldiana. Pandora trilineata. See Clidophora gouldiana. Pandorina arenosa. See Eyonsia arenosa. Pandosia ftbrosa. See Glandula fibrosa. Panomya norvegioa. See Panopaea (Panomya) norvegica. Panopaea (Panomya) norvegica Paracalanus parva Paragorgia arborea Paramphithoe cataphracta Paramphithoe elegans. See Halirages bispinosus. Paramphithoe bicuspis. See Pleustes bicuspis. Paramphithoe pulchella Paramuricea borealis Paramuricea grandis Paranthura brachiata. See Calathura brachiata. Parapagurus pilosimanus Parathemisto oblivia Pardalisca cuspidata Parerythrops robusta. See Meterythrops robusta. Pasithea nigra. See Bittium nigrum. Patella caeca. See Lepeta caeca. Patella Candida. See Lepeta caeca. Patella cerea. See Lepeta caeca. Patella fornicata. See Crepidula fornicata. Patella noachina. See Puncturella noachina. Patella rubella. See Acmaea rubella. Patella testudinalis. See Acmaea testudinalis. Patellina corrugata Peachia parasitica Pecten borealis. See Pecten gibbus var. borealis. Pecten concentricus. See I’ecten gibbus var. borealis. 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Bathymetric Whiteaves Tables. Catalogue 236 61 252 225 252 235 - 252 233 235 46 244 115 239 74 253 253 253 249 253 253 24S 249 iV 244 150 ( 249 i 235 32 1 252 229 ; 6 i 252 229 ■ 1 235 34 235 34 253 259 25'2 219 252 . 225 • ' V 373 k A MARI^^E I-NYERTEBRATE8 285 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a pecten gibbus var. borealis Pecten grandis. See Pecten (Placopecten) magellanicus. Pecten (Camptonectes) groenlandicus Pecten hoskynsi. See Pecten (Cyclopecten) pustulosus. Pecten imbrifer. See Pecten (Cyclopecten) pustulosus. Pecten irradians. See Pecten gibbus var. borealis Pecten (Chlamys) islandicus Pecten (Placopecten) magellanicus Pecten pealeii. See Pecten (Chlamys) islandicus. Pecten (Cyclopecten) pustulosus Pecten subauriculata. See Limatula subauriculata. Pecten tenuicostatus. See Pecten (Placopecten) magellanicus. Pecten (Camptonectes) vitreus Pectinaria groenlandica. See Cistenides granulata. Pectinaria (Cistenides) hyperborea. See Cistenides hyperborea. Pedicellaster typicus Pedicellina nutans Pelonaia arenifera Pelonaia corrugata. See Pelonaia arenifera. Peltogaster paguri Pennatula aculeata Pennatula (Ptilella) borealis Pentacta calcigera Pennatula canadensis. See Pennatula aculeata. Pennatula grandis. See Pennatula (Ptilella) borealis. Pennatula phosphorea var. aculeata. See Pennatula aculeata. Pentacta frondosa Pentacta minuta Pentagonaster granularis. See Tosia granularis. Pentagonaster eximius. See Tosia eximia. Pera crystallina Pera pellucida. See Pera crystallina. Periploma fragilis Periploma papyracea. See Periploma fragilis. Petalosarsia declivis Petricola dactylus. See Petricola pholadiformis. Petricola fornicata. See Petricola pholadiformis. Petricola pholadiformis Phakellia ventilabrum Phalangium littorale. See Pycnogonum littorale. Phallusia obliqua Phallusia prunum. See Ascidia complanata. Phallusioiides obliqua. See Phallusia obliqua. Phascolion alberti Phascolion strombi Phascolion strombi canadensis Phascolion strombi fusca Phascolion tubicola Phascolosoma bernhardus. See Phascolosoma caementarium. Phascolosoma boreale Phascolosoma caementarium Phascolosoma hamulatum Phascolosoma margaritaceaum. See Phascolosoma boreale. Phascolosoma tubicola. See Phascolion tubicola. Phialidium languidum Philine cingulata Philine finmarchica Philine formosa. See Philine quadrata. Philine fragilis Philine lima Philine lineolata. See Philine lima. Philine quadrata Philomedes brenda Philomedes interpuncta Pholas crispata. See Zirfaea crispata. Pholoe minuta Pholoe tecta Phoxichilidium maxillare Phoxocephalus holbolli Phryxus abdpminalis Phoxus fusiformis. See Harpinia fusiformis. Phoxus holbolli. See Phoxocephalus holbolli. Phoxus kroyeri. See Phoxocephalus holbolli. Phyllodoce catenula Phyllodoce groenlandica Bathymetric Whiteaves’ Tables. Catalogue. 244 117 244 118 244 116 244 117 244 119 244 119 236 53 243 114 2.55 269 249 213 235 35 235 35 235 45 235 44 235 44 255 271 244 145 252 244 137 232 18 255 240 240 240 240 240 89 240 89 240 88 240 ' 88 233 22 247 201 247 201 247 201 247 200 247 200 250 250 217 239 83 239 83 254 263 252 231 252 236 239 82 239 82 286 DEPARTME^^T OF THE NAVAL SERVICE Phyllodoce mucosa Phytllodoce sp Physalia arethusa. See Physalia pelagica. Physalia pelagica Pilidium commodum. See Capulacmaea radiata. Pilidium radiatum. See Capulacmaea radiata, Pilidium rubellum. See Acmaea rubella. Piliscus commodus. See Capulacmaea radiata. Piliscus probus. See Capulacmaea radiata. Pista cristata Plagiaoantha arachnoides Planaria angulata. See Amphiporus angulatus. Planaria fusca. See Cerebratulus fuscus. Planaria lactiflorea. See Amphiporus lactifloreus. Planaria linearis. See Cephalothrix linearis. Planaria rosea. See Amphiporus roseus. Planaria sanguinea. See Lineus sanguineus. Planaria viridis. See Lineus viridis. Pleurobrachia pileus. Pleurobrachia rhododactyla Pleurotoma decussata. See Bela decussata. Pleurotoma violacea. See Bela bicarinata var. violacea Pleurotomaria bicarinata. See Bela bicarinata. Plumularia falcata. See Hydrallmania falcata. Plumularia itenerrima. See Hydrallmania falcata. Pleustes bicuspis Pleustes panoplus Podocerus fucicola Podocerus nitidus Podon finmarchichus Podon intermedins Podon leuckarti Podon polyphemoid'es Polia obscura. See Lineus viridis. Polycanna groenlandica Polycera illuminata. See Polycera lessonii. Polycera lessonii Polycirrus sp Polycitor kukenthali Polydara concharum Polymastia mamillaris Polymastia robusta Polymorphina compressa Polymorphina lactea Polynices. See Lunatia. Polynoe gaspeensis Polynoe squamata. See Lepidonotus squamatus- Polystomella arctica Polystomella striatopunctata Pontaster hebitus Pontogeneia inermis Pontophilus norvegicus Pontoporeia femorata Porella acutirostris Porella bella ?Porella compressa. See Porella surcularis. Porella conoinna Porella elegantula Porella elegantula var. papposa Porella laevis Porella minuta Porella perpusilla Porella proboscidea Porella propinqua T’orella saccata Porella skenei Porella skenei var. plana Porella struma Porella surcularis Porellina ciliata. See Microporella ciliata. Porina tubulosa Portlandia glacialis Poseidon aflinis. See Micrura affinis. Potamilla neglecta Potamllla oculifera 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Bathymetric Whiteaves Tables. Catalogue 239 239 234 29 239 231 235 42 252 228 252 228 252 221 252 221 248 248 248 248 234 22 247 206 239 255 239 76 232 13 232 13 231 10 231 10 ; 239 84 231 9 231 9 236 48 252 226 253 255 252 230 241 103 241 103 241 102 241 104 241 104 241 105 241 103 241 241 103 241 105 241 241 104 242 104 242 103 242 104 242 9S 244 127 239 72 239 72 MA RINE / N V KR TEBRA TES 287 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Bathymetric Tables. Potamilla reniformis 239 Potamilla torelli 239 Praniza cerina. See Gnathia cerina. Praxilla gracilis 239 llPraxilla mulleri 239 Praxillella collaris 239 Praxillella gracilis. See Praxilla gracilis. Praxillella praetermissa 239 Praxililella sp 239 Priapulus caudatus? 240 Priapulus pygmaeus 240 I Primnoa lepadifera. See Primnoa reseda. I Primnoa reseda 235 j Prionospio steenstrupi 239 I Proboscina incrassata. See Stomatopora granulata. Proboscina penicillata. See Stomatopora penicillata. Procerodes ulvae 236 Protula americana 239 Protula media 239 Psammobia fusca. See Macoma balthica. Pseudarchaster intermedius var. insignis 236 Pseudooalanus elongatus 249 Pseudomma roseum 253 Pseudomma truncatum 253 PseudopaJilene bispida 254 Pseudophthalmus pelagicus. See Ampelisca macrocephala. Psilaster florae 236 Psolus fabricii. See Lophothuria fabricii. Psolus laevigatus. See Psolus phantapus. Psolus phantapus (L) 235 Pteraster militaris 236 Pteraster pulvillus 236 ; Ptilanthura tenuis 252 ‘Ptilella borealis. See Pennatula (Ptilella) borealis, i Ptilocheirus pinguis. See Leptocheirus pinguis. I Ptychatractus ligatus 247 ■ Ptycbocyclis urnula 231 Ptychogastria polaris 234 t Ptychogena lactea 234 Pulvinulina karsteni 231 Puncturella noachina 247 Puncturella princeps 247 Purpura lapillus 247 Pycnogonum grossipes. See Nymphon grossipes. Pycnogonum littorale 254 Pycnogonum pelagicum. See Pycnogonum littorale. Pyramis fusca. See Odostomia fusca. Pyramis striatula. See Menestho striatula. Pyrene costulata. See Anachis haliaeti. Pyura aurantium. See Halocyntba pyriformis. Pyura echinata. See Halocynthia echinata. Pyura ovifera. See Bolteni bolteni var. rubra. Q Quasillina brevis 232 R Ramphonotus minax 242 Reniera mollis 232 Reniera rufescens 232 Reophax findens 231 Reophax scorpiurus 231 Retepora elongata 242 Retusa gouldii 247 Retusa nitidula 247 Retusa pertenuis 247 Rhabdammina abj'ssorum 231 Rhabdammina discreta 231 Rhacotropis aculeata. See Rhacotropis aculeatus. I Rhacotropis aculeatus 252 1 Rhamphostomella bilaminata 242 i Rhamphostomella costata 242 ; Rhamphostomella ovata 242 Whiteaves’ Catalogue. 72 72 75 75 89 89 33 76 64 71 71 48 247 247 263 49 45 52 52 242 191 21 10 156 179 262 14 97 15 15 10 10 109 203 203 203 10 10 225 108 108 108 288 departme:nt of the naval service 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Bathymetric Whiteaves' , i Rhamphostomella plicata . . . Rhamphostomella radiatula Rhamphostomella scabra Rhamphostomella scabra var. labiata Rhaphiodesma lingua. See Esperella lingua. Rhoda inermis Rhodactinia daviesii. See Stomphia carneola. Rhynchobolus capitatus Rhynchonella psittacea. See Hemithyris psittacea. Rissoa aculeus. See Cingula (Onoba) aculeus. Rissoa carinata. See Cingula carinata. Rissoa castanea. See Cingula (Alvania) castanea. Rissoa eburnea. See Liostomia eburnea. Rissoa exarata. See Cingula arenaria. Rissoa globulus. See Cingula globulus. Rissoa jan-mayeni. See Cingula (Alvania) jan-meyeni. Rissoa mighelsi. See Cingula arenaria. Rissoa minuta. See Cingula minuta. Rissoa multilineata. See Cingula multilineata. Rissoa pelagica. See Cingula carinata. Rissoella eburnea. See Liostomia eburnea. Rochefortia molleri Rossia hyatti Rossia sublevis Rossia (?) tenera Rostellaria occidentalis. See Aporrhais occidentalis. Rotalia beccarii S Sabella crassioornis Sabella lumbricalis. See Nicomache lumbricalis. Sabella oculifera. See Potamilla oculifera. Sabella pavonina Sabella penicillus Sabella zonalis Sabellides borealis Sabellides cristata. See Melinna cristata. Sabinea sarsii Sabinea septemcarinata , Sagartia acanella Samthya sexcirrata Sanguinolaria fusca. See Macoma balthica. Sanguinolaria sordida. See Macoma calcarea. Sarsia mirabilis. See Syncoryne mirabilis. Sarsia princeps ?Saxicava distorta. See Saxicava rugosa. Saxicava rugosa Scalaria borealis. See Scalaria (Acirsa) costulata. Scalaria (Acirsa) costulata Scalaria eschrichtii. See Scalaria (Acirsa) costulata. Scalaria groenlandica Scalaris subulata. See Scalaria groenlandica. Scalaria undulata. See Scalaria (Acirsa) costulata. Scalibregma inflatum Scalpellum pressum Scalpellum stroemii Scalpellum velutinum Scaphander librarius. See Scaphander punctostriatus. Scaphander punctostriata. See Scaphander punctostriatus. Scaphander punctostriatus Schizaster fragilis Schizoporella auriculata Schizoporella biaperta Schizoporella cincta .Schizoporella cruenta Schizoporella hyalina Schizoporella linearis Schizoporella plana. See Myriozoum planum. Schizoporella sinuosa Scissurella crispata Sclerochilus contortus Sclerocrangon boreas Scolecolepis cirrata Scoloplos armiger .bles. Catalogue. 242 108 242 242 108 242 108 253 248 239 79 244 138 248 211 248 211 248 212 231 10 239 239 72 239 239 72 239 253 254 253 254 235 38 239 234 244 149 247 163 247 163 239 78 249 249 214 249 247 201 236 63 242 100 242 100 242 100 242 100 242 100 242 99 242 100 247 157 250 217 253 253 239 76 239 MARiyE INVERTEBRATES 289 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Scoloplos canadensis Scruparia clavata Scrupocellaria americana Scrupocellaria scabra Scrupocellaria scruposa Scutella parma. See Echinarachnius parma. Selaginopsis mirabilis. See Diphasia mirabilis. Sepia loligo. See Gonatus fabricii. Serpula cancellata. See Spirorbis cancellatus. Serpula granulata. See Spirorbis granulatus. Serpula lucida. See Spirorbis lucidus. Serpula porrecta. See Spirorbis lucidus. Serpula sinistrorsa. See Spirorbis lucidus. Serpula spirorbis. See Spirorbis borealis. Serpula vitrea. See Spirorbis vitreus. Serripes groenlandicus Sertularella conica Sertularella polyzonias. See Sertularia polyzonias. Sertularella tricuspidata. See Sertularia tricuspidata. Sertularia abietina Sertularia antennina. See Antennularia antennina. Sertularia argentea. See Thuiaria argentea. Sertularia cupressina. See Thuiaria cupressina. Sertularia faicata. See Hydrallmania falcata. Sertularia fallax. See Diphasia fallax. Sertularia filicula Sertularia fusiformis Sertularia geniculata. See Obelia geniculata. Sertularia latiuscula Sertularia loricata. See Gemellaria loricata. Sertularia myriophyllum. See Thecocarpus myriophyllum. Sertularia polyzonias ' Sertularia polyzonias var. gigantea Sertularia produota Sertularia pumila Sertularia rosacea. See Diphasia rosacea. Sertularia rugosa (Sertularella rugosa) Sertularia tricuspidata (Sertularella tricuspid eta) . . .. Sertularia volubilis. See Campanularia volubilis. Sigaretus groenlandicus. See Marsenina glabra. Sigaretus haliotoideus. See Marsenina glabra. Siliqua costata Siliqua squama Sipho latericeus. See Tritonofusus latericeus. Sipho lividus. See Sipho spitzbergensis. Sipho ossiani Sipho pubescens Sipho pygmaeus Sipho spitzbergensis Sipho stimpsoni Sipho 'ventricosus Siphonodentalium affine Siphonodentalium lobatum Siphonostomum asperum Siphonostomum pluniosum. See Trophonia plumosa. Sipunculus bernhardus. See Phascolosoma caementarium. Sipunculus caementarius. See Phascolosoma caementarium. Skenea planorbis. See Skeneia planorbis. Skenea serpuloides. See Skeneia planorbis. Skeneia planorbis Smittia arctica Smittia bella. See Porella bella. Smittia Candida Smittia globifera Smittia landsborovii Smittia landsborovii form porifera. See Smittia arctica. Smittia porifera. See Smittia arctica. Smittia producta.. Smittia reticulatopunctata Smittia trispinosa Socarnes vahli Solariella obscura Solariella obscura var. bella Solariella varicosa Solaster earlii Bathymetric Whiteaves’ Tables. Catalogue. 239 79 242 92 242 92 242 93 242 92 244 234 129 234 25 234 25 234 26 234 26 234 25 234 25 234 26 234 25 234 25 234 26 244 143 244 143 247 189 247 189 247 189 247 189 247 188 247 190 245 153 245 153 2^9 77 247 171 242 105 242 106 242 106 242 105 242 106 242 107 242 106 247 252 159 247 160 247 160 236 51 290 DEPARTMEI^T OF THE IS^AVAL SERVICE Solaster endeca Solaster furcifer. See Lophaster furcifer. Solaster papposus. See Crossaster papposus. Solaster syrtensis S’olecurtus squama. See S'iliqua squama. Solemya borealis. See Solenomya borealis. Solemya velum. See Solenomya velum. Solen americanus. See Ensis directus. Solen costatus. See Siliqua costata. Solen directus. See Ensis directus. Solen ensis. See Ensis directus. Solen minutus. See Saxicava rugosa. Solenomya borealis Solenomya velum Spinther citrinus Spiochaetopterus typicus Spirontocaris fabricii. Spirontocaris gaimardii Spirontocaris gaimardii beloheri Spirontocaris groenlandica Spirontocaris polaris Spirontocaris pusiola Spirontocaris spinus Spirontocaris stoneyi Spirontocaris turgida Spirialis gouldii. See Limacina gouldii. Spiroplecta biformis Spirorbis borealis Spirorbis cancellatus Spirorbis carinatus Spirorbis granulatus Spirorbis lucidus Spirorbis nautiloides. See Spirorbis stimpsoni. Spirorbis quadrangularis ?Spirorbis spirillum Gould. See Spirorbis borealis. Spirorbis spirillum Linnaeus Spirorbis stimpsoni Spirorbis validus Spirorbis vitreus Spisula (Hemimactra) polynyma Spisula (Hemimactra) solidissima Squilla lobata. See Caprella linearis. Scandella lateralis. See Mulinia lateralis. Staurophora laciniata Stauroteuthis syrtensis Stegocephalus inflatus Stenosoma irrorata. See Idotea marina. Stenothoe clypeata Stephanasterias albula. See Stichaster albulus. Sternaspis fo.ssor Sthenelais limicola Sthenoteuthis megaptera. See Ommastrephes megapterus. Stichaster albulus Stimpsoniella emersonii. See Amicula vestita. Stomapora expansa. See Tubulipora expansa. Stomatopora diastoporoides Stomatopora granulata Stomatopora penicillata Stomphia carneola Stomphia coccinea. See Stomphia carneola. Strombidium sulcatum Strongylocentrotus drobachiensis Stylarioides plumosa. See Trophonia plumosa. Stylocordyla borealis Suberites ficus Suberites hispidus Suberites montalbidus Sycon asperum Sycon protectum Synanthus mirabilis Synapta coriacea. See Chirodota laevis. Syncoryne gravata. See Syncoryne mirabilis. Syncoryne mirabilis Synidotea bicuspida Synidotea nodulosa Syrrhoe bicuspis. See Tiron acanthurus- Svrrhoe crenulata 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Bathymetric Whiteaves’ Tables. Catalogue. 236 51 236 51 244 144 244 144 239 87 239 76 253 252 253 253 250 253 251 253 252 253 250 253 253 251 231 10 239 68 239 69 239 70 240 70 240 69 240 70 240 240 71 240 71 240 69 244 139 244 139 234 248 213 252 232 252 232 240 88 240 84 236 54 242 110 242 110 242 110 235 40 231 236 62 232 13 232 14 232 14 232 14 232 12 232 11 235 40 234 19 252 240 252 239 252 231 MARINE INVERTEBRATES 291 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Bathymetric T Tables. Tanais filum. See Leptochelia filum. Tapes fluctuosa. See Liocyma fluctuosa. Tealia crassicornis. See Urticina crassicornis. Tectura rubella. See Acmaea rubella. Tectura testudinalis. See Aomaea testudinalis. Tecturella flaccida 240 Tellina balthica. See Macoma balthica. Tellina calcarea. See Macoma calcarea. Tellina frag'ilis. See Macoma balthica. Tellina groenlandica. See Macoma balthica. Tellina lata. See Macoma calcarea. Tellina proxima. See Macoma calcarea. Tellina sabulosa. See Macoma calcarea. Tellina sordida. See Macoma calcarea. Tellina (Angulus) tenera .. 244 Tellina (Macoma) tenera. See Macoma balthica. Temora longicornis 249 Temora sp 249 Tentorium semisuberites 232 Terebella brunnea 240 Terebella cirrata. See Cirratulus cirrhatus. Terebell\ figulus 240 Terebellides stroemii 240 Terebratalia spitzbergensis 240 Terebratella labradorensis 240 Terebratella spitzbergensis. See Terebratalia spitzbergensis. Terebratula caput serpentis. See Terebratulina septentrionalis. Terebratula labradorensis. See Terebratella labradorensis. Terebratula septentionalis. See Terebratulina septentrionalis. Terebratulina septentrionalis , 240 Teredo dilatata 244 Teredo navalis 244 Tethea hispida. See Suberites hispidus. Tethyum coriaceum. See Halocynthia tuberculum. Tethyum finmarkense 255 Tethyum molle. See Glandula arenicola and Glandula mollis. Tethyum mortenseni 255 Tethyum pyriforme americanum. See Halocynthia pyriformis. Tethyum rusticum. See Halocynthia rustica. Tetradidemnum albidum. See Leptoclinum albidum and var. lutecium. Tetrastemma candidum . 237 Tetrastemma serpentinum 237 Tetrastemma vittatum 237 Textularia agglutinans 231 Textularia variabilis 231 Thais lapillus. See Purpura laptllus. Thamnocnidia larynx 234 Thamnocnidia tenella 234 Thecaphora ibla. See Tentorium semisuberites. Thecaphora semisuberites. See Tentorium semisuberites. Thecocarpus myriophyllum 234 Thelepus cincinnatus ' 240 Thelepus cincinnatus canadensis 240 Thenea muricata 232 Thracia conradi 244 Thracia couthouyi. See Thracia myopsis. Thracia declivis. See Thracia conradi. Thracia myopsis 244 Tracia truncata 244 Thuiaria argentea 234 Thuiaria articulata 234 Thuiaria cupressina 234 Thuiaria lonchitis 234 Thuiaria thuja 234 Thyasira gouldll. See Cryptodon gouldii. Thyasira obesa var. See Cryptodon obesa. Thyone scabra 235 Thyonidium hyalinum. See Thyonidium pellucidum. Thyonidium pellucidum 235 Thyonidium productum 235 Thysanoessa inermis. See Rhoda inermis- Thysanoessa inermis var. neglecta 253 Thysanoessa raschii 253 Whiteaves’ Catalogue. 77 141 14 73 72 90 90 89 151 151 65 66 66 10 10 20 20 28 73 73 13 146 146 146 27 27 27 26 46 46 46 292 DEPARTME^^T OF TEE RATAL EERY WE 8 GEORGE Bathymetric Tables. Thysanopoda inermis. See Rhoda inermis. Thysaiiopoda norvegica. See Nyctiphanes norvegica. Tiara pileata 234 Tiaropsis diademata 234 Tintinnopsis beroidea 231 Tintinnopsis campanula 231 Tintinnopsis cylindrica 231 Tintinnopsis davidow 231 Tintinnopsis lobianooi 231 Tintinnus acuminatus 231 Tintinnus obliquas 231 Tiron acanthurus 252 Tonicella marmorea 247 Tornatina canaliculata 247 Tortanus discaudatus 249 Tosia eximia 236 Tosia granularis 236 Tottenia gemma 244 Toxopneustes drobachiensis. See 'Strongylocentrotus drobachiensis. Trachydermon albus 247 Trachydermon ruber 247 Trachyneme digitale 234 Tremaster mirabilis 236 Trichobranchus glacialis 240 Trichostemma hemisphaericum 232 Trichotropis borealis • 248 Trichotropis conica 248 Tritia trivittata. See Nassa (Tritia) trivittata. Triopa lacera. See Issa lacera. Tritonia arborescens. See Dendronotus arborescens. Tritonia reynoldsii. See Dendronotus arborescens. Tritonium ciliatum. See Buccinum ciliatum. Tritonium clathratum. See Trophon truncatus. Tritonium craticulatum.- See Trophon fabricii. Tritonium decemcostatum. See Neptunea decemcostata. Tritonium donovani. See Buccinum donovani. Tritonium glaciale. See Buccinum glaciale. Tritonium groenlandicum. See Buccinum cyaneum. Tritonium groenlandicum var. glabrum. See Buccinum cyaneum var, perdix. Tritonium groenlandicum var. perdix. See Buccinum cyaneum var. perdix. Tritonium gunneri. See Trophon clathratus var. gunner i. Tritonium islandicnm. See Slpho stimpsoni. Tritonium mitrula. See Bela mitrula. Tritonium pygmaeum. See Sipho pygmaeus. Tritonium undatum. See Buccinum cyaneum. Tritonofusus kroyeri . . . 248 Tritonofusus latericeus 248 Tritonofusus stimpsoni lirubatus 248 Tritonofusus syrtensis 248 Tritropis aculeata. See Rhacotropis aculeatus. Trochammina inflata 231 Trochinus pallidus. See Chirodota laevis. Trochostoma ooliticnm 235 Trochostoma turgidum 235 Trochus cinerarius. See Margarita undulata. Trochus divaricatus. See Lacuna vincta. Trochus groenlandicus umbilicatus. See Margarita undulata. Trochus occidentalis. See Calliostoma occidentals. Trophon clathratus 248 Trophon clathratus. See also Trophon truncatus. Trophon clathratus var. gunneri 248 Trophon craticulatus. See Trophon fabricii. Trophon fabricii 248 Trophon gunneri. See Trophon clathratus var. gunneri. Trophon scalariformis. See Trophon clathratus. Trophon truncatus 248 Trophonia aspera 240 n'rophonia plumosa 240 Truncatulina lobatula 231 Tryphosa horringii 252 Tubipora catenularia. See Electra catenularia. Tu'bipora flabellaris. See Tubulipora flabellaris. Tubipora penicillata. See Stomatopora penicUlata. Tubipora serpens. See Idmonea serpens. Tubularia crocea 234 A. 1918 Whiteaves’ Catalogue. 21 231 154 204 49 49 136 154 154 29 50 14 178 175 190 191 191 10 47 46 178 178 179 177 77 10 233 MARINE INVERTEBRATES 293 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Bathymetric Tables. Tubularia indivisa 234 Tubularia larynx. See Thamnocnidia larynx, Tubularia ramea. See Eudendrium rameum. Tubularia ramosa. See Eudendrium ramosum. Tubularia tenella. See Thamnocidia tenella. Tubulipora atlantica. See Idmonea atlantica. Tubulipora crates. See Lichenopora hispida. Tubulipora expansa 242 Tubulipora fimbria 242 Tubulipora fiabeliaris. See also Tubulipora fimbria. Tubulipora fiabeliaris 242 Tubulipora hispida. See Lichenopora hispida, Tubulipora lobulata 242 Tubulipora patina. See Diastopora patina. Tubulipora phalangea. See Tubulipora fiabeliaris. Tubulipora serpens. See Idmonea serpens. Turbo albulus. See Menestho albula. Turbo cinereus. See Margarita cinerea. Turbo helicinus. See Margarita helicina. Turbo incarnatus. See Margarita undulata. Turbo littoreus. See Litorina litorea. Turbo littoralis. See Litorina palliata. Turbo minutus. See Cingula minuta. Turbo obligatus. See Litorina rudis. Turbo obscurus. See Solariella obscura. Turbo olivaceus. See Margarita olivacea. Turbo palliatus. See Litorina palliata. Turbo planorbis. See Skeneia planorbis. Turbo rudis. See Litorina rudis. Turbo tenebrosus. See Litorina rudis. Turbo vestitus. See Litorina rudis. Turbo vinctus. See Lacuna vincta. Turbonilla (Pyrgiscus) edwardensis 248 Tudbonilla (Pyrgiscus) hecuba 248 Turbonilla interrupta. See Turbonilla interrupta var, fulvocincta. Turbonilla interrupta var. fulvocincta 248 Turbonilla nivea 248 Turbonilla rufa var. fulvocincta. See Turbonilla interrupta var. fulvooincta. Turbonilla seminuda. See Odostomia seminuda. Turbonilla (Pyrgiscus) whiteavesi 248 Turritella acicula. See Turritellopsis acicula. Turritella areolata. See Cingula (Alvania) areolata. Turritella bisuturalis. See Odostomia bisuturalis- Turritella costulata. See Scalaris (Acirsa) costulata. Turritella? costulata. See Cerithiopsis costulata, Turritella erosa 248 Turritella interrupta. See Turbonilla interrupta var. fulvocincta. Turritella lactea. See Turritella reticulata. Turritella polaris. See Turritella erosa. Turritella reticulata 2i8 Turritellopsis acicula 248 Turtonia minuta ' 244 Turtonia nitida. See Turtonia minuta. Typhlocolax acutus 236 Typhlolepta acuta. See Typhlocolax acutus. U Umbonula verrucosa 242 Unciola irrorata 2,52 Urosalpinx cinerea 248 Urticina callosa. See Actionostola callosa. Urticina crassicornis 235 Urticina felina. See Urticina crassicornis. Urticina nodosa. See Actinauge verrillii. Utriculus canaliculatus. See Tornatina canaliculata. Utriculus gouldii. See Retusa gouldii. Utriculus lima. See Philine lima. Utriculus nitidulus. See Retusa nitidula. Utriculus pertenuis. See Retusa pertenuis. Uvigerina angulosa 231 Uvigerina pygmaea 231 Whiteaves’ Catalogue. 20 111 111 111 111 161 161 174 174 174 139 64 102 220 177 39 10 10 294 DEPARTMEI^T OF THE RATAL SERTIGE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 V Vaginulina spinigera Valvulina conica Velutella crypitospira Velutina haliotoides. See Velutina laevigata. Velutina laevigata Velutina (Limneria) undata Velutina zonata. See Velutina (Limneria) undata Venericardia borealis Venus astartoides. See Liocyma fluctuosa. Venus castanea. See Astarte oastanea. Venus compressa. See Astarte banksii. Venus compressa. See Astarte compressa. Venus fluctuosa. See Liocyma fluctuosa. Venus fragilis. See Macoma balthica. Venus gemma. See Tottenia gemma. Venus is’landica. See Cyprina islandica and Serripes groenlandicus Venus mercenaria Venus minuta. See Turtonia minuta. Venus montacuti. See Astarte banksii. Venus montagui. See Astarte banksii. Vermilia serrula Verneuilina polystropha Vertumnus serratus. See Acanthonotozoma serratum. Virgularia flnmarchica. See Balticina flnmarchica. Virgularia grandiflora. See Anthoptilum grandiflorum. Virgularia lyungmani Virgulina squamosa Volumitra groenlandica Volutopsis norvegica Volvaria alba. See Cylichna alba. Volvaria canaliculata. See Tornatima, canaliculta. Vorticella bolteni. See Boltenia bolteni. W Waldheimia cranium. See Terebratalia spitzbergensis. X Xestoleberis depressa Xylophaga dorsalis. . Y Yoldia angularis. See Megayoldia thraciaeformis. Yoldia frigida. See Yoldiella frigida. Yoldia limatula Yoldia lucida. See Yoldiella lucida. Yoldia myalis Yoldia O'besa. See Yoldiella lucida. Yoldia sapotilla Yoldia thraciaeformis. See Megayoldia thraciaeformis. Yoldiella frigida Yoldiella lucida Z Zetes spinosa. See Achelia spinosa. Zirfaea crispata 245 151 Zirphaea crispata. See Zirfaea crispata. Zoanthus incrustatus. See Epizoanthus incrustatus. Zygodactyla groenlandica. See I’olycanna groenlandica. 245 125 245 126 245 125 245 126 245 126 250 217 245 151 244 135 210 71 231 10 235 34 231 10 248 248 188 Bathymetric Whiteaves’ Tables. Catalogue. 231 231 248 10 10 167 248 248 166 167 244 135 8 GEORGE V SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a A. 1918 XV HYDROGRAPHY IN PASSAMAQUODDY BAY AND VICINITY, NEW BRUNSWICK. (By Professor Alexander Vachon_, B.A., L.Ph., etc., Laval University, Quebec.) The laws that regulate the distribution of the plankton in the sea furnish a problem of paramount importance in the progressive industry of fisheries. Qualitative and quantitative determinations of the plankton are made at selected hydrographic stations, since the plankton is followed by multitudes of fishes which live on it, and those fishes are followed by others which serve as food for men. As the plankton, which regulates, to a great extent, the migrations of the fish, is itself at the mercy of the chemical, physical and mechanical conditions of the sea, it is easily understood of what economical importance a correct knowledge of those con- ditions will prove. We speak of the migrations of the herrings and sardines; they are the same as those of the plankton which serve as food for them, and the presence of the plankton is ruled by depth, light, temperature, salinity, pressure and density. temperature. The heat of the atmosphere, emanating from the sun, penetrates the water, and is attenuated according as the depth increases. At the surface, the temperature of the water is almost as changeable as that of the air adjoining it, the variations of which find their repercussion in the contiguous liquid, although somewhat mitigated. Cold in winter, warmer in summer, the surface water expresses the alterations in the tem- perature of the air. Therefore, in summer, the sun’s rays heat the water at the surface, and to a depth of a few meters. The difference between the temperature of the day and that of the night ceases to be perceptible at a small depth ; in order to find the region which is insensible to summer and winter variations, we must go down further. At about one thousand metres, the secular variations are imperceptible. Then begins the zone where the temperature never varies; by a slow and regular progression, the tem- perature grows colder and colder until it is only about one or two degrees above zero. This low temperature is found even in the tropical regions, where the scorching rays of the sun beam constantly upon the surface. Ordinarily, the water gradually becomes cooler, from the surface to the bottom, because, apart from the effect of the sun’s heat at the top, cold water is more dense and goes to the bottom; but, in the polar regions, and where there are cold currents, we sometimes find an area of colder water between two warmer regions, and this state of unstable equilibrium, where the water is cooler, more salt and more dense, affords very interesting information. Light does not penetrate into the water further than two or three hundred metres from the surface, hence, no green plants are found at such depths, as light is neces- sary for the decomposition of carbon dioxide which is the bread of the vegetable kingdom. When w^ater is heated, it goes to the surface; if it be concentrated, it seeks a lower level; should it cool for some reason or other, by the atmosphere or by evapora- tion, it also descends. Everything influences the temperature of the superficial water, the cold, polar currents as well as the hot currents coming from the equatorial regions. We understand why it is that the water is so cold at the bottom of the ocean, since cold water descends, and being free from the heating influence of the sun in those depths, where the light of day never reaches, and, on account of the feeble power of water to conduct heat, the temperature of the lower regions of the ocean never varies. Kelvin and Wegemann made calculations concerning the conduction of heat through water and came to the conclusion that this conduction is practically negli- gible. With a temperature of 30° C. at the surface and the water perfectly still, it would take one hundred years for any heat to be perceived at a depth of a hundred 295 Metres TemjDerature Sections. tf/4-.O U/Z.o UH.O c ti/O.O- t=9.0 - t=8.0 - t-7.0 - e-6.0 HYDROGRAPHY IN PAS8AMAQV0DDY BAY 297 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a metres. Therefore, in practice, heat propagates through the water only by the move- ments of the waves and currents. Looking over our records one can see that at the same depths in different stations, the temperature gradually becomes higher as the season advances, and in the month of duly, at Prince station 5, we found a temperature of 4°. 9 C. at 100 fathoms or 182 metres. It is an easy matter to find out the temperature of the air or of the surface water ; the thermometer can be read directly as soon as the expansion or contraction of the liquid in the tube is in equilibrium with its surroundings. However, it is not thus when one has to measure the exact temperature of a layer of water situated at a depth of a few hundred or thousand feet. Between the surface and the deep layer to be examined, there may be and, as a matter of fact^ there are other layers that are colder or warmer. Even if the thermometer is sent down and left long enough to indicate the temperature of the water at a measured depth, when it is brought up to be read, the mercurial column, by going through regions of different temperatures, will change in length ; it will contract, if it meets colder water and will expand if it comes in con- tact with warmer regions, it is impossible, therefore, to thus get the temperature of the lower regions of the sea with an ordinary thermometer. Besides, the thermometer is subjected, in the lower regions, to the enormous pressure of the upper layers, that of one atmosphere for every ten metres ; even if the instrument is not broken, it will be crushed; the diameter of the tube getting smaller, the mercury will indicate a higher temperature for the same expansion, and, therefore, the reading of the thermometer will be too high. It took almost two centuries to resolve these perplexing problems. Without going into details about the different suggestions worked out to reach a solution of the problems, suffice it to say that the best of all the thermometers that have been invented so far for taking the temperature of the lower regions is the Hegretti-Zambra reversing thermometer; this is the one- we used in our determina- tions. Hegretti and Zambra invented this thermometer in 1878 and it has undergone no essential changes since that time. It is noteworthy to remark here that in this type there is a narrowing of the tube just above the bulb and, when the thermometer is placed with the bulb pointing downwards, the mercury fills the tube above the nar- rowing to a greater or less extent according to the temperature. If the thermometer is tipped over, either by the closing of the water-bottle, as it happens with the Petter- son-Nansen bottle, or while a messenger is sent down the wire, as in the case of the Eknian reversing apparatus, the mercury breaks off at the narrowing and the mercury which was above this point sinks down to the opposite end of the tube and fills it to a certain height; a scale on the tube thus gives the temperature at the time the ther- mometer was turned over : that is called the temperature in situ. The length of the broken thread of mercury varies somewhat in passing through water of higher or lower temperature and this change is calculated when the temperature of the mercury is known at the time of the reading, and this is the reason why there is always with the apparatus a second ordinary thermometer that gives the reading temperature so that the correction may be made. In order that the thermometer may be able to withstand the pressure of the water, it is placed inside a strong glass tube. salinity. Since there is no element that is absolutely insoluble, every element is found to a certain degree in sea-water. By very accurate analysis, elements which one would not expect to find have been discovered in it ; common metals, such as iron, manganese and zinc, as well as precious metals, like gold and silver are found in sea-water. Those rarer metals, being present only in infinitesimal quantities, are not detected by the ordinary methods of analysis. The water of the ocean evaporates, condenses and falls again upon the earth in the form of rain; it washes the earth, oozes through it and by the streams and rivers is carried back to where it started from. This water, coming in contact with all sorts of 38a— 20 Metres O 25 Salinity -Sections 5 to /5 zo HYDROGRAPHY IN PA8SAMAQU0DDY BAY 299 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a substances, takes up all that it can dissolve and carries it down into the ocean and, though the quantity of a substance which goes into solution may be comparatively small, we understand how it is that the sea contains such diverse elements. The two predominant elements which are found in the water of the sea are chlorine and sodium. It seems logical to admit that the sea was always salt since we find in the ocean of to-day certain shells which require a definite salinity and which were quite abundant in the Cambrian seas. Dittmar gives the following composition and percentage of the salts in sea- water : — Sodium chloride, Na Cl. . . . Magnesium chloride, Mg Cl2- Magnesium sulphate. Mg SO4 Calcium sulphate, Ca SO4. . . Potassium sulphate, K2 SO4. Calcium carbonate, Ca CO3. . Magnesium bromide. Mg Br2 35-000 27-213 gr. per litre. 3-807 “ 1-658 “ 1-260 “ 0-863 “ 0-123 “ 0-076 “ Thoulet gives a somewhat different composition, though the amount of total salts is much the same, 35-0631 gr. per thousand grams of sea-water: — Sodium chloride, NaCl 27-3726 gr. per kilog. Potassium chloride, K Cl 0-5921 “ Rubidium chloride, Rb Cl 0-0190 “ Calcium sulphate, Ca SO^ 1-3229 “ Magnesium sulphate. Mg SO^ 2-2434 “ “ Magnesium chloride. Mg CI2 3-3625 “ Magnesium bromide. Mg Br2 0-0547 “ “ Calcium metaphosphate, Ca (POs)2 0-0156 “ “ Calcium bicarbonate, Ca C2 O?* 0-0625 “ “ Iron bicarbonate, Fe C2 O3 0-0149 “ “ From the analyses that have been made of a great many samples of sea-water, it can be stated that there are about 35 grams of salt in a thousand grams of sea-water. This amount is greater in some regions, for instance in the tropical regions and in the gulf stream, where evaporation is more intense. It is much less in other parts, espe- cially near the continental shores where the flow of fresh water from the coast lessens the proportion of salt. For instance, in my determinations, I found as low as 15-13 gr. per thousand at Prince Station 18, 19-18 per thousand at Station 20, 18-35 per thousand at Station 21, 15-63 per thousand at Station 22, etc. This is easily explained by the fact that there is at those points a mixture of fresh water from the coast. However, the average amount of salt in the ocean is about 35 gr. per thousand parts by weight. In the percentage of salts given by Dittmar and Thoulet, the acids and bases have been arbitrarily combined. Still it is very probable that in the water the salts are not found as indicated. The elements and acid radicals are found by analysis, but nothing tells us how they exist in solution. The dissolved substances mainly exist as ions, and from the freezing point and boiling point of sea-water, we calculate the ionic dissociation to be about 90 per cent; thus, only one-tenth of the total solids are present in the water as salts. It would be better, therefore, to write the composition of the solids in sea-water, as it is given by Dr. Johan Hjort: — Na 10-722 parts per 1000 Mg 1-316 Ca 0-420 K 0-382 Cl 19-324 SO4 2-696 CO3 0-074 Br 0-066 35-000 30-64% 3-76% 1*20% 1-09% 55-21% 7-70% 0-21% 0-19% 100-00% From the foregoing, one can readily perceive that the salinity of sea-water is not identical everywhere in the ocean; it varies in different regions and at different depths. 38a— 20^ Prince stations archipelago J^ro^esjor 1/acAo/r, /y^c//~o^/-o^A^. HYDROGRAPHY IN PASSAMAQUODDY BAY 301 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a A necessary condition to make a determination of the salinity of sea-water is to secure a sample of water collected at a certain date in a certain place, at the surface or at a known depth, which is guaranteed free from mixture with different water and which has in no way evaporated. The surface water can be collected in a bucket and hauled up. The glass bottle in which the water is to be preserved for analysis is rinsed with a portion of the sample, then filled, well stoppered and it can be kept as long as the bottle is almost completely filled and hermetically closed. From July 14 to July 25 my samples were kept in Imperial pint bottles; after the latter date I used citrate of magnesia bottles. I took the temperature of the sur- face from the water in the bucket by means of a Centigrade thermometer graduated in tenths of a degree and whose accuracy I had verified beforehand. To collect samples from below the surface, a great number of methods have been invented. At first, an ordinary stoppered bottle was sent down to a certain depth by means of a weight, and, at the desired depth, the bottle was opened and filled Avith water by pulling a cord attached to the stopper. In drawing it up, very little water from the surface layers could mix with the sample. The Petterson-Nansen bottle, which we used for collecting our samples from July 14 to July 25, can isolate a sample of water at any depth. This bottle is sent down open, the lid being suspended in the upper part of the frame and held by a spring. We used the reversing thermometer attached to the frame of the bottle. We left the bottle at the desired depth for five minutes so that the thermometer could have time to accurately mark the temperature of the water in situ. A messenger was then sent down along the wire; this messenger unhooks the lid; the weight, which hangs below the apparatus, clasps the whole thing together and closes the bottle. This is composed of a series of metallic cylinders to insulate the water and a thermometer can be placed on the inside; this thermometer, which, however, is but slightly affected by varying temperatures as the bottle is pulled up, was not used in our determinations. When we used the Petterson-Nansen bottle, the depth was taken in fathoms, as the meter-wheel had not arrived at the station, but, in my tables, the fathoms are expressed in metres. From July 25, we used the Nansen reversing bottles for collecting our samples and the meter- wheel or determining the depth. The Nansen bottle has attached to it a thermometer which is tipped over with the bottle by means of a messenger. We allowed this bottle to remain at least three minutes in the water before pulling it up for a reading. A number of these bottles can be fastened along the line; a messenger is hooked below each bottle, except the lowest one ; this messenger is released when the bottle is tipped over by means of a messenger sent from above; the result is that the next bottle is reversed ; this releases another messenger and so on. By this apparatus, a number of samples can be taken at the same time at different depths and the bottles are not so heavy and clumsy as the Petterson-Nansen bottle. The samples of water collected must afterwards be analysed. In such analysis the halogens are titrated with silver nitrate and the results given as grams of chlorine per thousand grams of water. We have seen that there are many substances in sea-water, and, though the pro- portion of salts varies from one place to another, the relative proportion of the different elements is about the same everywhere; thus, when the quantity of chlorine has been accurately determined, we have the proportion of total salts in the sample examined. Mohr’s method is used for the determination of chlorine. If a neutral or slightly alkaline solution of a chloride, bromide or iodide, in which there is a little potassium chromate comes in contact with a neutral solution of silver nitrate a white precipitate is formed as long as there is a trace of halide in solution. Thus, in sea-water, the bromine and small amount of iodine present are precipitated along with the chlorine, but the whole is calculated in grams of chlorine per thousand grams of water. As soon 302 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE iV, A. 1918 as the last trace of halide is precipitated, the potassium chromate indicates the end of the reaction by forming a red precipitate with the silver nitrate. If the strength of the silver nitrate has already been determined with a solution of chloride of known strength, the amount of halides in the unknown solution or in the sea-water that is analysed can be found by simple proportion. The solution of known strength which is used in hydrography for standardizing the silver nitrate solution is the sample of normal water ” which is furnished in closed glass tubes by the International Council. The amount of chlorine is marked on the tube; the sample I used contained 19-386 parts of chlorine per thousand grams. When possible, it is well to have a few bottles of the “ normal water ” in order to occasionally titrate the silver nitrate solution ; the amount of chlorine indicated on the tube is not absolutely reliable after the tube is two-thirds empty. As Doctor Huntsman could only obtain, last summer, and with considerable trouble, one tube of “ normal water,” we had to be satisfied with that. Here I desire to express my gratitude to the Biological Board, and especially Professor Macallum, for the opportunity of taking up this study, to Dr. Huntsman, the zealous and active curator of the Biological Station at St. Andrew’s, who gave so generously both of his time and of his experience to help me in every possible way in my work, and to Sir George Garneau, professor of analytical chemistry in Laval University, who helped me in the salinity determinations. For accurate sea-water analysis, a special burette is desirable : the ordinary burette is too wide and too short for the required accuracy. The reading should be certain to a hundredth part of a c.c., which is difficult with the ordinary burette. Besides, the “ drainage error ” is greater than in the special one, the upper part of which is an ungraduated bulb that terminates in a fine jet. The lower part of this . burette is a narrow tube graduated in hundredths of a c.c. At the present time it is most difficult, not to say impossible, to obtain one of those special burettes. Dr. Hunts- ^ man was able to get one from Dr. Mathews, of the Plymouth Marine Biological labor- ■ atory, England, but, most unfortunately, it was broken when it reached me. Two ' others, made to order by the Eimer and Amend Company also arrived in a broken ^ state. We hope to be fully equipped with all the special apparatus in the near future. ^ DENSITY. The density of sea-water can be taken with a pycnometer, or else with an areo- . meter, at constant temperature; the second method is less accurate. But the densities, ^ though they may be accurately determined by either of the methods, do not give the ) exact density of the water in situ, where it possessed a certain temperature and was I compressed by a mass of water. The density of sea-water is inversely proportionate to the temperature and directly proportionate to the salinity; the lower the tempera- « ture and the higher the percentage of salts, the heavier the water. When both the ' temperature and the salinity of a sample of water are known, the specific gravity may easily be calculated by means of Knudsen’s tables. When I reached the Biological Station, I began my work by making salinity deter- minations of samples of water which had been collected a j’ear before in St. Mary’s Bay and the Annapolis Basin. The Imperial pint bottles that contained those samples l were not hermetically closed; there was a deposit of salt on the covers and frequently on the outside of the lx)ttles. Supposing the water had evaporated, one would expect a high percentage of salts; nevertheless, the residts are low, and though I give them in the tables, I can, in no way, guarantee their accuracy. There are other results obtained with samples taken at the same stations in September and October. The other samples of water were collected on the given dates at stations chosen by Dr. Huntsman, where a study of the plankton is carried on along with the hydrography, j HYDROGRAPHY IN PASSAMAQUODDY BAY 303 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a At Prince Station 1, we find a higher temperature and lower salinity at 30 metres than at 20 which showing the water at this point was in a state of unstable equili- brium, a layer of higher density being above one of lower density. As a general rule, such strange results were obtained with many of the water-samples collected later in the season. Por instance, at Prince Station 4, the results are normal until September 15. Then we find a salinity of 31 -IS Voo at 35 metres when the salinity at 30 metres was as high as 32-5^ Voo, giving a density of 23'-96 for the first and 25*10 for the second. At the same station, on October 3, we obtained a salinity of 30*73 Voo at 20 metres when that of the surface was 31-66 V°°* The same consideration can be made concerning Station 6, when we find on September 15 a temperature of 10-17 and a salinity of 31*67 Voo at 35 metres whereas at ’30 metres the temperature was 10*12° and the salinity 31*69 Voo. As one can see by the tables, a number of water samples, col- lected at Station 6 in October, were lost, so we cannot say whether the extraordinary result mentioned is accidental. It will be seen also that at Prince station 6 the salmity varies greatly with the tide, especially at the surface and it is easy to under- stand that it should be so on account of the flow of fresh water from the Ste. Croix river, as station 6 is located in the mouth of the river, between the Biological Station and Bobbinston. At station 9 on September 15 we find a zigzag of temperatures and salinities ; the temperature rises somewhat from 10 to 20 metres while the salinity lowers; at 50 metres the salinity is 31*21 Voo when we find 32*15 Voo at 40 metres, the salinity afterwards rises normally to the bottom but the temperature rises also; how- ever, from 50 metres down, the density increases in a normal manner. On October 3, we find at the same station (20 metres) a density of 23-88 between 24*34 at 10 and 24-40 at 30 metres. At station 16 we get a salinity of 32-63 Voo at the surface, 32-07 Voo at 10 metres and 31*47 Voo at 20 metres. At 30 metres the salinity rises somewhat, but so does the temperature; there is another decrease in salinity at 40 metres. The high percentage of salts in the surface water of station 17 can be explained by the fact that the sample was collected in Yarmouth Harbour, where the depth is only 13 metres, and, therefore, the water is easily mixed. [ All the bottles, except one, were broken, which contained the samples collected at Station 20; it is unfortunate as the temperatures predicted interesting figures for the salinity. From a depth of 10 metres down the temperature rises, 6*08° at 10 metres, 6*43 at 15 m., then 8-22, 10*98, 11*74, 11*93, 12*00. Perhaps,.the ,jipper layers 'had been first cooled down to a certain depth, and that they had begun to get warmer again as the air temperature rose. But a fact worthy of attention in this particular ca^e is that the temperature of the surface water is 15*69° when the air temperature is 11*80°. At station 21 there is also a decrease of temperature from the surface to a depth of 20 metres, but there is a rise of temperature from 30 metres to the bottom.. However, at this station, as the salinity rises from the upper layers to the bottom, the increase of density is also normal. The temperatures taken at station 24 deserve special attention from the fact that there is very little difference between the surface temperature and that of the bottom, 9-37° at the surface and 9*29° at 55 metres. From 9*37° at the surface we get 9*32°, 9*31°, 9*28°; then a rise 9-129°, 9*30°; a slight fall to 9*28° and 9*29° at the bottom. These temperatures were taken at 9*20 a.m. The same day, at 5.45 in the afternoon, we have somewhat equivalent results, but the low salinity, instead of being at 50 metres, as in the forenoon when the tide was high is at 40 metres, at low tide. Two of the samples collected at station 24, September 23, 5.45 p.m. were lost; the others gave veiy extraordinary salinity results. The highest salinity, 32*37 Voo is at the surface. We found 32*29 Voo at 10 metres, 31*28 Voo at 40 metres and 31*13 Voo at 50 metres. A glance at the results given for stations 25 and 27 shows that at those stations also the density of the water was higher at the surface than at a certain depth. At station 25 we find a salinity of 32*47 Voo at 10 metres and only 31*54 Voo ten metres lower and so forth and so on. ti9 CD > < o n C z o -< o Co Q :v o' 0) 'uoLfooy^ EYDROGRAPEY IN PASSAMAQUODDY BAY 305 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a The following samples were collected by Mr. W. H. Chase, of Acadia University, a year before I reached the station. (The stations are indicated on a chart at the laboratory, at St. Andrews) : — Date. Station. Depth. Salinity S. %„. St. Mary's bay. No. 1 Bottom 29-18 „ 7, 1915, It 31-20 M 7, 1915 II II 3 It 31-89 „ 7, 1915 II 30-76 „ 7', 1915 30-70 „ 7' l.-)15 31-47 „ 7, 1915 31-48 „ 8' 1915 vt ti 8 30 -78 8, 1915 1! II 9 30 -18 •• 7, 1915 M „ 10 30 76 „ 13, 1915 „ „ 11 30 06 „ 8,1915 II II 12 It 31 45 M 13. 1915 II II 13 II 30-80 M 8,1915 II I. 14 il 29-86 .. 8 19K5. II II 15 30 -91 8, 1915 It It Ifi 30-77 „ 13. 1915 M „ 1? 30 -18 „ 13' 1915 „ „ 18 II 29-99 „ 13, 1915 If It 19 29 -86 n 1.3, 191.5 1. II 20. . II 30 25 „ 13, 1915 It II 21 II , • » . . ,30-38 M 13,1915 II II 22 . . 30-78 M 23, 1915 Annapolis basin, No. 25 Surface 29-99 M 2.3, 1915 II II 25 27 ■ 3 metres 30-40 „ 24, 1915 II II 28 Surface 30-52 „ 24, 1915 II II 28 Bottom 30 -.53 „ 23, 191.5 II It 29 Sui face 30-63 „ 23, 1915 ,1 „ 29 Bottom (6 '3 m. ). 30 -74 „ 23, 1915 II „ 30 II (46m.). 29 79 „ 24, 1915 Surface 30 05 21, 1915 II II 31 Bottom 30-77 June 22, 1915 Black Kock 72 ‘7 metres . . 26 -69 July 14, 1916 Off Wilson’s beach Siirfa.ce 30-88 t°=8-8 306 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 SAMPLES “Prince ” Stations. No. Locality. Position (vide chart). Latitude. 1 Longitude. Bottom. 1 Friar Roads, just south Coffin Ledge buoy. Bald Head bears Eg N. Deer Id. Point bears N. X Wi W. 44° 54' 27" N. 66° 58' 11" W. Hard. Rockj'. 1 II II It II II 1 II n II II II II If 1 II II II II II II II 1 II II II II II II II 1 II II II II II H If 1 II It II II If 1 II II II II II 1 II II tt II II II 1 II II II II II It II 1 II II II It II II II 1 II II If II If II II 1 M If II II II II 1 II II II II It II II 1 II It 11 It It II II 1 II II II II It II II 1 II II II II It 1 II II II II II II 11 1 II II 11 It I* 1 II It II II II 1 II It II If II II If 1 l» II II II II If II 1 II II tt II II If II 1 II tt II c II II II 1 II II II II If II II 1 II II II If ♦ 1 II 2 Bay of Fundy, off Head Harbour Id. North end of Head Har- bour Id. bears N.W. h W. |mile. Scott Head bears S.W. x S. g S., miles. 44° 56' 58" N. 66° 53' 0" W. Soft mud. HYDROGRAPHY IN PASSAMAQUODDY BAY 307 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a CX)LLECTED. Date. Hour. Depth in Metres. Air Temperature t° C. Tide. Wind. Sky. Depth of determations in metres. Water Temperature t* C. j Chlorine. Cl. %,. Salinity. S. %„. Density. 25 H If II ,1 ,1 ,, 25 m. 9-57 „ „ il M .31 12.50 p.m. 31 m. 14-91 h hour to ,, Clear. Sur- 14-91 17 03 30 77 22-73 .. 31 M If high tide. face, 20 m. 10 07 17-48 31-59 24-30 „ 31 It „ „ 1, I, „ 30 m. 10 01 17-49 31-61 24-33 Sept. 15 5.00 p.m. 36 m. 13-88 h ebb. S.E., Hazy. Sur- 10 95 17-25 31-17 23-82 Gray- „ 15 5.15 p.m. II light breeze . II face. 10 m. 10 26 17-42 31-48 24-19 ish. .. 15 5.00 p.m. II II 1, II „ 20 m. 10-07 18-02 32 56 25-07 „ 15 II ,1 II II ,, .30 m. 9-98 18-03 32-57 25-10 „ 15 M ,1 II 1, „ 35 m. 9-98 17-23 31-13 23-96 „ Oct. 3 10,20 a.m. 31 m. 13-20 Low. Calm, Clear. Sur- 10-60 17 52 31-66 24-28 It u 3 „ „ II face. 10 m. 9-96 sam pie lo st. „ 3 II If 1, II „ II 20 m. 9 83 17-01 30 73 23-71 it 3 ” " " " ” It 30 m. 9-82 17-60 31-81 24 -.56 " M O M 16 12.53 p.m. 30 m. 12-41 2^ hours to Moder, Cloudy. Sur- 9-35 sam pie lo st. n 16 „ „ high water. tl ate S.W. face. 20 m. 9-14 If II M 16 II If II It II „ 30 m. 8-98 M II 21 2.07 p.m. 27 m. 13-38 4 hour flood. Strong Cloudy, Sur- 9-32 no water samp le. 21 II II „ S.W. rain. face. 10 m. 9-18 „ It ?i „ 21 II „ „ tt ,, It 20 m. 9-08 ,, ,, II II 21 II If ,1 II „ ,, 26 m. 8-88 „ ,, ,, II 27 9.16 a.m. 30 m. 6 21 1 hour flood. Moder, Clear. Sur- 8-51 „ It ,, Gre’n- II 27 It .1 „ II N.W. II face. 20 m. 8-81 II ish. II 27 If II " It 11 30 m. 8-80 " II " It July 25 9.00 a.m. 90 m. 12-80 High. S.W. Clear. Sur- 8-50 17 42 31 47 24-28 II 25 II II It breeze. face. 28 m. 7-40 17-48 .31 59 24-70 II 25 II II II It It „ 45 . . . 6-90 17-61 31-82 24-97 1, 25 II II II II It ,, 65 m. 6-40 17-61 .31-82 25-03 II 25 II II II It II „ 85 m. 5 90 17-69 31-96 25-21 II 16 1.25 p.m. II It II It „ 10 m. 9.02 17.49 31.60 24.49 II 16 1.30 p.m. II II 1* H V 25 m. 8.33 17.54 ,31-70 24.66 II 16 1 35 p.m. II It „ It 50 m. 8.31 17.62 31.84 24.80 II 16 II II II It ,1 „ 75 m. 7.92 17.62 31.84 24.85 1, 16 f II It It II „ 100 m. 6.64 17.87 32.29 25.37 II 16 II II II It „ „ no m. 6.40 17.92 32 38 25.45 Sept. 18 11.09 a.m. 100 m. 13-12 Low tide. Calm. Clear. Sur- 11.30 16.70 ,30.18 22.99 Gray. II 18 11’24 a.m. II If face. 10 m. 10 08 16.92 30., 58 23.53 II 18 " If tt II M II 20 m. 9.74 17.02 30.75 23.76 II BEPABTME~NT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 SAMPLES “Prince ” Stations. No. Locality. Position (vide chart). 5 Bay of Fundy, between Head Harbour and the Southern Wolves. Head Harbour Lt. bears N.W. by W. I W., 3| miles. Swallow tail Lt. bears a little W. of S. miles. Latitude. Longitude. Bottom. 44° 56' 48'' N. 66° 48' 41" W. Soft mud. 6, 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Ste. Croix River, be- tween Biological Sta- tion and Robbinston. Biological Station bears E, I S., of a mile. Little Dochet Id. bears N. by W. i W., 2g miles. 45° 4' 49" N. 67° 5' 53" W. Fairly hard mud. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6 6. 6. 6. 6. 6 6. 6. 6. HYDROGRAFllY IX RASSAMAQUODDY BAY 313 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a COLLECTED— C7o?i. Date. Hour. Depth in metres. Air temperature t° C. Tide. Wind. Sky. Depth of determinations in metres. Temperature t° C. Chlorine. Cl. %„. I Salinity. S. %„. Density, at. Colour of water. 1916. Sept. 18 11 13 a.m. 120 m. 12-00 1 hour to s.w. Hazy- 25 m. 9.55 17.17 31.02 23.95 Gray . 18 tl high tide. breeze choppy . 30 m. 9.51 17.71 32.00 24.72 „ 18 II 1, „ „ tl 40 m. 9.32 17.72 32.02 24.75 It ,, 18 11 . 00 a. m. It II If tt !• 50 m. 9.08 17.84 32.23 24.98 II II 18 II II 1, tt „ tt 75 m. 8.26 18.02 32.56 25.36 tt II 18 II II II 1, II It 100 m. 7.61 18.04 32.60 25.47 tt Oct. 1 9.04 a.m. 99^1 m. 10-4 Half ebb. Light Hazy. Sur- 9.62 17.40 31.45 24.27 tl 4 9,18 a.m. II W. face. 10 m. 9.48 17.53 31.68 24.47 Gre’n- ish. II 4 9.06 a.m. tt It II II II 20 m. 9.43 17.77 32.10 24.81 „ II 4 tf II I, It tt 1, 30 m. 9.36 17.78 32 13 24.84 „ U 4 " It 10-40 It It 40 m. 9.21 17.78 32-13 24.85 It „ 4 8.51 a.m. ft „ tt ,, ,, 50 m. 9.07 17 82 32.20 24.95 It II 4 II tl ,1 ,1 II ,1 75 m. 8.85 17.82 32.20 24.97 It II 4 II II 1, tt 1, 1, 99 m. 7.98 17.99 32.50 25.34 ft July 17 5.10 p.m. 31 m. 15-30 1 hours ebb. S.W. Cloudy. Sur- 13.15 15.69 28.36 21.27 It It 17 It II It face. 9.10 m 8.80 16.92 30.58 23.75 M 17 4.50 p.m. M II 3 hrs. 40 m. ,, It 18.30 8.30 17.12 30.94 24 07 M 17 4 . 10 p . m. If II ebb. 3 hours ebb. II II m. 27.40 8.30 17.22 31.10 24.21 It 18 9.15 a.m. 14 00 1 hour flood. Calm. Foggy. lit. Sur- 12.10 15.68 28.33 21.45 If 18 It 1 tf face. 9.10 m 9.60 16.92 30.57 23 61 tf 18 9.00 a.m. tt It 45 min. flood It " 18.30 8 70 17.05 30.81 23.95 11 18 8.45 a.m. tt 1 hour flood. ,, II m. 25.60 8.60 17.08 30.87 24.00 I? 18 11 30 a.m. 15-10 3 hours flood It It m. Sur- 11.50 16.60 *29.99 22.82 ft 18 It tt tt 11 11 tt face. 9.10 m 8.60 16.96 30.65 23.83 M 18 11.15 a.m. It M tt It It 18.30 8.10 17.22 31.11 24.24 18 11.30 a.m. It tt If tl m, 27.40 8.10 17.23 31.14 24.25 tt 18 2.35 p.m. „ 16-30 High tide. If tt in. Sur- 12.80 16.70 30.17 22.73 tt 18 tl tl face. 9.10 m 8.95 16.96 30.64 23.76 18 2.00 p.m. . 31 „ 16-*30 It tt If • . 27-40 8-10 17 20 31.08 24-22 tl 26 4.30 p.m. . 31 1, 21 00 Low tide 1, Cloudy . m. Sur- 13-40 15-34 27-72 20-71 tt 26 4.30 II . 31 II 21-00 circ. face. 10 m. 9-84 16 55 29-90 23 04 It 26 4.30 1, . 31 ,1 21-00 „ t» • • It . . 15 m. 9-40 16 87 30-48 23-55 Aug. 26 4.30 1, . 31 II 21-00 „ M It . . 25 m. 8-80 17 -10 30-90 23-99 10 11.45 a.m. . 30 „ 18-50 4 flood N. W. ■ Clear. . . Sur- 12-65 15-65 28-28 21-33 tl 10 11.45 II . 30 ,1 18-50 breeze. face. 10 m. 9-60 16-93 30-59 23 62 It 10 11.45 „ . 30 1, 18-50 „ I, •1 20 m. 9-30 17 -14 30-98 23-96 tt 10 11.45 1, . 30 II 18-50 It .... ,, It 25 m. 9-37 17-17 31-02 23-98 tl 14 6.00 a.m. . 28 ,1 11-90 Low tide. . . Strong Cloudy . Sur- 10 95 16-01 28-94 22-10 1 N. W. face 38a— 21 314 DEPARTMENT OF TEE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 SAMPLES “ Prince ” Stations. No, Locality. Position (vide chart). 6 Ste. Croix River be- tween Biological Station and Robbin- ston. Biological Station bears E. I S., of a mile Little Dochet Id. bears N. by VV. ^ \V. miles. 45^ 6. 5. 6. 6. Latitude. ° 4' 49" Longitude. Bottom. N. 67° 5' 53" W Fairly hard mud. 6 6 6 6 , . . . 6.. . 6 6. . .. 6.... 6. ... 6.... 6... 6. ... 6 .. 6.... 6.... 6 ... 6.... 6.... 6... 6.... 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. <). <). 6. 6 6 r, 6 6 HYDROGRAPHY lY PASSAMAQUODDY BAY 315 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a COLLECTED— Cow. Date. Hour. ! Depth in Metre.s. Air Temperature t° C. Tide. Wind. Sky. Depth of determinations in metres. Water Temperature t° C. 1 Chlorine. Cl. %,. Salinity. S%„. Density, at. Colour of Water. 1916. i Ang; 14 1 6.00 a.m. . 28 m. 11-90 Low tide Strong.. Cloudy . 18-30 10-95 16 01 28-94 22 10 ! circ . m . 14 6.00 .1 . 28 11-90 II II 10 m. ..)-13 16-78 30 33 23 33 tf 14 6.00 I, . 28 „ 11 90 II II II 20 m. 9 91 16-98 30-69 23-65 tl 14 6.00 II . 28 „ 11 90 II 1, II '25 m. 9-68 17-12 30-93 23-86 ff 14 12.00 p.m. . 33 It 12-20 High tide. , ,, II Sur- 10-40 16-96 30-64 23-51 face. n 14 12.00 ,1 . 33 ,, 12-20 „ II ... 10 m. 9-70 17 03 30 77 23 75 ir 14 12.00 II . 33 1, 12-20 II II II 20 m. 9-55 17-18 31-03 23-97 M 14 12.00 „ . 33 ,, 12-20 ... II II 25 m 9 50 17-24 31-15 24 05 „ 14 12.00 1, . 33 12 20 II ... 1, II ... 30 m. 9 48 17 24 31-15 24 -06 18 8.30 a.m. . 29 ,, 13-80 i hour to South Hazy .. Sur- 11-75 16 07 29 04 23-19 low tide. breeze. face. 10-38 16-83 30 40 23-34 It 18 8.30 ,1 . 29 ,, 13-80 1, .1 II 10 m. 10-09 17 -13 30 f)5 23 8? It 18 8.30 II . 29 „ 13 80 1, 1, II 20 m. 10-06 17 -15 .30 98 23-83 tt 18 8.30 .1 . 29 II 13-80 ,, II II ■25 ni. 14-22 15-62 2S-22 20-96 tf 22 1.10 p.m. . 28 „ 22 -.38 Lo.w tide. . . Calm . . . .1 Sur- face. tl 22 1.10 ]). m. . 28 22-38 II II 10 m. 10 51 17 03 30-78 2.^ -59 If 22 1. 10 p.m. 28 ,, 22-38 II ■1 20 m. 9-83 17 24 31 16 24-01 tt 22 1 10 p.m. 28 „ 22-38 II II . . II 25 m. 9-78 17-30 31-26 24-11 It 23 8.20 a.m. . 32 ,, 14-90 High tide. . . S.E. II Sur- 12 29 16-93 30-59 23 10 breeze. face. 11 23 8.20 a.m. . 32 ,, 14-90 II M II . . 10 m. 10-60 17-17 31-02 23-79 23 8.20 a.m. . 32 „ 14 90 II It II 15 m. 10-29 17-21 31 10 23 88 M 23 7.58 a.m, . 32 II 14 -JO II * . . M II *20 m. 9-78 17 39 31-43 24 22 23 7.58 a.m.. 32 It 14-90 II ... It II 25 m. 9-69 17-43 31-49 24-30 23 7.58 a.m. . 32 II 14-90 11 II 30 m 9-08 17-43 31-49 24-31 tt 31 9.45 a.m. . 28 „ 15-20 2 hours flood Calm. . . Sun- Sur- 12-52 16 14 29-17 22 00 shine. face. It 31 9.45 a.m. . 28 I, 15-20 II II „ •20 m. 10-28 17-32 31-29 24-03 It 31 9.45 a.m. . 28 II 15 20 II II ,1 27 m. 10-26 17 34 31-34 24 07 Sept. 15 12.03 jxm. . 36 „ 16 80 2 hrs to high Light Clear . . Sur- 11-73 16-70 30-17 22-92 Gray . tide. S.E. face. breeze. II 15 12.03 p.m. . 36 „ 16-80 ,1 II II .... 10 m 10-31 17-26 31-19 23-88 M II 15 ' 2.03 p.m. . 36 „ 16-80 1, „ II 20 ni. 10-21 17 -54 31-69 24 32 If II 15 12.03 II . 36 1, 16-80 II II 1, 35 II 10 17 17-53 31 67 24-34 M Oct. 2 11.30 a.m.. 31 II 12.95 5 flood North . 1. Sur- 10-52 17 01 30-73 23-56 Gre’n- face. ish. II 2 11.30 „ . 31 M 12-95 II .1 II 10 m. 10-18 17 03 30-77 23-65 Gray. II 2 11.30 II . 31 II 12-95 II II II 20 II 10-12 17-31 31-27 24-06 ,, II 2 11.30 II . 31 II 12-95 II II II 30 II 10-11 17-45 31-54 24 25 ,, 1. 9 7.50 II . 33 II 11 72 2 hours to N.-E. Cloudy Sur 10-31 rso water sample. Gray- high tide. breeze. rain. face. ish. II 9 7.50 1, 33 „ 11-72 ,, II I, 20 m. 10-04 ,, ,, II 9 7 50 II . 33 „ 11-72 „ II „ 30 10 01 ,, ,, ,, 11 16 4.11 p.m. . 35 II 14 21 1 hour ebb. . Moder- partly Sur- 9-42 Sample lost. Gre’n- ate cloudy. face. ish. N.-W. II 16 4.11 „ , 35 ,, 14-21 „ „ ,, 20 m. 9-16 1, 16 4.11 II . 35 „ 14 21 „ „ ,, 30 II 912 •1 21 9.37 a.m. . 31 ,, 13-91 hours ebb. Fresh Misty. Sur- 9 47 No water sample. Gray- S.-W. Clouds. face. ish. •1 21 9.37 1. . ^ 31 ,, 13-91 II II I, 10 rn. 9-06 It 21 9.37 II . 31 M 13 91 „ „ 1, 20 1, 8-90 " 21 9.37 I. . : 31 1. 13-91 II I. .1 30 II 8-881 It ,, 38a— 21J 316 DEPARTME^^T OF THE NAVAL SERVICE I 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 SAMPLES “Prince” Stations No. Locality. Position (vide chart.) Latitude. Longitude. Bottom. 6 Ste Croix River between Biological station and Robbinston. Biological station bears E 1 S. T®o a mile. Little Dochet Id. bears N. by W. 1 W. 28 miles. 45° 4' 49" N... 67" 5' 53" W.. Fairly hai’d mud. 6. " II If " " II € II H It It II „ „ 6 " tt It " II II 7 II II II „ .1 I, n II ft " " 8 Bay of Fundy, east of White Horse Id., just south of Letite Pass- age. Head Harbour Lt. bears S.- W. by W., 28 miles. Green’s Point Lt. bears N. by W. 2g miles. 44° 59' 47" N.. 66" 51' 24" VV. Sand and mud. 8 tt II tt ft It 11 tl 8 n ft II It It II b tt If II II It " 9 Passaniaquoddy Bay, off Clam Cove Head. Forest Id. bears S -W. | mile. Southern end of Clam Cove Head bears S. S.-E. 8 miles. 44^ 58' 39" N.. 67°2'7" W... Sand, mud and shells. 9 II II It It " It " 9 11 11 If If II If " 9 . tt It It If II If " 9 It ft tt It II ft II 9 tt If tt I. II ** 9 II It It „ ft „ 9 It If II ft 9 It ft It tt II It '■ 9 tt It If II " tt 9 1. It If " It ’’ 9 II 1 tt ft II tf I. 9 II II If It II ft ft 9 II II II tl II II 9 tt ft II It It 9 It If tt II If tl 9 <1 It II tt If tt It 9 It If •' If It 9 ** if It If II .1 tt 9 ti II It If If If tt 9 M tt tt n 1* 9 If It ft If If II 9 • I tl It If If If 9 tt It If If f II 9 It If It II . tt 9 It If II If tl If 9 It II It It It If k HYDlWaiiAPHY IX PASI^AMAQUODUY BAY 317 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a COLLECTED— Cow. Date. Hour. Depth in metres. Air temperature t° C. Tide. Wind. Sky. Depth of determinations in metres. Water temperature t° C. j Chlorine Cl. %. Salinity S. %,. b I 0 Colour of water. 1916. Oct. 27 10.25 .. . 34 M 7-38 1^ hours to Moder- Clear. . . Sur- 8-90 No w ater sai mple. Gre’n- high tide. ate. face. ish N.-W. Gray. „ 27 10.25 .. . 34 .. 7-38 n „ 11 20 m. 8-82 ,1 tl H 27 10.25 M . 34 n 7-38 tt It . * . 30 II 8-82 ' II 84 .. 84 M July 14 5.00 p.rn. . 73 12 15 9 m. 7-62 17-33 31-32 24-47 Aug. 3 3.00 p.ni. . 73 m. 15 05 High s.-w. Cloudy . Sur. 9-50 1706 30-82 23-81 breeze. face. M 3 3.00 . 73 M 15 05 10 m. 910 17-11 30-92 23-95 3 3.00 M . 73 15 05 ,, ,, 20 II 8-95 1718 31-04 24-08 M 3 3.00 M . 73 .. 15 05 ,, 30 II 8-60 17 26 31 -19 24-23 M 3 3.00 „ . 73 15 05 ,, U 40 II 8-42 17-32 31-29 24-33 n 10 12.45 .. . 72 M 22-20 Low tide . . very Clear. , . Sur- 12-62 16 18 29 24 22-16 slight S. face. breeze. n 10 12.45 n . 72 „ 22-20 II „ „ 10 m. 10-02 16-99 30 71 23 62 M 10 12.45 n . 72 M 22-20 II ,, tt ; 20 II 9-20 17-23 31-13 24-09 M 10 12.45 M . 72 M 22-20 II „ tt 30 II 9 12 17 25 31-16 24 13 M 10 12.45 M . 72 .. 22-20 ,, tt 40 1, 9-12 17-25 31 16 24 13 M 17 3.50 ti 72 u 18-30 li hour ebb . Calm . . . It Sur- 10-05 17-36 -31-36 24-14 face. M 17 3. oO ti 1 2 II 18-30 „ ,, 10 ni. 9-57 17-36 31-36 24-14 Aug. 17 4.00 p.m. 72 m. 18-30 H hr. ebb. Calm. Clear. 20 m. 9-48 17-38 31-40 24-24 M 17 4.00 „ 72 II 18-30 II ,, 30 m. 9-02 17-47 31-57 24-46 .. 17 4; 00 „ 72 II 18-30 It „ 40 m. 9-01 17-47 31-57 24.46 Aug. 31 2.00 M 78 m. 16-68 1 hr. ebb. S.W. Sur- 12-21 17 06 30-82 23-34 breeze. face. 31 2.00 .. 78 II 16-68 It „ II 20 m. 10-16 17-45 .31-54 24-25 M 31 2.00 78 I, 16-68 „ II 75 m. 9-81 17-53 31 67 24-46 Sept. 15 3.26 M 76 m. 14-80 5 hr. ebb. S.H. Hazy. Sur- 10-42 17-24 31-16 23-89 Gray. breeze. face. M 15 3.26 M 76 II 14-80 „ II „ 10 m. 10-11 17-58 31 75 24 44 It .. 15 3.26 M 76 II 14 80 tt „ „ 20 m. 10-12 17-57 31-74 24 44 tl ^ M 15 3.26 M 76 II 14-80 tl II ,, 30 m. K'-ll 17 59 31-78 24-45 tl 1 15 2.51 M 76 II 14-80 ,, ,, 40 m. 10-02 17-79 32-15 24 75 M 15 2.51 n 76 ,1 14-80 tt ,, II 50 m. 9-85 17 27 31-21 24-05 1 .. 15 3.15 76 II 14-80 tl „ 11 60 m. 9-92 17-42 31-47 24-25 .. 15 3.15 M 76 II 14-80 tl II „ 70 m. 9-92 17-62 31-84 24-53 M 15 3.15 76 1, 14-80 tl „ ,, 75 m. 9-93 17-80 32-16 24-78 Oct. 3 n . 49 a.ni. 75 m. 14-56 1 hr. flood. S.W. Clear. Sur- 10-61 17-40 31-45 24-12 Gre’n- light face. ish. breeze. 318 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE ! V, A. 1918 SAMPLES “ Prince ’ Stations. No. Locality. Position (vide chart). Latitude. Longitude. Bottoin. 9 Passainaquoddy Bay, Forest Id. bears S.W. | 44° 58' 39" N. 67° 2' 7"' W. Sand, mud 9 off Clam Cove Head. mile. Southern end of Clam Cove Head bears S.S.E. J mile. and shells. 9 II M " ” II " 9 " If II •' 9 . . If II 9 " It II -> •- 9 If II II It 9 n •) " H It ]] 10 Passamaq noddy Bay, Navy Bar Lt. bears N.W. 45° 3' 14" N. 67° 1' 45" W. Mud and' , 10 10 near Eastern entrance to St. Andrew’s Har- bour. II II by N. 5 N., g mile. Tongue Shoal Lt. bears E. by N. f N., 1 mile. •- rocks. 10 If II II !• ' i 10 M ? 1(» 10 • 1 n II 1 tt It 1 10 10 If II 1 10 10 10 II II ft II It It i : 1 10 10 10 ft II ’’ " - 1 " 1 i 10 It 10 10 10 10 10 .. II If It 10 10 10 .! !! It II ;; 10 10 -- '• - 1. 10 .. " ' i HYDROGRAPHY IX PAS.SAMAOUODDY BAY 319 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a COLLECTED— Con. Date. Hour. Depth in Metres. d “L 9 s H Sm < Tide. Wind. Sky. Depth in determinations metres. Water Temperature t° C. o o .S O Salinity. S. Voo- Density, at. Colour of Water. 191(5. Oct. 3 11.49 a. 111. 75 m. 14-56 1 hr. Hood. S. W. Clear. 10 m. 10-20 17-52 31 ()5 24 34 Cray. light breeze. M 3 11.49 M 75 p 14 56 p 20 m. 10-12 17 -19 31-07 23-88 n 3 11.49 n 75 p 14 56 „ ,, ,, 30 m. 9-98 17 54 31-70 24 40 It M 3 11.35 n 75 p 14-56 40 m. 9-85 sampl e lost. Oct. 3 11.35 75 m. 14-5() 1 hr. flood. S.W. ,, 50 m. 9-83 17-64 31-88 24-58 Gre’n- light ish. breeze. 3 11.35 M 75 p 14.56 „ „ „ 75 m. 9-68 17 71 32 00 24-70 Gray. Oct. 17 8.32 .. 70 m. 11-61 1^ hr. to low Strong Cloudy, Sur- 9 10 No water. tide. S.W. rain. face. M 17 8.32 .. 76 p 11-61 ,, ,, 20 m. 9-01 11 .. 17 8.32 H 76 p 11-01 ,, „ „ 75 m. 8-91 ,, Ang. 3 5.00 p.m. 20 m. 2:f hr.s. ebb S.W. Cloudy. Sur- 10-70 16-77 30-30 23-21 tide. breeze. face. 11 3 5,00 1. 20 p ,1 10 m. 8-95 17 13 30-96 23-99 „ 3 5.0C n 20 P II If ,, 20 m. 8 75 17-18 31-04 24 09 (bot- tom.) Aug. 17 0.10 „ 18 in. 15-12 2 hrs. to low Slight Sur- 1175 17 07 30-84 23-43 tide. haze. face. H 17 6.10 H 18 p 15 12 p 11 ,, 10 m. 10 18 17 -18 31 04 23 89 M 17 6.10 „ 18 p 15 12 p 1, „ 15 m. 10-19 17-23 3113 23-94 Aug, 24 3.45 16 m. 17-28 Low tide. Light Rain. •Sur- 13-70 No water. E. face. M 24 3.45 p 16 p 17-28 „ ,, ,, 10 m. 9-72 II H 24 3.45 M 10 p 17-28 ,, „ ,, 15 m. 9-61 ,1 Aug. 31 11.25 a.m. 21 m. 16-89 2 hrs. to high Calm. Clear. Sur- 12-20 1718 31 05 23 51 tide. face. „ 31 11.25 n 21 p 16-89 ,, ,, „ 15 m. 10-19 17 43 31-49 24-22 31 11.25 21 p 10 89 11 „ „ 20 m. 10-09 17-48 31-59 24-30 Sept. 15 10.41 M 20 n). 16-58 2| hrs. flood. Light „ Sur- 11 42 17-41 ‘31-40 23-97 Gray. S.E. face. breeze. „ 15 10.41 M 20 p 16-58 „ ,, If 10 m. 10 24 17-40 31-55 24-25 If Oct. 3 9.05 17 m. 10.98 1 hr. to low N.W. If Surf. 10-51 17-30 31-30 24-06 M tide. mode- rate. M 3 9.05 .. 17 p 10.98 p ,, ,1 10 m. 10-38 17-52 31-60 24-30 M 3 9.05 .. 17 p 10.98 p ,, 15 m. 9-72 17-53 31-67 24 42 .. 9 9.33 „ 21 p 10.90 High tide. N.E. cloudy. Surf. 10-20 no water. 9 9.33 M 22 p 10.90 ,, „ „ 10 m. 9 83 ft II M 9 9.33 „ 22 p 10.90 ,, ,, 11 20 m. 9 85 II II .. 10 11.09 M 19 p 11.12 2 hrs. flood. S.W. ,, Surf. 9-24 17-64 31-88 24 64 Gre’n- mode- ish rate. Gray. M 10 11.09 „ 19 p 11.12 p ,, M 13 m. 9-12 17-70 .31-99 24-77 10 11 09 „ 19 „ 11.12 „ ,, II 18 m. 9-12 17-69 31-96 24-76 I, n 21 12.. 52 p.m. 18 „ 13.45 1 hr. to low Strong cloud.s, Surf. 9.30 no water. Gray- tide. S.W. rain. ish. H 21 12.. 52 p 18 p 13.45 If ,1 10 m. 8 95 II 21 12.. 52 p 18 p 13 45 ,, 17 m. 8-86 ,1 ,1 .. 27 8.08 a.iTj. 19 p 4.()2 2}j hrs. flood. Mode- partly Surf. 8-64 ,, Green- rate. cloudy. ish Gray. 320 DEPARTME'NT OF TEE :S'AYAL SERYIOE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 SAMPLES “Prince” Station Locality. Position (vide chart.) Latitude. Longitude. Bottom. No. 10 Passamaq noddy Bay, Navy Bar Lt. bears N.W. 45® 3' 14” N. 67“ 1' 45” W. Mud and 10 near Eastern entrance to St. Andrews Har- bour. by Ni N. S mile. Tongue Shoaf Lt bears E. by N, I N., 1 mile. It II rocks. 10 " ” It 11 In .a direct line between 44° 23' 52" N. 66° 12' 34” W. II Hard sand IL Tiverton .and East Ferry about midway. and rocks. II 11 It 11 II II II II 11 II II It It II 11 11 „ It t< II It II 11 " II ” " 12 St. ]VIary’s Bay, off One mile S. E. from Little 44® 26' 17” N. 66° 6' 33” W. Fine sand. 12 Little River. M It River wh.arf. 12 II If It It II II 12 It II It II II " 12 II It II II ,, „ 12 It II II If II t| II 12 II II II ” " 13 St. Mary’s Bay, below South Point of Oigby neck 44° 20’ 7” N. 66° 13' 24” W. ,, 13 Southern end of Petite I’assage. bears N.E. ^ N. 2^ miles. Church I’t. I)ears E. by S. \ S. miles. 13 M It It <1 II II II 13 M It M II „ .1 II 13 I. .1 ” ” 13 „ It II .. •• - 15 Bay of Fundy, off Brier 8| miles N.-W. by W. from 44° 19' 30” N. . 66° 32' 28" W. Fine sand . . 15 Island. II II north end of Gr.ande Pas- s.age. Run N. N.W. 4 miles, then run W. ^ N., 5^’ miles. II II II . . II II . . 15 II II II II II . . II II 15 II II II II II . . II II . . 15 II II II • • II II . . 15 II . • It 11 15 II II II II II 15 If II II II It . • It II . . 15 II II II . . II II • • 15 II II II II II • . 11 II . . 15 II II II . • 11 HYDROGRAPHY IN PAS8AMAQU0DDY BAY 321 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a COLLECTED— Con. Date. Hour. Depth of Metres. Air temperature t" C. j Tide. Wind. Sky. Depth of determinations in metres. Water temperature t" C. 0 Q 'u 3 0 Salinity S. %,. 1 Density at. Colour of Water. 1916. Oct. 27 8.08 a.m. 19 m. 4.62 hrs. flood. N.W. cloudy. 13 m. 8 92 no water. Gray. tl 27 8.08 1, 19 I. 4.62 " ft " 18 m. 8-87 " Sept. 2 7.55 .30 .1 13.02 Low tide. South cloudy. Surf. 9-00 17-91 32 37 25 08 breeze. 2 7.55 I. 30 „ 13.02 ,, 10 m. 8-91 17-94 32 41 25 14 „ 2 7.55 II 30 .1 13.02 ft 1, „ 20 m. 8-91 17-89 32-32 25 07 ft 2 7.55 II 30 II 13.02 ,, ,, II 25 m. 8.42 17-89 32-32 25.13 fl 2 1.15 p.m. 35 II 15.28 High tide. Strong cloudy Surf. 10-57 17-73 32-03 24-59 Blu- south. ish. M 2 1.15 II 3o II 15.28 „ II II 10 m. 10-32 17-79 32-15 24-70 II ,1 2 1.15 ,1 35 .1 15.28 „ ft II 20 m. 10-21 17-81 32-18 24-75 „ M 2 1.15 „ 35 I. 15.28 1, M II 30 m. 10-13 17 79 32-15 24 75 „ „ 4 8.50 a.m. 24 „ 13.. 38 Low tide. S.W.N. clear. Surf. 12-92 17-70 31-98 24-10 ,, breeze. „ 4 8.50 1. 24 II 13.38 ,, II 10 m. 12-92 17-70 31-99 24-10 II II 4 8.50 .1 24 .1 13.38 ,1 II 20 m. 11-51 17-76 32-09 24-46 „ II 4 8.10 p.m. 31 II 12.20 High tide. S.W. cloudy. Surf. 12-58 17-67 31 93 24-13 Gray- breeze. ish. „ 4 3.10 II 31 1, 12.20 „ 11 ,, 10 m. 12 51 17-68 31 -95 24-15 It 4 3.10 I, 31 „ 12.20 „ „ II 20 m. 11-12 17 73 32-03 24-49 If II 4 3.10 I, .31 ,1 12.20 ft ,1 „ 30 m. 11 04 17 77 32-10 24-55 I, 5 10.27 a.m. 50 „ 11.90 Low tide. N.E. II Surf. 11 08 17 74 32-05 24 51 Gray- breeze. ish. 5 10.41 I, 50 II 11.90 II 10 m. 10-14 17-83 32-21 24-79 II II 5 10.41 ,1 50 M 11.90 ft f 1 II 20 m. 9-82 17-85 32-26 24-86 „ II 5 10.27 •! .50 „ 11.90 ft I, 30 m. 9-60 17-86 32-28 24-93 ,, " .5 10.27 I, 50 II 11 .90 " If " 40 m. 9-18 17-91 32-36 25-05 - 5 10.27 M 50 I. 11.90 .1 1. I. 48 m. 909 17 93 32-40 25 12 If Sept. 6 11.45 a.m.. 203 m. 14-80 Low tide . . . Calm . , . Cloudy . Sur- 9-17 17-98 32-48 25-15 Dark face. blue. 6 12.15 p.m. . 203 H 14-80 ft ... It ... 10 m. 8-58 18-00 32 52 25-25 ft 6 12.15 „ . 203 u 14-80 If ... If ... ,, 20 8-40 18-01 32-54 25-31 ,, f 1 6 12.15 M 203 M 14-80 ft ... M ... If 25 1, 8-31 18-02 32-55 25-33 ,, If 6 12.15 „ . 203 .1 14-80 If ... If ... II 50 II 8-15 18-03 32-56 25-37 II If 6 12.10 II . 203 „ 14-80 ft ... It ... If 75 I. 7-78 18-05 32-61 25-46 II ft 6 12.00 noon. 203 1. 14-80 If ... If ... If 100 1, 7-49 18-10 32 71 25-53 ,, tf 6 11.45 a.m.. 203 I. 14-80 M ... II ... ,, 125 I. 6-28 18 19 32-87 25-85 ,, If 6 11.45 II . 203 n 14-80 M ... If ... If 150 1, 5-88 18-22 32-91 25-97 ,, If 6 11.45 II 203 „ 14 80 If ... II ... ft 175 1. 5-57 18-24 32-96 26-03 ,, ft 6 11.45 .1 . 203 .1 14-80 fl ... II ... tl 200 II 5-551 18-12 .32-74 25-57 ,1 322 1 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 “Prince” Stations No. Locality. Position (vide chart.) Latitude. Longitude. 10 Gulf of Maine, outsidt Beside Yarmouth, N.-W. , 43« 48' 48" N. . 66° 15' 54'' W, 16... . Yarmouth Harbour. I’airway buoy. 16 " If M " 16 ,, ,, If , . 16 H " 16 - !• n tt ft 16 16 . tf 16 " " H . . If 16 " " . . 16 " 17 Yarmouth Harbour 5 mile outside Bunker Id. 43° 48' 13" nV. 66° 8' 42" W. 17 17 17 H If red light. Abreast lower end of Ship’s St-rn. ft . . 17 17 .. " II .1 n 18 St. John River, between About 100 yds. off east cor- 45° 16' k" n’ . 66° 5' 53" W. ! .' 18 18 Fairville and Indian- town. ner of Lovett’s Pt. to- ward Marble Cove Pt. 18 " 18 j, 11 " •t 19 Bay of P"undy, off St. Partr idge Id. bell boat bear s4.5° 12'11"N. 66° 3' 40" w! ; 19 19 John Harbour. H ft M N.E. by N. i N. 2i miles. Pastern end of M'eogenes Id. bears N.-W. by N. 2| miles. ft n 20 Kennebeca.'is Bay, at Milkish Head bears N. by 45° 20'’57" n! ‘ 66« 4' 8" W. ! ! 20 20 western end of Lone: Id. W. i W. ^ mile. Out- side ])oint of Long Id. bears N.-E. by E. | E. by 1| miles. 20 »' t! " " " ... 20 Kennebecasis Bay, at Milkish head bears N. by 45° 12 "57" nV 66° I' V' W.‘ ' II 20 20 Western eiid of Long Id. W. i W. i mile. Outside point of Long Id. bears N. E. by E. \ E. 1^ miles. 20 11 ■' " 20 »* It i' ”, " " 21 1 Kennebecasis jjay, at ( eastern end of Long Id. Jutside i)oint of Long Id. 45° 24 ” 44" N. 66° I' W' W. 21 21 beai-s S.W. by S. ^ S., 1 mile. Northern end of Long Id. bears N,N.W. 21 M II " tf If 21 t1 It t! " 11 " 2’ " M '* It " 11 tt M SAMPLES Bottom. Hard rocks and gravel Soft mud. . . Rocks and sawdust. tt " li ” i Soft mud. . . i-; ■ ■■ •• i " "1 I „ .. j HYDROaHArHY IX PASSAMAQUODDY BAY 323 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a COLLECTED— Con. Date. Hour. Depth in metres. Air temperature t° C. Tide. Wind. Sky. Depth of determinations in metres. Water temperature t® C. o o D s o Salinity S. 7oo- Density crt, 1 Colour of water. 1916. Sept. 7 12.40 i).m. . 41 rn. 16-68 Low tide. . . Calm . . . Foggy.. Sur- 10 03 17 "85 32 25 24-84 II face. ,, 7 12.50 II . 41 II 16-68 •1 II II 10 m. S-82 17 60 31-81 24-53 ,, „ 7 12.50 .1 . 41 ,1 16 68 II II 20 .1 9-78 17-39 31-42 34 24 ,, 7 12.50 II . 41 II l()-68 II tt II 30 II 9-72 16 22 29 32 •22-59 ,, ,, 7 12.F0 II . 41 II 16-68 tt ... II II 40 II 9-69 17-21 31 -09 23-99 It 9 7.45 a.m. . 47 I. 12 52 j hour to Fog and Sur- 9 40 18.06 32-63 25-23 Gray high tide. rain. face. ish. It 9 8.04 II . 47 I. 12 52 If II ... ,, 10 m. 9-21 17-75 32-07 24 83 I, 1 9 8.04 II . 47 II 12-52 II 11 ... ,, 20 I, 912 17-42 31-47 24-37 ,, V 9 7.45 II . 47 .1 12-52 If It ... II 30 II 9-20 17-59 31-78 24 61 ,, „ 9 7.45 II . 47 .1 12-52 If tl ... It 40 .1 9-18 17-58 31-76 •24-58 1, ,, 9 i .4o ti 47 .1 12-52 I, II ,, 45 ,1 9 -18 17-89 32-33 25 02 ,, 8 6.20 II . 15 II 13 70 High tide.. South . . . Thick Sur- 11-32 17-25 31 17 23 77 ,, Fog. face. ,, 8 6.20 II . 15 II 13 70 ,, tt ... 10 m. 10-83 17-54 31-69 24 27 It „ 8 6.20 II . 15 ,1 13 70 ,, „ If 15 II 10 82 Water sampl e lost. ,, . n 8 1.20 p.m. . 13 II 14-25 Low tide. . . S.-W. Foggy. . Sur- 12 70 17 78 32 -12 24-25 11 hreeze. face. II 8 1.20 II . 13 ,1 14-25 II „ II 10 m. 11-78 17-53 31-68 24 09 tt 1, 8 1.20 II . 13 II 14-25 II ,, .1 13 II 11 -5i; 17 54 31-69 24 15 II 21 4.13 II . 35 II 16 35 Light Smoky . Sur- 14*80 Water sampl e lost. Bro’n. S.-W. face. ,, 21 4.13 II . 35 II 16-35 It 10 m. 13-19 S-36 15-13 10-55 ,, II 21 4.13 II . 35 II 16 35 It tl 20 1. 11-91 Water sampl e lost. ,, II 21 4.13 II . 35 .1 16-35 If 11 30 II 11-55 14-36 25 96 19-71 ,, I, 21 4.25 II . 35 II 16-35 It It 34 .1 9-28 14-55 26-30 20-31 ,, II 19 10.39 a. 111. . 19 I. 12-25 g hr. to low tl Cloudy . Sur- 11-78 Water sampl e lost. Green tide. face. 19 10.39 II . 19 1 12 26 tt 10 m. 10 62 17-03 30-78 23-57 1. 19 10.39 II . 19 II 12 26 ,, „ ,, 19 m. 10-59 Water sampl e lost. ,, II 19 4.00 p.m. . 55 II 11 80 1 hour river Light Clear. . . Sur- 15-69 „ „ Bro’n. flood. N.-W. face. breeze. II 19 4.20 II . 55 II 11 80 II 5 m. 12-93 II II 19 4.10 II . 55 II 11-80 11 ,, 10 1, 6-08 ,, H tl II 19 4.20 II . .55 I. 11-80 ,, „ It 15 1, 6-43 I, M ,, Sept. 19 4.10 p.m. 55 m. 11-80 1 hr. river Light clear. 20 m. 8-22 10-61 19 18 14-92 Brcj tl. flood. N.W. breeze. ,, 19 3.55 II 55 II 11-80 ,1 ,, 30 m. 10-98 water sampl e lost. ,, It 19 3 . 5o II 55 1, 11-80 1, ,, It 40 m. 11-74 ,, ,, It 19 3.55 ,1 55 1. 11-80 „ ,, tt 44 m. 11-93 ,, „ M 19 4.40 ,1 55 II 11-80 „ , 11 55 m. 12-00 ,, ,, II 20 3.40 II 48 II 16 -10 N.W. 11 Sur- 15-38 ,, breeze. face. 7-20 10 15 18-35 14 38 " It 20 3., 50 II 48 II 16-10 II 10 m. 6-11 11-13 20-13 15-86 It 20 3.50 1, 48 II 16 10 1.1 20 m. 10-18 11-53 20 85 15-95 ,, It 20 3.40 II 48 .1 16-10 It 30 m. 11-15 11-69 21-14 16 03 II ft 20 3 40 II 48 .1 16 lo }( 40 m. 11 21 w'ater saiu})! e lost. It 20 3.40 II 48 II 16-10 tt II 45 m. 16-10 ,, Bro'n. It 21 2.48 II 11 II 17 .54 S.S.E. Hazy. Sur- 13-67 8-64 15-63 11 4 It breeze. face. 324 DEPARTMEWr OF THE FATAL SERTICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 SAMPLES “Prince” Stations No. Locality. Position (vide chart.) Latitude. Longitude. Bottom. 22 St. John River, near West end of Milkish Id. 45° 18' 30" N. 66° 9' 32" W. Soft mud. 22 mouth of Kennebe casi.s Bay. bears E.N.E. Point on south side of nmuth of Kennebecasis Bay bears S.S.E. It If ff 22 U tf It If It II 1, 23 Bay of Fundy, between 15 miles south of Partridge 45° 0' 18" N. 65° 56' 10" W. Sand and 23 St. John and Digby. M ft Id. bell boat. 20 miles north of Prim point. ff ff gravel. 23 It It II II 1! If 23 It It If It It If ff 23 If ff ft ff tl ft f 1 23 tt ff f 1 If If If If 23 ft ft ft If ff ft ff 23 ft ff If ff ft ff ft 23 ff ft ff 1, ,1 24 Lower end of Annapolis Port Wade pier bears E.N. 44° 39' 15" N. 65° 44' 22" W. Fine sand. 24 Basin. E. Outside point of Vic- toria Beach bears N. ^ W. II ft 24 n II If If ff II 24 II It II It 1, ff II 24... II II If If ff ff 24 II II If If I f 24 If If * If If II If 24 If ff It If If It ff 24 11 ff If It ft II ff 24 ff II II If II ff ,, 24 If ft If It 24 II If It It It It If 24 If tt If 24 If If I, If ff 25 25 Bay of F undy, off Digby (4ut. ft ft 1 mile N.W. 4 N. from Fairway Buoy, mile N. by E. i 10., from Point Prim. ff It 44^ 43' 17" N. 65° 47' 18'' W. Sand and 25 25 If It ff If ff If •• shells. fl II 25 If If It tt M ff 25 If If II It 25 If It II It If II If 25 II ft It II It 25 ff II I f If ft ff 25 It If If " " 25 it If II If If It ff 25 If ft If It If W " 25 M f f II If It It II II „ ff 25 If ft ’ ** It It If 25 If If f f II tl 25 If It ft If If " " HYDROGRAPHY IN PA88AMAQH0DDY HAY 325 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a COLLECTED— (7on. Date. Hour. 1 Depth in metres. Air temperature t° C. Tide. Wind. Sky. Depth of determinations in metres. Water temperature t° C. Chlorine Cl. 7oo* 'S Density crt. Colour of water. 1916. S.E. Sept. 21 2.43 p.m. 11 m. 17-54 breeze. Hazy. 5 m. 11-70 water sampl e lost. " 21 2.43 II 11 m. 17-54 10 m. Sept. 22 12.43 p.m. 95 m. 17-74 1| hr. to low Calm. Clear. Sur- 10-30 17-36 31-37 24-09 Blue. tide. face. 11 22 1.07 II 95 II 17-74 ,, ft 10 m. 9-56 17-74 .32-06 24-76 11 11 22 1.07 II 95 II 17-74 „ 11 20 m. 8-83 17-85 32 25 25-04 11 11 22 12.56 II 95 1. 17-74 ,, 11 11 25 m. 8-73 17-89 32 32 25-09 II 11 22 12.56 1. 95 1. 17-74 1, ,, 30 ra. 8-57 17-93 32 40 25 18 11 11 22 12.56 1, 95 II 17-74 11 II 40 m. 8-38 17-95 32 44 25-24 11 11 22 12.43 II 95 II 17-74 11 II II 50 m. 8-12 17-96 32-46 25-28 11 11 22 12.43 II 95 II 17 74 ,1 II 11 75 m. 7-93 18-01 32-55 25-38 II 11 22 12 43 II 95 II 17-74 If II 11 95 m. 7-90 18-03 32-58 25-42 \t It 23 9.19 a.m. 58 II 12-83 High tide. Light cloudy. Sur- 9-37 17-86 32 28 24-95 Gre’n- S.E. face. ish. breeze. If 23 9.43 II 58 II 12-83 II II 11 10 m. 9-32 water samp] e lost. Gray. 11 23 9.33 II 58 II 12-83 II II 11 20 m. 9-31 17-94 32-41 25-07 If 11 23 9.33 II 58 II 12 ‘83 „ ,1 It 25 m. 9-28 17-93 32-39 25-07 11 23 9.33 II 58 II 12-83 II 11 30 m. 9-29 17-93 32-39 25-07 11 23 9.19 II 58 1, 12-83 I ,1 It 40 m. 9-30 17-96 32-45 25-10 It II 23 9.19 1, 58 1, 12-83 II II 11 50 m. 9 28 17-33 31 32 24-22 11 23 9.19 1, 58 II 12 83 II II If 55 m. 9-29 17-89 32-33 25-01 11 11 23 5 . 52 p. m. 55 II 15-58 Low tide. S.W. clear. Sur- 10-48 17-91 32 37 24 84 Gray- breeze. face. ish. 11 23 5.49 II 55 „ 15-58 11 II 11 10 m. 10-37 17-87 32-29 24-80 It 11 23 5.49 II 55 II 15-58 It II It 20 m. 10-30 water sampi e lost. 11 23 5.. 37 II 55 II 15-58 11 „ It 30 m. 10-22 ,, It 11 23 5.37 II 55 II 15-58 11 1, 40 m. 10-18 17 31 31 - 28 24-05 If 23 5.37 II 55 II 15-58 11 " 11 50 m. 9-86 17-23 31 13 24-00 Sept. 23 2.16 p.m. 74 m. 15-95 ^ hour to S.E. Cloudy. Sur- 9-30 17-95 32 44 25-10 Gre’n- low tide. breeze. face. ish. II 23 2.45 II 74 II 15-95 II II 11 10 m. 9-08 17-97 32-47 25-16 Gray. 23 2.33 II 74 II 15-95 II II It 20 m. 9-08 17-45 31 54 24-42 U 11 23 2.33 II 74 „ 15-95 II 1, It 25 m. 9-07 17-57 31-75 24-58 11 23 2.33 I. 74 II 15-95 II II 11 30 m. 9 09 17-96 32-46 25-13 11 11 23 2.18 II 74 II 15-95 II II It 40 m. 9-02 17-92 32-38 25-09 It 11 23 2.18 „ 74 II 15-95 11 II It 50 m. 9-02 17-98 .32-48 25-17 It If 23 2.18 II 74 II 15-95 II 11 73 m. 9-03 17-95 32-43 25-14 Sept. 27 12.18 II 75 II 12-19 High tide. S.W. Hazy. Sur. 9-21 Water samp] e lost. Gre’n- breeze. face. ish. If 27 12.31 II 75 II 12-19 11 II It 10 m. 9.17 Blue. It 27 12.18 II 75 II 12-19 11 II II 20 m. 9-18 11 11 27 12.18 II 75 1. 12-19 It „ ft 25 m. 9-13 17-40 31-45 24 34 11 It 27 12.18 „ 75 II 12-19 It 1, 30 m. 9-16 17-40 31-44 24 .34 It 11 27 12.02 II 75 II 12-19 11 „ 11 40 m. 9-14 17-85 32-25 24-98 It 11 27 12.02 1, 75 II 12-19 11 II . t1 50 m. 9-13 17-62 31 84 24-65 11 27 12.02 II 75 II 12-19 It II tf 74 m. 9-13 Water sampl e lost. It 326 DEPARTMENT OF THE NATAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 SAMPLES “Prince” Stations No. 2f) 2B 26 26 26 26, 27 27 27 27 27 I^ocality. Basin in River, inside Annapolis Royal. Annapolis River, north ern passage, around Goat Island. Z 3 -3 O hi £ Position (vide chart.) Lighthouse in bend above Granville rerry bears N. by W. i W. First point on south side above basin bears F. -Lighthouse on Shaffner’s Point bears N.E. ^ E Western side of Goat Id. bears S.E. by S. h S. 3 miles 5 8 U 14 17 20 23 26 Latitude. 44° 44' 5.5" N. 44° 42' 21" N. Longitude. 6.5° 20' 52" W. 65° 37' 29" W. Bottom. Very soft mud. Soft mud. HYDROGRAPHY IN PASSAMAQUODDY BAY 327 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a COLLECTED— Cow. Date. Hour. Depth in metres. Q Cb i S u Tide. Wind. Sky. Depth of determinations in metres. d X 5 5 4^ a; a 5 d 02 .ui 02 Density at. Colour of water. 1916. Sept. 25 10.19 a.m. 24 m. 13-40 High tide. Quite Haze. Sur- 14-05 16-14 29 17 21-71 Mud- 25 10.19 M 24 13-4(1 heavy N.W. breeze. face. 10 m. 13 99 16 81 30-38 22-64 dy. ,, 25 10.19 „ 24 M 13 40 ,, M „ 20 m. 13-72 16 95 30-63 22-90 ,, Sept. 25 4.28 p.m. 22 M 11-71 Low tide. Heavy Sur- 14 - 45 16 39 29-61 21-97 „ 25 4.28 M 22 M 14-71 N.W. breeze. face. 10 rn. 14-18 16-41 29-65 22-05 " 25 4.28 ,. 22 „ 14-71 " " 20 m. 14-00 16-72 30-21 22 52 " Sept. 26 10.54 a.m. 30 M 10 28 High tide. Heavy Partly Sur- 11 62 17 69 31-96 24 35 Gre’n- tf 26 10.54 .. 30 M 10 28 N.W. breeze. cloudy. face. 10 m. 11 62 17 36 31-36 23-88 ish. Gray. „■ 26 10.54 „ 30 „ 10-28 1. „ ,, 20 m. 11-18 17-77 32-10 24 52 •1 26 10.54 „ 30 M 10-28 „ ,, „ 25 m. 11-17 17-79 32-15 24 55 Sept. 7 9.12 „ South. ■Foggy. It Sur- 10-10 No wa tei sa mple. If 7 9.33 M 11 70 face. If 10-00 ’7-76 .32 09 24 71 II 7 9.56 M 11-40 II , If f 1 10-40 17 73 .32-03 24-60 II 7| 10.16 M 11-80 ,, If It 10-80 17-69 31 96 24 49 7 10 39 „ 11-60 II II 1? 11-10 17 69 31-97 24-43 II 7 11.02 M U-80 I, If If 11 -20 Samjd e of w ater lo St. If 7 11.22 „ 11-50 M If If 9-95 17 51 31 64 24-36 M 7 11.44 M 11-70 ,, ft M 10-45 17-34 31-34 24 04 11 7 12.10 p.m. 12 30 " II II 10-20 17-70 31 99 24-59 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ] 1 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE 25f 27g 29g m 33i 35g 378 39 40^ 42i 47 miles Hour. 11.30 a.iri. Head Harbour to ^ 11.45 a.ni. „ 12 00 p.m. tt 12.15 p.TTl. ft 12.30 p.m. 12.45 p.m. M 1.00 p.m. U 1.15 p.m. t? 1 . 30 p. m. tt 1.45 p.m. It 2.00 p.m. It 2.15 p.m. tt 2.30 p.m. tt 2.45 p.m. tt Fraser — Hydroids of Eastern Canada. WESTERN ARCHIPELAGO 38a— 22 8 GEORGE V SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a A. 1918 XVI. HYDROIDS OF EASTERN CANADA. By C. McLeax Fraser, Ph.D., Curator of the Pacific Biological Station, Departure Bay, B.C. INTRODUCTION. Since the early days of the Geological Survey explorations, lists of hydroids have appeared in connection with those of other invertebrata. As in these instances the hydroids that appeared accidentally in the general collection were examined in con- nection with this general material or sent away for examination, there were seldom many species in the list. Verrill identified many of the species and collected in the Bay of Fundy and the gulf of St. Lawrence and his reports, although somewhat scat- tered were the most valuable previous to 1901, when Whiteaves, in his “Catalogue of the ^farine Invertebrata of Eastern Canada,” gave a comprehensive list including all the species that had been reported to that time. Since 1901 two lists have been pub- lished ; the one by Stafford, in his Fauna of the Atlantic Coast,” which appeared 111 ••Contributions to Canadian Biology,” 1912, and the other my own list of the Hydroids of Nova Scotia ” in 1913. Certain references have also been made to Eastern Canadian distribution in the second and third parts of Nutting’s monograph, published in 1904 and 1915, respectively. In the meantime, collecting has been continued in connection with the Atlantic Ration, now at St. Andrews, N.B. The material accumulated was sent to me by l)r. A. G. Huntsman, with the request that I make an examination of it. It was of much interest to find it a most comprehensive collection, as shown by the fact that iroin It 79 species have been determined, while Whiteaves’ list included but 58, Staf- ford s 69, six of which have neither name nor description, and my Nova Scotia list 50. In some instances there is some doubt as to the validity of certain species'. Stimpson named some species without giving figure or adequate description and A. Agassiz did the same. Some of these difficulties were straightened out by contempor- aries, but with others there is still some confusion. Taking all together, 112 species have been determined with reasonable assurance, although in two or three cases, men- ^ possibility of synonymy. The six unnamed species 01 fetaltord s are not included in this number. In listing the hydroids in this latest collection, it is as well to include all, to bring the whole list from the eastern coasts of Lauada to date. i Some Newfoundland locations are given but these are all on the gulf of St Law- rence side. No attempt has been made to include the species reported north of the strait of Belle Isle. .1, 1® are reported for tlie first time in this area, but only one of these, Btmc^a hrems is described as new to science. The others are: Diconjne con- reita <^arvem grmnlandtca, Eudendrmm album, Eudendrium annulatum, Tubularia spectahhs, Campanularia gigantea, Clytia cylindrica, Clytia edwardn, Obelia articu- lata, Opercularella pmmla, Stegopoma plicatile, Hehella pociUum, Sertularia corni- nnp Antennularta americana, Phimularia setaceoides. f/*"® *^"'® list of species of hydroids that p.;k ,• ^®P‘’'’t®'? f™™ the waters along the eastern coasts of Canada, with the dis- he 1 T ^"® ** ^Itloh ^iH include that given with ' tear f f®fJ'Pt>on and one or more others where good descriptions or figures ppear and all the references m connection with points in this area and to give an |account of any new or important point noted, i; 38a— 22 J 330 DEPARTMEI^T OF TEE FATAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION. For the consideration of the question of distribution, the waters of Eastern Canada can be conveniently divided into three regions: (1) The Bay of Fundy and its approaches, (2) the Gulf of St. Lawrence, (3) the east or southeast coast of Nova Scotia. In the Bay of Fundy the waters around the island of Grand Manan have been much used as a collecting ground ever since Stimpson found a sufficient number of species to make it worth while to write up “ The Marine Invertebrates of Grand Manan.’’ Then, as now, it was recognized that on account of the exposed position and the difference in tides, the channels between the numerous small islands must be con- tinually supplied with enough food for countless forms of great variety. The archi- pelago between Passamaquoddy bay and the Bay of Fundy proper provides a large area where 'the conditions are somewhat similar although the salinity becomes noticeably less in the inner waters. The whole area is suitable for hydroid growth. Even at the mouth of the St. Croix river there is a sufficient interchange on account of the high tides to permit of the existence of some species. Most of the collecting has been done in shallow water and near shore, hence although 87 species have been obtained, the probability is that many others exist in areas as yet untouched. Apart from the Passamaquoddy archipelago, ’one other point must be mentioned and this at the other side of the Bay of Eundy. St. Mary bay, near Brier island, Nova Scotia, must be a very satisfactory locality for hy droids. All the material sent from there, apparently was obtained during one trip, July 29-30, 1913, and yet from this material alone 30 species of hydroids were obtained. When that many were picked up in indiscriminate collecting, the locality must offer fine opportunities for one looking '! especially for hydroids. The Gulf of St. Lawrence has been touched at only a few points, Malpeque, ; Gaspe, Seven islands, Anticosti, Bay of Islands, Newfoundland, and some individual ; dredging trips. It is quite possible that in the gulf there is no single restricted area that offers such a variety of conditions as that at the entrance to Passamaquoddy bay, yet along the whole coast there is variety in plenty and in the vast area of the gulf 1 itself there are great differences in depth and in the nature of the bottom. While the | 65 species already obtained may be representative, they must only serve as a sample of I what is to be found there. What is true of the Gulf of St. Lawrence is equally true of the Nova Scotia coast, i The near shore waters have been touched only in the vicinity of Canso at the extreme i east and at Barrington passage at the extreme south. The coast waters intervening ; are studded with small islands among which are innumerable channels with suitable conditions for a good food supply, in which no collecting has ever been done. The ' small amount of deep water dredging done by the United States Fish Commission ; gives some idea of the richness of the fauna in deep water. Of the 65 species from this area, five were found on sargassum from the gulf stream. These were Syncoryne I mvrdbilis, Clytia noliformh, Jlclia hyaliva, Sertularia cornicina and Plumularia | setaceoides, but the first two have also been reported from inshore. I In making a comparison of the hydroids found in these three areas, it will be | noticed that of the 27 gymnoblastic species 25 have been found in the Bay of Fundy, 11 in the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and 15 off the Nova Scotia coast. The gymnoblastic forms are always an uncertain quantity, particularly in general collecting. So many of them are so delicate that they are soon past recognition unless they are preserved when taken from the water. It is quite possible, therefore, that the Bay of Fundy predominance is due to better preservation of material. Of the 26 species of Cam- panularians, 21 were found in the Bay of Fundy, 17 from the Gulf of St. Lawrence j and 17 from the Nova Scotia coast, almost exactly the same proportion as the whole number of species. Of the 7 species of the Campanulinidie, 3 were found in the Bay | HY DROIDS EASTER^^ CANADA 331 i SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a of Fundy, 5 in the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and 2 off the Nova Scotia coast. These are small forms and easily overlooked. Of the 9 species of the Halecidae, 8 were from the Bay of Fundy, 7 from the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and 4 from the Nova Scotia coast. ■ There is no apparent reason why the Nova Scotia coast should be lacking but there is I a similar lack in the Gulf of St. Lawrence in the Lafoeidse and Hebellidse as out of j the 11 species recorded, there are 7 from the Bay of Fundy, 3 from the Gulf of St. I Lawrence and 9 from the Nova Scotia coast. In the Sertularidse the gulf of St. Law- I rence leads, as out of the 24 species, 19 are from the Bay of Fundy, 21 from the Gulf [ of St. Lawrence, and 14 from the Nova Scotia coast. As usual in temperate regions, the PlumularidsB are poorly represented. Out of the 8 species reported, 4 are from the Bay of Fundy, 1 from the Gulf of St. Lawrence and 4 from the Nova Scotia coast, only one species being reported from more than one place. Taking the coast as a whole, the gymnoblastic species and the Campanularidae are well represented while the Halecidse and the Sertularidse are proportionately low in numbers. With the distribution here recorded additional evidence is obtained regarding the conclusion that, for a large number of species, the distribution takes place southward along the continental shores from a central circumpolar area. Of the 112 species, 65 have been reported from the Arctic regions, 72 from the west of Europe, and 57 from the west coast of North America. Furthermore, it indicates that along these coasts there is no very definite break in the continuity at any one point, although, of course, ' some of them extend farther southward than others. Of the 77 species that have been reported from the east coast of the United States as well, 62 of them or 80 per cent occur in the Arctic regions. Western Europe, or the west coast of North America, and 21 of them appear in the list of 51 species obtained at Beaufort, N.C., in 1911. A table shows the distribution of each species in these regions and another shows the distribution of the Gymnoblastea and the main families of the Calyptoblastea. 332 DEPARTMEIilT OF THE l^AYAL SERVICE Cordylophora lacustris ...... Clava leptostyla Monobrachium parasituni Syncoryne mirabilis Dicoryne conferta flexuosa Bimeria brevis Garveia groenlandica Bougainvillia carolinensis Eudendrium album annulatum capillare cingulatuin dispar raineum ram o sum tenue Hydractinia echinata Myriothela phrygia Acaulis primarius Corymorpha pendula Tubularia couthouyi erocea indivisa larynx. spectabilis tenella Campanularia amphora flexuosa gelatinosa gigantea groenlandica. hincksi integra magnifica neglecta speciosa verticillata. . volubilis Clytia cylindrica ed ward si johnstoni noliformis Eucopella ealiculata Gonothyrsea gracilis loveni Obelia articulata commissuralis dichotorna flabellata g(‘niculata hyalina longissima Calyeella syringa Cuspidella costata grand is Opercularella lacerata pumila Stegopoma plicatile Tetrapoma Ri)II)S EASTERX CAXADA 347 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a The tenuity of the hydrothecal walls may vary much in the same species and the collapsible appearance is often due to the length of time the hydroids are in stale water before they are examined or before they are preserved. Finally as to the number of teeth in the margin of the hydrothecae, the number may vary from 12 to 16 in the hydrothecae of the same colony and they appear to be just as liable to be numerous in the small hydrothecae as in the large ones. While the chasm is a great one between the small specimens and the very large ones, when only those are seen, it becomes entirely bridged when all graduations are brought into view also. The conclusion that all specimens recorded as C. hicophora, C. grayi and C. joJmstoni should be all included in the one species C. johnstoni (Alder) to me seems unavoidable. Clytia NOLiFOKMis (McCrady). Campanularia noliformis McCrady, Gymno. Charleston har., 1857, p. 92. Clytia noliformis Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 343. Fraser, Hyd. Beaufort, 1912, p. 359. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic coast, 1912, p. 73. Nutting, Am. Hyd., iii, 1915, p. 57. Distribution. — Canso, Gaspe, Seven islands (Stafford) ; Briar island, 33 to 39 fathoms, on sargassum in Gulf Stream, east of Nova Scotia. Genus EUCOPELLA. Eucopella caliculata (Hincks). Campanularia caliculata Hincks, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1853, p. 178. Clytia (Oi'thopyxis) poterium Agassiz, Cont. Nat. Hist. H. S., 1862, p. 297. Orthopyxis poterium A. Agassiz, N. A. Acalephse, 1865, p. 223. Orthopyxis caliculata Yerrill, Mar. Invert. Vineyard sound, 1873, p. 408. Campanularia poterium Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 344. Campanularia caliculata Hargitt, Am. Nat., 1901, p. 383. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. Eastern Canada, 1901, p. 23. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic coast, 1912, p. 73. Eucopella caliculata Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 166. Fraser, Hyd. Y. I. region, 1914, p. 147. Orthopyxis caliculata Bale, Proc. Boy. Soc. Yict., 1914, p. 72. Nutting, Am. Hyd., iii, 1915, p. 64. Distribution. — Bay of Fundy, low water to 30 fathoms, gulf of St. Lawrence at the Mingan islands, 6 fathoms (Yerrill); Henley harbour, strait of Belle Isle, 20 to 30 fathoms (Packard); Seven islands (Stafford); Canso, 20 fathoms (Fraser); Sea Coal bay, N.S. (A. Agassiz). In my previous papers where this species was recorded the name Eucopella cali- culoAa has been used but now Bale and Nutting intimate that Eucopella must be dis- carded for Orthopyxis. It seems to be putting a big stretch on the law of priority when it is made to cover a name that was first applied to a subgenus and later a genus but admittedly never defined. I t is all very well to speak of the “ elaborate descrix)- tion” given by Agassiz for Clytia (Orthopyxis) poterium, but it was not sufficiently elaborate to give recognition to the fact that the species had already been described. In any case the description was not complete enough to convince Hincks of the neces- sity for the new genus for, while recognizing the identity of Clytia poterium with his own Campanularia caliculata in his 1868 work, he retains the name C ampanularia. Little stress can be laid on the fact that A. Agassiz used the name Ortho pyxis in 1865 as there he simply refers to his father’s collections without farther remarks. 348 DEPAETME^TT OE THE EAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 A stronger argument for retaining OrtJiopyxis appears in the fact that Yerrill used Oriliopyxis caliculata in all the references to the species in his paper in 1873, giving a description of the species but not of the genus on page 408, but as he returns to Campamdaria caliculata in 1874 and again in 1879, the argument loses its strength. !N^utting has evidently overlooked these references of VerrilFs for he says: “I cannot find any author has used the name Orthopyxis since 1865.’’ The name Eucopella has a different status for when von Lendenfeld introduced it in 1885 he defined the genus and other definitions given since then do not conflict with his definition. Since the genus Orthopyxis had not been previously defined, Bale and Nutting are really substituting a new genus for Eucopella, although retaining all the characteristics of that genus, for although a name is given that had been used pre- viously, they do not know and never can know that Agassiz had any such characteris- tics in mind when he applied the subgeneric name Orthopyxis to his species poterium. Genus GONOTHYR^A. GONOTHYRiEA GRACILIS (Sars). Laomedea gracilis Sars, Beretn. om zool. Keise, etc., 1851, p. 18. Gonotkyrcea gracilis Allman, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1864, p. 374. Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 183. Fraser, Hyd. Beaufort, 1912, p. 361. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 166. Nutting, Am. Hyd., iii, 1915, p. 70. Distrihution. — Canso, Barrington passage, low water (Fraser) ; off High Duck island, between Two and Three islands, off Swallowtail light, 30 to 40 fathoms off Bliss island, off St. Andrews point, off Joe’s point, off Dochet island. Gonothyr.ea loveni (Allman). Laomedea loveni Allman, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1859, p. 138. Gonothyroea loveni Allman, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1864, p. 374. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 352. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 166. Nutting, Am. Hyd., iii, 1915, p. 69. Distrihution. — St. Andrews, Gaspe. Malpeque, Seven islands (Stafford) ‘ Chedac- bucto bay, 20 fathoms (Fraser) ; Nigger reef, off Joe’s point, off Head Harbour island, Oumming’s cove, 5 to 40 fathoms. Stafford mentions a species of Gonothyrcva which occurs at Malpeque, between the clustered stems of Tuhularia : “ Its hydrotheca has about 24 long, narrow, rigid, sharp teeth, separated by broad, rounded spaces below and continuing as thickened lines down the hydrotheca.” It is unfortunate that he did not describe this species more fully and give figures of it, since, as far as I am aware, there has been no species of Gono- thyrcea described with hydrothecae like these. Gonothyrcea gracilis (Sars) has hydro- thec« with long, slender, sharp, teeth but each hydrotheca has only 10 to 12 of them. Twenty-four is an unusually large number of teeth to be found on the hydrothecal margin of any hj^droid species. The thickened longitudinal lines have not been men- tioned in connection with otlier species of this genus. Genus OBELIA. Obelia articulata (A. Agassiz). (Fig. 1.) Ell cope articulata A. Agassiz, N. A. Acalephae, 1865, p. 89. Trophosome. — Largest colonies reaching a height of 7 cm., most of them much less than this; stem usually simple, although in some of the large colonies there is a HY DROIDS EASTERN CANADA 349 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a slight indication of fasciculation; main stem continuous throughout and distinctly heavier than any of the branches ; branches short and slender ; main stem and branches with two to four annulations above the point where the branch or pedicel (iomes off; branches similarly annulated at their origin. Hydrothecate pedicels arising from each axil and one or two from each node, usually annulated throughout; hydrothecse much deeper than wide; margin with 12 to 14 low, rounded teeth. Gonosome. — Gonangia much elongated, with a distinct collar, borne on pedicels that are annulated throughout. They appear in the axils of the pedicels and smaller branches and at times are very numerous. Distribution. — St. Croix river, reef near Biological station, off Joe’s point, off St. Andrews point, St. Andrews island,, Chamcook harbour. Minister’s island. Wolves island, off Swallowtail light, Grand Manan. I have no doubt that this species which is common in the vicinity of the Biolo- gical station is the same as A. Agassiz described as Eucope articulata but his descrip- tion is not very complete, hence I have included a full description at this time. The species resembles Obelia dichotoma in its mode of branching, 0. longissima in the nature and arrangement of the hydrothecse and 0. commissuralis in the nature and arrangement of the gonangia. It is so much like these species in these respects that unless one gets a complete fertile colony it is somewhat difficult at times to be sure that it is not one of these species. It is quite possible that some of the records given for these other species should have been given for 0. articulata. Obelia commissuralis McCrady. Obelia commissuralis McCrady, Gymno. Charleston har., 1857, p. 95. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 350. Hargitt, Am. Nat., 1901, p. 382. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. East. Can., 1901, p. 23. Fraser, Ilyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 167. Nutting, Am. Hyd., iii, 1915, p. 83. Distribution. — Grand Manan (Verrill) ; Canso, low water (Eraser); Grand Manan (A. Agassiz) ; Seven islands. Obelia dichotoma (Linnseus). Sertularia dichotoma Linnseus, Syst. Nat., 1758, p. 812. Obelia dichotoma Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 156. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 350. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. East. Can., 1901, p. 23. Obelia pyriformis Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. East. Can., 1901, p.,23. Obelia dichotoma Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73, Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 167. Nutting, Am. Hyd., iii, 1915, p. 80. Distribution. — Nova Scotia, Metis (Dawson) ; St. Andrews, Gaspe, Seven islands (Stafford) ; Canso, low water (Fraser) ; Grand Manan (A. Agassiz) ; Joe’s point, east of Spruce island 17 fathoms. Brier island, 33 to 39 fathoms. Obelia flabellata (Hincks). Campanularia flabellata Hincks. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1866, p. 297. Obelia flabellata Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 157. Nutting, Hyd. MAods Hole, 1901, p. 350. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Nutting, Am. Hyd. iii, 1915, p. 84. Distribution. — St. Andrews, Seven islands (Stafford) ; between White and Spruce islands. 350 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Obelia GEX3CULATA (Linii£eus). Sertularia geniculata liiNN^us^ Syst. Nat., 1767, p. 1312. Obelia geniculata Hincks^ Br. Hyd. Zoopli., 1868, p. 149. Nutting^ Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 350. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. East. Can., 1901, p. 23. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 167. Fraser, Grampus Hydroids, 1915, p. 73. Nutting, Am. Hyd., iii, 1915, p. 73. Distribution. — Bay of Fundy and northward, low water to 40 fathoms (Yerrill) ; gulf of St. Lawrence (Dawson); St. Andrews, Gaspe, Seven islands (Stafford); Bar- rington passage, 3 fathoms, Canso, low water (Fraser); High Duck island. Horse island. Whale cove, off Swallowtail light. Wolves, north of Green island. Bliss island. Deer island, off Joe’s point, St. Andrews. Obelia ha^alina Clarke. Obelia liyalina Clarke, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zook, 1879, p. 241. Fraser, Hyd. Beaufort, 1912, p. 363. Nutting, Am. Hyd., iii, 1915, p. 76. Distribution. — On sargassum in the gulf stream, east of Nova Scotia. Obelia longissima (Pallas). Sertularia longissima Pallas, Flench. Zooph., 1766, p. 119. Obelia longissima Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 154. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 351. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. East. Can., 1901, p. 23. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Nutting, Am. Hyd., iii, 1915, p. 85. Distribution. — Bay of Fundy (Yerrill); St. Andrews, Seven islands (Stafford); off Bliss island, Indian Head bay, off Joe’s point, St. Andrews. Family CAMPANULINID^. Genus CALYCELLA. Calycella syringa (Linnaeus). Sertularia syringa Linn^us, Syst. Nat., 1767, p. 1311. Campanularia syringa Stimpson, Mar. Invert. Grand Manan, 1854, p. 8. Calycella syringa Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 206. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Llole, 1901, p. 355. WiiiTEAVES, Mar. Invert. East. Can., 1901, p. 23. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 168. Fraser, Hyd. Y. I. region, 1914, p. 156. Distribution. — Off Duck island, 25 fathoms (Stimpson); Le Have bank, 45 fathoms (Smith and Ilarger) ; gulf of St. Lawrence, on the Orphan bank and about half-way between East cape, Anticosti, and the Bird rocks, in 313 fathoms (White- aves); St. Andrews, Malapeque, Gaspe, Seven islands (Stafford); Barrington passage, shallow water, Canso banks, 50 fathoms ( Fraser) ; at almost all points where collect- ing was done in the bay of Fundy. In my 1914 paper reasons are given for believing that Calycella pygmcea is not distinct from Calycella syringa HYDRO IDS EASTERy CANADA 351 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Genus CUSPIDELLA. CuspiDELLA cosTATA Hincks. Cuspidella costata Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 210. Stafford, Eauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Distribution. — Gaspe (Stafford) . Cuspidella grandis Hincks. Cuspidella grandis Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 210. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. East. Can., 1901, p. 24. Distribution. — Orphan bank (Whiteaves); Coteau harbour. Long island, Labia- dor (Packard). Genus OPERCULARELLA. Opercularella lacerata (Johnston). Campanularia lacerata Johnston, Br. Zooph., 1847, p. 120. Opercularella lacerata Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 194. Hutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 354. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Fraser, Hyd. Hova Scotia, 1913, p. 168. Distribution. — St. Andrews (Stafford); Fox island, Chedabucto bay, low tide (Fraser) ; Niger reef, weir stakes, St. Andrews island. Brier island, 33 to 39 fathoms. Opercularella pumila Clark. Opercularella pumila Clark, New England Hy droids, 1876, p. 61. nana Hartlaub, Die Hydromedusen Helgolands, 1897, p. 502. pumilla Hargitt, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1909, p. 375. Distribution. — Weir stakes, St. Andrews island. The description and figures given by Hartlaub for Opercularella nana agree per- fectly with the creeping form of Opercularella pumila as described by Clark. Clark found but empty gonangia but Hartlaub found and described the complete gonosome. There is no question but that the species is distinct from 0. lacerata (Johnston). In the specimens found in the Bay of Eundy, the hydrothecse are only about half as long (•25) in 0. pumila as they are in 0. lacerata (-45 mm) and the gonangia are of an entirely different shape. In 0. lacerata they are rounded or truncate at the distal end, while in 0. pumila the distal portion is drawn out to become much more tubular. All of the material obtained at St. Andrews I. was of the creeping type but it was well supplied with gonangia. Genus STEGOPOMA. Stegopoma PLICATII.E (Sars). Lafoea plicatile Sars, Forhandl., 1863, p. 31. Stegopoma plicatile Levinsen, Medusae, Ctenophorer, etc., 1893, p. 36. Broch, Coelenteres du Fond, 1912, p. 11. Fraser, Hyd. V. I. region, 1914, p. 161. Distribution. — Bay of Islands, Newfoundland. Genus TETRAPOMA. Tetrapoma quadridentatum (Hincks). Calycella quadridentata Hincks, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1874, p. 149. Tetrapoma quadridentatum Levinsen, Medusar, Ctenophorer, etc., 1893, p. 180. Calycella ciuadridentata Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Distribution. — Gaspe ( Stafford) . 352 DEPABTME^T OF THE FAVAL SERYWE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Family HALECID.E:. Germs HALECIUM. Halecium articulosum Clark. Ilalecium articulosum Clark^ New England Hyd., 1876, p. 63. Nutting^ Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 358. Stafford^ Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Fraser, Hyd. V.I. region, 1914, p. 164. Distribution. — St. Andrews (Stafford) ; Wolves, between White and Spruce islands, southwest of Deer island, off Sandreef light, 15 fathoms, off Harbour island, 25 fathoms, off Joe’s point 10 fathoms, reef near Biological station. Haleciuai beani (Johnston). Tlioa beani Johnston, Br. Zooph., 1847, p. 120. Halecium beani Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zoopln, 1868, p. 224. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 358. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 168. Distribution. — St. Andrews, Seven Islands (Stafford); Barrington passage, 5f., Canso banks, 50f. (Fraser) ; at many points from the south end of Grand Manan to the head of Passamaquody bay. Halecium curvicaule Lorenz. Halecium curvicaule Lorenz, Polypomedusen von Jan Mayen, 1886, p. 3. Brocfi, Hyd. Arkt. Meere, 1909, p. 150. Distribution. — Off Joe’s point, off Deer island, off Brier island, 33-39L Halecium gracile Yerrill. Halecium gracile Verrill, Invert. An. Vineyard sd., 1873, p. 729. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 358. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 24. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Distribution. — St. Andrews, Seven islands (Stafford) ; reef near Biological Station St. Andrews, 5 to 10 fathoms. Haleciujm halecinum (LinnjBus). Sertularia halecina Linn.fus, Syst. Nat., 1767, p. 1308. Halecium halecinum Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., -1868, p. 221. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 357. Whiteaves. Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 24. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Distribution. — Chateau bay, strait of Bell Isle, 30 fathoms. Bay of Funday (Packard); Bay of Fundy (Dawson); Bay of Fundy (Whiteaves); St. Andrews (Stafford); St. Andrews, off Deer island. Halecium minutum Broch. Halecium minutum Broch, Nordmeer gesammelten hydroiden, 1903, p. 4. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 168. Distribution. — Canso banks, 50 fathoms (Fraser) ; Brier island, 22 fathoms. Bay of Islands, Newfoundland. 50 to 60 fathoms. H YDRO I n EA S TE EX CA XA DA 353 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Halecium muricatum (Ellis and Solander). Sertularia muricatum Ellis and Solander^ Nat. Elist. Zoopli., 1786, p. 59. Halecium muricatum EiiNCKS, Br, Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 223. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 25. Stafford, Eauna iVtlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Eraser. Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 169. Distribution. — 15 miles south southeast of Bonaventure island, 50 fathoms (Whit- eaves); off Caribou island, 30 to 50 fathoms. Square island, Labrador (Packard); St. Andrews, Canso, Gaspe (Stafford) ; Canso banks, 50 fathoms (Eraser) ; Quoddy river, 23 to 47 fathoms. Head Harbour island. Deer island, between Big Duck and Cheyne island, off Spruce island, 11 to 35 fathoms, between Two and Three islands, off Brier island, 33 to 39 fathoms. Haleciu]si sessile Norman. Halecium sessile Norman, Hyd. Hebrides, 1866, p. 196. Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 229. WH1TEAAT.S, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 25. Distribution. — Between East cape, Anticosti and Bird rocks, 12 fathoms (W^hiteaves). Halecium tenellum Hincks. Halecium tenellum Hincks, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1861, p. 252. Hincks, British Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 226. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 357. Stafford, Eauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 169. Distribution. — St. Andrews, Gaspe, Seven islands (Stafford) ; Canso banks, 50 fathoms (E raser) ; common from the north end of Campobello island to the head of Passamaquoddy bay. Brier island. Seven islands, bay of Islands, Newfoundland. Family IIEBELLID/E. Genus HEBELLA. Hebella calcarata (A. Agassiz). Lafoea calcarata A. Agassiz, N. A. Acalephae, 1865, p. 122. Hargitt, Am. Nat., 1901, p. 387. Hebella calcarata Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 353. Fraser, Hyd, Beaufort, 1912, p. 371. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Distribution. — Canso (Stafford). Hebella ( ?) pocillum Hincks. Lafoea pocillum Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 204. Distribution. — St. Andrews. There was no gonosome present on the St. Andrews specimens to settle the ques- tion definitely as to whether this species is a Lafoea or an Hebella but as there is a distinct diaphragm in the hydrotheca, it agrees with Hebella in that respect and is so placed. 354 DEPARTMEH^T OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Family LAFCEIDzE. Genus CKYPTOLAKIA. Cryptolaria trisertalis Fraser. Cryptolaria triserialis Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p, 170. Distrihutiou. — Off Durell island, Chedabucto bay, 20 fatboms (Fraser). Genus FILELLUM. Fjlelluaf serpens (Hassall). Campanularia serpens Hassall, Trans. Micro. Soc., 1852, p. 163. F Helium serpens Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zoopb., 1868, p. 214. Beticularia serpens Merrill, Cbeck-list, 1879, p. 79. Filellum serpens Fraser, Beaufort Hydroids, 1912, p. 369. Fraser, Hyd. No\^a Scotia, 1913, p. 171. Distribution. — Canso banks, 50 fathoms (Fraser) ; common from the north end of Campobello island to the head of Passamaquoddy bay and up the mouth of the St. Croix river. Brier island, 22 fathoms. Genus GKAMMAEIA. Grammaria ABiETiNA (Sars). Campanularia abietina Sars, Nyt. Mag. for Naturv., 1851, p. 139. Grammaria robusta Stiaipson, Mar. Invert. Grand Manan, 1854, p. 9. Grammaria abietina Sars, Norske Hydroider, 1863, p. 34. Salacia abietina, Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 212. Lafcea abietina Bonnevie, Norske, Nordhavs-Ex., 1899, p. 64. Grammaria abietina Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 28. Stafford, Eauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 171. Fraser, Hyd. V. I. region, 1914, p. 173. Distribution. — Grand Manan (Stimpson) ; Le Have bank, 60 fathoms (Smith and Harger) ; gulf of St. Lawrence, Trinity bay, 25 fathoms, and elsewhere (Whit- eaA^es) ; Gaspe, Seven islands (Stafford); Chedabucto bay, 20 fathoms (Fraser); bay of Islands, Newfoundland, 50 to 60 fathoms. Graaiaiaria gracilis Stimpson. Grammaria gracilis Stiaipson, Mar. liwert. Grand Manan, 1854, p. 9. Whiteaves, Mar. Import. E. Can., 1901, p. 28. Distribution. — Grand Manan (Stimpson). Genus LAFCEA. Lafo-:a duaiosa (Fleming). Sertularia dumosa Fleaiing, Edin. Phil. Jour., 1828, p. 83. Lo,faia dumosa Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 200. Nutting, Hyd. 'Woods Hole, 1901, i). 355. Whiteaves, ]\Iar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 24. HYDIWmS EASTERN CANADA 355 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Lafcea robusta AViiiteayes, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 24. Stafford, Fauna 7itlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Lafooa dumosa Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 171. Fraser, Hyd. Y. I. Region, 1914, p. 174. Distribution. — Nova Scotia (Agassiz) ; between Anticosti and Gaspe, 120 to 200 fathoms (Whiteaves) ; St. Andrews, Gaspe, Seven islands (Stafford) ; Chedabucto bay, 20 fathoms (Fraser) ; common in all the Passamaquoddy bay area. Brier island, 22 fathoms. Laf(ea fruticosa Sars. Lafcea fruticosa Sars, Norske Hydroider, 1863, p. 30. Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 202. Bonnevie, Norske Nordhavs-Ex., 1899, p. 64. Yerrill, Check-list, 1879, p. 17. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 172. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 172. Distribution. — ^Seven islands (Stafford); Chedabucto bay, 20 fathoms (Fraser); Chamcook harbour, 5 fathoms. Lafcea gracillima (Alder). Campanidaria gracillima Alder, Trans. Tynes Nat. F. C., 1857, p. 39. Lafcea gracillima Bonnevie, Norske Nordhavs-Ex., 1899, p. 64. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 356. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 24. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 172. Fraser, Hyd. Y. I. region, 1914, p. 175. Distribution. — ^Bay of Fundy (Yerrill) ; Le Have bank, 45 to 60 fathoms (Smith and Harger) ; Gaspe, Seven islands (Stafford); Canso banks, 50 fathoms (Fraser); Brier island. Seven islands, bay of Islands, Newfoundland, 50 to 60 fathoms. Lafcea pygm^a Hincks. Lafcea pygmcea Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 205. Hebella pygmcea Nutting, Hyd. AVoods Hole, 1901, p. 353. Broch, Nordmeer ges. Hyd., 1903, p. 5. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 172. Distribution. — ^Chedabucto bay, 25 fathoms (Fraser). Lafcea svt.imetrica Bonnevie. Lafcea symmetrica Bonnevie, Norske Nordhavs-Ex, 1899, p. 64. Billard, Ex. Sc. ‘‘ Travailleur ” et du “Talisman,” 1907, p. 176. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 172. Distribution. — Chedabucto bay, 25 fathoms (Fraser). Family SEETULABJD.dE. Genus ABIE TIN ARIA. Abietinaria ABiETiNA (Liuna3us). Sertularia abietma Linn^us, Syst. Nat., 1758, p. 808. Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 266. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 25. 356 DEPARTME:NT of tee :t^ATAL SERYIOE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Sertularella ahietina Nutting^ Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 3G1. AhietinaHa ahietina Nutting, Am. Hyd. ii, 1904, p. 114. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 173. Distribution. — Off Nova Scotia, 51 fathoms (Allman) ; Mingan island, gulf of St. Lawrence and Labrador (Packard) ; gulf and river St. Lawrence (Dawson and Whiteaves) ; St. Andrews, Gaspe, Canso, Seven islands (Stafford); Canso banks, 50 fathoms (Fraser); St. George’s bank, Newfoundland (A. Agassiz); off Swallowtail light, southwest of Deer island. Head harbour, McMaster island, off Joe’s point. Seven islands. Abietinaria filicula (Ellis and Solander.) Sertularia filicula Ellis and Solander, Nat. Hist. Zooph., 1786, p. 57. Stiaipson, Mar. Invert. Grand Manan, 1854, p. 8. Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 264. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 25. Ahietmaiia filicula Nutting, Am. Hyd. ii, 1904, p. 123. Distribution. — Grand Manan, 20 fathoms (Stimpson) ; Labrador (Packard). Note. — Stafford reports specimens of an Abietinaria species from Seven Islands, Quebec, but as all the information he gives concerning it is that it most resembles A. gig ant ea Clark,” it is impossible to place it. Genus DIPHASIA. Dipit ASIA fall ax (Johnston.) Sertularia fallax Johnston, Br. Zooph., 1847, p. 73. Stiaipson, Mar. Invert. Grand Manan, 1854, p. 8. Diphasia fallax Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 249. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 361. Hargitt, Am. Nat., 1901, p. 391. Whiteaves, Mar. Iiwert. E. Can., 1901, p. 26. Nutting, Am. Hyd. ii, 1904, p. 114. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 173. Distribution. — Grand Manan (Stimpson) ; Bay of Fundy, 20 to 55 fathoms (Ver* rill); St. Andrews (Stafford); Barrington passage, 4 fathoms (Fraser); common throughout the Passamaquoddy bay area. Brier island. 22 fathoms. Diaphasia rosacea (Linnaeus). Serinlaria rosacea Linn^hjs, Syst. Nat., 1758, p. 807. Diphasia rosacea Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 245. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 361. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 26. Nutting. Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 107. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 74. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 174. Distribution. — Strait of Belle Isle, 50 fathoms (Packard); St. Andrews (Stafford); Barrington passage (Fraser) ; off Deer island, 15 fathoms, off Frost ledges, Quoddy river, between White and Spruce islands, between Two and Three islands. Brier island, 33 to 39 fathoms. H7DR0IDS EASTERN CANADA 357 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Diphasia tamarisca (Linnaeus). Sertularia tamarisca Linn.^us^ Syst. N^at., 1758, p. 808. Sertularia producta Stimpson, Mar. Invert. Grand Manan, 1854, p. 8. Diphasia tamarisca Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 273. Sertularia producta Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 27. Diphasia tamarisca Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 108. Distribution. — Grand Manan (Stimpson) ; Sea coal bay, N.S. (Yerrill). Nutting, apparently with good reason, has concluded that Sertularia producta Stimpson is synonymous with Diphasia tamarisca (Linnaeus) and hence it is included here under that name. Genus HYDEALLMANIA. Hydrallmania falcata (Linnaeus). Sertularia falcata Linn^us, Syst. Nat., 1758, p. 810. Plumularia falcata Stimpson, Mar. Invert. Grand Manan, 1854, p. 8. Hydrallmania falcata Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 273. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 364. Hargitt, Am. Nat., 1901, p. 392. WriiTEAVES, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 27. Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 124. Stafford, Eauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 74. Eraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 174. Distribution. — Grand Manan, 25 to 35 fathoms (Stimpson) ; bay of Eundy, low water to 110 fathoms, Anticosti, Mingan islands (Yerrill); Le Have bank, 60 fathoms, Chebucto head, Halifax harbour, 20 fathoms (Smith and Harger) ; Sable island, Gaspe, Metis (Dawson) ; gulf of St. Lawrence (IVhiteaves) ; Grand Manan (A. Agassiz); St. Andrews, Gaspe, Seven islands (Stafford); Barrington passage (Fraser); one of the comonest species of large size in the collection. Genus SELAGINOPSIS. Selaginopsis MiRABiLis (Yerrill). Diphasia mirabilis Yerrill, Amer. Jour. Sci. Arts, 1872, p. 9. YMiteaves, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 26. Selaginopsis mirabilis Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 128. - Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 74. Eraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 174. Distribution. — Le Have bank, 60 fathoms (Smith and Harger) ; Gaspe, Seven islands (Stafford); Canso banks, 50 fathoms (Eraser). Genus SEKTULAKELLA. Sertularella conica Allman. Sertularella conica Allman, Hyd. Gulf Stream, 1877, p. 21. Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 79. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 174. Distribution. — Canso banks, 50 fathoms (Fraser). 358 DEPARTMElslT OF THE ^S^AVAL SERVICE 3 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Sertularella fusifor^iis (Hincks). Sertularia fnsifonnis Hincks, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1861, p. 253. Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 243. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 26. Sertularella fusiformis Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 89. Distrihution. — Gidf of St. Lawrence, between Anticosti and Gaspe, 200 fathoms (Whiteaves). Sertularella polvzonias (Linnaeus). Sertularia iiolyzonias Linn.eus, Syst. Nat., 1758, p. 813. Stiaipson, Mar. Invert. Grand Manan, 1854, p. 9. Sertularella polyzonias -lELm cks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 235. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 362. Whiteaa^es, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 25. Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 90. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73, Eraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 175. Distrihution. — Grand Manan, 10 to 40 fathoms (Stimpson) ; Le Have bank, 60 fathoms (Smith and Harger) ; Caribou island, (Packard) ; gulf of St. Lawrence (Whiteaves); St. Andrews, Gaspe, Seven islands (Stafford); Chedabucto bay, 10 to 20 fathoms (Fraser) ; common throughout the Passamaquoddy bay area. Seven islands. Sertularella rugosa (Linnaeus). Sertularia rugosa Linn.eus, Syst. Nat., 1758, p. 809. Stbipson, Mar. Invert. Grand Manan, 1854, p. 9. Sertularella rugosa Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 259. Sertularia rugosa Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 25. Sertularella rugosa Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 82. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Distribution. — Grand Manan, deep water (Stimpson); Square island, Labrador, 30 fathoms (Packard); Seven islands (Stafford); High Duck island, between White and Spruce islands, Cumming’s cove, West Quoddy head, Dochet island. Sertularella tricuspidata (Alder). Sertularia tricuspidata Alder, Ann. 'and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1856, p. 356. Sertularella tricuspidata Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 239. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 362. Whiteaves, ]\[ar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. "26. Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 71. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 175. Distribution. — Bay of Fundy, 50 to 55 fathoms (Verrill) ; Le Have bank, 45 to 60 fathoms (Smith and Harger) ; gulf of St. Lawrence (Whiteaves) ; strait of Belle Isle, 40 fathoms (Packard) ; St. Andrews, Gaspe, Seven islands (Stafford) ; Canso banks, 50 fathoms (Fraser) ; very common everywhere in the Passamaquoddy bay area at all depths, Brier island, 33 to 39 fathoms. HYDROIDS EASTERN CANADA 359 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Genus SEKTTJLATtlA. Sehtularta cornicina (McCrady). JJynamena cornicina McCrady, Gymno, Charleston TIar,, 1858, p. 204. Sertularia cornicina Nutting, ITyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 359. , Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 58. Fraser, TTyd. Beaufort, 1912, p. 374. Distribution.- 'On sargassum in the Gulf Stream, east of Nova Scotia. Sertularia pumila Linnaeus. Sertularia pumila Linn^us, Syst. Nat., 1758, p. 807. Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 260. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 359. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. F. Can., 1901, p. 25. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 175. Distribution. — Nova Scotia and Metis (Dawson); strait of Belle Isle, between tides (Packard); St. Andrews, Canso, Seven islands (Stafford); Canso, low water (Fraser) ; Grand Manan (A. Agassiz) ; High Duck island. Wolves, Indian Head bar, Souris, P.E.I., A^ork harbour, bay of Islands, Newfoundland, Seven islands. Genus THUIAEIA. Tiiuiaria argentea (Linmeus). Sertularia argentea Linn^us, Syst. Nat., 1758, p. 809. Stiaipson, Mar. Invert. Grand Manan, 1854, p. 8. Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 268. Tiiuiaria argentea Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 364. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 27. Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 71. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Fraser, Hyd. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 176. Distribution. — Grand Manan, 4 to 6 fathoms (Stimpson); Bay of Fimdy, Nova Scotia coast, gulf of St. Lawrence, low water to 110 fathoms (Verrill) ; Northumber- land strait, gulf of St. Lawrence (Whiteaves) ; Gaspe bay (Dawson) ; Caribou island, 8 fathoms (Packard); St. Andrews, Gaspe (Stafford); Barrington passage, 5 fathoms, Canso banks, 50 fathoms (Fraser); off Deer island, off Grand Manan, bay of Islands, Newfoundland, 50 to 60 fathoms. Tiiuiaria cupressina (Linnaeus). Sertularia cupressina Linn^us, Syst. Nat., 1758, p. 808. Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 270. Tiiuiaria cupressina Nutting, Llyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 363. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 27. Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 72. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Distribution. — Off Nova Scotia, 51 fathoms (Allman) ; Bay of Fundy, low water to 100 fathoms (Verrill); Northumberland strait, gulf of St. Lawrence (Whiteaves); Henley harbour, strait of Belle Isle, 7 fathoms (Packard); St. Andrews (Stafford); St. Croix river, off Joe’s point, McMaster island, Quoddy river, off Deer island, W'hale cove, 20 to 30 fathoms. Brier island, 33 to 39 fathoms. 38a— 24 360 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 TuLiiAHiA FABKIOII (Leviiiseii). Sertularia fastigiata Fabricius^ Fauna Groenlandica, 1780, p. 458. Sertalaria fabricii Levinsen, Vid. Middel. Naturh, Foren., 1892, p. 48, Thuiarla fabricii Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, p. 1904, p. 71. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Distribution. — Gaspe, Islands (Stafford); St. Andrews. Thuiria immersa Nutting. Thuiaria immersa Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 66. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Distribution. — Seven islands (Stafford) ; St. Croix river. Grand Manan, between Mohawk and Adam island, 35 fathoms, between Green and Three islands, McMaster island, off Deer island, off Brier island, 22 fathoms. Thuiaria latiuscula (Stimpson). Sertularia latiuscula Stimpson, Mar. Invert. Grand Manan, 1854, p. 8. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 26. Thuiaria latiuscula Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 69. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Distribution. — Grand Manan (Stimpson) ; Gaspe, Seven islands (Stafford) ; St. Andrews. Thuiaria lonchitis (Ellis and Solander). Sertularia lonchitis Eelis and Solander, Nat. Hist. Zooph., 1786, p. 42. Thuiaria articulata Whiteaves, Mar.. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 27. Thuiaria lonchits Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 66. Fraser, Hs'^d. Nova Scotia, 1913, p. 176. Distribution. — Le Have bank, 45 fathoms (Smith and Harger) ; gulf of St. Law- rence (Whiteveaves) ; Canso banks, 50 fathoms (Fraser); St. Andrews. Thuiaria robusta Clark. Thuiaria robusta Clark, Alaskan Hyd., 1876, p. 227. Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 64. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Distribution. — Gaspe, Seven islands (Stafford). Thuiaria similis (Clark). Sertularia similis Clark, Alaskan Hyd., 1876, p. 219. Thuiaria similis Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 69. Fraser, West Coast Hyd., 1911, p. 77. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Fraser, Hyd. V. I. region, 1914, p. 199. Distribution. — Gaspe (Stafford); St. Croix river, Quoddy river. West Quoddy head. Head Harbour island, 25 fathoms. Whale cove, Brier island, 22 fathoms. Seven islands. Thuiaria ten era (Sars). Sertularia tenera Sars, Bidrag til Kundskaben etc., 1873, p. 20. Thuiaria tenera Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 70. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Distribution. — Gasi>e, Seven islands (Stafford); St. Andrews, Brier island. HYDROIDS EASTERN CANADA 361 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Thuiariv thuja (Linnssus). Sertularia thuja Linn.uus, Syst. Nat., 1758, p. 809. Thuiaria thuja Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 275. Nutting, Hyd. AVoods Hole, 1901, p. 364. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, j). 26. Nutting, Am. Hyd., ii, 1904, p. 62. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 73. Distribution. — Miingan islands (Packard) ; gulf of St. Lawrence (Whiteaves) ; Seven islands (Stafford) ; McMaster island, 30 fathoms. Note. — Stafford refers to four species of Thuiaria from Gaspe, none of which he describes sufficiently to place, but apparently one of them is a Synthecium and is probably new and the others may be also. Family PLUMULARID/D. Genus AGLAOPHENOPSIS. Aglaopiienopsis cornuta (Verrill). Cladocarpus cornutus Verrill, Am. Jour. Sci. Arts, 1879, p. 310. Aglaopiienopsis cornuta Nutting, Am. Hyd., i, 1900, p. 120. WiTiTEAA'ES, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 28. Distribution. — Off Sable island, on Banquereau, 200 fathoms (Verrill). Genus ANTENNTILAEIA. AnTENNULARIA AMERICANA Nuttiug. Antennularia americana Nutting, Am. Hyd., i, 1900, p. 69. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 368. Distribution. — St. Andrews. Antennularia antennina (Linnaeus). Sertularia antennina Linnjeus, Syst. Nat., 1767, p. 1310. Antennularia antennina Hincks, Br. Flyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 280. Nutting, Am. Hyd., 1900, p. 69. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 867. Whiteaats, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 28. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 74. Distribution. — Bay of Fundy, 10 to 60 fathoms (Verrill) ; St. Andrews (Stafford) ; channel off White Horse island. Genus CLADOCARPUS. Cladocarpus pourtalesi, Verrill. Cladocarpus pourtalesi Verrill, Am. Jour. Sci. Arts, 1879, p. 309. Nutting, Am. Hyd., i, 1900, p. 116. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 28. Distribution. — Southwest of cape Sable, 112 to 115 fathoms, Banquereau, off Sable sland, 300 fathoms (Verrill). Cladocarpus speciosus Verrill. Cladocarpus speciosus Verrill, Amer. Jour. Sci. Arts., 1879, p. 311. , Nutting, Am. Hyd., i, 1900, p. 116. Whiteaves, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 28. ' Distribution, — Banquereau, off Sable island, 200 fathoms (Verrill). j | 362 DEPARTME'NT OF TEE EAYAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Genus PLUMULAKTA. Plum u LARI A setaceoides Bale. Plumularia setaceoides Bale^ Hyd. S. Australia, 1881, p. 28. Fraser, Hyd. Beaufort, 1912, p. 382. Distribution. — On sargassum. Gulf Stream, east of Nova Scotia. Genus SCHIZOTRICHA. SCHIZOTRICHA GRACILLIMA (Sars). Plumularia gracillima Sars, Vid. Selsk. Fork., 1873, p. 86. Plumularia verrilli Clark, Trans. Conn. Acad. Sci., 1876, p. 64. Verrill, Prelim. Check-list, 1879, p. 18. Schizotricha gracillima Nutting, Am. Hyd., i, 1900, p. 80. Nutting, Hyd. Woods Hole, 1901, p. 366. Stafford, Fauna Atlantic Coast, 1912, p. 74. Distribution. — Grand Manan (Stafford). Genus TIIECOCARPUS. Tiiecocarpus m;yriophyllum (Linnaeus). Sertularia myriophyllum Linn^us, Syst. Nat., 1767, p. 1309. Aglaophenia myriophyllum Hincks, Br. Hyd. Zooph., 1868, p. 290. Tiiecocarpus myriophyllum Nuttinc;, Am. Hyd., i, 1900, p. 107. Wiiiteaves, Mar. Invert. E. Can., 1901, p. 28. Distribution. — Le Have bank, 60 fathoms (Smith and Harger) ; off cape Gaspc, 60 fathoms (Whiteaves) ; Mingan islands (A. Agassiz). BIBLIOGRAPHY. (Only those papers referred to in tlie synonymy or in tlie text are listed). Agassiz, \j. — J862. Contributions to the natural history of the United States of America, vol. iv, j). 1-372. Boston. Agassiz, A. — 186,^. North American AcaleplKc. Illustrated Cjitaloguc of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College, iio. 2, p. 1-234. Cambridge. Alder, J.— 1856. A notice of some new genera and species of British hydroid zoophytes. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, 2nd ser., vol. xviii, London. 1857. A catalogue of the zoophytes of Northumberland and Durham. Trans- actions of the Tyneside Naturalists’ Field Club, vol, iii, p. 1-70. New- castle-upon-Tyne. BYDROIDS EASTERN CANADA 363 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Allman, G. J. — 1844. Synopsis of the genera and species of zoophytes inhabiting the fresh waters of Ireland. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, 1st. ser., vol. xiii, p. 328. London. 1864. On the construction and limitation of genera among the hydroida. Ibid., 3rd. ser., vol. xiii. 1871. A monograph of the gymnoblastic or tubularian hydroids. Published for the Pay Society, in 2 parts, 450 p., 23 pi. London. 1877. Eeport of the Hydroida collected during the exploration of the Gulf Stream by L. F. de Pourtales. Memoirs of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College, vol. v, no. 2, p. 1-64. Cambridge. Bale, W. M.— 1881. On the Hydroida of southeastern Australia, with descrii)tions of sup- posed new species and notes on the genus Aglaophenia. Journal of the Microscopical Society, Victoria, vol. ii, p. 1-34. Melbourne. 1914. Further notes on Australian hydroids. Ill, Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria, vol. xxvii, n.s., pt. 1, p. 72-93. Melbourne. Billard, A.— 1907. Hydroides, in: Expeditiones vScientifiques du Travailleur ” et du “ Talisman,” t. viii, p. 159-241. Paris. Bonnevie, K. — 1899. Hen norske Nordhavsexpedition, 1876-78, vol. vi, pt. 26. Zoologi Hy- droida, p. 1-103. Christiania. Broch, H. — 1903. Hie von dem Norwegischen Fischereidampfer “ Michael Sars,” in den Jahren, 1900-1902, in dem Nordmeer gesammelten Hydroiden. Bergens Museum Aarbog, no. 9, p. 1-14. Christiania. 1909. Hie Hydroiden der Arktischen Meere. Fauna Arctica, bd. v, Jena. 1912. Coelentere's du Fond. Campagne Arctique de 1907. Brussels. Clark, S. F.— 1876. Hescription of new and rare hydroids from the New England coast. Transactions of the Connecticut Academy of Sciences, vol. iii, July, 1875, p. 58-66. New Llaven. 1876. Report of the hydroids on the coast of Alaska and the Aleutian islands, collected by W. H. Hall, from 1871 to 1874. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, p. 205-238. 1879. Report on the Hydroida collected during the exploration of the Gulf Stream and gulf of Mexico by Alexander Agassiz, 1877-78. Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology of Harvard College, vol. v, p. 239-250. Cainl)ridge. Ellis, J. and Solander, H. — 1786. The natural history ot many curious and uncommon zoophytes col- lected from various parts of the globe. 208 j). London. Fabricius, 0. — 1780. Fauna Groenlandica. Hauniae et Lipsiae. Fleming, J. — 182'8. A history of British Animals. Edinl)urgh Philosophicnl Journal. 364 DEPA.RTMENT OF TEE NAVAL EERVIOE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 F-raser, C. M. — 1911. The liydroids of the west coast of North America. Bulletin from the Laboratories of Natural History, State LTniversity of Iowa, p. 1-91. Iowa City. 1912. Notes on New Eui^laiid hydroids. Ibid., ]). 39-4S. 1912. Some hydroids of Beaufort, North Carolina. Bulletin of the Bureau of Fisheries, vol. xxx, 1910, p. 339-387. Washington. 1913. Hydroids from Nova Scotia, Canada Geological Survey, Victoria IMemorial Museum, Bulletin No. 1, pt. xvi, p. 157-180. Ottawa. 1914. Some hydroids of the Vancouver island region. Transactions of the Koyal Society of Canada, 3rd ser., vol. viii, p. 99-210. Ottawa. 1915. Pelagic hydroids, in : Exploration of the coast water between Nova Scotia and Chesapeake bay, July and August, 1913, by the United States Fisheries schooner Grampus.” Oceanography and Plankton. Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Plarvard College, vol. lix. No. 4, p. 300-314. Cambridge. Hargitt, C. W. — 1901. The Hydromedusse. In three parts. American Naturalist, vol. xxxv. No. 412, p. 301-315; No. 413, p. 379-395; No. 415, p. 575-595, New York. 1908. A few coelenterates of Woods Hole. Biological Bulletin of the Marine Biological Laboratory at Woods Hole, Mass., vol. xiv. No. 2, p. 95-120. Lancaster, Pa. Hartlaub, C. — ■ 1897. Die Hydromedusen Helgolands. Wissenschaftlichen Meeresuntersu- chuiigen, n.f., bd. ii, hft. 3., p. 449-514. Keil und Leipzig. Hassall, A. — 1852. Description of tliree species of marine zoophytes. Transactions of the Koyal Microscopical Society, vol. Hi. London. Hincks, T.— 1853. Further notes on British zoophytes, with description of new species. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, 2nd ser., vol. xi. London. 1801. A catalogue of the zoophytes of South Devon and South Cornwall, Ibid., 3rd ser., vol. viii. 1800. On new British hydroids. Ibid., 3rd ser., vol. xviii. 1808. A history of the British hydroid zoophytes. 2 vols. London. Jiiderholrn, E. — 1909. Northern tind Arctic invertebrates in tlie collection of the Swedish State Museum, iv. Hydroiden. Kongelige Svenska Vetenskaps Akade- miens Handlingar, bd. 45, No. 1, p. 1-124. Stockholm. Joiinston, G. — 1847. History of British zooiJiytes, ed. ii, in two volumes. Ijondon. I.,evinscn, G. M. K. — 1892. Orn Fornyelsen af Erna'ringsindividerne hos Ilydroidcrnc. Videnska- belige Meddelelser fra den naturhistoriske Foreningi Kjdbenhavn, p. 12-31. 1893. Meduser, Cteno])horer og Hydroider fra Gronlands Vestkyst tilligemed Bemserkninger on Hydroiderncs Systematik. Ibid., p. 143-220. 1913. Systematic Studies on the Sertularidac. Ibid., p. 251-323, UYnixorni^ ea^^tei^x Canada 365 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a Linnaeus, C.- — 1758. Systeina natune, iOth ed. Lipsise. 1767. Ibid., 12th ed. Holmiae. von Lorenz, L. — 1886. Polypornedusen von Jan Mayen, In: Lie international Polarfurschung’, 18182-83. Die Osterreichische Polarstatioii, 3 an Mayen, bd. iii. Wien. McCrady, J. — 1858. Gymnophthalniata of Charleston harbour. Proceedings of the Elliot Society of Natural History, vol. 1 for 1853-1858, p. 103-221. Head Apr. 15, 1857. Charleston. MacGillivray, J. — 1842. Catalogue of the marine zoophytes of the neighbourhood of Aberdeen. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, 1st ser., vol. ix. London. Mereschlmwsl^y, M. C. — * 1877. On a new genus of hydroids from the White sea with short description of other new hydroids. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, 4tli ser., vol. XX, j). 220-221). London. Norman, A. M. — 1864. On underscribed British Hydrozoa, Actinozoa and Polyzoa. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, 3rd ser., vol. xiii, London. 1866. Keport of the committee appointed for the purpose of exploring the coasts of the Hebrides by means of the dredge. Part i. On the Crus- tacea, Echinodernata, Polyzoa, Actinozoa and Hydrozoa. Report of the British Association for the Advancement of Science, 1866, p. 193-206. London. Nutting, C. C.— 1898. On three new species of hydroids and one new to Britain. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, 7th ser., vol. v, p. 362-366. London. 1900. American hydroids. Pt. I. The Plumularidae. Special Bulletin, United States National Museum, 152, p. Washington. 1901. The hydroids of the Woods Hole region. United States Eish Commis- sion Bulletin for 1899, vol. xix, p. 325-386. Washington. 1904. American hydroids. Pt. II. The Sertularidse. Special Bulletin, United States National Museum, 152, p. Washington. 1915. Ibid. Pt. III. The Campanularidse and the Bonneviellidse. 118 p. Pallas, P.S.— 1766. Elenchus Zoophytorum. Haag. Sars, M. — 1851. Beretning oin en i Sommern 1849 foretagen Zoologisk Beise i Lofoten og Einmarken. Nyt Magazine for Naturvidenskaberne, bd. vi. Chris- tiania. 1857. Bidrag til kundskaben om Middlehavets Littoral fauna. Ibid., vol. x. 1863. Bemerkninger over fire norske Hydroider. Videnskabis-Sels-kabets Forhandlinger for 1862. Christiania. Sars, G. O. — 1873. Bidrag til kundskaben om Norges Hydroider. Ibid., for 1872, 366 DEPAETME'NT OF TEE IS^AYAL SERVICE 8 GEORGE V, A. 1918 Stafford, T. — 1912. On the fauna of the Atlantic coast of Canada. Contributions to Cana- dian Biology, being studies from the biological stations of Canada, 1906- 1910. p. 69-78 (Hydroids, p. 72-74). Ottawa. Stimpson, W. — 1854. Synopsis of the marine invertebrata of Grand Manan. Smithsonian contributions to knowledge, vol. vi. Washington. Verrill, A. E.— 1872. Radiata from the coast of North Carolina. American Journal of Science and Arts. 3rd. ser., vol. v. 1874-1879. Brief contributions to zoology from the Museum of Yale College. Results of recent dredging expeditions on the coast of New England. American Journal of Science and Arts, vol. vii, 1874, p. 38-138, p. 405- 414, p. 500-505; vol. ix, 1875, p. 411-415; vol. x, 1875, p. 36-43; vol. xvi, 1878, p. 371-378; vol. xvii, 1879, p. 309-315. 1879. Preliminary check-list of the marine invertebrates of Atlantic coast from cape Cod to the gulf of St. Lawrence. Prepared for the TJnited States Commission of Fish and Fisheries. Verrill, A. E. and Smith, S. I. — 1874. Report of the Invertebrate animals of Vineyard sound and adjacent waters. Report of the Commissioner of Fisheries for 1871 and 1872, X). 295-747. Washington. Whiteaves, J. F. — 1901. Catalogue of the marine invertebrates of Eastern Canada. Geological Survey of Canada, p. 18-28. Ottawa. n£LltUn0FTH£ ^^£8 5-1940 >««va«,nronu,No,s ETDROIDS EASTERN CANADA 367 SESSIONAL PAPER No. 38a EXPLANATION OF EIGUEES. (All drawings except la and 2a magnified 25 diameters.) Plate I. 1. 0''?elia articulata. a. Colony, natural size. h. Portion of colony to show nature and arrangement of hydrothecse and gonangia. 2. Bimeria brevis. a. Colonies, natural size. b. Branched colony. c. Unbranched individuals. Plate II. 3. Clytia johnstonij hydrothecae. a. From the Devon Coast. 1 b. From St. Mary’s bay, N.S. c. From the coast of Grand Manan. d. From Bliss island. e. From Deer island. f. From the St. Croix river. Drawings by Clara A. Fraser. , 38a— 25 PLATE I HYDROIDS OF EASTERN CANADA. C, McLean Fraser. Clara A:-Ffasef', del. PLATE II 3e Clira A. Fraser, del. The I'-.u ■'’‘imsin the ti-linois